Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Pro/ENGINEER 2000i2
NC Machining Option
Topic Collection
5
Wire EDM Parameters ..................................................................................................... 143
To Use Previous Parameters ........................................................................................... 150
To Use a Non-Active Site................................................................................................. 150
To Include a Parameter in a Relation ............................................................................... 151
Using Parameters in Relations......................................................................................... 151
Sites ................................................................................................................................ 152
Machinability Database .................................................................................................... 156
Milling.................................................................................................................................... 161
General Information ......................................................................................................... 161
Tool Axis Control in Milling ............................................................................................... 167
Volume Milling ................................................................................................................. 172
Automatic Cut Motions for Volume, Local, and Profile Milling............................................ 176
Local Milling..................................................................................................................... 182
Surface Milling ................................................................................................................. 188
Swarf Milling .................................................................................................................... 209
Face Milling ..................................................................................................................... 211
Profile Milling ................................................................................................................... 215
Pocket Milling .................................................................................................................. 218
Trajectory Milling.............................................................................................................. 219
Thread Milling .................................................................................................................. 234
Engraving ........................................................................................................................ 240
Plunge Milling .................................................................................................................. 241
Mill Geometry........................................................................................................................ 243
About Mill Geometry ........................................................................................................ 243
Mill Window ..................................................................................................................... 244
Mill Volumes .................................................................................................................... 246
Mill Surfaces.................................................................................................................... 261
Turning.................................................................................................................................. 269
About Turning NC Sequences.......................................................................................... 269
To Set Up the Coordinate System for Correct CL Output.................................................. 269
To Define a Turning Envelope.......................................................................................... 270
Using Turning Envelopes ................................................................................................. 271
To Define the Stock Boundary ......................................................................................... 272
Stock Boundary and Cut Extensions ................................................................................ 272
Defining the Stock Boundary in Part and Assembly Machining ......................................... 273
Example: Using Stock Boundary for Area Turning ............................................................ 274
To Change the Stock Boundary Outline ........................................................................... 274
To Define the Cut Extensions........................................................................................... 274
To Adjust Cut Motion Ends .............................................................................................. 275
To Specify Corner Conditions .......................................................................................... 276
6
Corner Condition Types ................................................................................................... 277
To Specify Local Stock Allowance.................................................................................... 278
Local Stock Allowance ..................................................................................................... 278
To Specify the Tool Orientation........................................................................................ 279
To Use Multi-Head Turning .............................................................................................. 279
To Create an Area Turning NC Sequence........................................................................ 280
Area Turning.................................................................................................................... 281
Example: Face Area Turning............................................................................................ 281
Example: Outside Area Turning ....................................................................................... 282
Example: Inside Area Turning .......................................................................................... 283
To Create a 4 Axis Area Turning NC Sequence ............................................................... 284
Example: 4 Axis Area Turning.......................................................................................... 284
To Create a Profile Turning NC Sequence ....................................................................... 285
Profile Turning ................................................................................................................. 285
Example: Profile Turning.................................................................................................. 286
To Create a Groove Turning NC Sequence...................................................................... 286
Groove Turning................................................................................................................ 287
To Create a Thread Turning NC Sequence ...................................................................... 290
Thread Turning ................................................................................................................ 290
Examples: Thread Turning............................................................................................... 291
To Create a Facing Thread Turning NC Sequence........................................................... 292
To Perform the Remainder Material Analysis ................................................................... 292
Turn Profile ........................................................................................................................... 292
About Turn Profile............................................................................................................ 292
To Define a Turn Profile................................................................................................... 293
To Define a Turn Profile by Sketching .............................................................................. 294
Sketching a Turn Profile................................................................................................... 295
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces ................................................................ 296
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces ................................................... 297
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Curves ................................................................... 297
To Define a Turn Profile by Section.................................................................................. 298
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Section..................................................................... 298
To Define a Turn Profile by Creating a Reference Envelope............................................. 299
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting a Reference Envelope............................................ 300
To Adjust a Turn Profile ................................................................................................... 300
Holemaking ........................................................................................................................... 301
About Holemaking ........................................................................................................... 301
To Create a Holemaking NC Sequence............................................................................ 302
Holemaking Cycle Types ................................................................................................. 303
Three and Five Axis Holemaking...................................................................................... 304
7
To Set Up a Peck Table................................................................................................... 305
Peck Table ...................................................................................................................... 305
Example: Peck Table ....................................................................................................... 306
To Define Hole Sets......................................................................................................... 307
Combining Selection Methods.......................................................................................... 309
To Define Depth .............................................................................................................. 309
To Define the Starting Point for Drilling............................................................................. 310
To Define Depth for Blind Drilling ..................................................................................... 311
To Select Holes by Axes.................................................................................................. 311
To Select Holes by Surfaces............................................................................................ 312
To Select Holes by Diameters.......................................................................................... 312
To Select Holes by Feature Parameters........................................................................... 313
To Select Holes by Points ................................................................................................ 313
To Define the Countersink Diameter ................................................................................ 314
To Use the Automatic Chamfer Selection......................................................................... 315
Example: Automatic Chamfer Selection ........................................................................... 315
To Define Plates for Web Drilling ..................................................................................... 316
Back Spotting Specifics ................................................................................................... 316
Example: Back Spotting................................................................................................... 316
Drill Groups ........................................................................................................................... 319
About Drill Groups ........................................................................................................... 319
To Define a Drill Group .................................................................................................... 320
To Modify a Drill Group .................................................................................................... 320
Using Drill Groups............................................................................................................ 320
Auto Drilling........................................................................................................................... 321
About Auto Drilling ........................................................................................................... 321
To Create an Auto Drilling NC Sequence ......................................................................... 321
To Select a Coordinate System and Retract Plane ........................................................... 322
The Default Coordinate System and Retract Plane........................................................... 323
To Filter Rows ................................................................................................................. 323
Filters Available for Auto Drilling....................................................................................... 324
To Edit Hole Parameters.................................................................................................. 325
To Apply Hole Strategies ................................................................................................. 325
Defining Your Hole Strategies .......................................................................................... 326
To Customize the Table ................................................................................................... 327
To Reorder the NC Sequences Created by Auto Drilling................................................... 327
Wire EDM ............................................................................................................................. 328
About Wire EDM NC Sequences...................................................................................... 328
To Create a 2-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence ................................................................... 328
Contouring and No Core Cut Motions............................................................................... 329
8
To Create Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions........................................................... 329
Example: Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions............................................................ 331
To Specify Thread Point and Approach Point ................................................................... 332
Example: Specifying Thread Point and Approach Point .................................................... 333
To Specify Taper Angle for 2-Axis Contouring .................................................................. 333
To Specify Corner Conditions .......................................................................................... 334
Corner Condition Types ................................................................................................... 335
Example: Corner Conditions ............................................................................................ 336
To Create No Core Cut Motions ....................................................................................... 336
Specifying a Start Point for No Core Cut Motions ............................................................. 337
To Use Previous Cut Motions........................................................................................... 338
To Mirror Cut Motions ...................................................................................................... 338
Example: Mirroring Cut Motions ....................................................................................... 339
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Taper Angle Format ................................ 339
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Head1/Head2 Format ............................. 340
Automatic Synchronization of Start and End Points .......................................................... 341
To Set Up the Register Table(s)....................................................................................... 343
Register Tables ............................................................................................................... 344
To Set Up the Radius Substitution Table(s)...................................................................... 344
Radius Substitution Tables .............................................................................................. 345
Auxiliary NC Sequences........................................................................................................ 346
About Auxiliary NC Sequences ........................................................................................ 346
To Create an Auxiliary NC Sequence............................................................................... 346
User-Defined NC Sequences................................................................................................. 346
About User-Defined NC Sequences ................................................................................. 346
To Define a Manufacturing UDF....................................................................................... 347
Including Operations, Workcells, and Reference Superfeatures in a Manufacturing UDF.. 348
Example: Manufacturing a Group of Features .................................................................. 349
To Place a Previously Defined Group in Another Manufacturing Model ............................ 349
Example: Using a Manufacturing UDF with Pro/PROGRAM ............................................. 350
The Customize Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 353
About the Customize Dialog Box...................................................................................... 353
To Create a Control Point ................................................................................................ 355
To Create an Offset Control Point .................................................................................... 356
Offset Control Points........................................................................................................ 356
To Create an Automatic Cut Motion ................................................................................. 357
Implicit Tool Motions ........................................................................................................ 357
To Redefine a Follow Cut Motion ..................................................................................... 357
The Follow Cut Dialog Box............................................................................................... 358
To Split a Follow Cut Motion ............................................................................................ 359
9
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion ................................................................................... 360
Example: Using Tool Kerf and CL Command ................................................................... 361
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion in Holemaking............................................................. 362
To Create a Connect Motion ............................................................................................ 363
To Redefine the Connect Motions .................................................................................... 364
To Create a GoTo Point Motion........................................................................................ 365
To Create a Go Delta Motion ........................................................................................... 366
Modifying the Go Delta Increments .................................................................................. 367
To Create a Go Home Motion .......................................................................................... 367
To Create a Plunge Motion .............................................................................................. 367
Plunge Motions................................................................................................................ 368
To Create a Retract Motion.............................................................................................. 368
To Create a Tangent Approach Motion............................................................................. 369
To Create a Tangent Exit Motion...................................................................................... 369
To Create a Normal Approach Motion .............................................................................. 370
To Create a Normal Exit Motion ....................................................................................... 370
To Create a Lead In Motion ............................................................................................. 371
Lead In and Lead Out Motions ......................................................................................... 371
To Create a Lead Out Motion........................................................................................... 372
To Create a Helical Approach Motion............................................................................... 372
To Create a Helical Exit Motion........................................................................................ 373
To Create an Approach Motion Along Tool Axis ............................................................... 373
To Create an Exit Motion Along Tool Axis ........................................................................ 374
To Specify Parameters for a Tool Motion ......................................................................... 374
To Insert a CL Command................................................................................................. 375
CL Commands................................................................................................................. 376
Modifying CL Commands................................................................................................. 377
Customizing the Operation Tool Path .................................................................................... 377
About Customizing the Operation Tool Path..................................................................... 377
To Reorder Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths............................................................... 377
To Synchronize Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths ........................................................ 378
To Specify Synch Points .................................................................................................. 379
To Insert a CL Command................................................................................................. 380
Adding CL Commands at the Operation Level.................................................................. 381
To Modify a CL Command ............................................................................................... 381
To Find a CL Command................................................................................................... 382
To Delete a CL Command ............................................................................................... 382
To Copy a CL Command ................................................................................................. 383
CL Data................................................................................................................................. 383
About CL Data ................................................................................................................. 383
10
To Write CL Data to a File................................................................................................ 383
Default CL File Names..................................................................................................... 384
To Create a Set of NC Sequences ................................................................................... 385
Sets of NC Sequences..................................................................................................... 385
To Output CL Data for a Set of NC Sequences ................................................................ 386
To Process CL Data on a Remote Machine...................................................................... 386
To Input a CL Data File.................................................................................................... 387
To Display CL Data for an Operation, NC Sequence, or a Set of NC Sequences.............. 387
The DISPLAY CL Menu ................................................................................................... 388
To Display Tool Path for an NC Sequence ....................................................................... 390
To Rotate or Translate CL Data ....................................................................................... 391
Rotating and Translating CL Data .................................................................................... 391
Example: Translating CL Data ......................................................................................... 391
To Mirror CL Data ............................................................................................................ 391
Mirroring CL Data ............................................................................................................ 392
Example: Mirroring CL Data............................................................................................. 392
To Scale CL Data ............................................................................................................ 392
To Output CL Data in Different Units ................................................................................ 392
To Edit CL Data Files....................................................................................................... 393
To Perform Screen Editing of CL Data ............................................................................. 395
To Perform Search/Replace............................................................................................. 396
To Perform CL Data Gouge Checking.............................................................................. 396
To Specify an NC Alias .................................................................................................... 398
NC Aliases....................................................................................................................... 398
To Include Pre- and Post-Machining Files ........................................................................ 399
To Convert a CL File........................................................................................................ 400
Converting CL Files ......................................................................................................... 400
Using the PLAY PATH Dialog Box ................................................................................... 400
Subroutine Programming....................................................................................................... 406
About Subroutine Programming ....................................................................................... 406
To Create a New Subroutine Pattern................................................................................ 406
Limitations ....................................................................................................................... 408
Examples: Subroutine Programming ................................................................................ 408
To Redefine a Subroutine Pattern .................................................................................... 409
NC Post-Processing .............................................................................................................. 409
About NC Post-Processing .............................................................................................. 409
To Generate a CL File and an MCD File at the Same Time .............................................. 410
To Generate an MCD File from an Existing CL File .......................................................... 411
CL Output ............................................................................................................................. 411
About CL Output .............................................................................................................. 411
11
Supported CL Data Commands ....................................................................................... 412
CL Output for Holemaking Cycles .................................................................................... 419
CL Output for Circular Interpolation .................................................................................. 424
Synchronized Output for XY-UV 4-Axis Wire EDM ........................................................... 426
NC Check ............................................................................................................................. 427
About NC Check.............................................................................................................. 427
Modifying NC Sequences ...................................................................................................... 428
About Modifying NC Sequences....................................................................................... 428
To Modify an NC Sequence ............................................................................................. 428
Modifying Parameters of Multiple Automatic Cut Motions ................................................. 429
To Change a Parameter Value for All Cut Motions at Once .............................................. 429
To Redefine an NC Sequence ......................................................................................... 430
To Reorder an NC Sequence........................................................................................... 430
To Suppress or Delete Mill Volumes and Surfaces ........................................................... 431
Patterning NC Sequences ..................................................................................................... 432
About Patterning NC Sequences...................................................................................... 432
To Create a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence ........................................................ 433
Coordinate System Patterns ............................................................................................ 433
Using Relations................................................................................................................ 434
To Create a Rotary Table Pattern of an NC Sequence ..................................................... 434
To Modify a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence ........................................................ 435
To Create a Reference Manufacturing Pattern ................................................................. 435
Reference Patterns.......................................................................................................... 436
To Reference Pattern a Volume Milling NC Sequence...................................................... 436
To Create a Dimension Pattern of an NC Sequence......................................................... 436
Changing Feed Colors........................................................................................................... 437
About Changing Feed Colors ........................................................................................... 437
To Change a Feed Color.................................................................................................. 437
To Change a Feed Range................................................................................................ 438
Model Tree............................................................................................................................ 438
About Model Tree ............................................................................................................ 438
To Display the Manufacturing Features............................................................................ 439
To Select the Features to Display .................................................................................... 439
To Display the Manufacturing Parent/Child Relationships................................................. 439
To Add Manufacturing Parameters................................................................................... 440
Process Information .............................................................................................................. 440
About Process Information............................................................................................... 440
To Output Manufacturing Information ............................................................................... 440
To Set Up Filter Configuration.......................................................................................... 441
To Generate a Route Sheet ............................................................................................. 442
12
Route Sheet .................................................................................................................... 442
To Create a Customized Report on a Manufacturing Process........................................... 442
Using Pro/REPORT in Pro/NC ......................................................................................... 443
Examples: Creating a Customized Report on a Manufacturing Process............................ 444
Naming Conventions ............................................................................................................. 446
About Naming Conventions.............................................................................................. 446
13
To Retrieve Tool Parameters ........................................................................................... 475
To Add a Sketched Tool................................................................................................... 476
To Modify an Existing Tool............................................................................................... 476
To Delete a Tool .............................................................................................................. 477
To Save Tool Parameters ................................................................................................ 477
To Create a Tool Model ................................................................................................... 477
Solid Tool Models ............................................................................................................ 478
To Use a Tool Model........................................................................................................ 478
Using Assembly as a Tool Model ..................................................................................... 479
Machining Features............................................................................................................... 479
About Machining Features ............................................................................................... 479
To Create a Machining Feature........................................................................................ 480
To Adjust Feature Boundaries.......................................................................................... 481
Example: Adjusting Feature Boundaries........................................................................... 481
To Adjust Soft Walls ........................................................................................................ 485
To Adjust Feature Depth.................................................................................................. 485
To Machine a Feature...................................................................................................... 486
To Set Tool Path Properties............................................................................................. 486
To Mimic a Tool Path ....................................................................................................... 487
Face Features....................................................................................................................... 488
To Create a Face Feature................................................................................................ 488
To Machine a Face Feature ............................................................................................. 488
The Face Milling Dialog Box............................................................................................. 489
Example: Face Machining................................................................................................ 491
Slab Features........................................................................................................................ 491
To Create a Slab Feature................................................................................................. 491
Example: Creating a Slab Feature ................................................................................... 492
To Machine a Slab Feature.............................................................................................. 493
The Slab Milling Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 494
Pocket Features .................................................................................................................... 496
To Create a Pocket Feature............................................................................................. 496
To Machine a Pocket Feature .......................................................................................... 497
The Pocket Milling Dialog Box.......................................................................................... 498
Through Pocket Features ...................................................................................................... 500
To Create a Through Pocket Feature ............................................................................... 500
Example: Creating a Through Pocket............................................................................... 501
To Machine a Through Pocket Feature ............................................................................ 502
The Through Pocket Milling Dialog Box............................................................................ 503
Step Features ....................................................................................................................... 505
To Create a Step Feature ................................................................................................ 505
14
To Machine a Step Feature.............................................................................................. 505
The Step Milling Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 506
Profile Features..................................................................................................................... 508
To Create a Profile Feature.............................................................................................. 508
To Machine a Profile Feature ........................................................................................... 509
The Profile Milling Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 510
Channel Features.................................................................................................................. 512
To Create a Channel Feature........................................................................................... 512
Example: Creating a Channel Feature ............................................................................. 513
To Machine a Channel Feature........................................................................................ 513
The Channel Milling Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 515
Example: Channel Machining........................................................................................... 517
Slot Features......................................................................................................................... 518
To Create a Slot Feature.................................................................................................. 518
To Machine a Slot Feature............................................................................................... 519
The Slot Milling Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 520
Through Slot Features........................................................................................................... 521
To Create a Through Slot Feature.................................................................................... 521
To Machine a Through Slot Feature ................................................................................. 522
The Through Slot Milling Dialog Box ................................................................................ 523
Boss Top Features................................................................................................................ 525
To Create a Boss Top Feature......................................................................................... 525
Example: Creating a Boss Top Feature............................................................................ 526
To Machine a Boss Top Feature ...................................................................................... 527
The Boss Top Milling Dialog Box...................................................................................... 528
Example: Boss Top Machining ......................................................................................... 530
Flange Features .................................................................................................................... 531
To Create a Flange Feature............................................................................................. 531
Example: Creating a Flange Feature................................................................................ 532
To Machine a Flange Feature .......................................................................................... 533
The Flange Milling Dialog Box.......................................................................................... 534
O-Ring Features.................................................................................................................... 535
To Create an O-Ring Feature........................................................................................... 535
To Machine an O-Ring Feature........................................................................................ 536
The O-Ring Milling Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 537
Example: O-Ring Machining............................................................................................. 538
Hole Group Features............................................................................................................. 539
To Create a Hole Group Feature...................................................................................... 539
Combining Selection Methods.......................................................................................... 540
To Select Holes by Axes.................................................................................................. 541
15
To Select Holes by Diameters.......................................................................................... 541
To Select Holes by Surfaces............................................................................................ 541
To Select Holes by Feature Parameters........................................................................... 542
To Machine a Hole Group Feature ................................................................................... 542
The Drilling Strategy Dialog Box....................................................................................... 543
Example: Automatic Chamfer Machining.......................................................................... 546
Entry Hole Features .............................................................................................................. 547
To Create an Entry Hole Feature ..................................................................................... 547
The Entry Hole Dialog Box............................................................................................... 548
To Machine an Entry Hole Feature................................................................................... 549
Free Form Machining ............................................................................................................ 550
To Machine a Free Form Feature..................................................................................... 550
The Freeform Milling Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 552
Tool Path Display and Output ................................................................................................ 553
About Displaying the Tool Path ........................................................................................ 553
To Display the Tool Path.................................................................................................. 554
The PLAY PATH Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 555
To Add a Break Point....................................................................................................... 556
Manipulating Break Points ............................................................................................... 556
To Position the Tool......................................................................................................... 557
To Insert a CL Command................................................................................................. 557
Using Parameters in CL Commands ................................................................................ 558
To Delete a CL Command ............................................................................................... 558
To Redefine a CL Command............................................................................................ 558
To Save CL Data in a File ................................................................................................ 559
To Output a CL File ......................................................................................................... 559
To Output NC Codes ....................................................................................................... 560
Template Machining .............................................................................................................. 561
About the Template Manager........................................................................................... 561
To Create a New Template .............................................................................................. 561
To Convert an Existing TPL Template File to XML Format ............................................... 563
To Place a Template........................................................................................................ 563
Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................................... 564
To Manipulate Features Using the Model Tree ................................................................. 564
Options Available from the Model Tree............................................................................. 564
To Toggle Material Display .............................................................................................. 567
16
To Use Pro/PROCESS for MFG....................................................................................... 570
About Specific Uses for Pro/PROCESS for MFG.............................................................. 571
About the Part Machining Process Plan ........................................................................... 571
To Document the Part Machining Process Plan................................................................ 572
Process Steps....................................................................................................................... 573
About Process Assemblies .............................................................................................. 573
To Use Process Mode ..................................................................................................... 574
MFG SETUP Menu Commands ....................................................................................... 575
MFG SEQUENCE Menu Commands ............................................................................... 575
COMPONENT Menu Commands..................................................................................... 576
MFG MODIFY Menu Commands ..................................................................................... 577
STEP REGEN Menu Commands ..................................................................................... 578
Select Step Menu ............................................................................................................ 578
Read About and Create Steps ......................................................................................... 578
View Steps ...................................................................................................................... 584
Documenting the Process ..................................................................................................... 585
Create Customized Documentation.................................................................................. 585
Read About Process State............................................................................................... 588
Specific Process Considerations ...................................................................................... 588
Reports............................................................................................................................ 590
Other Process Functions ....................................................................................................... 595
About Obtaining Information............................................................................................. 595
About Step Information .................................................................................................... 595
Simplified Representations............................................................................................... 596
Sample Session .................................................................................................................... 597
About the Sample Session............................................................................................... 597
To Retrieve the Process Model ........................................................................................ 597
Example: Retrieved Process Model.................................................................................. 597
To Create Drawings......................................................................................................... 598
To Use the Play Steps Functionality................................................................................. 598
Example: MFG Model Stock Assembled .......................................................................... 598
To Use the Copy Process Functionality............................................................................ 600
Example: Copy Process Functionality .............................................................................. 601
To Define a New Operation.............................................................................................. 607
17
Pro/NC
Getting Started with Pro/NC
About Pro/NC
Pro/NC will create the data necessary to drive an NC machine tool to
machine a Pro/ENGINEER part. It does this by providing the tools to let the
manufacturing engineer follow a logical sequence of steps to progress from a
design model to ASCII CL data files that can be post-processed into NC
machine data. The illustration below summarizes the Pro/NC process.
Manufacturing
Model Machine Tools
(Workcells)
Set Up
Fixture Setups Manufacturing Tool
Database
Set Up
Operation
Define NC
Pro/NC Sequences
Post-Process
Drive NC
Machine Tool
Licensing Requirements
Pro/NC is a family of optional modules that can be ordered in any
combination, to provide a “custom fit of the available functionality to your
company’s needs.
The table below lists the functionality available with each of the modules.
18
If you do not have the appropriate license to perform a specific set of
functions, you may need to use a different command to start Pro/ENGINEER,
or you might be able to “float the necessary options to your working session.
3. Specify the type of the model by selecting an option button under Sub-Type:
Þ If you are machining a single part with only one workpiece, choose NC Part.
Þ If you are machining an assembly of reference parts with no, one, or many
workpieces, or if you do not have the permission to make changes to the workpiece
model, choose NC Assembly.
19
4. Type a name for the new manufacturing model in the Name text box, unless you want to
accept the default.
5. Click OK.
6. If you have chosen NC Part as the sub-type, the system displays the browser window,
listing all the part files in the current directory. Select the name of the reference part.
7. The system displays the MANUFACTURE menu, the model tree, and, in case of Part
machining, the reference part.
Pro/NC Concepts
Design Model
The Pro/ENGINEER design model, representing the finished product, is used
as the basis for all manufacturing operations. Features, surfaces, and edges
are selected on the design model as references for each tool path. Referencing
the geometry of the design model sets up an associative link between the
design model and the workpiece. Because of this link, when the design model
is changed, all associated manufacturing operations are updated to reflect the
change.
Holes to be
drilled
Surfaces to
be milled
Workpiece
The workpiece represents the raw stock that is going to be machined by the
manufacturing operations. Its use is optional in Pro/NC. The benefits of using
a workpiece include:
20
• Automatic definition of extents of machining when creating NC sequences.
• Dynamic material removal simulation and gouge checking (available with Pro/NC-
CHECK).
The workpiece can represent any form of raw stock; such as bar stock or
casting. It may be created easily by copying the design model and modifying
the dimensions or deleting/suppressing features to represent the real
workpiece.
Holes removed—
not part of casting
Dimensions increased
to allow for material
removal
Dimensions decreased
to allow for material
removal
Manufacturing Model
A regular manufacturing model consists of a design model (also called
“reference part since it is used as a reference for creating NC sequences) and
a workpiece assembled together (see illustration below). As the
manufacturing process is developed, the material removal simulation can be
performed on the workpiece. Generally, at the end of the manufacturing
process the workpiece geometry should be coincident with the geometry of the
design model. However, material removal is an optional step.
21
Solid lines
show design
model
Dotted lines
show
workpiece
If you are not concerned with material removal, you do not have to define the
workpiece geometry. Use a workpiece represented by a coordinate system
(“workpiece with no geometry), or no workpiece at all in Assembly machining.
• The workpiece—filename.prt
• Part machining—Acts on the assumption that the manufacturing model contains one
reference part and one workpiece (also a part).
Once the manufacturing model is created, Part and Assembly machining use
similar techniques to develop the manufacturing process. If there are specific
techniques for defining an NC sequence they will be described in the
appropriate chapter. Keep in mind that in Part machining the system
automatically determines some of the machining aspects based on the
22
workpiece geometry; therefore, while Assembly machining gives you more
flexibility in building the manufacturing model, it may also require extra
steps when creating the NC sequences.
The major difference between Part and Assembly machining is that in Part
machining all the components of the manufacturing process (operations,
workcells, or NC sequences) are part features that belong to the workpiece,
while in Assembly machining these are assembly features that belong to the
manufacturing assembly.
Note: Use Assembly machining if you do not have the permission to make changes to the
workpiece model.
2. By default, all files are listed in the browser window. To narrow down the search, choose
Manufacturing from the Type drop-down list. You can also use one of the following
options from the Sub-type list:
Þ All—Lists all the models in the Manufacturing family of products, that is, all the
models that have the “.mfg extension (including Cast, Mold, Sheet Metal
manufacturing, and so on).
Þ NC Part—Lists only the Part manufacturing models created in Release 18.0 and
later.
Þ Pre-18.0 MFG—Lists all the Part and Assembly manufacturing models created
prior to Release 18.0.
Note: Filtering by sub-type applies only to files created in Release 16.0 and later.
Use All to retrieve “.mfg files created prior to Release 16.0.
3. Select the name of the model to retrieve from the browser window.
4. The system displays the manufacturing model, the model tree, and the MANUFACTURE
menu.
23
To Place a Workpiece in Part Machining
When you create a new model for part machining, you are immediately
prompted to enter the name of the design model. This is the base component
of the manufacturing assembly. To continue with the manufacturing
assembly:
Þ Assemble—To assemble the workpiece to the design model. Choose Workpiece and
enter the name of the workpiece. The workpiece will be retrieved for assembling with
the design model. Assemble the workpiece by specifying the proper placement
constraints.
Þ Create—To create the workpiece directly in Manufacturing mode (this option is only
available if you have an appropriate license). Choose Workpiece, enter the name of
the workpiece, and create the first feature of the workpiece referencing geometry of
the design model as necessary. To create more features on the workpiece, use the
Mod Work option in the MFG MODIFY menu.
To Manipulate a Workpiece
3. Choose Datum, Coord Sys, and create a coordinate system to represent the workpiece.
Return to the MANUFACTURE menu.
24
Note: If you do not have the appropriate license and cannot create a workpiece in
Manufacturing mode, create the workpiece containing a coordinate system in Part mode
and then assemble it to the reference part.
4. The INSTANCES menu appears with a namelist of instances (including the generic part)
and two additional options Show Table and Edit Table.
6. Regenerate.
When you replace a design model and regenerate the workpiece, the NC
sequences and material removal (where applicable) are updated according to
the new model.
Note: This functionality only works if you use the Replace option in the MFG MDL
menu. For example, if you replace a reference part with another family member using
Simplified Representations, the NC sequences will still reference the original reference
part.
25
Example: Replacing a Design Model
Workpiece
(shown in dashed lines where
different from the design model)
Design
model
When you choose Mfg Model from the MANUFACTURE menu, the MFG MDL
menu appears with the following options:
You can use the MFG MDL menu options in any combination and as many
times as needed.
26
• When you choose Assemble from the MFG MDL menu, the following options are
available:
Þ Gen Assem—Assemble a general assembly. In this case, you have to classify the
assembly components. Choose Ref Model from the MFG CLASS menu and select all
the components (parts or subassemblies) to be classified as reference models. Choose
Done Sel when finished. Then choose Workpiece from the MFG CLASS menu and
select all the components to be classified as workpieces. Choose Done Sel when
finished. All the components that you have not classified as either reference model or
workpiece will stay in the manufacturing assembly but will have no effect in defining
manufacturing geometry.
• When you choose Create from the MFG MDL menu, the component will be classified as
the reference part or the workpiece, depending on the option you use (Ref Model or
Workpiece).
2. Select component(s) that you want to reclassify. Click Done Select when finished.
27
Click Done.
4. Select more components to reclassify, or click Quit Select to finish the reclassification
process.
Manufacturing Process
1. Set up the manufacturing database. It may contain such items as workcells (machine
tools) available, tooling, fixture configurations, site parameters, or tool tables. This step
is optional. If you do not want to set up all your database up front, you can go directly
into the machining process and later define any of the items above when you actually
need them.
Þ Operation name
Þ Operation comments
Þ Operation parameters
You have to define a workcell and a coordinate system before you can start creating NC
sequences. Other setup elements are optional.
3. Create NC sequences for the specified operation. Each NC sequence is a series of tool
motions with the addition of specific post-processor words that are not motion-related but
required for the correct NC output.
The tool path is automatically generated by the system based on the NC sequence type
(such as Volume Milling, Outside Turning), cut geometry, and manufacturing
parameters. You can apply more “low level control, if you like, by:
Þ Defining your own tool motions, that is, approach, exit, and connect motions. Tool
motions include Automatic Cut motions.
28
4. For each completed NC sequence, you can create a material removal feature, either by
making the system automatically remove material (where applicable), or by manually
constructing a regular Pro/ENGINEER feature on the workpiece (such as Slot or Hole).
Modal Settings
Most of the machining setup elements are modal, that is, all subsequent NC
sequences will use this setting until you explicitly change it. Among those
are:
• Fixture setup
• Tool (provided the tool type is compatible with the NC sequence type)
• NC Sequence coordinate system (for the first NC sequence, the Machine Coordinate
system specified for the operation will be implicitly used as the NC sequence coordinate
system as well, unless you explicitly specify another one)
• Retract surface
Walk-Through Menus
Most of Pro/NC menus are designed to “walk you through the process
development. These menus use checkmarks to select an option; more than
one option may be selected at a time. When you choose Done from such a
menu, the system will invoke the appropriate user interface for each selected
option in turn.
This allows you to reduce the time and minimize the number of menu
selections involved in defining an NC sequence.
29
To Get Process Status and Tool Path Information
The following items are listed in the Status page of the Info Box:
• Operation name
• NC sequence type
If you want to find out more about a particular item, select on the
appropriate button in the Info Box, and a corresponding Info window or
subwindow will appear. The following information can be obtained by
pressing the buttons in the Info Box:
• Tool—The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, which allows you to set up tooling.
The information in the Info Box updates as you develop the manufacturing
process.
When you display the tool path, the appropriate information appears in the
Tool Path Info section of the Info Box, such as the feedrate, the spindle speed,
the current XYZ coordinates of the tool, the current IJK coordinates of the
tool axis, and so on. These values update to match the tool’s location.
30
Operations
About Operations
Note: You have to set up an operation before you can start creating NC sequences.
• Name
• Workcell to be used
• Retract surface
• Comments (optional)
When the NC sequences and material removal features are created, they
contain a reference to the current operation name. Operation setting is
modal, that is, once an operation is created, it stays current until another
operation is created or activated.
To Create an Operation
You have to create an operation before you can start defining NC sequences.
When creating the operation, the required elements are the machine tool
name and the Program Zero coordinate system.
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Machining > Operation (or Mfg Setup >
Operation).
Note: If you do not have any operations defined, the system automatically opens the
Operation Setup dialog box and starts creating a new operation when you click
Machining or Mfg Setup.
2. If you already have defined some operations for the current manufacturing process, click
the New icon at the top of the dialog box to start creating a new operation.
31
The Operation Setup dialog box displays the default settings for the operation name
and output parameters. To change the default name, type the new name in the
Operation Name text box.
3. Select or create a machine tool (workcell). If you have set up some machine tools prior to
creating the operation, their names appear in the NC Machine drop-down list. To create
4. Define the Program Zero. Click next to the Program Zero text box and select or
create a coordinate system. Once the Program Zero is defined, the name of the coordinate
system appears in the Program Zero text box, and clicking next to it will highlight
the coordinate system on the screen.
5. Use any of the other, optional, elements of operation setup, if needed. You can:
Þ On the General tab, set up the Retract surface. The Retract surface is used for
creating Milling and Holemaking NC sequences. If you do not define it at this time,
you will be prompted to do this once you start creating the first Milling or
Holemaking NC sequence. Click for details.
Þ On the General tab, click to assemble and set up the fixtures. Click for
details.
Þ On the From/Home tab, specify datum points to serve as FROM and HOME
locations.
Þ On the Output tab, change the output parameters or type the operation comments,
to be output using PPRINT.
6. Click OK to finalize creating the operation and close the dialog box.
7. If you want to immediately create another operation, click Apply, and then click the New
icon at the top of the Operation Setup dialog box.
• NC Machine—The name of the machine tool (workcell) used to perform the operation. If
you have set up some machine tools prior to creating the operation, their names appear
in the NC Machine drop-down list. To create or redefine a machine tool, click next
to the NC Machine drop-down list.
32
In the lower portion of the Operation Setup dialog box there are three tabs:
General, From/Home, and Output. They contain the following elements:
• Program Zero—Select or create a coordinate system used for NC output and for other
machining references.
• The Retract group box—Specify how the tool retracts between the cuts:
• FROM Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the FROM location. Once set,
the name of the datum point appears in the text box. Clicking highlights the datum
• HOME Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the HOME location. Once set,
the name of the datum point appears in the text box. Clicking highlights the datum
Note: If the workcell associated with the operation has two heads, you can
set up separate FROM and HOME points for the second head. In this case, a
From motion will be created between the From point specified for a head
(that is, Head 1 or Head 2) and the first point of the first NC sequence that
uses this head; a Home motion will be created from the last point of the last
NC sequence that uses this head to the Home point for the head.
• Output NCL File—The default name for the operation cutter location (CL) data file.
You can type any name. Clicking Use Default sets it back to the system default.
• PARTNO—The part name, output with the PARTNO command, as well as using
PPRINT. You can type any name. Clicking Use Default sets it back to the system
default (the name of the workpiece for Part machining, and the name of the
manufacturing assembly for Assembly machining).
• Startup File—Type the name of the file you want to be included at the very beginning of
the operation CL file (after the PARTNO, MACHIN, and UNITS commands). The file
must be located in your current working directory and have the extension “.ncl.
33
• Shutdown File— Type the name of the file you want to be included at the very end of
the operation CL file. The file must be located in your current working directory and
have the extension “.ncl.
• Comments—Type the operation comments in the text box below. These comments can
be output using PPRINT.
The comments for an operation can be listed in the Manufacturing info; they
can also be output in the CL data files using PPRINT.
1. On the Output tab of the Operation Setup dialog box, type the operation comments in the
Comments text box.
2. Use the following buttons located to the right of the Comments text box, as necessary:
To Activate an Operation
Follow the procedure below if you want to activate one of the previously
created operations (to add another NC sequence to it, or to customize its tool
path).
1. Click Operation.
2. The Operation Setup dialog box opens, with the name of the currently active operation
displayed in the Operation Name text box.
3. Select the name of the operation you want to activate from the drop-down list.
34
Workcells
About Workcells
• Name
• Type
• Number of axes
• A set of parameters
• Associated tools
• Associated site(s)
1. On the MFG SETUP menu, click Workcell. Another way to access this functionality is to
2. If you already have defined some machine tools for the current manufacturing process,
click the New icon at the top of the dialog box to start creating a new machine tool.
The Machine Tool Settings dialog box displays the default settings for the machine
name, type, and parameters. You can click OK or Apply at this point to create a machine
tool with default name and parameters, and no cutting tools associated with it.
3. To change the machine name, type the new name in the Machine Name text box.
4. To change the machine type, use the Machine Type drop-down list.
Click to see a summary of the existing workcell types and the NC sequence types
subsequently available for each of them. The number of axes specified for the workcell
will also affect the NC sequence options; for example, if you set up a 4-Axis Mill workcell,
you will have the 3 Axis and 4 Axis options available when creating NC sequences, but
the 5 Axis option will not appear.
5. To change the number of axes, use the Number of Axes drop-down list.
6. To change the parameters, use the tabs located in the lower portion of the dialog box.
35
7. To set up the cutting tools for the machine, click the Cutting Tool Setup button located
on the Cutting Tools tab. You can also set up the tools later by clicking NC Setup >
Cutting Tool Manager.
8. Click OK to finalize the machine tool creation and close the dialog box.
9. If you want to immediately create another machine tool, click Apply, and then click the
New or the Open icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box.
You can save the current machine tool, along with its parameters, by clicking the Save
icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box. You can then use the Open
icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box to create a new machine tool
with the same parameters, whether in this or in another NC process.
• Machine Name—The machine name identifies the machine tool within the
manufacturing process. The default machine names have the format MACH01, MACH02,
where the number gets automatically incremented by the system. You can type any
name.
When you save the machine tool data on disk, the system uses the Machine Name as a
filename (with the .gph extension).
• Orientation—(Available only for Lathe or Mill/Turn machine tools.) Specifies the lathe
orientation: Horizontal (default) or Vertical. This option defines the default Sketcher
orientation when you later create Turning NC sequences in this workcell:
Þ For Horizontal, the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system will point
horizontally to the right, and the x-axis—vertically upward.
36
Þ For Vertical, the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system will point vertically
upward, and the x-axis—horizontally to the right.
The tabs on the Machine Tool Settings dialog box enable you to specify the
following parameters of a machine tool.
• PP Name—The name of the default post-processor associated with the machine. Type
the name in the text box. The Reset button lets you change the name back to the system
default.
PPRINT—Opens the PPRINT menu to let you set up your PPRINT options.
• FROM—Specifies how the FROM statement will be output to an operation CL data file:
Þ At Every Tool Path—FROM statements are output at the beginning of each tool
path for a machining feature. For the first tool path, this FROM statement
corresponds to the location of the operation From point, if specified, or to the first
location on the tool path for this machining feature.
• LOADTL—Controls the output of the LOADTL command in the operation CL data file:
Þ Not Modal—Outputs the LOADTL statement at the beginning of each feature tool
path, regardless of whether the tool is the same or changed.
37
Þ Do Not Output—COOLNT/OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
Þ Output (default)—The SPINDL /OFF statement is output at the end of each feature
tool path.
Þ Do Not Output—SPINDL /OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
These options become accessible only for a Mill type machine tool when you
set Number of Axes to 4 Axis.
• Use Rotate Output—If this option is not selected (default), all CL data is transformed
and output in the coordinates of the Program Zero coordinate system. When you select
this option, the system outputs the applicable TRANS and ROTABL commands to specify
linear and rotational transformations. Only select this option when indexing to a new
table position is desired.
• Rotation Direction—Available only when Use Rotate Output is selected. Allows you
to specify that rotation is performed in a particular direction (this may occur when there
is an obstruction in one rotation direction but not another). The values are:
Milling Capability
These options become accessible only for a Mill/Turn type machine tool.
If both Head1 and Head2 are selected, the HEAD1 and HEAD2 options will
appear in the MACH AUX menu when creating Milling NC sequences.
38
Creating a Milling or Holemaking NC sequence using HEAD2 will result in
HEAD2 statement being output in the CL file.
If neither Head1 nor Head2 is selected when defining the workcell, then the
SEL MENU with the MILL and TURN options will not appear when creating
NC sequences. That is, once you click NC Sequence on the MACHINING
menu, you will be brought directly into the MACH AUX menu for Turning.
Cutter Compensation
When you expand this field, the Output cutter position options become
available:
• Tool Center—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the tool center.
• Tool Edge—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the cutting edge of the
tool. If you select this option, type the desired value in the Safe Radius text box. This
value represents the smallest concave corner radius that can be safely machined, and
must be slightly bigger than the radius (Cutter Diameter/2) of the biggest tool on the
machine. The Adjust Corner drop-down list gives you a choice of corner condition
options for convex corners:
Þ Straight—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straight
segments extended until they intersect.
Þ Fillet—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straight
segments connected with an arc.
Þ Automatic—The system adds a fillet corner condition at all the convex corners on
the outside contour of the part, and a loop corner condition at all the convex corners
on the inside contour of the part.
• Maximum Speed—Maximum allowable spindle speed for the machine tool (optional).
Type the maximum speed value in RPM (revolutions per minute).
39
• Feed Units—Select the rapid feed rate units from the Rapid Traverse drop-down list.
The values are:
• Feed Limits—Type the value of the feed rate used for rapid traverse in the Rapid Feed
Rate text box (optional).
• Tool Change Time—Time needed for changing a tool, in seconds (optional). Type the
value in the text box, or use the UP and DOWN arrows next to the text box to increase or
decrease the value, respectively.
• The Cutting Tool Setup button opens the Tool Setup dialog box to let you set up the
cutting tools associated with the machine tool. For 2-turret Lathe and 4- or 5-axis
Mill/Turn machines, you get separate cutting tool setup buttons for Head 1 and Head 2.
Lets you specify the travel limits for the machine tool: X-Axis Travel, Y-
Axis Travel, and Z-Axis Travel. Specifying these values is optional. Values
for the travel limits along the axes should be the actual dimensions that
indicate the extent of the machine tool workspace relative to the Program
Zero coordinate system. For example, if a machine tool is 60 inches wide, and
the origin of the Program Zero coordinate system is located halfway between
the ends, specify the travel limits for X-Axis Travel as follows: type -30 in
the left text box and 30 in the text box on the right.
If you display or otherwise output the CL data for a machining feature that
exceeds the limitations of the machine tool where it is defined, the
Information Window will appear, listing the values of the limits that have
been exceeded and their corresponding actual values.
Type the comments associated with the machine tool in the text box
(optional).
40
Workcell Types
The workcell type determines the types of NC sequences that can be created
using it (for example, 4 Axis Lathe allows you to perform 2- and 4-axis
Turning and Holemaking).
Workcell Descriptio NC
Type n Sequence
Types
Available
Profile
Groove
Thread
Holemaking
:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap
Ream
Local Mill
Surface Mill
Face
Profile
Pocketing
Trajectory
Thread
Engraving
41
Plunge
Holemaking
:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap
Ream
Profile
Pocketing
Trajectory
Thread
Engraving
Plunge
Turning:
Area
Profile
Groove
Thread
Holemaking
:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
42
Tap
Ream
You can create a workcell at setup time and then use it in an operation, or
create a workcell directly when defining an operation.
1. On the Output tab of the Machine Tool Setup dialog box, click PPRINT. Another way to
access this functionality is from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu: click Mfg
Setup > CL Setup > PPRINT.
43
Þ Save—Save the current PPRINT table for later use. You will be prompted for the
name of the file. The file will have an extension “.ppr and will be stored in the
current working directory.
10.If the table has not been set up, the Modify option will be grayed out. Choose Create. If
you have previously set up a PPRINT table, you can either change your former settings
using the Modify option, or start with a clean table using Create.
The Activate PPRINT dialog box opens. It contains all the items that can be output
through PPRINT. Whether an item will be output or not is determined by the flag value.
The default flag value for all items is “NO. Change it to “YES if you want the item to be
output.
2. To change the flag value, highlight the item or items in the PPRINT table by clicking on
them once, then click on the appropriate action button (Yes or No), located in the lower-
left portion of the dialog box. To unselect an item, click on it once more. You can also use
the Select All and Unselect All icons located in the lower-right portion of the dialog box.
3. To supply comments for an item, highlight it and type the comment in the Comments
text box. When you highlight an item with an existing comment, the comment is
displayed in the Comments text box. While editing a comment, you can revert to the
previous value by clicking the drop-down arrow next to the Comments text box.
Whenever you output CL data to file, the system will check the PPRINT
table. If any flag is set to “YES and the appropriate information is available,
the corresponding PPRINT command will be output to the CL file.
• PART_NAME
• DATE_TIME
• SCALE
• TRANSLATE
44
• ROTATE
• OPERATION_NAME
• OPERATION_COMMENTS
• LAYER_NAME
• UDF_NAME
• TOOL_TABLE
• ONLY_OUTPUT_USED_TOOLS
• NC_SEQUENCE_NAME
• NC_SEQUENCE_COMMENTS
• FEATURE_ID
• SEQUENCE_TYPE
• CUTCOM_REGISTER
• SPINDLE_SPEED
• CUT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• ARC_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• FREE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• RETRACT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• PLUNGE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• SCAN_TYPE
• RETRACT_HEIGHT
• NUMBER_OF_SLICES
The following items are output once per LOADTL or TURRET statement:
• TOOL_NAME
• TOOL_POSITION_NUMBER
45
• TOOL_COMMENTS
• TOOL_PARAMETERS
• TOOL_OFFSET_NUMBER
• CHAMFER_LENGTH
• CORNER_RADIUS
• CSINK_ANGLE
• CUTTER_DIAM
• DRILL_DIAMETER
• DRILL_LENGTH
• END_ANGLE
• END_OFFSET
• GAUGE_Z_LENGTH
• GAUGE_X_LENGTH
• HOLDER_TYPE
• INSERT_LENGTH
• LENGTH
• LENGTH_UNITS
• NOSE_RADIUS
• NUM_OF_TEETH
• POINT_ANGLE
• SHANK_DIAMETER
• SIDE_ANGLE
• SIDE_WIDTH
• TOOL_MATERIAL
• TOOL_ORIENTATION
• TOOL_TYPE
46
Fixtures
About Fixtures
Fixtures are parts or assemblies that help orient and hold the workpiece
during a manufacturing operation. Fixtures can be created and saved in Part
or Assembly mode, and retrieved into the Manufacturing mode during fixture
setup. Creating the fixture in Assembly mode is advantageous since fixtures
can be created as needed during the intermediate process steps by
referencing the workpiece. It is a simple process, since you can build the
fixture referencing the workpiece with Use Edge.
You do not have to quit out of Manufacturing mode to enter Part or Assembly
mode; you can simply open another object (part or assembly) between NC
sequences.
Note: If you have an appropriate license, you can use the library of
manufacturing fixtures (clamps, holding plates, chucks and jaws) of generic
sizes.
1. On the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, click Mfg Setup > Fixture > Create.
Another way to access this functionality is to click on the General tab of the
Operation Setup dialog box. The FIXTURE SET menu opens. Click Create.
2. On the DEFINE FIXT menu, click Name and enter a name for the fixture setup. The
name must be unique within the manufacturing model. If you do not use this option, the
setup will be given a default name (FSETP0, FSETP1).
3. Click Component. The FIXT COMP menu appears with the options:
Þ Create—Create a new part on the fly. This option allows you to create fixtures as
needed during the intermediate process steps by referencing the workpiece
geometry.
Þ Clear—Remove selected fixture components using the Select option, or remove all
the components in the current fixture setup using the All option in the CLEAR menu.
4. The Setup Time command allows you to type the time it takes to assemble/disassemble
the fixtures. This time will then appear in the route sheet as a setup time for the NC
sequence.
47
5. Click Done when finished defining the fixture setup. This setup becomes active (that is,
it will be used by all newly created NC sequences).
Fixture Setup
To use fixtures in the manufacturing process, you must first define the
fixture setup(s) for the manufacturing model. Each fixture setup has a name
and contains information about the fixtures that are to be present in the
model when the setup is active. Only one setup can be active at a time. Setup
names can be used to manipulate fixtures within the manufacturing model.
Since fixture setups contain fixture assembly information, each
manufacturing model has to have its fixture setup(s) explicitly defined;
unlike sites or tools, you can not retrieve a fixture setup from one model into
another manufacturing model. Fixture setups can be defined at the time of
setting up an operation or at any time between NC sequences.
When you click on the General tab of the Operation Setup dialog box
(or click Fixture on the MFG SETUP menu), the FIXTURE SET menu appears
with the commands:
• Create—Create a new fixture setup. This setup then becomes active (that is, it will be
used by all newly created NC sequences).
• Modify—Modify an existing fixture setup. When you select a name of the setup to
modify from a namelist menu, the current setup is temporary replaced by the setup
selected for modification. You can modify the setup name, add or remove components, or
change the setup time. Once modifications are done, however, the original setup that was
on display before you started the modification process will reappear. If you want to make
the modified setup active, use the Activate option below.
• Activate—Specify which of the previously defined fixture setups to display (that is,
make active). Select the name of the fixture setup you want from a namelist menu.
Coordinate Systems
Coordinate systems used in Pro/NC can belong to the design model, to the
workpiece, or to any other component of the manufacturing assembly. You
48
can use coordinate systems created prior to bringing a component into the
manufacturing model, or create them in Manufacturing mode.
1. Click next to the Program Zero text box in the Operation Setup dialog box, or
select the Coord Sys option in the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. The MACH CSYS or the SEQ CSYS menu, respectively, will appear with the following
options:
Þ Create—Select the model that the coordinate system will belong to, then create the
coordinate system.
Þ Select—Select the coordinate system either by selecting on the screen or using the
Sel By Menu option.
Þ Use Prev—Allows you to select a coordinate system used for an earlier operation or
NC sequence.
• Machine—Acts as the default origin for all CL data. This coordinate system is specified
at the time of operation setup using the Program Zero option in the Operation Setup
dialog box. All NC sequences created within a certain operation will use the same
Machine coordinate system.
• NC Sequence—Affects all the NC sequence data, such as retract surface and cut feed
direction. This coordinate system is specified at the time of NC sequence setup using the
Coord Sys option in the SEQ SETUP menu. The NC Sequence coordinate system must
be oriented in a certain way, as described in the following sections.
The NC Sequence coordinate system setting is modal, that is, once specified,
it will stay for all subsequent NC sequences until you change it. For the first
49
NC sequence, the Machine coordinate system specified for the operation will
be implicitly used as the NC sequence coordinate system as well.
If the Machine and NC Sequence coordinate systems are different, then, upon
creating an NC sequence, all CL data will be transformed and output in the
coordinates of the Machine coordinate system. If the Z axes of the NC
Sequence and Machine coordinate systems are not parallel, the tool
orientation vector (i,j,k) or table rotation will be provided. This functionality
allows you to post-process 3-axis operations to be performed on the 5-axis
machines. In Turning, it can be used if the post-processor requires X-Y input.
Notes:
Þ Using the CL_DATA_MODE parameter, you may specify that the linear and
rotational transitions between the NC Sequence and Machine coordinate systems be
output in the CL file, instead of transforming all CL coordinates.
Þ To output CL data with respect to the NC Sequence coordinate system, use the
COORDINATE_OUTPUT parameter.
Z-Axis Orientation
For turning, remember that the positive Z-axis points away from the lathe
headstock. If you create a coordinate system at the headstock end of the part,
make sure the positive Z-axis points towards the rest of the workpiece. On
the other hand, if you create a coordinate system at the tailstock end of the
part, the Z-axis should point away from the workpiece, off into space. In
either case, the Z-axis must be colinear with the turning axis. The following
shows the Z-axis orientation for turning.
50
NC Sequences
About NC Sequences
• Automatic Cut motions, that is, tool motions while actually cutting the workpiece
material.
To Create an NC Sequence
51
• Customize—Customize the default tool path, that is, define your own tool motions and
insert CL commands.
• Seq Info—Brings up a checklist menu of all tool motions, along with the NC Sequence
option. Select the motion(s) that you want to display info for (you can use Select All); use
the NC Sequence option to display the NC sequence info. The appropriate info will be
displayed in an Info Window.
• Done Seq—Finalize the current NC sequence and return to the MACHINING menu.
• Next Seq—Finalize the current NC sequence and immediately start defining a new NC
sequence of the same type and with the same initial setup (tool, parameters, cut
geometry). You are brought directly into the NC SEQUENCE menu, where you can change
any of the setup elements or “tweak the tool path using the Customize functionality.
• Quit Seq—Abort defining the NC sequence. You will be prompted for a confirmation.
• Name (optional)
• Comments (optional)
• Tool
• Manufacturing parameters
Most of these settings are modal. You usually have to specify cut geometry
and adjust the manufacturing parameters for each specific NC sequence. If
you choose Customize prior to completing the sequence setup, the
appropriate interface will be invoked automatically to “walk you through the
required steps.
52
As an NC sequence is created, it will be given a default name corresponding
to its type (for example, Volume Milling). The Name option in the SEQ
SETUP menu allows you to enter a customized name for the NC sequence.
This name will then be displayed instead of the default NC sequence name in
the namelist menus and messages (for example “Computing tool path for
NC_Sequence_name).
Þ Create—A system window will appear to allow you to enter the comments using the
system editor.
Þ Modify—A system window will appear with the current comments. Edit the
comments using the system editor.
At the NC sequence level, the start and end points are specified using the
Start and End options in the SEQ SETUP menu. When a new NC sequence is
created, it will automatically use the End point of the previous NC sequence
as its Start point.
1. On the SEQ SETUP menu, select the Start and/or End option.
53
To Select an NC Sequence
NC sequence features themselves do not have geometry that you can select
on to choose the NC sequence for modification, CL data output . Whenever an
NC sequence is to be selected, the NC Sequence option will appear in the
SELECT FEAT menu. When you choose it, a namelist menu of the NC
sequences will appear; each NC sequence is identified by its number and
type, followed by the operation name, for example:
and so forth.
If you have specified an NC sequence name using the Name option in the
SEQ SETUP menu, this name will appear in the namelist menu instead of the
NC sequence type (for example, Volume Milling).
Note: If a line is too long to fit in the namelist menu, place the cursor over it and check
the bottom line in the message window to see the whole entry.
If more than one operation has been defined for the model, the SEL NC SEQ
menu controls which NC sequences are listed in the namelist menu:
• By Cur Oper—Only NC sequences that belong to the current operation will appear in
the namelist menu.
• All Operations—All NC sequences existing in the model will appear in the namelist
menu.
An NC sequence can also be selected using the Sel By Menu option (as any
other feature) by its feature number, internal ID, or from a Model Tree.
Retract Surface
The retract surface defines the level to which the tool is retracted after a cut.
Depending on your machining needs, you can specify the retract surface to be
a plane, cylinder, sphere, or a custom-made surface.
54
You can specify the retract surface at the operation level, and then modify it
at the NC sequence level, if needed.
When an operation Retract Surface is defined, the tool will traverse along
this surface from the end of one sequence to the beginning of the next
sequence.
The retract surface setting is modal, that is, once specified, it will stay for all
subsequent NC sequences until you change it, as long as it is applicable to
the NC sequence type. For example, if you specify a cylinder at the operation
level on a 5-Axis workcell, you will have to define a planar retract surface
when creating a 3-Axis NC sequence.
Retract
plane
Retract
cylinder
When you set a non-planar retract surface, you can control the maximum
deviation of the tool from this surface, as shown in the following illustration,
by specifying a Tolerance value in the Retract group box, located on the
General tab of the Operation Setup dialog box. The default is 0.1" (1 mm).
retract surface
Tolerance
tool path
tool
55
To Set Up a Retract Surface
1. Click next to the Surface text box in Retract group box, located on the General
tabbed page of the Operation Setup dialog box, or select Retract from the SEQ SETUP
menu.
3. Select the Surface option button and click one of the following buttons:
Þ Along Z Axis—Create a datum plane normal to the Z-axis of either the Machine or
the NC Sequence coordinate system (depending on whether you define retract at the
operation or the NC sequence level), by specifying an offset along this axis. Type the
offset value in the Enter Z Depth text box.
4. The Preview button lets you display the retract surface prior to finalizing the setup.
Click OK to create the retract surface, Cancel—to quit.
1. Select the Sphere option button in the Retract Selection dialog box.
2. By default, the sphere center is either the Machine or the NC Sequence coordinate
system (depending on whether you define retract at the operation or the NC sequence
level). To specify a different center, use one of the following options in the drop-down list
in the Set Sphere Center group box:
Þ Default—Use the default center, that is, the Machine coordinate system if you
define retract at the operation level, or the NC Sequence coordinate system if you
define retract at the NC sequence level.
56
Þ Create Datum Point—Create a datum point.
The system displays the name of the coordinate system or datum point that is the
current center of the sphere at the bottom of the Set Sphere Center group box. It also
shows, in parentheses, the name of the model that the coordinate system or datum point
belongs to.
Þ Select the Sphere Radius option button and type the radius value in the text box to
the right.
Þ Select the Offset From Datum Point option button. This activates the Set Offset
Reference group box with the following options in the drop-down list:
The system displays the name of the reference datum point, with the model name in
parentheses, at the bottom of the Set Offset Reference group box. Type the offset value
with respect to this datum point in the text box below the Offset From Datum Point
option button.
1. Select the Cylinder option button in the Retract Selection dialog box.
2. By default, the cylinder axis is one of the axes of either the Machine or the NC Sequence
coordinate system (depending on whether you define retract at the operation or the NC
sequence level). To specify a different reference, use one of the following options in the
drop-down list at the top of the Set Cylinder Axis group box:
Þ Default—Use the default reference, that is, the Machine coordinate system if you
define retract at the operation level, or the NC Sequence coordinate system if you
define retract at the NC sequence level.
The system displays the name of the reference (coordinate system or datum axis) in the
middle portion of the Set Cylinder Axis group box. It also shows, in parentheses, the
name of the model that the coordinate system or datum axis belongs to. If the reference
57
is a coordinate system, you can select which axis to use as the cylinder axis using the
drop-down list at the bottom of the Set Cylinder Axis group box.
Þ Select the Cylinder Radius option button and type the radius value in the text box
below.
Þ Select the Offset From Datum Point option button. This activates the Set Offset
Reference group box with the following options in the drop-down list:
The system displays the name of the reference datum point, with the model name in
parentheses, at the bottom of the Set Offset Reference group box. Type the offset value
with respect to this datum point in the text box below the Offset From Datum Point
option button.
Material Removal
2. Choose NC Sequence from the SELECT FEAT menu and select the parent NC sequence
from the namelist menu.
58
Þ If you choose Construct, the feature creation interface is invoked. Create the
feature to represent the removed material.
Automatic material removal may not be available for some NC sequence types. In this
case, you are brought directly into creating a feature.
For Volume and Local milling, the amount of material removed using the
Automatic option is defined by the milling volume and depends on the
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameter value. All material inside the volume will
be removed, with the offset equal to the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW value left on
the sides and bottom.
The following illustration shows the tool path and automatic material
removal for Conventional surface milling.
59
Automatic material removal for Profile milling is defined by the tool
geometry and the trajectory of the last profiling pass, as shown in the next
illustartion.
NUM_PROF_PASSES 2
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
Automatic material removal for Face milling removes all material above the
surface(s) selected for facing.
For Area and Groove turning, the Automatic option will remove material
from the whole area of the cut (minus PROF_STOCK_ALLOW). Convex
corners can be either straight or filleted, depending on the
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE parameter value.
60
not have control over the direction of material removal extensions; if they do
not work for your Turn Profile, create the material removal feature using the
Construct option.
The following illustration shows the default material removal extensions for
Profile turning.
X X X
Z Z Z
X X X
Z Z Z
Automatic material removal is available for No Core Wire EDM only. It is not
applicable for contouring NC sequences.
Tooling
61
• Tool Type—One of the predefined tool types available in Pro/NC. Tool types correspond
to the types of NC sequences performed in the workcell; the tool type, in turn, defines the
tool’s cross-section and, therefore, the set of parameters you have to specify for the tool.
• Geometry parameters—Parameters that specify all the dimensions of the tool. These
dimension values are used in calculating the tool path and material removed, and should
accurately reflect the actual tool dimensions and length units. Some of the Geometry
parameters are required to define the tool’s cross-section, others are optional. The actual
parameter names in this category depend on the Tool Type.
Þ Length units of the tool (Length_Units). The default length units of a tool are those
of the workpiece. If you change the Length_Units, this will affect the actual tool
dimensions.
Þ Optional parameters used when referencing MDB files: number of teeth (for milling
tools only) and tool material. If you do not set these parameters, you will be
prompted for information at the time of MDB file lookup.
Þ Optional comments (Tool_Comment): a text string that will be stored along with the
tool parameters and output with the tool table. If you want the tool table to show a
comment different than the Tool_Comment parameter string, use Edit > Table
Comments in the Tool Setup dialog box, and type in a new comment string.
When you set up the tooling for a workcell or specify a tool to be used for an
NC sequence, the system displays the Tool Setup dialog box. This dialog box
enables you to add, modify, and delete the tools, as well as view all the tools
currently defined for the workcell.
Note: When you select a Tool Table entry in the upper portion of the Tool Setup dialog
box, the system updates the lower portion to display this tool’s parameters and section
sketch.
62
Pocket ID Offset Comments
------------------------------------------
1 BALL1
2 FLAT1 4 flat end mill
LOADTL / 1
LOADTL / 2, OSETNO, 4
Comments are output with the Tool Table when you use PPRINT. To add
comments to a tool, enter them in the Tool_Comment field under the
Advanced tab.
The tool name (Tool_ID) is used throughout Pro/NC to identify the tool. You
can store the tool’s parameters in a text file and then retrieve it to use in a
different manufacturing process. Tool_ID serves as the name for this
parameter file, therefore, all the operating system’s restrictions for file names
apply to Tool_ID (for example, it cannot contain spaces or periods). The name
must be less than thirty-two alpha-numeric characters long.
Note: The tool name can not contain hyphens (“-). Underscores (“_), however, can be
used.
Tool Type
When you define a tool within a workcell, tool types available for selection are
consistent with the types of NC sequences performed in the workcell. For
example, if you have a Mill type workcell, the tool type selection includes
milling and holemaking tools, but no turning. If you set up a tool at the time
of creating an NC sequence, the tool type selection will be limited to those
applicable for the current NC sequence type. For example, if you are creating
a Standard Drill NC sequence, the tool types available for selection will
include DRILLING, MILLING, and so on, while for a Tap NC sequence the
only tool type available will be TAPPING.
1. Choose Tooling from the MFG SETUP menu and select the name of the workcell where
you want to set up the tooling. Or, at the time of creating or modifying a workcell, you
can choose Tooling from the CELL SETUP menu to set up tooling for this workcell.
Another way to access tooling setup is to click the Tool Setup icon in the
Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
2. The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, with all the tools defined for the current
workcell listed in the Tool Table section.
63
3. Add new tools or modify the existing ones using any combination of techniques described
below.
4. Choose File > Done to exit the Tool Setup dialog box.
2. The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, with all the tools defined for the current
workcell listed in the Tool Table section.
3. Select an existing tool in the Tool Table, modify it if necessary, or create a new tool using
the techniques described below.
4. Choose File > Done to exit the Tool Setup dialog box.
You can set up tools in advance, as part of the manufacturing database setup,
and then select the appropriate tool when performing an NC sequence, or
create tools on the fly at the time of defining an NC sequence. Whenever you
access the Tooling functionality, the system displays the Tool Setup dialog
box, which enables you to create, modify, and delete tools, as well as to review
the tools already defined for the workcell.
2. The system fills in the fields in the dialog box with the default values:
Þ Pocket number is incremented by 1 with respect to the last one currently in the
Tool Table.
Þ Offset is blank.
Þ Tool Type is the first one in the list of the currently applicable tool types.
64
Þ Parameters that appear under the Geometry and Advanced tabs are defined by
the Tool Type. Required parameter fields contain a system-supplied default value,
optional parameters have a default value of dash (-).
3. If you want to set up a tool of a different type, click on the arrow next to the Tool Type
parameter and select the appropriate value. The system displays the parameter names
and default values for the new Tool Type.
5. Click Preview to display the tool section based on the current parameter values.
Tool Parameters
Each type of tool has a set of parameters that describe the geometry of the
tool. The parameters for each type of tool are listed in a tool parameters table
for each tool type and are explained in the illustrations that follow. The bold
cross (+) shown in these pictures for each type of tool indicates the default
tool control point, that is, the point for which the tool path will be calculated.
Nose_R • •
adius
Tool_W • •
idth
Side_W •
idth
Length • •
Side_A • •
ngle
End_A • •
ngle
Gauge_ • •
X_Leng
th
Gauge_ • •
Z_Leng
65
th
Tool_M • •
aterial
Holder_ •
Type
Turning Tools
Side Width
Tool Width
Tool Width
Length Length
Cut • • • • • •
ter
_Di
am
Cor • • • • •
ner
_Ra
diu
s
Cut • •
ter
66
_Wi
dth
Sha • • •
nk_
Dia
m
Len • • • • • •
gth
Ins •
ert
_C
ut_
Wi
dth
Ins •
ert
_Le
ngt
h
En •
d_
Off
set
Sid • • •
e_A
ngl
e
Cut •
_Le
ngt
h
Ga • •
uge
_X_
Len
gth
Ga • • • •
uge
_Z_
Len
gth
Nu • • • •
m_
Of_
Tee
67
th
Too • • •
l_M
ate
rial
Milling Tools
Side
Angle **
Length
** If you specify a Side_Angle other than a dash (-), the tool will
not be automatically degouged when creating the NC
sequences. Use Taper Mill tools for automatic degouging.
68
Shank Diam Shank Diam
Cutter Diam
Length Length
Cutter Width
Corner
Length Radius Corner
Length Radius
Cutter Width
Shank
Cutter Diam
69
Length
45
Cutter
Width
d*
70
Taper Mills With No Cut_Length
Side
Side Side
Angle
Angle Angle
Cutter
Corner Diam
Radius Cutter Diam
* If the Cut_Length value is a dash (-), the length of the tapered portion is
determined by the combination of Cutter_Diam, Side_Angle, and Shank_Diam
parameter values.
Le ng t h Length Length
Side Side
Si de Cut Angle Angle
Length Cut Cut
An gl e
Length Length
Cutter Diam
Corner Radius 0 Cutter Diam Corner Radius -
Flat Taper Mill Bullnose Taper Ball Taper Mill
Mill
71
Cutter Diam Cutter Diam* Cutter Diam
d d d
Side
Angle
Length Length Length
1/2
Length
Corner Radius
0 <= r <= d/2 Contouring
Auxiliary
Groove (Wire EDM)
Auxiliary Contouring
Cutter_Diam • •
Length • •
Drill_Diameter •
Body_Diameter •
Length • • • • • • •
Chamfer_Length •
Drill_Length •
Insert_Length •
Tip_Offset •
Gauge_Offset •
72
Cutting_Offset •
Side_Angle •
Point_Angle • • •
Csink_Angle • •
Gauge_X_Length • • • • • • •
Gauge_Z_Length • • • • • • •
Tool_Material • • • • • • •
Point
Angle
Length Length Length
Holemaking Tools—Countersink
Point
Angle Length
Length
Gauge
Offset
Point
Angle
Point_Diameter = 0 Point Diameter
Regular Truncated
73
Body Diameter
Cutter Diam
Cutting
Offset
Length
Length
Csink
Angle
Insert
Length Cutter Diam / 2
Bore Back Spotting
Cutter Diam
Side
Angle Length
Side
Length Csink Drill Length
Angle Angle
Point Angle
Cutter Diam Drill Diameter
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Tool Parameters File.
The search starts in your current working directory. If you have set the
pro_mf_tprm_directory or pro_library_dir by using the appropriate configuration options,
you can quickly jump to these directories by clicking the button in the top-right corner of
the browser window.
By default, the browser displays files with the “.tpm extension. If you have pre-Release
12.0 tool files with the extension “.tprm, you can display them in the browser window by
clicking the arrow next to the Type field and selecting *.tprm.
3. Select a file name from the browser window and click Open.
4. The system searches the Tool Table for the Tool_ID of the tool being retrieved:
Þ If not found, the system appends the tool at the end of the Tool Table. The Pocket
number is incremented by 1 with respect to the last one currently in the Tool Table.
The Offset field is left blank.
74
Þ If the system finds a tool in the current Tool Table that has the same name and the
same parameters as the one being retrieved, it highlights the appropriate Tool Table
entry and displays its parameter values and section sketch.
Þ If the name belongs to a tool that already exists in your manufacturing process but
has a different set of parameters, the system issues a warning and queries you if you
want to overwrite an existing tool. If you confirm, it highlights the appropriate Tool
Table entry and displays the tool’s new parameter values and section sketch.
Note: When you retrieve a tool parameters file, its type must correspond to the Tool
Type value in the Tool Setup dialog box; otherwise, the system will issue an error
message and the tool will not be retrieved.
You can create your own tool library, where all the tool parameter files are to
be stored. This way, the tools are available to all users for retrieval into their
manufacturing processes, for modifying, or for setting up new tools. The
configuration file option to use is:
pro_mf_tprm_dir pathname
Always enter in the configuration file the complete pathname to the tool
library to avoid problems when working in different directories with
Pro/ENGINEER. Example:
pro_mf_tprm_dir /usr/users/toolcrib
1. When defining a Trajectory Milling or Trajectory Turning NC sequence, check off the
Tool option in the SEQ SETUP menu.
3. The system increments the Pocket number by 1 with respect to the last one currently in
the Tool Table and generates a default name for the tool. The Offset field is left blank.
5. Click Sketcher.
6. The system invokes the Sketcher functionality and brings up a new subwindow. Sketch
the tool section.
75
To Modify an Existing Tool
2. The system updates the lower portion of the Tool Setup dialog box to display this tool’s
parameters and section sketch.
4. Click Preview to display the tool’s section based on the new parameter values.
To Delete a Tool
1. Select the tool you want to save by highlighting the appropriate Tool Table entry.
3. The system saves the tool parameters in a text file called “tool_id.tpm. If you set the
“pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option, described below, the file is stored in the library
directory; otherwise, in the current working directory.
You can save tool parameters in the form of ASCII text files and then reuse
these tools in a different manufacturing process without having to set them
up from scratch. When you save a tool, the system stores its type and
parameter values in a text file named “tool_id.tpm, where tool_id is the tool
name (Tool_ID).
You can later retrieve a tool parameter file into a different manufacturing
process.
Note: Prior to Release 12.0, the default extension for the tool parameter files used to be
“.tprm. Old files with this extension will be recognized by the system as tool parameter
files, that is, they will be retrievable. Whenever a tool parameter file is stored, however,
it will now have the “.tpm extension.
76
TOOL_ID BALL125
TOOL_TYPE MILLING
LENGTH_UNITS INCH
CUTTER_DIAM 1.25
CORNER_RADIUS 0.625
SIDE_ANGLE -
LENGTH 4
NUM_OF_TEETH -
TOOL_MATERIAL -
GAUGE_X_LENGTH -
GAUGE_Z_LENGTH -
TOOL_COMMENT -
Note that tool parameter files do not contain Pocket number and Offset
information. You have to specify these in context of the workcell when you set
up the tooling or create an NC sequence.
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Std Size (this option is available only
for the following tool types: DRILLING, CENTER-DRILLING, and TAPPING).
Standard Tools
You can configure your own standard size tool database. Set the
configuration file option “pro_mf_tprm_dir to a local directory. Under this
directory create a sub-directory “drills which will contain “.tpm files for
drilling, a subdirectory “center_drills which will contain “.tpm files for center
drilling, and a subdirectory “taps containing tap tool files.
77
set "pro_mf_tprm_dir /common/mfg_tools"
/common/mfg_tools
Note: Do not confuse the standard tool parameter files with the standard library of solid
tools (available with Pro/LIBRARY license).
However, you can enhance the CL data display and interactively check for
interference by showing a “real tool. In order to do this, design your tool as a
regular Pro/ENGINEER model (part or assembly), and then establish
associativity between this model’s dimensions and Pro/NC tool parameters.
When such a tool is used, you will have the option to display the default
section or the real tool model. This is also another way to create your tool
library.
Standard Library
If you have an appropriate license, you can also use the standard tool library
of solid tools. It contains common tools (mills, taps, and drills) of sizes
corresponding to ANSI standards. For more information, refer to the
TOOLING LIBRARY Catalog.
1. Create a new Pro/ENGINEER model of type Part, give it the name of the tool. Reproduce
the tool geometry by using the appropriate construction features (protrusions, cuts, and
so on).
2. Create a coordinate system to represent the tool origin, i. e., the tool control point. This is
the point that will follow the tool path computed for the NC sequence. Make sure the Z-
axis of the coordinate system is pointing in the upward direction (into the tool) for
Milling and Holemaking tools; for Turning, the axes of the tool coordinate system must
78
be oriented so that they will coincide with the directions of the NC sequence coordinate
system’s axes when the tool is in default orientation. Change the coordinate system’s
name to “TIP (use Set Up, Name).
3. Establish associativity between the model’s dimensions and tool’s parameters. There are
two ways to do this:
Þ Add parameters to the model with the names exactly corresponding to the tool
parameter names. This method is convenient when you want to define the tool
parameters directly in the tool assembly (for example, Cutter_Diam for an insert
drill vs. a drill bit).
Notes:
Origin coordinate
system
Dimension symbols
correspond to tool
parameter names.
RCORNER_RADIUS
79
To Assign Tool Material and Number of Teeth
Tool material and number of teeth can be set up while creating a model.
Then, when the tool model is retrieved into a manufacturing process, the tool
parameters Num_Of_Teeth and Tool_Material will be initialized, which will
simplify the use of Machinability Database files.
• To set up material, choose Set Up from the PART menu, then choose Material, and
assign material to the tool model.
To use a tool model in Pro/NC, you have to retrieve the tool using the Open
Tool Library option. The system will look up the tool model and read
appropriate dimension values into the tool parameter file. When displaying
CL data, you will have an option to display the tool model, or a default tool.
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Tool Library.
Note: Make sure to select the correct tool type from the Tool Type drop-down list in the
dialog box before retrieving a solid tool model.
Þ By Copy—The tool information will be copied into the manufacturing model. The
tool parameters for the NC sequence can be modified using the Tool Setup dialog
box; the library model will not be changed. If the library model is later modified, it
will not affect this NC sequence.
4. The system reads in the tool parameters from the model (the model name is used as
Tool_ID).
Tool Display
80
If a tool model was used for creating an NC sequence, then whenever you
display the path and tool, two additional options will appear:
• No Model—Display the default tool section based on the tool parameter values.
Note: If the TIP coordinate system is missing in the model, the system will
issue an error message and display the default tool. If multiple coordinate
systems named TIP are found in the tool model, a warning will be issued; the
tool origin will be selected by the same rules as the tool parameters are
extracted from a tool assembly (for example, the assembly coordinate system
takes precedence).
If an assembly is used as a tool model, the system will search the assembly
first, and then all the component parts in the same order as they were
assembled (that is, the first component will be searched first), for the tool
parameters and origin data. Once a parameter is set, all values for the same
parameter found later will be ignored. In other words, the top-level assembly
parameters take precedence over component parameters, and after that the
precedence is determined by the order of assembly.
If, after all components are searched, some of the tool parameters are
missing, an error message will appear and you will be asked to select another
tool.
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Tool Library > Use Outline (this
option is available only for the tool types TURNING and TURN-GROOVING).
3. The system reads in the model parameters and geometry, and generates the tool outline
by projecting the external profile of all components of the tool model to the XZ plane of
the TIP coordinate system. When creating an NC sequence using this tool, the system
will use the tool outline for material removal and degouging purposes, as described
above.
Note: If you have trouble generating tool path when using a solid tool outline, try
increasing the value of the NC sequence parameter BACK_CLEAR_ANGLE.
81
Solid Tool Capabilities in Turning
Generally, a tool model is used for visual purposes only. However, in Turning
you have an option to use the tool model geometry for calculating the
automatic material removal and degouging the tool path. This functionality
allows you to customize the tool outline and designate the cutting edges that
correspond to your particular tool/holder combinations.
When you specify that you want to use the tool outline, the system will use
the whole tool profile in computing the tool path. This option is similar to
using a tool model By Reference, because you can modify the tool section
only by modification of the tool model geometry.
The tool model for this functionality is set up according to the general rules of
setting up a solid tool model:
• It must contain a coordinate system named “TIP to indicate the control point location.
• The only geometric parameter you have to define for the tool model is Nose_Radius,
required for calculating material removal. You can define this parameter by either using
a model parameter or a dimension symbol. You can also add parameters to the model to
provide values for non-geometric parameters (such as Tool_Comment or
Gauge_X_Length). If an assembly is used as a tool model, you can use both Part and
Assembly parameters for this purpose, as before. Unlike regular Tool Model
functionality, you do not have to define geometric parameters (such as Tool_Width,
Length); the tool outline will be based directly on the tool model geometry.
Geometry of the tool will be defined by projecting the external profile of all
components of the tool model to the XZ plane of the TIP coordinate system.
This projected tool contour will be used to remove material and also to
degouge against the tool contour.
If the tool model is an assembly, you can indicate which portion of the tool
will actually be used to remove material using the Yes_No type parameter
“solid_tool_cutting at the part level. If this parameter is set to “yes for a
certain part in the tool assembly, the outline of this part will be used as the
cutting edges.
All other edges in the assembly will be assumed to be non-cutting. You can
specify a clearance value, to avoid contact between non-cutting tool geometry
and the workpiece material, using the NC sequence parameter
TOOL_CLEARANCE. This parameter designates how close the non-cutting
edges will be allowed to approach workpiece material.
82
Tool assembly
If you want to use a tool model By Reference, you generally have to define all
the parameters required by Pro/NC for the appropriate tool type. In
Holemaking, however, you may want to use customized tools that are not
easily described by the tool section parameters of either of the Holemaking
tool types. Pro/NC allows you to use a simplified parameters’ set for a solid
Holemaking tool.
• Cutter_Diam—The cutter diameter of the tool, used for Auto depth computations.
• Tip_Offset—The distance from the tool control point (tip) to the shoulder (where
Cutter_Diam starts).
• Length
When you retrieve a Holemaking tool model, if the system finds the
Tip_Offset parameter it will use this simplified parameters’ set for tool
representation. Therefore, when defining a solid model for a Holemaking tool,
83
you can specify just the parameters listed above, and the TIP coordinate
system, and use this model By Reference for Holemaking NC sequences.
Dimension symbols
correspond to tool
parameter names.
Manufacturing Parameters
Note: You can also access the manufacturing parameters for the current NC sequence by
clicking the Manufacturing Parameters icon in the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar. This is
equivalent to selecting Seq Setup, Parameters, Set. The Param Tree dialog box will
appear.
You can either set all the parameters for an NC sequence manually, one-by-
one, or initialize the parameters file from database.
• If a site corresponding to the type of the NC sequence has been activated (whether by
associating it to the workcell or by using the Activate option), it will be automatically used
to initialize the parameters. You can retrieve parameters of another site appropriate for
the current NC sequence using the Site option in the MFG PARAMS menu. Note that
retrieving site parameters does not activate the site for subsequent NC sequences.
84
• Retrieve an existing NC sequence specific parameters file. Choose Retrieve from the
MFG PARAMS menu, then choose Param Files and select a file name from the DATA
FILES menu. This menu will contain all the appropriate type files in the current
directory, or in the library directory, if set. If the file resides in another directory, select
Names and enter path and name for the file to be retrieved. You can also enter a
question mark (?) after selecting Names, which will open the browser window. The
search will be started in the “pro_mf_param_dir directory, if set; otherwise, in your
current working directory.
Note: If the retrieved file contains some parameters inapplicable for the current NC
sequence, these parameters will be listed in the Information Window.
• Retrieve the set of parameters used for a previous NC sequence. The Use Prev option is
only available after at least one NC sequence has been created.
• For a milling, turning, or holemaking NC sequence, feed and speed parameters can be
initialized using the Machinability Database (MDB) files. The rest of the parameters will
have to be filled in using the Set option.
Note: You can use the Set option at any time to modify the parameter values.
Parameter Inheritance
All levels of manufacturing features automatically inherit their parameters
from an upper-level feature, unless you explicitly modify (customize) a
parameter at the current level. That is, Tool Motions inherit their parameters
from the parent NC sequence, while NC sequences may (under certain
circumstances) inherit their parameters from sites.
The following are the rules for the NC sequence parameter inheritance:
• If, at the time of creating an NC sequence, a site of appropriate type is associated with
the current workcell, the NC sequence will inherit the parameters of this site. This is
called implicit inheritance. If you later modify the parameters of the site, the NC
sequence parameter values will update accordingly. Also, if you later replace the
associated site with another one (of the same type) the NC sequence parameters will
update to the values in the new site associated with the workcell.
Note: If you disassociate a site from the workcell (without replacing it with another site
of the same type), existing NC sequences that implicitly inherit their parameters from
this site will keep the inheritance link.
• If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using a site other than the one associated
with the workcell (by activating another site or by using the Site option in the MFG
PARAMS menu), then the NC sequence will inherit the parameters of this site. This is
called explicit inheritance. If you later modify the parameters of the site, the NC
sequence parameter values will update accordingly. However, changing the site
associated with the workcell, or the workcell itself, will not affect the parameters of this
NC sequence.
• If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using the Retrieve option in the MFG
PARAMS menu, these parameters will be marked as customized.
85
• If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using the Use Prev option in the MFG
PARAMS menu, and the previous NC sequence inherits its parameters from a site, the
current NC sequence will not automatically inherit from the same site. The following
situations are possible:
Þ If both the previous and the current NC sequence implicitly inherit from the same
site, the inherited (non-customized) parameters used from the previous NC sequence
will also be marked as inherited in the current NC sequence.
Þ If the previous NC sequence explicitly inherits from a site, and you want the new NC
sequence inherit from the same site, use the Site option first to initialize the NC
sequence parameters, then use the Use Prev option. In this case, all the inherited
parameters used from the previous NC sequence will also be marked as inherited in
the current NC sequence.
Þ If the previous and current NC sequences inherit from different sites, or if one of
them does not have an inheritance source, then all the parameters used from the
previous NC sequence will be marked as customized.
• If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using an MDB file, these parameters will be
marked as customized.
• If you modify parameter values using the Set option in the MFG PARAMS menu, these
parameters will be marked as customized.
Parameters marked as inherited will automatically update all the way down
if you change a parameter value at the upper level. However, if you have
explicitly modified a parameter value at a certain level, this parameter will
be marked as customized and will not change when you modify parameters at
an upper level. Customized parameters can also be inherited by the lower-
level features. In other words, if you modify CUT_FEED at the NC sequence
level, it will no longer change if you later modify CUT_FEED in the parent
site file, but the Automatic Cut motion CUT_FEED will update to the new
NC sequence value (unless you explicitly customize it at the Tool Motion
level, too).
The Set option allows you to set or modify parameters for the NC sequence. If
you have initialized the parameters, all or some of the parameters values will
86
be filled out. You can then modify them to suit this specific NC sequence. If it
is a new file, you will have to replace every “-1 with a value.
Note: Only parameters visible at the NC sequence level will appear for modification. Use
the Visibility option to modify the parameters’ visibility.
2. A Param Tree dialog box appears with a “simplified set of parameters, corresponding to
the NC sequence type. These parameters are the most commonly modified; they provide
a quick and simple way of creating and modifying the tool path.
If you want to modify a parameter not in the Simplified set, press the Advanced button
in the upper-right corner of the dialog box (this button allows you to toggle between the
Advanced and Simplified parameters’ presentations). The complete set of NC sequence
parameters is displayed in the Param Tree dialog box. They are listed under the
following categories, or branches:
Þ Feeds—Feed parameters.
Þ Cut Options—Parameters that define the type of the cut, such as scan type, cycle
type.
Þ Entry/Exit—Parameters that define the entry and exit path for the tool, such as
plunge angle, lead-in, approach and exit path.
3. To modify a parameter, use the mouse to highlight the cell with the parameter value.
The value will appear in the input panel at the top of the dialog box. Then, depending on
the parameter type, do the following:
Þ When modifying a parameter that has a numeric value, type in a new value and
press<CR>.
You can enter a mathematical expression, which may contain other parameters in
the same NC sequence, or tool parameters. For example, if you enter:
STEP_OVER CUTTER_DIAM / 2
the STEP_OVER distance will be based on the cutter diameter of the current tool (if
the tool is later changed, STEP_OVER will also be updated).
87
You can also include model dimension symbols (in assembly format, for example,
d12:0) and user-defined parameters which are already defined in relations for the
model.
When you enter a relation in the input panel, the system evaluates the relation and
places the value in the appropriate cell. If you later highlight this cell for
modification, the input panel will display the relation used.
Þ When modifying a parameter that has a string value, such as SCAN_TYPE, press
the down arrow to the right of the input panel (or press <F4>). A drop-down list will
appear with all possible values for this parameter. Scroll to the value you want (to
display it in the input panel), then press <CR>.
4. The Edit button in the menu bar of the dialog box allows you to copy a parameter value
(in a cell, not in the input box) and then paste it into other cells, or in all cells within a
row. This is especially helpful when modifying parameters of an NC sequence which has
multiple Automatic Cut motions.
6. Choose Save from the MFG PARAMS menu if you want to save this file to disk (you will
have to save the parameters if you want to retrieve them for another NC sequence), and
enter a file name. The file will be saved with a file extension corresponding to the type of
NC sequence you are creating. These are:
.mil—Milling NC sequences
.trn—Turning NC sequences
.drl—Holemaking NC sequences
.aux—Auxiliary NC sequences
Notes:
Þ You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this means
that the default value is not set by the system).
Þ Some parameters may have a value of dash (-), that is, “ignore. This means that the
parameter will not be used. Usually a system default or another parameter will be
88
used instead. The “- value is only acceptable for those parameters that have it as a
default.
Þ Length units for NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as the
units of the workpiece. If you change the workpiece units using the Same Size
option (so that the dimension values are changed), the system also scales all the
appropriate parameters of the currently existing NC sequences.
Names
MACH_NAME
MACH_ID
NCL_FILE
The default name of the CL file for the NC sequence. The default is a dash (-),
in which case the system generates a default name.
PRE_MACHINING_FILE
Enter name of the file you want to be included at the very beginning of the
CL file. The file must be located in your current working directory and have
extension “.ncl. The default is a dash (-), that is, none.
POST_MACHINING_FILE
Enter name of the file you want to be included at the very end of the CL file.
The file must be located in your current working directory and have
extension “.ncl. The default is a dash (-), that is, none.
Cut Param
TOLERANCE
The tool path approximates curved geometry by moving in small straight line
increments, as shown in the following drawing. The maximum distance that
the straight line path deviates from the curved geometry is set by
TOLERANCE. The default TOLERANCE is 0.001" (0.025 mm).
89
Design surface
TOLERANCE
Machined
surface
Feed
CUT_FEED
The feed rate used for cutting motion. The default CUT_FEED is not set
(displayed as “–1).
CUT_UNITS
RETRACT_FEED
The rate at which the tool moves away from the workpiece. The default
RETRACT_FEED is a dash (-), in which case the CUT_FEED will be used.
RETRACT_UNITS
FREE_FEED
The feed rate used for rapid traverse (RETRACT_UNITS are used for rapid
feed rate units). The default FREE_FEED is a dash (-), in which case the
RAPID command will be output to the CL file. The same happens if
FREE_FEED is set to 0.
PLUNGE_FEED
The rate at which the tool approaches and plunges into the workpiece (in
Milling and Turning). The default PLUNGE_FEED is a dash (-), in which
case the CUT_FEED will be used.
PLUNGE_UNITS
Machine
LINTOL
90
Allows you to specify the linear tolerance interpolation used by post-
processor, for multi-axis milling and Mill/Turn rotary linearization. Outputs
the “LINTOL / r statement at the beginning of the CL file. The default
LINTOL is a dash (-), in which case the LINTOL statement will not be
output.
CIRC_INTERPOLATION
Specifies the format in which the tool motion along an arc or circle will be
output to the CL file. The options are:
• ARC_ONLY (default)—Use this format for machines that have full circular interpolation.
Only the CIRCLE statement and the minimum number of points necessary for post-
processing will be output to the CL file. The number of points is defined by the
NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS parameter.
Note: The CIRC_INTERPOLATION parameter specifies only the format for CL data
output. The actual tool path along curved geometry is always generated according to the
TOLERANCE parameter value, as described above.
NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS
COOLANT_OPTION
COOLANT_PRESSURE
COORDINATE_OUTPUT
FIXT_OFFSET_REG
Allows you to specify the fixture transformation offset register used on your
machine. The default FIXT_OFFSET_REG is a dash (-), that is, none. If you
91
specify another value (“n) for FIXT_OFFSET_REG, the “SET / OFSETL, n
and “SET / OFSETL, OFF statements will be output.
END_STOP_CONDITION
Specifies the stop command to be issued at the end of the CL data output for
an NC sequence:
• GOHOME—The GOHOME command will be issued. If you specify a Home point for the
operation, the tool appears in the Home location. If you do not specify the Home point,
the system outputs the GOHOME command anyway, but it does not move the tool, and
issues a warning.
Entry/Exit
START_MOTION
Defines how the tool will move from the Start point of the NC sequence to the
beginning of the cut motion. If you do not specify the Start point (using the
Start option in the SEQ SETUP menu), this parameter will be ignored. The
values are:
DIRECT (default)—The approach motion will be a straight line from the Start point of
the NC sequence to the start of the cut.
Z_FIRST—The tool will first move in the direction parallel to the z-axis of the NC
Sequence coordinate system, then move in the direction normal to the z-axis and start
cutting.
Z_LAST—The tool will first move in the direction normal to the z-axis of the NC
Sequence coordinate system, then move along the z-axis and start cutting.
END_MOTION
Defines how the tool will move from the end of the cut to the End point of the
NC sequence. If you do not specify the End point (using the End option in the
SEQ SETUP menu), this parameter will be ignored. The values are:
• DIRECT (default)—The exit motion will be a straight line from the end of the cut to the
End point of the NC sequence.
• Z_FIRST—The tool will first move in the direction parallel to the z-axis of the NC
Sequence coordinate system until it reaches the Z coordinate of the End point, then move
to the End point in the direction normal to the z-axis.
92
• Z_LAST—The tool will first move in the direction normal to the z-axis until it reaches
the XY coordinates of the End point, then move to the End point along the z-axis.
Milling Parameters
The following parameters are specific to milling NC sequences. They are
listed under a heading corresponding to the name of the branch when you set
up the parameters.
Notes:
Þ You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this means
that the default value is not set by the system).
Þ Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as the
units of the workpiece.
Cut Option
SCAN_TYPE
For Volume milling, refers to the way a milling tool scans the horizontal
cross-section of a milling volume and avoids islands. The options are:
• TYPE_2—The tool continuously machines the volume without retract, moving around
the islands upon encountering them.
• TYPE_3—The tool removes material from continuous zones defined by the island
geometry, machining them in turn and moving around the islands. Upon completing one
zone, the tool may retract to mill the remaining zones. It is recommended that
ROUGH_OPTION for TYPE_3 is set to ROUGH_&_PROF.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass it
retracts and returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in the
same direction. Avoiding islands is the same as in TYPE_1.
93
• TYPE_1_CONNECT—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass
it retracts, rapids back to the start point of the current pass, plunges, and then moves to
the start of the next pass. If there is an adjacent wall at the start of the cutting passes,
the connection motion follows the profile of the wall to avoid gouging.
The following illustration shows the scan types for Volume milling.
TYPE_1 TYPE_SPIR
AL
TYPE_2 TYPE_3
TYPE_ONE_DIR TYPE_1_CONNECT
• TYPE_3—If selected surfaces are divided into zones, the tool will completely machine one
zone before moving to the next.
• TYPE_2—The tool continuously machines the selected surfaces, moving around the
islands upon encountering them.
94
• TYPE_3—If selected surfaces are divided into zones, the tool will completely machine one
zone before moving to the next.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass it
will retract and return to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in the
same direction.
• TYPE_1—The tool moves back and forth along the generated cut lines.
• TYPE_3—If selected surfaces are divided into zones, the tool will completely machine one
zone before moving to the next.
• TYPE_SPIRAL—The tool makes the first cutting pass halfway between the start and end
cutlines. The following passes will be made alternately to the right and to the left of the
first pass.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass it
retracts and returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in the
same direction.
For Projected Cuts Surface milling, the scan types are the same as for Volume
milling (with the exception of TYPE_1_CONNECT and CONSTANT_LOAD).
They refer to the way the flat pattern of the tool path is created.
• TYPE_1—The tool moves back and forth across the surfaces being machined.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass it
retracts and returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in the
same direction.
• TYPE_HELICAL—The tool moves along a helix. Valid for a closed loop of surfaces only.
95
For Face milling:
• TYPE_1—The tool makes parallel cutting passes, moving back and forth along the
selected face. If the selected face consists of multiple zones, the tool ignores them and
moves across the whole length of the workpiece.
• TYPE_3—If the selected face consists of multiple zones, the tool machines one zone,
moving back and forth in parallel cutting passes, then retracts and moves to the next
zone.
• TYPE_SPIRAL—The tool makes the first cutting pass in the middle of the surface. The
following passes will be made alternately to the right and to the left of the first pass.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass it
retracts and returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in the
same direction.
TYPE_1 TYPE_3
For Pocketing, the scan types are the same as for Volume milling (with the
exception of TYPE_1_CONNECT and CONSTANT_LOAD). They refer to the
way the tool scans the bottom of the pocket.
For Plunge milling, you can not change the scan type when the tool has
Insert_Width smaller than Cutter_Diam/2. For a regular flat tool the
following scan types are available:
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—Cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass the tool
returns to the opposite side of the region, to start the next cut in the same direction.
ROUGH_OPTION
96
• ROUGH_&_PROF—Creates an NC sequence that rough cuts the milling volume, then
profiles the volume surfaces.
• PROF_&_ROUGH—Profiles the volume surfaces first, then rough cuts the volume.
• POCKETING—Profiles the walls of the volume and finish mills all the planar surfaces
inside the volume that are parallel to the retract plane (island tops and bottom of the
volume). The open edges of the planar faces are milled according to the value of the
POCKET_EXTEND parameter.
• FACES_ONLY—Finish mills only the planar surfaces inside the volume that are parallel
to the retract plane (island tops and bottom of the volume). The open edges of the planar
faces are milled according to the value of the POCKET_EXTEND parameter.
ROUGH_ONLY PROF_ONLY
ROUGH_&_PROF PROF_&_ROUGH
97
ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP with
ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP
TYPE_3
with TYPE_ONE_DIR
POCKET_EXTEND
Defines the positioning of the tool when machining the open edges of the
planar faces inside a volume (for example, island tops). The values are:
• TOOL_ON (default)—The tool stops when its center touches the boundary of the face.
• TOOL_TO—The tool stops when its leading edge touches the boundary of the face.
• TOOL_PAST—The tool stops when its heel touches the boundary of the face.
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
In Volume milling, if set to YES, confines the milling volume to that inside
the workpiece boundaries, in order to avoid air machining. If set to NO
(default), trimming will be done only in the Z direction.
Note: When you intentionally offset or sketch the volume past the workpiece boundaries
(as shown in the following illustration), make sure to set this parameter to NO.
98
Milling
volume
Specify TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
NO to make the offset work.
In 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface and Face milling, if set to YES (the default is
NO), makes the tool machine one zone of the workpiece before going to the
next. The actual tool path depends on the SCAN_TYPE parameter value. The
following illustration shows Face milling with SCAN_TYPE set to
TYPE_ONE_DIR.
CUT_DIRECTION
For Volume milling, allows you to reverse direction of tool motion within a
slice. The values are STANDARD and REVERSE.
STEPOVER_ADJUST
If set to YES (the default), adjusts the step-over distance (defined by the
STEP_OVER and NUMBER_PASSES parameters) to make both the
beginning and the end of the cutter path for one pass close to the edges. The
adjusted step-over distance does not exceed the original one. If set to NO, the
step-over distance will be exactly as defined by the combination of the
STEP_OVER and NUMBER_PASSES parameters.
99
STEPOVER_ADJUST
NO YES
CUT_TYPE
For Local milling, there is an additional option NONE, which makes the tool
move back and forth when cleaning up material.
For Profile milling, the ZIG_ZAG option can be used when profiling open
contours. It provides lace-type connection between slices, while CLIMB and
UPCUT make the tool retract and rapidly traverse to the beginning of the
next slice.
CUT_TYPE
CLIMB ZIG_ZAG
100
direction of machining the surface. The LACE_OPTION parameter must be
set to NO.
FIX_SKIPPED_SLICES
LACE_OPTION
Controls whether the tool retracts at the end of a pass on a surface mill (as
shown in the following illustration). The default (NO) causes the tool to
retract after each pass, so that all cuts are in the same direction.
LINE_CONNECT, CURVE_CONNECT, and ARC_CONNECT cause the tool
not to retract.
Note: If you set LACE_OPTION to LINE_CONNECT for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface
milling, the system automatically degouges connecting motions and switches to
CURVE_CONNECT if LINE_CONNECT causes gouging. In 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences,
if LINE_CONNECT causes gouging, the tool will retract. To avoid such retracts, use
CURVE_CONNECT.
101
LACE_OPTION NO LACE_OPTION LINE_CONNECT
ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES
If set to NO, eliminates negative Z moves for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface
milling NC sequences. The default is YES. If you set
ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES to NO, you have to also set SCAN_TYPE to
TYPE_1 and LACE_OPTION to NO.
ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES NO
RETRACT_OPTION
Note: If Approach or Exit path is specified for each slice using Build Cut, the
RETRACT_OPTION parameter will be ignored.
GOUGE_AVOID_OPTION
In Swarf milling, specifies whether the tool will retract to avoid gouging:
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE
102
For 3-Axis Profiling: TIP_&_SIDES (the default) will make the system detect
undercuts when degouging the tool path. If you want to be able to machine an
undercut, set GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE to TIP_ONLY.
For 5-Axis Profiling: if set to TIP_&_SIDES, the system degouges with
respect to the whole tool (as defined by the tool parameters). The tool will
retract if an undercut is detected. The default is TIP_ONLY, in which case
the system does not detect undercuts.
REMAINDER_SURFACE
Applicable for Straight Cut Surface milling and 3-Axis Isolines and Cut Line
Surface milling NC sequences. If it is set to YES (the default is NO), the
system will generate a surface representing the leftover material (to be
removed by a subsequent Local Mill NC sequence). This surface will belong to
the current NC sequence, and will be regenerated upon regenerating the tool
path.
Note: The remainder surface will be generated based on the SCALLOP_HGT parameter
value.
AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. If set to YES (the default), the
system will attempt to use edges crossing all the selected cut lines as synch
lines. If this is not satisfactory, set AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE to NO and specify
the synch lines or synch points manually.
AUTO_INNER_CUTLINE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. If set to YES, the system will
attempt to use edges crossing all the specified synch lines as inner cut lines.
The default is NO.
CUTLINE_TYPE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. Allows you to select which
algorithm the system uses when it calculates cut line distribution. The values
are:
CUTLINE_EXT_TYPE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. Specifies how the system
handles the case when a cut line does not extend the whole length of the
surface selected for machining. The values are:
103
BOUNDARY (default)—The system will attempt to extend the cut lines up to the
boundary of the surface.
CUTLINE_EXT_TYPE
BOUNDARY NONE
AXIS_DEF_CONTROL
Applicable for 5-Axis Cut Line Surface and Trajectory milling, and for Swarf
milling.
For 5-Axis Cut Line Surface milling and Swarf milling, the values are:
For 5-Axis Trajectory milling, this parameter is used for Automatic Cut
motions created using the Surfaces option. Another way to specify axis
definitons is to use the Axis Control option in the CUTMOTION SETUP
menu. The AXIS_DEF_CONTROL parameter specifies the approximation
type between the explicit axes definitions. The values are:
104
• PROJECT_ON_DRIVE_SURFACE—Preserves the lead angle of the tool axis relative to
the surface normal for each explicit axis defined at locations on the surface. As the tool
moves between explicit axis definitions, the system computes an average lead angle by
linearly interpolating between the last explicit axis definition and the next explicit axis
definition. This average is then applied at the current location and the tool axis is
projected onto the surface making the tilt component 0. This method can be used to
generate tool paths that have a variable user-controlled lead angle, but maintain cutting
with the side of the tool.
USE_VARIABLE_TILT
If set to YES (the default is NO), the tool will tilt to avoid gouging. Available
for Swarf milling only.
IGNORE_RULINGS
If set to NO (the default), the tool will be parallel to the ruling lines when
machining ruled surfaces. If set to YES, the tool will ignore the ruling lines of
the ruled surfaces. Available for Swarf milling only.
4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT
If set to YES (the default is NO), the system will attempt to use variable lead
angle to avoid gouging. That is, if gouging occurs with the specified
4X_LEAD_ANGLE, the system will try to use another angle in the range
between 4X_MIN_LEAD_ANGLE and 4X_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE. Applicable
for 4-axis milling only.
CUSTOMIZE_AUTO_RETRACT
If set to NO (the default is YES), the tool will not perform the automatic
retract when following the default tool path.
SLICE_PATH_SCAN
Defines the order of machining multiple passes within multiple step depths
(slices). The values are:
105
PASS_BY_PASS—After completing the first pass for the first slice, go to the first pass for
the second slice, and so on. After completing the first pass for the last slice, go to the
second pass for the first slice; proceed until completing the last pass for the last slice.
SLICE_BY_SLICE—Complete all the passes within a slice before going to the next slice.
Cut Param
STEP_DEPTH
The incremental depth of each pass during rough cut NC sequences. The
STEP_DEPTH must be greater than zero. The default is not set (displayed as
“–1).
MIN_STEP_DEPTH
For Volume and Profile milling, specifies the minimum acceptable distance
between slices. By default, all planar surfaces that are normal to the Z-axis of
the NC Sequence coordinate system produce additional slices. A slice along
such a planar surface will be skipped if the distance between it and the
previous slice is less than the value of MIN_STEP_DEPTH.
NUMBER_CUTS
For Face milling, gives you additional control over the number of cuts to
depth (also controlled by the STEP_DEPTH parameter). The system will
compute number of cuts using the STEP_DEPTH parameter value, compare
it with the NUMBER_CUTS value, and use the greater one. The default is a
dash (-), that is, not used.
OFFSET_INCREMENT
ROUGH_STEP_DEPTH
Available for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling only. The default is a dash
(-). If you specify a value other than the default, the system performs surface
106
milling in depth increments, defined by the appropriate horizontal slices.
This allows you to create Volume-like tool paths without actually defining a
Mill Volume, which is especially helpful when machining imported (nonsolid)
surfaces. The NC sequence removes the same material and has the same
automatic degouging capabilities as the regular 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface
milling sequences.
The following illustration shows 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling in depth
increments.
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT
SCALLOP_HGT
Similarly used to control step-over distance for Surface milling and Local
milling By Previous Tool.
2. If you specify wsh > 0, a step depth is calculated using wsh. This calculated value is
compared to the STEP_DEPTH you defined. Pro/NC uses the lesser of the two.
107
STEP_OVER
Tool path
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
STEP_OVER
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
and
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the rough cut for the finish cut. Both
parameters are used for Rough Cut NC sequences only, and specify different
stock allowances for roughing and profiling cuts in a Volume NC sequence.
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW must be set to a value less than or equal to
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW. When geometry is displayed after Automatic
material removal, it will use PROF_STOCK_ALLOW.
Pocket
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW
For Volume milling, the amount of stock left after a rough NC sequence on
planar surfaces parallel to the retract plane. The default is a dash (-), in
which case the BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW parameter will be ignored and
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW will be used instead.
For Facing, specifies the amount of stock left on the selected face. The
default, a dash (-), sets the stock allowance to 0.
WALL_TOLERANCE
Lets you specify the amount of material that can be left along the walls after
the previous NC sequence, without the Local Mill NC sequence cleaning it
up. The default is 0. Applicable for Local milling NC sequences referencing a
previous Volume NC sequence.
108
STEP_OVER
Controls the lateral depth of cut of either type of endmill. The STEP_OVER
must be a positive value less than or equal to the cutter diameter. The
default is not set (displayed as “–1).
TOOL_OVERLAP
PLUNGE_STEP
Controls the distance between successive plunges of the tool. The default is a
dash (-), in which case:
• If you are using a Plunge Mill tool, this distance is equal to the tool parameter
Insert_Cut_Width.
• If you are using a regular milling tool, the system calculates the maximum plunge step,
based on the Cutter_Diam of the tool, that results in removing all the material between
the plunges.
CORNER_ROUND_RADIUS
Specifies the minimum radius allowed for concave corners in high speed
machining. Available for Volume milling only. The default is 0.
NUMBER_PASSES
Gives you additional control over the number of tool passes per slice (also
controlled by the STEP_OVER parameter). The system will compute step-
over distance using the NUMBER_PASSES parameter value (if other than
0), compare it with the STEP_OVER value, and use the one that is smaller.
Applicable for Volume milling and Facing. For Facing, if NUMBER_PASSES
is set to 1, it will override the STEP_OVER value, so that only one pass per
slice will be made.
ONE_PASS_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the tool path for a one-pass Face milling NC sequence
(that is, when NUMBER_PASSES is 1). The positive value offsets the pass to
the left with respect to the cut direction, the negative—to the right. The
default is 0.
INITIAL_EDGE_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the first pass for Face milling with respect to the edge of
the surface being milled. The default is 0, in which case the tip trajectory at
109
first pass will coincide with the surface edge; the positive value offsets the
first pass into the surface, the negative—off the surface. Cannot be greater
than the STEP_OVER value.
FINAL_EDGE_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the last pass for Face milling with respect to the edge of
the surface being milled. The default is 0, in which case the tip trajectory at
last pass will coincide with the surface edge; the positive value offsets the last
pass into the surface, the negative—off the surface. Cannot be greater than
the STEP_OVER value.
CUT_ANGLE
The angle between the cut direction and the X-axis of the NC Sequence
coordinate system. The default CUT_ANGLE is 0, which is parallel to the X-
axis. Valid for Volume and Plunge milling, Pocketing, Facing, Straight Cut
Surface milling, and Projected Cuts Surface milling. CUT_ANGLE will be
ignored for Volume and Plunge milling, Pocketing, and Projected Cuts
Surface milling if SCAN_TYPE is TYPE_SPIRAL.
CUT_ANGLE 0 CUT_ANGLE 90
LEAD_ANGLE
Together with TILT_ANGLE, defines the tool orientation with respect to the
surface normal for 5-Axis Surface milling NC sequences. LEAD_ANGLE is
specified in degrees from the surface normal with respect to the tool travel
direction: positive value tilts the tool forward, negative—backward.
TILT_ANGLE
Together with LEAD_ANGLE, defines the tool orientation with respect to the
surface normal for 5-Axis Surface milling NC sequences. TILT_ANGLE is
specified in degrees from the surface normal with respect to the tool travel
direction: positive value tilts the tool to the right, negative—to the left.
AXIS_SHIFT
Allows you to shift the CL data along the tool axis. If set to a positive value,
will shift all CL data down along the tool axis; a negative value will shift the
CL data up. The default is 0.
Note: AXIS_SHIFT is applied after gouge checking has been performed. Use the Gouge
Check functionality to make sure there is no gouging.
110
Tool Model
AXIS_SHIFT
NUM_PROF_PASSES
PROF_INCREMENT
NUM_PROF_PASSES =1 NUM_PROF_PASSES = 4
PROF_INCREMENT
First pass
Final pass
CORNER_OFFSET
111
SLOPE_ANGLE
In Local Milling, the angular value with respect to the XY plane that divides
the material to be removed into vertical and horizontal regions. For example,
if you are removing material left over in a pocket with slanted walls,
specifying the value of the SLOPE_ANGLE less than the wall slope will make
the tool machine the bottom edges of the pocket first, and then remove the
material in the corners between the walls. The default SLOPE_ANGLE for
newly created NC sequences is 30 degrees. For NC sequences created prior to
Release 2000i2, the default value is 90 degrees.
START_OVERTRAVEL
Specifies the distance from the tool to the surface outline for all passes except
the first one for each slice (see also APPROACH_DISTANCE). The default is
0. Applicable for Facing only.
END_OVERTRAVEL
Specifies the distance that the tool overtravels past the surface outline on all
passes except the last one for each slice (see also EXIT_DISTANCE). The
default is 0. Applicable for Facing only.
GROOVE_DEPTH
The depth of the groove. The default is not set (displayed as “–1). Applicable
for Engraving only.
4X_TILT_ANGLE
Specifies the angle (in degrees) between the tool axis and the 4 Axis Plane.
Normally, the tool axis is parallel to this plane (the default 4X_TILT_ANGLE
is 0). Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
4X_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the angle (in degrees) between the tool axis and the projection of the
surface normal on the 4 Axis Plane (the default is 0). Applicable for 4-axis
milling only.
4X_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the maximum lead angle allowed when trying to avoid gouging. The
default is a dash (-), but you have to specify a value if
4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT is set to YES. Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
4X_MIN_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the minimum lead angle allowed when trying to avoid gouging. The
default is a dash (-), but you have to specify a value if
4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT is set to YES. Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW
112
Allows you to specify stock allowance to be used with check surfaces. The
default is a dash (-), that is, ignore. This parameter is available for Milling
NC sequences that utilize the Check Surfs functionality (that is, Surface,
Trajectory, Profile milling, and for Local Milling referencing a Surface milling
NC sequence).
Feed
ARC_FEED
Allows you to control the cut feed around arcs. The default is a dash (-), in
which case the CUT_FEED will be used. If set to 0, the RAPID statement will
be output before the CIRCLE statement.
ARC_FEED_CONTROL
Determines how the value for cut feed around arcs is calculated. The options
are:
INVERSE_FEED
Enables you to specify the inverse time feed rate, or the rate of rotation, for
machines with rotary axes. Available for 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences only. If
you set INVERSE_FEED to YES (the default is NO), the system outputs the
following line in the CL data file before the first cutting feed statement:
At the end of the CL data file, the system outputs the following line:
RAMP_FEED
113
APPROACH_FEED
THREAD_FEED
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
Machine
SPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates (RPM). The default is -1.
SPINDLE_SENSE
SPINDLE_RANGE
RANGE_NUMBER
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
If set to a value other than a dash (-) (which is the default), the MAXRPM
attribute will be added to the SPINDL command.
SPEED_CONTROL
CUTCOM
114
Controls tool compensation. The options are:
ON—Turns on the cutter compensation in the CL file. The compensation is Right or Left,
depending on CUT_TYPE and SPINDLE_SENSE.
CUTCOM_REGISTER
Specifies the number of the register of the machine controller that holds the
tool compensation data. The default is 0.
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS
CUTCOM_LOC_APPR
CUTCOM_LOC_EXIT
115
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the exit motion if multiple
cutcom points are specified. Cutcom points are numbered from 0 to n, where
n is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 0.
Exit
Approach Move Part
move
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 2 5th GOTO point
Cut motion
6th GOTO point (cutcom point 0)
CUTCOM_ON_SPIRAL
HOLDER_DIAMETER
HOLDER_LENGTH
OSETNO_VAL
Specifies the tool gauge length register. The default is a dash (-), in which
case the Offset value from the Tool Table is used.
Z_GAUGE_OFFSET
116
Shifts CL output by a specified value along the tool axis. If you specify a
positive value, CL data is shifted in the positive Z-direction of the tool
coordinate system; a negative value shifts CL data in the opposite direction.
The default is a dash (-).
Entry/Exit
RAMP_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool enters the workpiece during a plunge cut. The
default RAMP_ANGLE is 90, which enters the workpiece parallel to the Z-
axis. Not applicable for Facing or Trajectory NC sequences.
RAMP_FEED
The rate at which the tool moves upon entering the workpiece during a
plunge cut. The default is a dash (-), in which case the CUT_FEED will be
used. Not applicable for Facing or Trajectory NC sequences.
CLEAR_DIST
The clearance distance above the surface to be milled (for example, the
previous slice level) at which the rapid motion ends and the PLUNGE_FEED
begins. The default is not set (displayed as “–1).
PULLOUT_DIST
Specifies the height above the level of the cut (for example, the slice just
milled) up to which the tip of the tool will retract at CUT_FEED and then
change to RETRACT_FEED. The default is 0.
INTER_RET_HEIGHT
Specifies the distance that the cutter will retract above the level of the cut to
perform intermediate rapid motions. The default is a dash (-), in which case
the cutter will retract all the way to the retract surface. Applicable for Facing
only.
LEAD_IN
If set to YES, makes the tool enter the workpiece along a tangent circular
path when profiling. The arc radius is set by LEAD_RADIUS, the arc angle—
by ENTRY_ANGLE. You can also specify the length of the adjacent straight
portion of Lead In trajectory using TANGENT_LEAD_STEP, and the length
of a straight segment normal to it using NORMAL_LEAD_STEP.
For closed contours, if start point is not set, the tool will enter at a location
determined by the system. If not satisfied with this location, specify your own
Start Point axis. The tool will enter at the point along the profile which is
closest to the start point axis.
117
EXIT_ANGLE
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
NORMAL_LEAD_
STEP LEAD_IN
LEAD_OUT
LEAD_IN
Start
LEAD_RADIUS point
LEAD_OUT
ENTRY_ANGLE
Open profile Closed profile
If LEAD_IN is set to YES with a zero radius, the tool will go directly to the
point closest to the Start Point specified and start cutting. When LEAD_IN is
set to NO, cutting will begin at the default point of the contour determined by
the system.
Default start of
the contour Start Point axis Start Point axis
LEAD_OUT
118
Makes the tool exit the workpiece along a tangent circular path when
profiling. Works similarly to LEAD_IN. If the end point is specified it will be
used for LEAD_OUT, otherwise the default 90 arc (and the default exit point
for closed contours) will be used.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in or
out. The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or
lead-out motion. The default is 0.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion of
the lead-in or lead-out motion. The default is 0.
HELICAL_DIAMETER
Allows you to replace the plunge motion between the slices for Rough Volume
milling with a helical entry motion. The helical diameter will be formed by
the outside of the tool as it approaches the beginning of a Rough slice; the
angle of descent is defined by the RAMP_ANGLE parameter value. If a Start
Point axis is specified, the helix center will be at the axis location; if the
helical motion violates the Mill Volume, the system will issue a warning and
stop machining. If a Start Point axis is not specified,the helix will be created
as close to the start point of the lower slice as possible. To move from the end
of the previous slice, the tool will lift off the surface by PULLOUT_DIST and
horizontally move at RETRACT_FEED to the start of the helical entry into
the lower slice. If you have specified Approach Walls for the NC sequence, the
helical motion will not be created when the tool moves down outside the
Approach Walls; however, if the tool moves down inside the Mill Volume, the
system will use the helical entry. The default HELICAL_DIAMETER is 0, in
which case the helical motion will not be performed.
APPR_EXIT_EXT
Applicable for Volume milling only. Defines the maximum distance between
the periphery of the tool and the Approach Wall of the mill volume for
approach and exit motions within a slice.
APPR_EXIT_PATH
Applicable for Profiling and for the profiling pass of Volume milling NC
sequences. Allows you to trim the sketched approach or exit path by the
outline of the profiling tool motion. For approach path, only the first portion
(from the start point up to the first intersection with the profiling outline)
will be kept. For exit path, only the last portion (from the last intersection
with the profiling outline to the end point) will be kept. If the approach/exit
119
path is set to not be trimmed, the tool will follow the whole path as sketched.
The values are:
APPR_EXIT_PATH
Approach path Approach path
APPR_EXIT_HEIGHT
Applicable for Volume, Local, Profile milling, and Engraving. Allows you to
control the depth of the approach and exit path specified during Build Slice.
The options are:
DEPTH_OF_CUT (the default)—The approach/exit path for each pass (including the
first/last) will be at the depth of the start/end point of the pass.
OVERTRAVEL_DISTANCE
For 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling, specifies the distance that the tool
travels past the surface outline, both at the beginning and end of each cutting
pass.
APPROACH_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of approach motions. For Facing, also specifies the
additional (with respect to START_OVERTRAVEL) distance from the tool to
the surface outline for the first pass in each slice. The default is 0.
EXIT_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of exit motions. For Facing, also specifies the additional
(with respect to END_OVERTRAVEL) distance that the tool overtravels past
the surface outline for the last pass in each slice. The default is a dash (-),
that is, 0.
120
APPROACH_FEED
The rate at which the tool approaches the surface during a Facing NC
sequence. The default is a dash (-), in which case CUT_FEED will be used.
EXIT_FEED
The rate at which the tool overtravels past the surface edge during a Facing
NC sequence. The default is a dash (-), in which case CUT_FEED will be
used.
CLEARANCE_EDGE
Specifies which point of the tool is to be used for measuring the exit motions
and the overtravel motions when the tool leaves the material:
ENTRY_EDGE
Specifies which point of the tool is to be used for measuring the approach
motions and the overtravel motions when the tool approaches the material:
APPROACH_TYPE
RADIAL—The approach motion will be a straight line normal to the cut motion,
controlled by the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter.
HELICAL—The tool will approach the start of the cut motion in a helical motion
controlled by the ENTRY_ANGLE and the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameters.
121
HELICAL (default)—The tool approaches the machining surface following a helical
trajectory, tangent to the start point of the cutting tool path. The helical pitch value is
controlled by the RAMP_ANGLE parameter (the default value for RAMP_ANGLE in this
case is 30). The lead-in radius is equal to the radius of the previous tool minus the radius
of the cutting tool. If the CLEAR_DIST parameter value is greater than 0, the helical
approach will start at the CLEAR_DIST height; otherwise, at retract plane.
EXIT_TYPE
RADIAL—The exit motion will be a straight line normal to the cut motion, controlled by
the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter.
HELICAL—The tool will exit the cut motion in a helical motion controlled by the
EXIT_ANGLE and the EXIT_DISTANCE parameters.
HELICAL (default)—The tool exits by following a helical trajectory, tangent to the end
point of the cutting tool path. The helical pitch value is controlled by the RAMP_ANGLE
parameter (the default value for RAMP_ANGLE in this case is 30). The lead-out radius is
equal to the radius of the previous tool minus the radius of the cutting tool. If the
PULLOUT_DIST parameter value is greater than 0, the helical exit will end at the
PULLOUT_DIST height; otherwise, at retract plane.
CIRCULAR—The tool exits by following a circular trajectory, tangent to the end point of
the cutting tool path. The lead-out radius is equal to the radius of the previous tool
minus the radius of the cutting tool.
ENTRY_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool when
leading in. Used when creating Lead In motions. The default is 90.
In Thread milling, defines the angle of the helical approach motion. If the
angle is 0, the helical motion will still be created, but it will only contain one
point. However, you will be able to modify the motion parameters in order to
change this.
EXIT_ANGLE
122
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool when
leading out. Used when creating Lead Out motions. The default is 90.
In Thread milling, defines the angle of the helical exit motion. If the angle is
0, the helical motion will still be created, but it will only contain one point.
However, you will be able to modify the motion parameters in order to change
this.
CUT_ENTRY_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default entry move type for
intermediate cuts. The values correspond to the Each Cut entry move types
available in the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
CUT_EXIT_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default exit move type for
intermediate cuts. The values correspond to the Each Cut exit move types
available in the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
INITIAL_ENTRY_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default entry move type for the
first cut. The values correspond to the First Cut entry move types available in
the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
FINAL_EXIT_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default exit move type for the
last cut. The values correspond to the Last Cut exit move types available in
the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
Thread
THREAD_DIAMETER
Defines the minor diameter for an External thread or the major diameter for
an Internal thread. Applicable for Thread milling only.
Turning Parameters
The following parameters are specific to turning NC sequences. They are
listed under a heading corresponding to the name of the branch when you set
up the parameters.
Notes:
123
Þ You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this means
that the default value is not set by the system).
Þ Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as the
units of the workpiece.
Cut Option
SCAN_TYPE
For Area turning, specifies the type of tool movement and the way the tool
scans multi-step profiles:
• TYPE_1—The tool will cut in one direction only, then retract to the beginning of the cut.
If there are multiple hollows, the tool will complete the first hollow and go to the next
one.
• TYPE_2—The tool will cut back and forth along the whole length of the cut.
• TYPE_3—The tool will cut back and forth. If there are multiple hollows, the tool will
complete the first hollow and go to the next one.
• TYPE_1_CONNECT—Works the same as TYPE_1, except the tool will move from one
pass to the next by profiling the workpiece between the end point of the first pass and the
start point of the following pass.
For Groove turning, SCAN_TYPE specifies if the tool cuts from the middle to
the sides of the groove, or from one side to the other:
• TYPE_1 (the default)—Starts in the middle and makes alternating passes on each side in
turn.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—Starts at one side of the groove and moves to the other side.
124
• TYPE_1_CONNECT—Assures uniform stock allowance on the sides of the groove after
the rough pass. Starts on the deepest portion of the groove, as close to the middle of the
groove as possible, and makes alternating passes on each side in turn; continues making
passes on the longer side, if necessary, until the wall is reached. Makes connecting
motions between the plunge passes by moving along the profile of the groove (similar to
TYPE_1_CONNECT in Area turning, described above).
ROUGH_OPTION
• ROUGH_ONLY—No profiling is done. The tool cuts by horizontal rough passes for Area
turning, by vertical passes for Groove turning.
ROUGH_OPTION
ROUGH_ONLY ROUGH_&_PROF
ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP PROF_ONLY
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
Allows you to extend the tool path past the workpiece boundaries as
sketched. If TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is NO (the default), the machining zone
125
will be formed by the whole sketch of the cut; the system will add a vertical
line as the right boundary and a horizontal line as the left boundary. If
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is set to YES, the machining zone will be defined on
the outside by the workpiece boundaries, with a small extension past these
boundaries determined by the system.
CUT_DIRECTION
Allows you to reverse the default cutting direction for turning NC sequences
(right-to-left for Outside and Inside turning, downward for Facing). The
values are:
• REVERSE—Reverse the cut direction. The tool will cut left-to-right for Outside and
Inside turning, and from the center upward for Facing.
OUTPUT_POINT
Allows you to choose which point of the tool will be used as the control point
for CL output:
• CENTER (default)—The center of the nose radius (the default control point).
• TIP—The output point will be offset downwards and to the left from the default control
point by the NOSE_RADIUS value.
• X_OFFSET—The output point will be offset downwards from the default control point by
the NOSE_RADIUS value.
• Z_OFFSET—The output point will be offset to the left from the default control point by
the NOSE_RADIUS value.
• CENTER_RIGHT—Same as CENTER, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove
turning only).
• TIP_RIGHT—Same as TIP, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove turning only).
• X_OFFSET_RIGHT—Same as X_OFFSET, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove
turning only).
126
• Z_OFFSET_RIGHT—Same as Z_OFFSET, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove
turning only).
All the offsets are determined with respect to the default tool section
orientation (as appears using the Show option). The same point will be used
for Outside, Inside, or Face turning. Applicable for Area, Profile, and Groove
turning only.
OUTPUT_POINT
CENTER TIP
X_OFFSET Z_OFFSET
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE
Allows you to specify the type of gouge checking for turning NC sequences.
TIP_ONLY (the default) calculates gouge avoidance with respect to the tip of
the tool only. TIP_&_SIDES calculates gouge avoidance with respect to the
tip and both cutting sides of the tool. The tool path will be changed to avoid
gouging, and material removal simulation will reflect the tool geometry.
Applicable for Area and Profile turning only.
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIP_ONLY
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIP_&_SIDES
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE
127
Reflects the two ways of generating the tool path when passing a convex
corner during a profiling pass of an Area NC Sequence:
• FILLET (default)—The tool path consists of two straight segments connected with an
arc.
• STRAIGHT—The tool path consists of two straight segments extended until they
intersect.
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE
Part Part
FILLET STRAIGHT
Note: STRAIGHT may not work if the tool size is too big to enter a cavity in the part.
Part Part
FILLET STRAIGHT
STEPOVER_ADJUST
YES (the default) allows you to uniformly distribute cutting passes across the
area of the cut or along the groove width during a Rough NC sequence. If set
to NO, the distance will be determined by either STEP_DEPTH (for Area
turning) or STEP_OVER (for Groove turning).
GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE
Allows you to specify an intermediate retract for the profiling pass of Groove
turning NC sequences:
• NO_BACKCUT (the default)—The tool will enter the groove on one side, retract at some
intermediate point along the groove profile, enter on the other side and complete the cut.
• CONTINUOUS—The tool will enter the groove on one side, cut across, and exit on the
other side.
ALTERNATE_SIDE_OUTPUT
If set to YES (the default is NO), allows you to generate CL output for Groove
turning NC sequences based on the side of the tool cutting material. For scan
types TYPE_1 and TYPE_1_CONNECT, the initial plunge is created with
128
output point specified by the OUTPUT_POINT parameter. The tool retracts
back to the starting height. The system then issues a new TURRET
statement with OSETNO defined by the ALT_OSETNO_VAL parameter, and
the tool moves to beginning of the next plunge with the X, Y, Z output based
on the side of the tool entering material. This pattern is repeated for all
rough passes.
DEEP_GROOVE_OPTION
• BY_DEPTH (the default)—The tool will cut to the bottom of the groove in PECK_DEPTH
increments, retracting at FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH, if specified, before stepping over to
the next pass.
• BY_WIDTH—The tool will completely machine the whole width of the groove at each
PECK_DEPTH.
Cut Param
TOOL_CLEARANCE
The distance used to degouge the tool holder when solid tool outline is used.
STEP_DEPTH
The incremental depth of each pass during rough cut NC sequences. The
STEP_DEPTH must be greater than zero. The default is not set (displayed as
“–1). Applicable for Area Turning only.
END_STEP_DEPTH
MIN_STEP_DEPTH
129
Controls how the intermediate reference part diameters are machined. The
default is a dash (-), which means that all diameters will be machined to
stock allowance. Applicable for Area Turning only.
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
and
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the rough cut for the finish cut. Both
parameters are used for Rough Cut NC sequences only, and specify different
stock allowances for roughing and profiling cuts in Area and Groove NC
sequences. PROF_STOCK_ALLOW must be set to a value less than or equal
to ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW. When geometry is displayed after Automatic
material removal, it will use PROF_STOCK_ALLOW. The defaults are 0.
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
STOCK_ALLOW
Determines the stock allowance for Profile turning NC sequences and final
programmed thread depth for Thread turning. The default is 0.
Z_STOCK_ALLOW
130
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
STEP_DEPTH Z_STOCK_ALLOW
CSYS z
Z_STOCK_ALLOW
(or ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW if Z_STOCK_ALLOW is "-")
NUMBER_PASSES
Gives you additional control over the number of tool passes during an Area or
Groove NC sequence (also controlled by the STEP_DEPTH parameter for
Area turning, or STEP_OVER for Groove turning). The system will compute
step depth using the NUMBER_PASSES parameter value (if other than 0),
compare it with the STEP_DEPTH (or STEP_OVER) value, and use the one
that is smaller.
CUT_ANGLE
Allows you to cut at an angle. For Outside and Inside Turning the angle is
measured with respect to the Z axis, for Facing—with respect to the X axis.
The default is 0. Applicable for Area turning only.
CUT_ANGLE 165
NUM_PROF_PASSES
Specifies the amount of profiling passes. Applicable for Area and Groove
turning when ROUGH_OPTION is ROUGH_&_PROF or PROF_ONLY. The
default is 1.
PROF_INCREMENT
Specifies the offset between the profiling passes. The final pass will always be
the same, which means that the first pass will be offset from the final pass
by: (NUM_PROF_PASSES–1)*PROF_INCREMENT.
The default is 0. If NUM_PROF_PASSES is greater than 1, you must specify
a positive value for PROF_INCREMENT.
131
NUM_PROF_PASSES = 3
PROF_INCREMENT
CONCAVE_RADIUS
CONVEX_RADIUS
CHAMFER_DIM
Defines the size of the 45 chamfer when a Chamfer corner condition is added.
START_OVERTARVEL
and
END_OVERTRAVEL
These two parameters specify the distance that the tool travels outside the
workpiece in the beginning and the end of each pass, respectively. Applicable
for Area and Profile turning. The default value is 0. For Area turning,
START_OVERTRAVEL and END_OVERTRAVEL will only be applied if the
cut extension is parallel to the direction of the cut motion.
END_OVERTRAVEL
not applied
START_OVERTRAVEL
applied
BACK_CLEAR_ANGLE
132
The minimum angle by which the back end of the tool will clear the
workpiece as it enters an area of smaller diameter than was previously being
machined. The default is 5.
STEP_OVER
The distance between two neighboring cuts. The default is not set (displayed
as “–1). Applicable for rough Groove turning (that is, with ROUGH_OPTION
other than PROF_ONLY).
SIDEWALL_OFFSET
Allows you to control the intermediate retract point for the profiling pass in
Groove turning (when ROUGH_OPTION is PROF_ONLY or
ROUGH_&_PROF, and GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE is NO_BACKCUT).
SIDEWALL_OFFSET specifies the length of the second portion of the cut,
that is, the distance between the point of retract and the end of the bottom of
the groove. The default is a dash (-), in which case the tool will retract at the
midpoint of the bottom entity.
PECK_DEPTH
If set to a value other than 0, the peck cycle will be performed. The default is
0. Applicable only for rough Groove turning (that is, with ROUGH_OPTION
other than PROF_ONLY).
ALT_OSETNO_VAL
Machine
SPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates (RPM). The default
SPINDLE_SPEED is not set (displayed as “–1).
SPINDLE_SENSE
SPINDLE_RANGE
133
RANGE_NUMBER
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
If set to a value other than a dash (-) (which is the default), the MAXRPM
attribute will be added to the SPINDL command.
SPEED_CONTROL
CUTCOM
CUTCOM_REGISTER
Specifies the number of the register of the machine controller that holds the
tool compensation data. The default is 0.
TOOL_ORIENTATION
Allows you to control the tool orientation. It represents the angle (in degrees)
from the tool axis clockwise to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate
system. TOOL_ORIENTATION can be any value between 0 and 360. The
default is 0.
DELAY
OSETNO_VAL
Specifies the tool gauge length register. The default is a dash (-), in which
case the Offset value from the Tool Table is used.
X_GAUGE_OFFSET
134
Shifts CL output by a specified value. If you specify a positive value, CL data
is shifted in the positive X-direction of the tool coordinate system; a negative
value shifts CL data in the opposite direction. The default is a dash (-).
Z_GAUGE_OFFSET
Entry/Exit
PLUNGE_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool approaches the workpiece. The default is 0.
Applicable for Area and Groove turning.
PULLOUT_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool is pulled away from the workpiece. The default is
0. Applicable for Area and Groove turning.
PLUNGE_ANGLE 45 PLUNGE_ANGLE 0
PULLOUT_ANGLE 0 PULLOUT_ANGLE 45
RETRACT_RATIO
Controls the depth of the tool retracting motion during an Area turning NC
sequence. This depth is specified as a ratio of STEP_DEPTH. The default is
1.1.
retracting
depth
STEP_DEPTH
PULLOUT_DIST
135
Used for the final retract of the tool. The default is 0, in which case the
system default value for retract will be used. Applicable for Groove turning
only.
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
Applicable for peck cycle Groove turning only. If other than 0 (the default),
the tool will retract all the way back to CLEAR_DIST upon reaching this
depth below the top of the groove.
CLEAR_DIST
For Groove NC sequences, the clearance distance above the workpiece surface
at which the PLUNGE_FEED ends and the CUT_FEED begins. For Thread
NC sequences, the clearance distance from the workpiece (corresponds to “d
in the AI parameter “FEDTO, d). The default is -1.
APPROACH_DISTANCE
In Area turning, will be used for the initial entry into rough turning, as well
as for the entry into the profiling motion. Also specifies the length of
approach Tool Motions for all NC sequence types. The default is 0.
EXIT_DISTANCE
In Area turning, will be used for the final exit from rough turning, as well as
for the exit from the profiling motion. Also specifies the length of exit Tool
Motions for all NC sequence types. The default is a dash (-), that is, 0.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in or out. Used
when creating Lead In and Lead Out Tool Motions, and in Build Cut for Profile turning.
The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or lead-out
motion. Used when creating Lead In and Lead Out motions in Build Cut for Profile
turning. The default is 0.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion of
the lead-in or lead-out motion. Used when creating Lead In and Lead Out
motions in Build Cut for Profile turning. The default is 0.
ENTRY_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool when
leading in. Used when creating Lead In and Lead Out motions in Build Cut
for Profile turning. The default is 90.
136
EXIT_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool when
leading out. Used when creating Lead In and Lead Out motions in Build Cut
for Profile turning. The default is 90.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
TANGENT_ TANGENT_
LEAD_STEP LEAD_RADIUS LEAD_STEP
cut motion
EXIT_ANGLE
ENTRY_ANGLE
Thread
THREAD_FEED
Number of threads per inch. The default value is not set (displayed as “–1).
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
PERCENT_DEPTH
Note: This option is valid only for AI macros, not for ISO standard CL Data.
NUMBER_FIN_PASSES
Sets the number of passes to be made after the final thread depth
(determined by STOCK_ALLOW) is reached. The default is 1.
NUMBER_STARTS
NUMBER_CUTS
For ISO threads, the number of times the tool will be positioned to a multiple
cut (corresponds to the ISO parameter “CUTS,c).
NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS
For AI threads, the number of times the tool will be positioned to a multiple
cut (corresponds to “n in the AI parameter “OFSETL,n,o).
137
CUT_OFFSET
For AI threads, the offset distance between the cuts in multiple cut threading
(corresponds to “o in the AI parameter “OFSETL,n,o).
tool
thread
CUT_OFFSET
NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS = 4
OUTPUT_THRD_PNTS
If set to YES (the default), outputs GOTO statements for the first and last
points of the thread into CL file, before and after the THREAD/AUTO
command, respectively. If set to NO, does not output these GOTO statements.
INFEED_ANGLE
Angle at which the tool begins the cut. The default value is 0.
THREAD_DEPTH
Thread depth (for General thread type only). The default value is not set
(displayed as “–1).
Holemaking Parameters
The following parameters are specific to Holemaking NC sequences. They are
listed under a heading corresponding to the name of the branch when you set
up the parameters.
Notes:
Þ You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this means
that the default value is not set by the system).
Þ Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as the
units of the workpiece.
138
Cut Option
SCAN_TYPE
There are several algorithms for automatically creating the Holemaking tool
path:
TYPE_1—By incrementing the Y coordinate and going back and forth in the X direction.
PICK_ORDER—The holes will be drilled in the same order as they are selected. If one
choice results in more than one hole being selected (for example, All Holes or Pattern
selection), these holes will be drilled according to TYPE_1. Then the PICK_ORDER
drilling will be resumed.
SCAN_TYPE
y y y
x x x
TYPE_1 TYPE_SPIRAL TYPE_ONE_DIR
CUT_DIRECTION
Enables you to reverse the order in which the holes are machined. The values
are: STANDARD (default) or REVERSE. REVERSE will make the system
start with the last hole and go back to the first one. This functionality is
helpful when you have to create multiple NC sequences on a large hole set:
alternating direction of tool path for successive NC sequences lets you save
time for repositioning the tool. If your tool path was created using the
Customize functionality, CUT_DIRECTION will affect the Use Sketch
segments, but not the Connect segments.
CYCLE_FORMAT
Specifies the output format for CL data of a Holemaking NC sequence. For all
newly created NC sequences the default is COUPLET. The other option is
FIXED (this is the default for NC sequences created prior to Release 12.0).
Not applicable for BORE, REAM, and BREAKCHIP cycles (these are always
output in COUPLET format).
CYCLE_OUTPUT
139
Specifies the order of drilling for an automatically created Holemaking tool
path when multiple Hole Sets are included in the NC sequence:
Cut Param
BREAKOUT_DISTANCE
CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW
Allows you to specify stock allowance to be used with check surfaces. The
default is a dash (-), that is, ignore. This parameter is available for all 3-Axis
Holemaking NC sequences except Back boring.
PECK_DEPTH
Depth increment for each drilling pass. Default value is 0. If you select DEEP
drilling, you have to specify non-zero PECK_DEPTH. Not available for
Countersink drilling.
Feed
THREAD_FEED
Used for TAP cycles only (instead of CUT_FEED) to specify feed rate. The
default is not set (displayed as “–1).
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
TPI (default), MMPR, IPR. Applicable for TAP cycles only. Allows alternate
pitch designations.
FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR
Used for the floating TAP cycle only. The feed rate is calculated as the
THREAD_FEED value multiplied by FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR. The default is
1.
140
Machine
SPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates. The default is not set
(displayed as “–1).
SPINDLE_STATUS
ON (default), OFF.
SPINDLE_SENSE
SPINDLE_RANGE
RANGE_NUMBER
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
If set to a value other than a dash (-) (which is the default), the MAXRPM
attribute will be added to the SPINDL command.
SPEED_CONTROL
DELAY
Duration of dwelling at depth. The default is a dash (-), in which case there
will be no delay. Not applicable for TAP and DEEP cycles.
DELAY_UNITS
141
Entry/Exit
CLEAR_DIST
The clearance distance above the top of the hole at which the
PLUNGE_FEED ends and the CUT_FEED begins. The default is not set
(displayed as “–1).
CLEARANCE_OFFSET
The clearance distance above the top of the hole at which the tool is
positioned for 5-Axis Holemaking. Also defines how far the tool will retract
after drilling a hole and before traversing to the next hole. The default value
for CLEARANCE_OFFSET is a dash (-), in which case CLEAR_DIST will be
used. Applicable for 5-Axis Holemaking only.
PULLOUT_DIST
Allows for the tool to return to a point other than that defined by
CLEAR_DIST. The default is a dash (-), in which case this parameter is not
used.
If the default value is used, then the tool will return to the clearance distance
(CLEAR_DIST) when moving to the next hole, and the cycle statement will
not include the RETURN option.
If the value of PULLOUT_DIST is set to 0, then the tool will return to the
retract plane when moving to the next hole.
RAPTO_DIST
Allows for further rapid advance from CLEAR_DIST towards the top of the
hole. The default is a dash (-), in which case this parameter is not used.
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
If set to a value other than 0 (the default), specifies full retraction out of the
hole for BREAKCHIP cycle after a certain number of incremental steps. This
number of steps is calculated as FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH / PECK_DEPTH.
ORIENT_ANGLE
JOG_DIST
Allows you to specify the distance of backing an asymmetric tool away from
the hole wall before retracting. Applicable for BORE cycle and for back
spotting only. The default is a dash (-), in which case this parameter is not
used.
BACK_BORE_CLEARANCE
142
Minimum distance between tool and hole cylinder. Applicable for back
spotting only.
Notes:
Þ You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this means
that the default value is not set by the system).
Þ Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as the
units of the workpiece.
Cut Option
AUTO_CORNER_TYPE
RADIUS—Create round corner motions for concave and convex corners. This is the
default.
CORNER_PASSES
APPROXIMATE_SPLINES
Indicate whether you want to approximate spline edges with arcs when
creating CL data output. The default value is NO; if you specify a value of
YES, the spline edges will be approximated.
143
AUTOSYNCH_START_END
YES—The two heads will be automatically synchronized at the beginning and the end of
each cut.
NO—The start and end points of the upper and lower contours will be mapped by cut
entities; therefore, the upper and lower contours will have different start and end points
in XY.
Cut Param
STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the NC sequence. The default is not set
(displayed as “–1).
CORNER_LENGTH
Defines the size (the side length) of the parallelograms added to the tool path
when corner condition is specified. The default is 0.
CORNER_ANGLE
For a sharp corner, the angle of the parallelogram equals the angle between
the adjoining entities, and the CORNER_ANGLE value is ignored. However,
if you add a corner condition between two tangent entities, the angle of the
parallelogram will be defined by the CORNER_ANGLE parameter. The
default is 0.
CONCAVE_RADIUS
CONVEX_RADIUS
ATTACH_WIDTH
STOP_DIST
Distance before the end of the cut motion where the system will place a CL
stop command (STOP or OPSTOP, depending on the
END_STOP_CONDITION parameter value). This enables the operator to
clamp the part before it is cut free and falls away. After the clamp is in place,
the tool completes the trajectory. If the tool path consists of more than one
pass, the stop point is located on the first pass only.
144
DETACH_STOP_DIST
Distance before the end of the Detach move where the system will place a CL
stop command (STOP or OPSTOP, depending on the
END_STOP_CONDITION parameter value).
END_OVERTRAVEL
Overtravel distance past the end of the cut motion. If the cut motion consists
of more than one pass, the overtravel distance is applied according to the
END_OVERTRAVEL_PASS parameter value.
REVERSE_DIST
NUM_PROFILE_PASSES
PROF_INCREMENT
Increment for each Finish pass (unless this data is specified in the register
table).
STEP_OVER
Controls the lateral depth of cut for No Core Wire EDM. The STEP_OVER
must be a positive value less than the cutter diameter. The default is not set
(displayed as “–1).
TOOL_OVERLAP
Another way to control the lateral depth of cut for No Core Wire EDM.
TOOL_OVERLAP indicates the amount that the tool should overlap the
region machined during the previous pass. The default is a dash (-).
TOOL_OVERLAP must be less than the tool diameter. If TOOL_OVERLAP
is specified and STEP_OVER is not, the lateral depth of cut will be calculated
as
(CUTTER_DIAM –TOOL_OVERLAP).
Feed
ARC_FEED
Allows you to control the cut feed around arcs. If set to a dash (-) (which is the
default), the CUT_FEED value will be used. If set to 0, the RAPID statement
will be output before the CIRCLE statement.
Machine
SPARK_ALLOW
145
Together with STOCK_ALLOW and the tool parameter CUTTER_DIAM,
defines the trajectory of the center of the tool with respect to desired
geometry. The default is 0.
CL_DIST
TAPER_ANGLE
Value of the machine controlled taper angle (applicable for 2-Axis Wire EDM
only).
CL_OUTPUT_MODE
Defines the CL output format for the tool axis (applicable for 4-Axis Wire
EDM only):
CUT_MOTION_CONNECT
CUT_WIRE (default)—The wire is cut at the end of the cut motion. If the wire is
disengaged between cut motions, the tool moves at RAPID feed.
CONTINIOUS—Do not unload wire at the end of cut motion. If the wire is engaged
between cut motions, the tool moves at CUT_FEED.
CUTCOM_MOVE
If this parameter is set to a non-zero value, it will allow the tool to move
away from the specified tool path by this distance in the direction of the tool
offset or Cutcom offset (whichever is applicable). Before each Cutcom move,
the CUTCOM / OFF statement will be output. Then there will be new
GENRTR, FLUSH, and CUTCOM statements for the next tool pass. At the
end of a cut motion there will be a CUTCOM / OFF statement followed by
exit motion for closed contours or by Cutcom move for open ones.
CUTCOM_MOVE_APPROACH
Specifies the length of linear move used to turn cutter compensation on or off
for the first pass of a Contouring NC sequence (similar to CUTCOM_MOVE,
described above).
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS
146
1—Do not strip colinear points, to allow proper implementation of Cutcom.
CUTCOM_LOC_APPR
Note: For bisect angles, the motion towards the cut is considered an
approach motion.
CUTCOM_LOC_EXIT
Note: For bisect angles, the motion away from the cut is considered an exit
motion.
147
1st GOTO point (cutcom point 0)
Exit
Approach move move Part
CUTCOM_REG_START
CUTCOM_REG_INCR
FLUSH_REG_START
FLUSH_REG_INCR
FLUSH_REG_APPROACH
FLUSH_REG_DETACH
GENRTR_ROUGH
GENRTR_APPROACH
GENRTR_DETACH
GENRTR_FINISH
148
Initial power setting of the first finish pass.
GENRTR_REG_INCR
REGISTER_TABLE
Specify the name of the register table to be used. The default is a dash (-), in
which case cutcom and generator will be determined using the appropriate
parameters above.
Entry/Exit
APPROACH_DISTANCE
EXIT_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of exit motions for Customize. The default is a dash (-),
that is, 0.
APPROACH_MOVE
Allows you to specify if the Approach move will be created automatically. The
default is YES. In order for the Approach move to be created, you have to
also specify a Thread Point for the cut motion.
RETURN_TO_START
If set to YES (the default is NO), the wire will return to the start point upon
completing the cut motion. Applicable to No Core cut motions only.
LEAD_IN
If set to YES, the system will create a Lead In motion automatically on all
passes of a multi-pass cut motion. The default is NO.
LEAD_OUT
If set to YES, the system will create a Lead Out motion automatically on all
passes of a multi-pass cut motion. The default is NO.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in or
out. The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or lead-out
motion. The default is 0.
149
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion of
the lead-in or lead-out motion. The default is 0.
END_OVERTRAVEL_PASS
The Use Prev option in the MFG PARAMS menu allows you to create initial
parameter value settings for the current sequence by making a one-time copy
of those parameter values from a previous NC sequence. This is especially
convenient when you perform several NC sequences in a row with
parameters just slightly varying. After retrieving the parameters, use Set to
make any variations, if necessary.
When you choose Use Prev, a run-time menu of all previous NC sequences
whose parameters are compatible with the current one will appear (if none of
the previous NC sequences’ parameters are applicable, the system will issue
a message). Select the NC sequence to use. It does not have to be of exactly
the same type as the current one. The system will read in the applicable
parameters and ignore those that are not valid for the current NC sequence
type. However, the system will not check for the appropriate parameter
values. For example, TYPE_3 is a valid SCAN_TYPE for Milling, but is
invalid for Holemaking. If the value retrieved is not applicable for this NC
sequence type, the system will issue a warning and automatically reset the
parameter to its default value.
1. Choose Site from the MFG PARAMS menu. You will have the following options:
150
Þ Cur Workcell—Use the site(s) associated with the current workcel. Use this option
to use the default sites for the workcell after activating some other site.
Þ Current Dir—Retrieve site files from the current directory. Select a site type. Only
the site types that are appropriate for the current workcell type will be listed.
Þ In Session—Use site files that have been created or retrieved in the current session.
2. Appropriate sites will be listed in a namelist menu. Select a name of the site to use.
3. The “.sit file will be read in, its default values initializing the NC sequence parameters. If
some of the default values are missing, supply them using the Set option.
Note: You can use Part Rel for the workpiece in Part manufacturing if the relation
contains only the NC sequence (not tool) parameters and workpiece dimensions.
3. Choose Tool Info or NC Seq Info if necessary to check on the parameter exact names
and current values. NC Seq Info gives you the feature internal ID for the NC sequence.
4. Select the reference part and/or the workpiece to display dimensions in symbolic form.
5. Choose Add and enter the relation. Enter parameters using the syntax above.
PARAM_NAME:FID_#
where:
Example:
151
The tool parameter syntax is:
PARAM_NAME:TID_ID
where:
ID—the TOOL_ID.
Example:
Options Tool Info and NC Seq Info in the RELATIONS menu, accessible in
Manufacture mode only, facilitate using tool and NC sequence parameters in
relations. They display parameters (including ID) for a selected tool or NC
sequence, respectively.
Sites
About Sites
The Site option in the PARAM SETUP menu allows you to set up NC sequence
specific or generic sites that can be later used to specify parameters for NC
sequences.
Warning: When you start using a new release of Pro/NC, make sure to
update your existing site files whenever there is a change in the way the
system interprets a parameter value. Parameter values in site files are not
updated automatically.
1. From the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, choose Mfg Setup > Param Setup >
Site > Create.
2. Enter the name for the site. The system will automatically add a suffix corresponding to
the site type and extension “.sit (for example, “mach1_mil.sit).
152
4. A Pro/TABLE window comes up with all the manufacturing parameters required for this
type of NC sequence (for a generic site, all the parameters will be present). Supply values
for the parameters. Each parameter must have either a default value, or low and high
range, or both, specified. If omitting the default value, enter a dash (-). If both are
specified, the default value must be within the range boundaries. You can also specify
visibility and add optional comments for any parameters.
When specifying a parameter value, you can enter relations, similar to modifying the
parameters of an NC sequence. However, when an NC sequence inherits the site
parameters, it will inherit the evaluated value of this relation, not the relation itself.
Parameter Visibility
• When you set up site parameters, two columns are available for each parameter:
Þ MFG INFO VISIBLE—Specifies if the parameter should be listed when you display
Manufacturing Info.
The default values for all parameters are YES for both columns. If you set a value to NO,
this parameter will not be visible.
If you specify that a parameter is invisible in NC sequences, it must have a set default
value before the site may be accepted by Pro/NC. If you set a parameter with a “-1 value
to be invisible, the system will issue an error message and allow you to re-edit the site
table.
• The Visibility option in the MFG PARAMS menu allows you to modify parameter
visibility:
When you select this option, a Pro/TABLE window appears with the list of all parameters
and the two visibility columns, as described above.
153
Manipulating Sites
• Modify—Modify parameters of a site. Select a site name from the menu. The editor
window comes up with the current site parameters.
• Retrieve—Retrieve an existing site file from disk. Select a site name from the menu, or
choose Names and enter the path and name of the site file.
• Save—Save a site file to disk. Select a site name from the menu. You have to save a site
in order to use it in other manufacturing models.
• Delete—Delete a site. Select a site name from the menu, then confirm that you really
want to delete the site. If the site has been used by an NC sequence, the system will issue
a warning. If you delete such a site, all NC sequence parameters inherited from this site
will be treated as customized (non-inherited).
• Show—Display information about an existing site. Select a site name from the menu.
To Activate a Site
The Activate option in the SITE SETUP menu allows you to make a site
active. Before being activated, the site must be added to the manufacturing
model using the Create or Retrieve option. Only one site of a particular
type can be active at a time.
1. Choose Activate.
Þ Cur Workcell—Activate the site(s) associated with the current workcell. Use this
option to quickly revert to the default sites for the workcell after activating some
other site.
Þ In Session—Select a site other than the default site(s). Only the sites that have
been created or retrieved in the current session will be available. Select a site name
154
(or several names) from the namelist menu. Sites of the same type are mutually
exclusive.
Activating a Site
When you create an NC sequence, the parameters of the active site will be
the default parameters. The system will look for an NC sequence specific
active site first (for example, Milling), then for a generic active site. If neither
is found, the system default parameters will be used.
Note: When you activate an operation, the site(s) associated with the
operation’s workcell are activated automatically.
1. When creating a workcell, choose Site from the CELL SETUP menu. To associate a site
with an existing workcell, choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING
menu, Workcell, Modify, and select the workcell name. Then choose Site from the
CELL SETUP menu.
Þ In Session—Use site files that have been created or retrieved in the current session.
3. Select a site type. Only the site types that are appropriate for the current workcell type
will be listed.
4. The list of sites of the selected type appears in the menu. Select a site name.
5. Repeat the steps above to select more than one site, if needed, then select Done.
You can associate more than one site with a workcell, because different types
of NC sequences created on a workcell may require different parameter
settings. However, only one site of a particular type can be associated with
155
the workcell. The table below lists the site types that may be associated with
the each workcell type.
Turning
Holemaking
Mill Generic
Milling
Holemaking
Mill/Turn Generic
Milling
Turning
Holemaking
WEDM Generic
WEDM
Machinability Database
Feed rate and spindle speed parameters for milling, turning, and holemaking
can be initialized using the Machinability Database (MDB) files.
MDB files can be created through the Mach DB option in the PARAM
SETUP menu, or as ASCII files outside of Pro/ENGINEER. The expected
format of these files is dependent on the NC sequence type.
pro_mdb_dir pathname
156
pro_mdb_dir /usr/users/mach_db
The MDB files for milling, turning, and holemaking must be placed under the
machinability database directory (or under the working directory if the
machinability database directory is not set up) in subdirectories named
“mill_db, “turn_db, and “drill_db, respectively. You will not be able to create
an MDB file using the Mach DB option if the default subdirectory for it does
not exist.
3. After selecting an option from the MDB SETUP menu, specify an NC sequence type:
Milling, Turning, or Drilling.
Þ File—Create, modify, or show an MDB file. If you are creating a new file, the
Pro/TABLE window will appear. For Modify and Show, the menu-driven search
will be initiated in the appropriate directory (“mill_db, “turn_db, or “drill_db).
When you create a new file, the Pro/TABLE window appears with the default
file headers. Fill in the appropriate values. If you want to specify the same
value as in the previous entry, leave the cell blank or put in a dash (-). If this
parameter is to be ignored for a particular entry, type n/a.
Although MDB files are created through model setup, they can eventually be
used in any manufacturing model. When you create an NC sequence, you will
have an option to look up an MDB file. This will initialize the feed and speed
parameters based on the tool size, tool and workpiece material, cut depth.
157
Machinability Database Units
If you check off Units when creating or modifying MDB files, the MDB UNITS
menu will appear with the following options:
• Cut Depth—Specify the cut depth units (applicable for Milling and Turning). The
options are: Inch, Foot, Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter. The system default is Inch.
• TL Width—Specify the tool width units (applicable for Turning only). The options are:
Inch, Foot, Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter. The system default is Inch.
• TL Diam—Specify the tool diameter units (applicable for Drilling only). The options are:
Inch, Foot, Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter. The system default is Inch.
Note: Conversion of existing MDB files is not provided. that is, if you modify units
of an existing MDB file, the values will stay the same.
UNITS FEED SPEED CUT DEPTH TOOL WIDTH TOOL DIAM HARDNESS
Milling inch/toot foot/min inch n/a n/a Bhn
h
Turning inch/rev inch n/a
If you modify an MDB file whose units differ from the current MDB units, the
system will issue a warning and prompt you to reset the current units to
those of the file. If you confirm, the current defaults for MDB units will be
reset. If you cancel, the units in the current MDB file will be changed to
match the default units. The values will stay the same!
158
If you select Show from the MDB SETUP menu and then check off Units, the
Information Window will appear with the current default units for the
appropriate MDB type (Milling, Turning, or Drilling).
You can use an MDB library file (“*.mdb) to set CUT_FEED and
SPINDLE_SPEED for a milling, turning, or holemaking NC sequence. The
file must already exist in the corresponding subdirectory (“mill_db, “turn_db,
or “drill_db) of the machinability database directory, or of your working
directory if the machinability database directory has not been set up.
You will be prompted to supply necessary data about the cut and tool, using a
Pro/TABLE window. Supply the values for all listed parameters.
159
4. If the table lookup is successful, the CUT_FEED and SPINDLE_SPEED parameters will
be set to values derived from the table, either directly or by linear (one- or two-
dimensional) interpolation. At the same time:
Notes:
Þ You have to set up the tool before using the MDB Library.
Þ If you change any of the values on which the parameter selection depends, the
parameters will not be updated automatically. You will have to go through the
parameter retrieval process again to reflect the changes.
• Show Error—Display the most recent error message produced by MDB lookup.
Good Practice
• Assign workpiece material in Part mode using Set Up, Material. Workpiece hardness
and condition will be automatically looked up in the material file.
• Provide values for the tool parameters Num_Of_Teeth (for milling) and Tool_Material. If
using a tool model, set up tool material and number of teeth.
160
Milling
General Information
• Surface Mill—3- to 5-Axis milling of horizontal or slanted surfaces. You are given a
choice of several methods for defining the cut.
• Swarf Mill—5-Axis milling of a series horizontal or slanted surfaces by cutting with the
side of the tool.
• Trajectory—3- to 5-Axis milling, with the tool moving along a specified trajectory.
• Engraving—3- to 5-Axis milling, with the tool moving along a Groove cosmetic feature.
To Select Surfaces
161
Surfaces to be milled are selected using the Surfaces option in the SEQ
SETUP menu. They can be selected from:
• Mill Volume—Create or select a Mill Volume, then select all or some surfaces from this
volume.
• Mill Surface—Create or select a Mill Surface. Specify which side of the surface to mill
using Flip and Okay options (arrow shows the side). Select all or some patches from the
milling surface.
Note: In Assembly machining, the Workpiece option does not appear. The Model
option enables you to select surfaces from any part in the manufacturing assembly.
After you have specified from where the surfaces are to be selected, the
SELECT SRFS menu appears:
• Add—Select surfaces to mill. If selecting from a Mill Volume or Mill Surface, you have a
choice of:
Þ Select—Select surfaces to be milled. You can either select individual surfaces, or use
the Pick Many option in the GET SELECT menu and draw a rectangular box on the
screen by selecting its two diagonal points; all surfaces completely covered by this
box will be selected.
Þ Select All—All surfaces included in the Mill Volume/Mill Surface definition will be
milled.
• Show—When you choose this option, all currently selected surfaces are highlighted in
cyan.
• Change—Appears only when selecting from a Mill Volume or Mill Surface. Allows you to
select or create another Mill Volume/Mill Surface, or modify the current one. You can
then proceed adding and removing surfaces using the options above.
162
• Loop—Select a closed loop of surfaces by choosing a face they surround. If there is more
than one loop of edges (for example, there is a hole in the selected surface), you will be
prompted to select an edge to use. This option is especially helpful for Profiling.
These options will also be available when you use Remove Single for
Profiling.
Note: Selecting by Loop does not parametrically gather surfaces. For example, if you
want to be able to replace the reference part with another family instance that has more,
or fewer, surfaces than the original one, and have the tool path automatically update, use
a Mill Surface created by Gather, Surf & Bnd.
• When selecting surfaces to be milled using Model or Workpiece, you can only select
surfaces from one quilt. You will then be prompted to specify which side to use by
flipping an arrow.
• When selecting check surfaces, you can select as many entire quilts and individual quilt
surfaces as needed. Upon selecting Done Sel, these selections are highlighted one-by-one
and you are prompted to specify the side by flipping an arrow. When an entire quilt is
selected, it is considered to be a single selection, and you will only have to specify the side
just once.
163
Notes:
Þ Automatic gouge avoidance is not implemented for Mill type tools with Side_Angle >
0. Use Taper Mill tools for automatic degouging.
The Check Surfs option in the SEQ SETUP menu, available for
Conventional, Contour Surface, Trajectory, and Profile milling (and for Local
Milling referencing a Conventional or Contour milling NC sequence), allows
you to select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will be
performed, or unselect some of the surfaces selected automatically. Selecting
this option brings up the SRF PRT SEL menu with the following options:
• Add Ref Prts—A checkmark next to this option means that all surfaces of the reference
part (or, in case of Assembly machining, of all reference parts) will be included as Check
Surfaces.
• Sel Surf—Select or unselect individual surfaces using the SELECT SRFS menu, which
allows you to add, remove, and show surfaces that will be used for gouge checking.
Additional options will be available when adding surfaces or removing them using the
Remove Single option:
Note: If you use a Mill Window, the system automatically performs gouge checking
against all the surfaces of the reference part(s); therefore, the Add Ref Prts option is not
available, and when you add surfaces using the Sel Surf option, reference parts are not
selectable.
The system automatically includes all surfaces of the reference part (or, in
case of Assembly machining, of all reference parts) as Check Surfaces for the
following types of NC sequences:
164
• Local Milling By Previous Tool
You can override this default by unselecting Add Ref Prts in the SRF PRT
SEL menu.
When you create a 4-Axis milling NC sequence, the 4 Axis Plane option will
appear in the SEQ SETUP menu in addition to all the other options
appropriate for this particular NC sequence type. This is a plane to which the
tool axis will be parallel. You can select a planar surface or select or create a
datum plane. You can also specify values for lead angle and tilt angle of the
tool axis with respect to the 4 Axis Plane, as well as enable variable lead
angle control using the 4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT parameter.
The system will generate CL data as if for 5-Axis milling and then
automatically recompute it so that the tool axis is always parallel to the
specified plane. The following shows the difference in CL output between a 5-
Axis and a 4-Axis Conventional Surface milling NC sequence.
4- Axis
Plane
5-Axis 4-Axis
!AL("About_Milling_NC_Sequences",0,`',`')
165
To Specify Negative Stock Allowance
• For Volume, Local, Conventional, Contour, and Pocket milling, negative stock allowance
value must be less than Corner_Radius of the tool.
• For Profile and Trajectory milling, any negative value may be specified.
!AL("About_Milling_NC_Sequences",0,`',`')
For all Milling NC sequence types, except Trajectory Milling, the system
automatically generates an Auto Plunge and the default Automatuc Cut
motion. You can either accept the motions automatically generated by the
system (and supplement them with the Approach and Exit Tool Motions, if
needed), or delete them and generate your own Automatic Cut motions, as
well as Approach and Exit Tool Motions. For Trajectory Milling, cut geometry
is not specified at the time of NC sequence setup; you have to use the
Customize functionality to generate the Automatic Cut, Approach, and Exit
Tool Motions.
This option is available only if the NC sequence’s tool path has not been
customized. If you define Build Cut items at the NC sequence level, and then
attempt to customize the tool path, the system prompts you first to delete the
items defined at the NC sequence level. An Info Window opens with a list of
items you must delete. The Build Cut functionality at the NC sequence level
is available for Volume, Local, Profile milling, Conventional Surface milling,
Contour Surface milling (including Surf/Surf, Cutline, and ProjToolPath),
Face milling, and Pocketing.
166
The Build Cut functionality at the NC sequence level is identical to that at
the Automatic Cut motion level.
!AL("About_Milling_NC_Sequences",0,`',`')
The Axis Def option in the SEQ SETUP menu enables you to control the
orientation of the tool axis for 5-axis Contouring and Conventional surface
milling NC sequences, including Cut Line machining.
• Points on Surface—Select points at which to define the orientation of the tool axis; in the
regions between selected points, Pro/NC will gradually interpolate the correct axis
orientation for the tool. Axis orientation is interpolated using a weighted average of the
tool axis orientations specified at the nearest selected points. If values have been
specified for the parameters LEAD_ANGLE and TILT_ANGLE, these values will not be
taken into consideration when interpolating the default axis orientation, but will be
added/subtracted to/from that value after it has been calculated. For Cutline machining,
you can also define tool axis orientation along the cutlines.
• Pivot Point—Select or create a datum point to be used as pivot point for the tool. The tool
axis will always pass through this point while machining the surface(s).
• Pivot Curve—Select an open or closed loop of edges or curves that will be used to guide
the tool axis. The tool axis will always pass through some point of the pivot curve while
machining the surface(s). All entities that form the pivot curve must be tangent to each
other. You can have the system automatically synchronize tool path with pivot curve or
define your own synchronization.
Point on Surface and Pivot Curve axis definitions can be used in 4-Axis
Milling. For Points on Surface, specified tool axes will be projected onto the 4-
Axis Plane and then interpolated.
1. When choosing the references that you need to define for the NC sequence, choose Axis
Def from the SEQ SETUP menu.
3. Choose Add from the AXIS DEF menu. The AXIS DEF OPT menu appears with the
following options:
167
Þ Along Cutline—(Available for Cutline Machining only) Specify the tool axis
orientation along the cutlines.
Þ Location—Specify the tool axis orientation at a datum point. The datum point may
be located anywhere on the surface being machined. Select or create a datum point
at which to define the tool axis orientation.
Þ Drive Surf—Select a surface (or multiple surfaces) to adjust the tool axis
orientation for the selected edges (optional).
4. Choose Edge and select edges for axis control. The edges must form a continuous chain.
You will then be prompted to specify the tool axis orientation at the start and end of each
edge using the AXIS DEF TYPE menu described following. If you selected a drive surface,
the tool orientation along the edge will be the average of the two endpoint orientations
adjusted by the shape of the drive surface. If you did not specify a drive surface, you will
have to create additional control points along the edge using the Location option.
5. Choose a command from the AXIS DEF TYPE menu to indicate the tool’s orientation at the
specified point:
Þ Along Z Dir—Specify the tool axis along the Z direction of the NC sequence
coordinate system.
Þ Datum Axis—Select or create a datum axis to specify the orientation of the tool
axis.
6. If you chose Datum Axis, select or create a datum axis to indicate the tool’s orientation
at that location.
7. The DIRECTION menu appears. Choose Flip or Okay to indicate the direction of the tool
axis. The axis orientation definition will be displayed as a magenta arrow originating at
the specified location.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for every point at which you want to define the tool axis
orientation.
168
Axis definition created using
Edge and Along Z Dir.
2. Choose Along Cutline and Done/Return from the AXIS DEF OPT menu.
3. The system highlights all the existing cutlines. Select a point along a cutline.
4. The ENTER VAL menu appears to let you specify this position as a parameter along the
entire length of the cutline (that is, 0.00 is the start point of the cutline and 1.00 is the
end of the entire cutline). The system also presents the parameter value corresponding to
the selected point and displays it as an option in the ENTER VAL menu. You can either
select this option, or choose Enter and type in another parameter value along the
cutline.
5. After you specify the location along the cutline, choose a command from the AXIS DEF
TYPE menu to indicate the tool’s orientation at the specified point.
6. Choose Add from the AXIS DEF menu and repeat Steps 2 through 5 for every point at
which you want to define the tool axis orientation, then choose Done Sel.
You can specify Drive Surfaces and apply them to axis definitions along
cutlines, as you do for axis definitions along edges.
169
The following options in the AXIS DEF menu allow you to manipulate existing
Points on Surface axis definitions:
If you choose Remove, Redefine, or Show from the AXIS DEF menu, you
will get a namelist menu of all the existing axis definitions (for example,
AXIS DEF BY EDGE #1, DRIVE SURFACES #1, and so on). As you place
the cursor over a name in the menu, the complete name appears at the
bottom of the message window (this is useful if the name is too long to fit
inside the menu), and the system highlights the corresponding geometry on
the screen. Axis definitions appear as magenta arrows. Cutlines and chains of
edges appear in magenta. Drive surfaces appear in cyan, with the
corresponding edges or cutlines that reference them highlighted in magenta.
If you choose Redefine and select an axis definition along the cutline, the
AXIS DEF REFS menu appears with the following options:
• Location—Select another point along the cutline and enter the new parameter value.
• Orientation—Change the tool axis orientation by using the AXIS DEF TYPE menu
options.
If you choose Redefine and select a Drive Surface definition, the DRV SRF
REFS menu appears with the following options:
• Axis Def Set—Modify the list of axis definitions that reference these drive surfaces. A
checkmark menu appears with all the applicable axis definitions; select additional
definitions by checking them off, or unselect some of the ones currently selected. Choose
Done Sel when you are finished.
1. When choosing the references that you need to define for the NC sequence, choose Axis
Def from the SEQ SETUP menu.
Þ Define—Brings up the CR/SEL PVT menu to allow you to select or create a datum
point to serve as a pivot point.
170
Þ Remove—Delete the existing pivot point.
1. When choosing the references that you need to define for the NC sequence, choose Axis
Def from the SEQ SETUP menu.
Þ Define—Brings up the CHAIN menu to let you select entities to define the pivot
curve. All entities of the pivot curve must be tangent to each other.
Þ Adjust Tool—(Appears for Cut Line machining only.) Adjust the tool axis positions
along the pivot curve by specifying synchronization points (synch points). Click for
details.
3. Check off the Preview option, if desired. If this option is checked off, the system will
display the tool axis positions as you add synch points.
4. Choose Set Axis. The SYNCH menu appears with the following options:
Þ Add—Select pairs of synch points along the pivot curve and the cutlines.
Þ Show—Show the pairs of synch points currently defined and the corresponding tool
axis positions in cyan. You can either display them in turn by using the Next and
Previous options, or use Show All.
171
Þ Redefine—Modify a pair of synch points. Select a synch line (that is, tool axis
position) to change, by selecting anywhere on the line. Then specify new locations for
the synch points, similar to when adding a new pair.
7. The system highlights a cutline and prompts you to select a point on that cutline. If the
Preview option is on, the tool axis position appears as a red line after you select a point
on the cutline.
8. Specify other pairs of synch points by repeating the two steps above. Choose Done Sel
when finished.
Volume Milling
The following graphic illustrates the depth of the first slice for Volume
milling.
172
First slice is at slice depth below
the top of mill volume. First slice is at slice depth
below the top of the workpiece.
Workpiece
Mill volume
Mill volume
No workpiece geometry
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
Þ Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Volume are mutually
exclusive. If you check off the Window option, then the checkmark next to the
Volume option is automatically turned off, and the DEFINE WIND menu appears
with the following options:
Redef Wind—Redefine the Mill Window used by the NC sequence. This option is
only available if the window is created or selected.
173
Create Wind—Create a new Mill Window.
Þ Top Surfaces—Explicitly define the “top surfaces, that is, surfaces of a mill volume
that can be penetrated by the tool when creating the tool path. This option has to be
used only if some of the top surfaces of the volume are not parallel to the retract
plane. If Mill Window is used, this option is not available. The window start plane
will be used as the top surface.
Þ Appr Walls—Select side surfaces of a mill volume, or sides of the Mill Window, that
can be violated during tool approach and exit.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
The following illustration shows a Mill Volume and corresponding tool path
for a Volume NC sequence.
For Volume milling, the tool is supposed to always be inside the milling
volume. In some cases, however, you may want to perform cutting by the side
174
of the tool only, that is, to make tool plunge outside the material. The Appr
Walls option in the SEQ SETUP menu allows you to select side surfaces of a
mill volume that can be violated during tool approach and exit. The user
interface for selecting these surfaces is the same as for other types of surface
selection in Milling.
If a Mill Window is used, then you will be prompted to select entities from the
window curve (that is, the window outline in the start plane) rather than
surfaces from the Mill Volume. Selected entities will be used as sides of the
tool approach.
If Approach Walls have been defined, the system will attempt to make an
approach and exit for every slice through these walls and plunge outside
material, as shown in the following illustration. The length of approach/exit
extension is defined by the APPR_EXIT_EXT parameter plus tool radius.
If the Approach Walls have been specified, the datum point, axis, or sketch
used for approach or exit in Build Cut can be outside the milling volume.
Profiling passes will not be created along the surfaces selected as Approach
Walls.
High speed machining (both roughing and profiling) is available for 2.5-axis
Volume sequences.
175
• Constant cutting condition
The following Automatic Cut motion types are available for Volume, Local,
and Profile milling:
The first three options produce a single Automatic Cut motion each, no
matter how many slices are generated. In Slice/Slice, each slice represents a
separate Automatic Cut motion. You can use more than one option per an NC
sequence; every time a new Automatic Cut motion will be added.
176
Example: Automatic Cut Motion Types
The following illustration shows Automatic Cut motion types for Volume,
Local, and Profile milling.
Depth
First depth
From depth First slice
Second slice
Second depth
To Depth
Third slice
• Build Cut—Add or remove slices and specify approach and exit motions for each slice in
the cut motion. Also allows you to perform region-by-region milling.
177
• Info—Brings up the INFO ITEMS menu which provides the following information:
Þ Cut Motion—Displays the feature ID of the current cut motion and the cut motion
parameters in the INFO window.
Þ Tool—Displays the tool ID, type, and parameters in the Information Window; a
subwindow also appears, displaying the tool.
This Automatic Cut motion will include slices from the system start and up to
a specified depth. The same options will be available as for the default
Automatic Cut motion, but you also have to specify the final depth.
This Automatic Cut motion will include slices in a specified range of depths.
The same options will be available as for the default Automatic Cut motion,
but you also have to specify the “From and “To depths.
This option allows you to explicitly specify the depth of each slice. Note that
each slice will represent a separate Automatic Cut motion.
2. Choose Depth and specify the depth of the slice. You can also use the Parameters
option to modify parameters for this particular slice.
Note: If at this point you choose Depth again, you will modify the depth of the current
slice, not create a new one.
178
4. Choose Done when satisfied with the current slice.
5. Choose Next Slice from the NEXT SLICED menu, and repeat steps 2 through 4 to define
another slice. The Play Cut option always shows the current slice only.
6. When the desired number of slices has been generated, choose Done/Return from the
NEXT SLICED menu.
The Build Slice option, which replaces the Build Cut option for this cut
motion type, allows you to define approach and exit motions for the current
slice.
To Specify Depth
• For From-To Depth motion: From Depth—the depth of the first slice, To Depth—the
depth of the last slice.
• Specify Plane—Select a planar surface or datum plane parallel to the retract plane.
You will also have an option to make a datum plane “on the fly.
The Play Cut option allows you to display the cut motion as it is currently
defined. You can then specify different depth value(s) if desired.
2. If By Region is checked off, the APPR EXIT TYPE menu will appear:
Þ Whole Volume—The approach (exit) motion will apply to all slices in all regions.
Þ Select Region—The approach (exit) motion will apply to the slices of a selected
region only. Select the region by selecting on the appropriate slice boundary.
179
3. Select an option from the APPR EXIT OPT menu:
Þ Datum Point—Create or select a datum point to be used as a start (end) point. The
point will be projected normal to the retract plane on all applicable slices; these
projections will be used as a start (end) point for each slice.
Þ Axis—Create or select an axis to be used as a start (end) point. The axis can belong
either to the workpiece or to the design model, and must be normal to the retract
plane.
Þ Sketch—Sketch the approach (exit) path for the tool in the XY plane of the NC
Sequence coordinate system. The approach path must finish (and the exit path—
start) so that the tool lies completely inside the area of the cut.
The Build Cut option allows you to add or remove slices and specify
approach and exit motions for each slice in the cut motion. It also allows you
to specify whether you want to machine across the whole milling volume at a
particular Z depth, or to completely machine a pocket before going to the next
one (region-by-region milling). This functionality is available for Automatic,
Upto Depth, and From-To Depth cut motion types, for Volume and Local
milling.
4
1
(Top basin) 3
When you choose Build Cut, the BUILD CUT menu appears with the
following options:
180
• By Slice—Slices will be generated by intersecting the whole volume at a particular Z
depth.
• By Region—The volume will be automatically broken into regions. Each region will be
completely machined upto depth before going to the next region. Separate approach and
exit paths can be specified for each region.
• Show Slices—Display the slices by marking their corners in cyan. You can either use
the Show All option, all step through the slices using the Next and Previous options.
• Add Slice—Specify depth for a new slice using the Specify Plane and Z Depth
options. Use the Update Slices option after adding slices.
• Show Regions—(Available only if By Region is checked off.) Show the volume regions
by displaying their critical slices. You can either use the Show All option, or step
through the regions using the Next and Previous options.
• Skip Region—(Available only if By Region is checked off.) Select regions that will not
be milled.
• Undo—Delete a Build Cut action. A menu with all the actions created so far will appear;
select an action to delete.
• Redo—Redefine a Build Cut action. A menu with all the actions created so far will
appear; select an action to redefine, then respecify the action references (such as depth,
sketch).
The following illustration shows defining approach and exit using the Axis
option.
181
This axis is selected for
approach and exit point.
The following illustration shows sketching approach and exit for Build Cut.
Approach sketch
Exit sketch
Local Milling
• Prev NC Seq—Remove material left after a Volume, Profile, Surface, or another Local
milling NC sequence, usually with a smaller tool. When you create a Local milling NC
sequence, you will be prompted to select a reference NC sequence. The system will then
compute the material left by the reference NC sequence and machine away this material
only. After a Volume or Profile NC sequence, you can do region-by-region milling. If a
Surface milling NC sequence is used as a reference sequence, a remainder surface,
representing the leftover material, will be generated for this NC sequence. You can
generate this remainder surface at the time of creating the parent NC sequence by
setting the REMAINDER_SURFACE parameter to YES. The following illustration shows
Local milling by reference.
182
Volume milling performed Local milling
with a large tool. removes the
leftover material.
Previous radius
(CORNER_OFFSET)
183
UPCUT CLIMB NONE
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
2. Choose Local Mill and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Prev NC Seq and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
5. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
Þ Order—This option can be used to reorder patches of the remainder surface if the
reference sequence is an Isolines Surface Milling NC sequence.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
Þ CntrSrfLocal—The cut motions will be performed along the u-v surface lines. If the
leftover surface consists of multiple patches, you will have control over the order of
machining.
Þ Cnvnl Local—The cut motions will be parallel to the X-axis of the NC Sequence
coordinate system. If the leftover surface consists of multiple patches, the system
184
will completely machine each of the patches before going to the next one (similar to
SCAN_TYPE TYPE_3 in Conventional surface milling). The patches will be
machined in a default order.
8. If the sequence type is CntrSrfLocal, and the leftover surface consists of multiple
patches, you will be able to reorder them using the Order option in the SEQ SETUP
menu. The ORDER PATCH menu will appear with the options:
Þ Define Order—Specify the order of machining by using the Next Surface option in
the CNTR ORDER menu and selecting the next surface to machine. Choose Done
Order when finished. You do not have to order all surfaces. Those surfaces that
were not explicitly ordered (or defined as skipped, see the next option) will be
machined at the end in some default order.
Þ Show—Display the current order of machining the surfaces. The first surface to be
machined will be highlighted. Choose Next from the SHOW ORDER menu to
highlight the next surface to be machined. Choose Done/Return to quit.
9. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
10. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
2. Choose Local Mill and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Corner Edges and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
5. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
185
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
7. Selecting Corner Edges from the SEQ REFS menu will bring up the CORNER EDG menu:
Þ Suggest—Show possible corners based on the surface selection in the previous step.
This option is for information purposes only: the corners to be milled have to be
explicitly defined using the Define option below.
Þ Define—Define corners by either selecting surfaces that form a corner using the
Surfaces option, or selecting the corner edges themselves using the Edges option.
Remove Single—Allows you to step through the specified corners using the Next
and Previous options. Unselect a corner using the Accept option.
8. After defining the corners, choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically
generated by the system. If not satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use
the Customize functionality to adjust the tool path.
9. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
2. Choose Local Mill and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose By Prev Tool and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
5. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
Þ Prev Tool—Specify the “previous (larger) tool, which will be used for calculating the
remainder material. The previous tool must be a ball end mill. The user interface for
specifying the “previous tool is the same as for specifying the current tool.
186
Note: If you perform Local Milling by previous tool immediately after machining
with a large tool, do not forget to select the Tool option in the SEQ SETUP menu and
specify a smaller current tool.
Þ Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Surfaces are mutually
exclusive. If you use the Window option, then all the surfaces within the specified
Mill Window will be selected.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
6. Selecting Machine Srfs from the SEQ REFS menu will bring up the MACHINE SRFS
menu with the following options:
Þ Select Surf—Select a subset off surfaces to machine. To use this option, first turn
off the checkmark next to the Machine All option above.
Þ Order Surf—Customize the order of machining the surfaces. The ORDER PATCH
menu appears with the following options:
Define Order—Specify the order of machining by using the Next Surface option in
the CNTR ORDER menu and selecting the next surface to machine. Choose Done
Order when finished. You do not have to order all surfaces: when computing the CL
data, the system will mill the ordered surfaces first, and then mill any leftover
surfaces.
Show—Show the current order of machining. Use the Next option in the SHOW
ORDER menu to highlight the next surface to be machined.
7. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
8. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
187
Surface Milling
• Straight Cut—Mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts. For 3-Axis NC
sequences, you can also remove material in depth increments.
• From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-v lines.
• Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, and some
intermediate cuts. When the system generates the tool path, it gradually changes the
shape of the cuts according to surface topology.
• Projected Cuts—Mill the selected surfaces by projecting their contours on the retract
plane, creating a “flat tool path in this plane (using the appropriate scan type), and then
projecting this tool path back on the original surface(s). This method is available for 3-
Axis Surface Milling only.
Depending on the selected method, you have to define the cut by specifying
appropriate parameters and geometric references.
When you redefine a Surface Milling NC sequence, you can change the Cut
Type (that is, select a different method of defining the cut and specify the
new parameters and references) and produce a different tool path.
When you create a Surface Milling NC sequence, you are given a choice of
several methods for defining the cut. Depending on the selected method, the
tool path will be different. You can change the Cut Type (that is, select a
different method of defining the cut and specify the new parameters and
references) at any time when you redefine a Surface Milling NC sequence.
188
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
2. Click Surface Mill. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis if applicable. Click Done.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
Þ Close Loops—Specify loops to close for Window machining. Appears for 3-Axis NC
sequences only.
Þ Define Cut—Define the method of surface milling and specify the appropriate
parameters.
Þ Axis Def—Control the orientation of the tool axis. Appears for 4- and 5-axis NC
sequences only.
The required options are selected automatically. Select additional options, if desired, and
choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
4. When you start to define the cut, the system opens the Cut Definition dialog box.
Specify a method of defining the cut by selecting one of the following options:
Þ From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-v
lines.
Þ Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, and
some intermediate cuts. When generating other cuts, the system gradually changes
their shape to accommodate surface topology.
189
type), and then projecting this tool path back on the original surface(s). This option
is available for 3-Axis Surface Milling only.
Depending on the selected method, the system displays the appropriate options in the
lower portion of the Cut Definition dialog box.
5. Select the appropriate options in the Cut Definition dialog box and specify geometric
references to define the cut according to the selected method. Click for details. When
satisfied with the cut definition, click OK to close the Cut Definition dialog box and
generate the tool path.
6. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Play Path to verify the tool path automatically
generated by the system. Use the Customize functionality, if needed, to adjust the tool
path.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Straight Cut.
Þ Relative to X-Axis—The direction of the cuts is defined by an angle from the x-axis
of the NC Sequence coordinate system. The initial value in the Cut Angle text box
corresponds to that of the CUT_ANGLE parameter. You can change the direction by
typing a different value.
Straight Cut surface milling NC sequences generate the tool path which will:
• Completely machine the selected surface(s). If a surface is not bounded by walls on the
outside, the tool will “straddle, that is, overrun the surface boundary by a half diameter.
190
• Any inner protrusions, as well as the outer walls extending up from the surface, will be
avoided automatically. The stock allowance, if any, will apply to the side walls as well.
• If a surface is selected from model, any slots or holes on the surface will be “patched: the
tool path will be generated as if they were not there.
• If you want to eliminate negative Z moves of the tool (for example, when machining hard
materials), use the ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES parameter. It is applicable for 3-Axis NC
sequences only.
The following illustration shows handling inner loops and outer walls for
Straight Cut surface milling.
For 3-Aixs Straight Cut milling, you can control the start point and direction
of machining the surface by using a combination of CUT_TYPE,
SPINDLE_SENSE, and CUT_DIRECTION parameters (see the following
table ). The LACE_OPTION parameter must be set to NO.
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTION
STANDARD
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_DIRECTION
191
STANDARD
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTION
STANDARD
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_DIRECTION
STANDARD
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTION
REVERSE
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_DIRECTION
REVERSE
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTION
REVERSE
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_DIRECTION
REVERSE
You can select any type of end mill, including flat and radius end mills, for
Straight Cut surface milling of convex surfaces. The gouge avoidance will be
calculated automatically.
192
Use this method to mill a single surface, or several continuous surfaces. The
machining direction is defined by the natural u-v contour of the surface to be
milled. If multiple surfaces are selected, the machining direction is
determined separately for each surface.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select From Surface Isolines.
The system displays the names of the surfaces selected for milling in the Surface List
list box.
2. Select a surface name in the list box to preview the cut direction.
3. For each selected surface, you are given a choice of two directions, determined by the u-v
lines of the surface. Click , if necessary, to toggle between these directions.
4. If more than one surface is being machined, they will be milled in the same order as they
are listed in the list box. You can reorder the surfaces using the following methods:
Þ Select a surface name in the list box, then click the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
icons to move it up or down in the list.
5. If you click , the CNTR ORDER menu appears with the options:
Þ Next Surface—Select the first surface to be milled. This option will highlight
automatically after each selection allowing you to select surfaces in the order you
want them to be milled.
Þ Done Order—Select this option when you have specified all the surfaces you want
to be milled in a specific order. You do not have to order all the surfaces selected for
milling: when computing the CL data, the system will mill the ordered surfaces first,
and then mill any leftover surfaces.
6. When satisfied with the cut direction and the surface order, click OK.
For Surface Milling From Surface Isolines, the machining direction is defined
by the natural u-v contour of the surface to be milled. If the surface to
machine is at an angle with the coordinate system axes, you may want to use
the From Surface Isolines option rather than Straight Cut.
Isolines Surface Milling NC sequences generate the tool path which will:
• Completely machine the selected surface(s). If a surface is not bounded by walls on the
outside, the tool will “straddle, that is, overrun the surface boundary by a half diameter.
193
• Any inner protrusions, as well as the outer walls extending up from the surface, will be
avoided automatically. The stock allowance, if any, will apply to the side walls as well.
• Internal holes and slots will not be “patched. For 3-Axis milling, the tool will move over
internal slots or holes at a constant Z level, plunging or retracting at the lower edge as
necessary. For 4- and 5-Axis milling, the tool will retract at all inner edges. If you don’t
want this to happen, use a Mill Surface, or select a surface from a Mill Volume.
The following illustration shows using a Mill Surface for Isolines Surface
Milling.
If you select more than one surface, the surfaces must allow for a continuous
tool path. Each surface will be machined separately. You will be able to
specify the machining direction independently for each of the selected
surfaces. You will also be able to specify the order in which the surfaces will
be milled.
194
To Define a Cut Using Cut Lines
Use Cut Line Surface Milling to produce cuts shaped according to the surface
topology. This option gives you more control over the actual shape of the cuts
than the From Surface Isolines option.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Cut Line.
The system displays two tabbed pages, Cut Lines and Options, in the lower portion of
the Cut Definition dialog box.
2. Select a Cut Line Style option to define whether you are machining an open or closed loop
of surfaces.
3. Add cut lines by clicking the Plus (+) icon in the Setup Cut Lines area of the Cut Lines
tabbed page. You can define cut lines by selecting edges or datum curves, as well as by
sketching the cut lines and projecting on the surfaces to be machined.
Once you define a cut line, its name and type are listed in the list box above the action
buttons.
4. To delete a cut line, select it in the list box and click the Minus (-) icon.
Þ Select a cut line name in the list box, then click the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
icons to move it up or down in the list.
Þ Click to reorder the cut lines by selecting them on the screen. All the cut lines
are highlighted in cyan. Select the cut line to machine first. You can proceed
selecting the cut lines in the order you want them to be machined, or click Done Sel.
The rest of cut lines will be machined in default order.
7. To change the cutting direction, click . The system displays a red arrow to indicate
the current cutting direction. Use the Flip and Okay options to specify the direction.
When you select Cut Line as the Cut Type option, the system displays two
tabbed pages, Cut Lines and Options, in the lower portion of the Cut
Definition dialog box.
• Machined Surfaces—Define the cut lines by selecting edges or curves that belong to
the surfaces to be machined.
195
• Retract Plane—Define the cut lines in the Retract plane.
• Tool Extent—The system will generate a surface feature representing the zone of the
selected surfaces that can be machined using the current tool and parameters. You will
then be able to define the cut lines using the edges of this surface. The surface belongs to
the NC sequence. This option is available for 3-Axis milling only, and it will not be
available if a Side Mill tool is used.
The Toolpath Method options specify the mechanism for computing the tool
motion:
• Tool Contact—A Cut Line represents the trajectory of the tool contact point.
• Tool Centerline— A Cut Line represents the trajectory of the tool center.
Use the Setup Cut Lines area of the Cut Lines tabbed page to add, remove,
redefine, or reorder cut lines.
The proper Cut Line Style option depends on whether you are machining an
open or closed loop of surfaces:
• Open Ends—Machine an open surface loop. In this case, the system will expect all cut
lines to be open chains of edges, curves, or sketched entities. You will be able to adjust
the ends of the chain if you use curves or sketched entities to create a cut line.
• Closed Loops—Machine a closed surface loop. In this case, the system will expect all
cut lines to be closed loops of edges or curves. If the cut line is sketched, its projection on
the selected surfaces must also form a closed loop. You will have to specify a start point
for the cut motion by selecting on the cut line.
• Auto Inner Cutlines—If this check box is selected, the system will attempt to use edges
crossing all the specified synch lines as inner cut lines.
• Extend Cutlines to Boundary—If this check box is selected, the system will attempt
to extend the cut lines up to the boundary of the surface. Use this functionality when a
cut line does not extend the whole length of the surface selected for machining.
196
• Tool Center Curve—Calculate Machinable Area surface by based on the tool center
locations when generating the tool path.
The Synchronize Cut Lines area of the Options tabbed page contains the
tools for synchronizing cut lines:
• Plus (+) icon—Define the synch lines between the cut lines. Once you add a
Synchronizer, its name and type are listed in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
• —Redefine the Synchronizer selected in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
• Minus (-) icon—Delete the Synchronizer selected in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
• Auto Synchronize—If there are edges crossing all the selected cut lines, the system will
attempt to automatically determine if they should be used as the synch lines. It will
highlight all the synch lines when displaying the intermediate mesh for the tool path. If
you are not satisfied with the automatically selected synch lines, clear the Auto
Synchronize check box and select the appropriate synch lines manually, by using the
Plus (+) icon in the Synchronize Cut Lines area of the Options tab.
Use Cut Line Surface Milling to machine a region between open or closed
boundaries, called “cut lines. The “cut lines that you select or sketch
determine the shape of the first and last passes in the tool path; passes will
first mimic the shape of the edge or entity specified as the cut line, then
gradually change shape as necessary to accommodate different surface
topology.
Notes:
• You can perform Cut Line Surface Milling in step depth increments by using the
OFFSET_INCREMENT and NUMBER_CUTS parameters.
• You can machine undercuts in a 3-Axis NC sequence using a Side Mill tool. The gouge
avoidance for the entire tool with respect to cut surfaces will be calculated automatically.
The retract motions generated by the system will be checked for gouging, with problem
areas highlighted. Specify appropriate Approach and Exit motions if gouging is detected.
The following illustration shows Cut Line machining with Open Ends cut
lines.
197
Select this
chain as the
end cut line.
1 2 3
Select this
chain as the
start cut line.
The following illustration shows Cut Line machining with Closed Loops cut
lines.
part to machine
In some cases, when the surface topology changes abruptly at some point
between the start and end cut lines, you may need to specify intermediate cut
lines. In some cases, inner cut lines can also be selected automatically by
using the Auto Inner Cutlines option.
198
The following illustration shows specifying intermediate cut lines.
1. In the Setup Cut Lines area, on the Cut Lines tabbed page of the Cut Definition
dialog box, select a Cut Line Style option (Open Ends or Closed Loops) and click Add.
Þ From Edges—Define the cut line by selecting edges either on the surfaces selected
for milling, or on some other surfaces (specified using the Tool Extent or the
Alternate Surfaces option).
Þ Projected—Sketch the cut lines in the retract plane (or specify another sketching
plane). The system will project the sketched cut lines onto the surfaces to be
machined. The projection direction is parallel to the z-axis of the NC Sequence
coordinate system.
Þ From Surfaces—Define the cut lines using surface boundaries. You will be
prompted to select the surfaces using the SELECT SRFS menu options and then enter
the offset value for the surface boundaries. This option appears for 4- and 5-Axis
machining only.
3. Depending on the selected Cut Line Type option, select the edges, datum curves,
surfaces, or sketch the cut lines.
4. For Open Ends cut lines, if you use From Curves or Projected, you can adjust the
endpoints of the cut line by clicking Specify Ends.
5. For Closed Loops cut lines, click the Select Start Point button and select on the cut
line to specify the start point for machining. If you select somewhere along a cut line
199
entity (other than at an endpoint), you will be prompted to specify the placement of the
point as a length ratio along the selected entity. The options in the ENTER VAL menu
are:
Þ Enter, which allows you to enter any length ratio along the entity
7. When satisfied, click OK. The system lists the name and the type of the newly defined
cut line in the list box in the Setup Cut Lines area on the Cut Lines tabbed page of the
Cut Definition dialog box.
One of the methods of defining a cut line is using the edges of either the
surfaces selected for milling, or of some other surfaces (specified using the
Tool Extent or the Alternate Surfaces option).
When you define a cut line From Edges, the CHAIN menu appears,
providing the following methods of edge selection:
• Bndry Chain—Select boundaries of the specified surfaces. When you choose this option,
the whole boundary of the specified surfaces highlights in cyan. The CHAIN OPT menu
appears with the following options:
Þ From-To—Select a start vertex (curve end), then an end vertex (curve end). One of
the chains connecting these vertices highlights. Specify which chain you want to
include using the Next and Accept options.
• Surf Chain—Select a chain of edges that belong to the same surface. You will be
prompted to select a surface, and then specify which edges to include using either the
Select All or From-To options in the CHAIN OPT menu.
• Intent Chain—Select an edge. Based on this selection and the design intent criteria, the
system selects a chain of edges.
200
The Unselect option in the CHAIN menu allows you to cancel the previous
set of selections.
For Open Ends cut lines, if you create them as From Curves or Projected,
you may need to adjust the ends of the cut line to make it meet an edge
correctly, especially for 4- and 5-Axis machining.
Þ Start—Specify the end condition for the beginning of the cut motion.
Þ End—Specify the end condition for the end of the cut motion.
3. Use the following commands on the CUT START or the CUT END menu:
Þ On—Use the default start point or end point for the cut motion.
Þ Specify—Manually relocate the start point or end point for the cut motion. You can
move the mouse and extend the starting segment, displayed in green. When you
select a new location for the point, use the commands on the END DIM TYPE menu
(Ext Length, Offset Plane, or Offset Csys) to specify the dimension type for the
end.
1. Go to the Options tab of the Cut Definition dialog box and click the Plus (+) icon in
the Synchronize Cut Lines area.
201
The Synchronization dialog box opens.
Þ Projected—Sketch a synch line in the retract plane (or specify another sketching
plane). The system will project the sketched synch line onto the surfaces to be
machined. The projection direction is parallel to the z-axis of the NC Sequence
coordinate system.
Þ From Points—Specify synchronization points on the cut lines. Each cut line is in
turn highlighted in red. Select a location on the cut line to place a synch point.
Repeat for all the other cut lines. The system will create the synch line by connecting
the synch points with straight linear segments.
3. Click OK. The system lists the name and the type of the newly defined synch line in the
list box in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box on the Options tab of the Cut
Definition dialog box.
Use Projected Cuts Surface Milling when you need more control over the way
you scan the surfaces (for example, if you need to generate a spiral tool path).
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Projected Cuts.
202
The system redisplays the lower portion of the Cut Definition dialog box to contain the
Plus (+) and Minus (-) icons and a list box for defining the contours to be machined, as
well as the following options for defining the contour offsets:
Þ On—The contour to be machined will coincide with the projected contour of the
selected surfaces.
Þ Def Contrs—Select the contours to machine either by using the Select option and
selecting the contours (all selectable contours are highlighted in cyan), or using the
Select All option. Once a contour is selected, it is projected to the retract plane (the
projected contour is displayed in magenta).
Þ Def Offsets—If you select this option, you can define the contour offsets by scrolling
through all the contours being created.
The CNTR OFFSET menu opens. Use the Next and Prev commands to scroll through
the contours. Other commands on the CNTR OFFSET menu correspond to the options
for specifying offset in the Cut Definition dialog box. As you choose Next and Prev,
the current projected contour is highlighted in cyan (instead of magenta). As you
choose Left, Right, or change offset, the projection is redisplayed to reflect the
change.
Once you define a contour, its name and offset are listed in the list box.
3. To delete a contour, select it in the list box and click the Minus (-) icon.
4. To redefine the offset of a contour, select it in the list box and use the On, Left, Right,
and Boundary Offset Value options to change the offset.
The following illustration shows surface milling using projected tool path.
203
Flat tool path pattern in Tool path projected back
retract plane. onto the surfaces.
You can define automatic Entry and Exit moves for all types of Surface
Milling NC sequences and for Swarf Milling.
2. Specify the Entry moves for First Cut and Each Cut, and Exit moves for Each Cut and
Last Cut, by selecting options from respective drop-down lists. Click for details. If you
select CUSTOM_ENTRY or CUSTOM_EXIT, you can define Main, First Alternate,
and Second Alternate custom strategies for this move using the tabbed pages in the
right half of the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
3. You can save your Entry and Exit strategies by clicking the Save icon at the top of the
Entry/Exit Move dialog box. By default, the file is saved in your working directory with
the .apx extension. When defining Entry and Exit moves for a different NC sequence, you
can retrieve a previously saved strategy file by clicking the Open icon at the top of the
Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
4. When satisfied with your Entry and Exit move definitions, click OK.
• Entry/Exit Type—Lets you select standard strategies for entry and exit. You can
specify different entry strategies for
• Custom Strategies—Lets you define custom strategies for entry and exit.
204
Above the group boxes there are the Open and Save icons, for saving and
retrieving your Entry and Exit strategies. The OK and Cancel buttons are
located below the group boxes.
The Entry/Exit Type group box contains the following drop-down lists.
• First Cut—Select an entry move type for the first cut (approach move). The options are:
Þ LINE_TANGENT—The tool enters in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the
line is defined by the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter.
Þ HELIX—The tool enters along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by the
HELICAL_DIAMETER and RAMP_ANGLE parameters.
Þ RAMP—The tool enters at an angle. The move is defined by the RAMP_ANGLE and
CLEAR_DIST parameters.
Þ ARC_ENTRY—The tool enters along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the
arc is located in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate
system). The radius of the arc is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. The
angle of the arc is 180 degrees.
Þ ARC_TANGENT—The tool enters along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is,
the arc is located in a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NC
Sequence coordinate system). The move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS and
ENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
Þ LEAD_IN—The tool leads into the cut. The move is defined by the
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP, NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, and
ENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
• Each Cut—Select an entry move type for each intermediate cut. The options are:
205
Þ CUSTOM_ENTRY—Enter using the custom strategies, specified in the Custom
Strategies group box for this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, then
the system uses the First Alternate strategy, and so on. If all the custom strategies
cause gouging, then no entry move is created.
Þ LINE_TANGENT—The tool enters in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the
line is defined by the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter.
Þ HELIX—The tool enters along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by the
HELICAL_DIAMETER and RAMP_ANGLE parameters.
Þ ARC_ENTRY—The tool enters along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the
arc is located in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate
system). The radius of the arc is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. The
angle of the arc is 180 degrees.
Þ ARC_TANGENT—The tool enters along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is,
the arc is located in a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NC
Sequence coordinate system). The move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS and
ENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
Þ LEAD_IN—The tool leads into the cut. The move is defined by the
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP, NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, and
ENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
• Each Cut—Select an exit move type for each intermediate cut. The options are:
Þ LINE_TANGENT—The tool exits in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the line
is defined by the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter.
206
Þ HELIX—The tool exits along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by the
HELICAL_DIAMETER, RAMP_ANGLE, and PULLOUT_DIST parameters. The tool
leaves the surface in a helical motion at CUT_SPEED until it reaches
PULLOUT_DIST, then it retracts at RETRACT_SPEED. If you want the tool to exit
completely by a helical motion, set the configuration option
use_old_helical_exit to yes (the default is no).
Þ ARC_EXIT—The tool exits along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc
is located in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system).
The radius of the arc is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. The angle of the
arc is 180 degrees.
Þ ARC_TANGENT—The tool exits along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is, the
arc is located in a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NC
Sequence coordinate system). The move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS and
EXIT_ANGLE parameters.
Þ LEAD_OUT—The tool leads out of the cut. The move is defined by the
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP, NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, and
EXIT_ANGLE parameters.
• Last Cut— Select an exit move type for the last cut (exit move). The options are:
Þ LINE_TANGENT—The tool exits in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the line
is defined by the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter.
Þ HELIX—The tool exits along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by the
HELICAL_DIAMETER, RAMP_ANGLE, and PULLOUT_DIST parameters. The tool
leaves the surface in a helical motion at CUT_SPEED until it reaches
PULLOUT_DIST, then it retracts at RETRACT_SPEED. If you want the tool to exit
completely by a helical motion, set the configuration option
use_old_helical_exit to yes (the default is no).
Þ ARC_EXIT—The tool exits along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc
is located in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system).
The radius of the arc is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. The angle of the
arc is 180 degrees.
207
Þ ARC_TANGENT—The tool exits along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is, the
arc is located in a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NC
Sequence coordinate system). The move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS and
EXIT_ANGLE parameters.
Þ LEAD_OUT—The tool leads out of the cut. The move is defined by the
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP, NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, and
EXIT_ANGLE parameters.
The Custom Strategies group box contains three tabbed pages, Main, First
Alternate, and Second Alternate, for defining the custom strategies for
each cut type.
You can define Main, First Alternate, and Second Alternate custom
strategies for any cut using the tabbed pages in the right half of the
Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
Note: You can only define custom strategies for a cut if you have selected
CUSTOM_ENTRY or CUSTOM_EXIT for this cut type in the Entry/Exit
Type group box in the left half of the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
1. Select the text box next to the appropriate cut type (for example, First Cut) on the Main,
First Alternate, or Second Alternate tabbed page. Click Change.
The system displays the default strategy name, such as strategy 1, in the Name text
box in the Strategy Definition group box. You can type a different name.
3. Build the custom strategy by selecting a segment type from the Type drop-down list in
the Segment Definition group box, specifying the appropriate parameter values, and
clicking Insert. The following segment types are available:
Þ Helix—The tool moves along a helix. You have to specify the following parameters:
Radius, Ramp Angle, Height, and Direction (Left or Right).
Þ Line—The tool makes a linear move. You have to specify the following parameters:
Length and Slope.
Þ Arc—The tool moves along an arc. You have to specify the following parameters:
Radius and Angle.
As you insert segments, their names are displayed in appropriate order in the list box in
the Strategy Definition group box.
208
4. As you insert segments, their names are displayed in appropriate order in the list box in
the Strategy Definition group box. If you select a segment name in the list box, the
segment definition is displayed in the Segment Definition group box below. You can:
Þ Change the segment definition. To do this, change the segment type or parameter
values and click again on the selected segment name in the list box.
Þ Insert another segment before the selected one by defining the segment type and
parameters and clicking Insert.
5. The Available Strategies list box at the top of the dialog box lists all the custom
strategies defined for this or any other move type. If you select a strategy name in this list
box, the strategy definition is displayed in the Strategy Definition group box below. You
can:
Þ Copy the strategy by clicking Duplicate (the strategy is copied with the default
name such as strategy 1 copy), then change the strategy name and definition
as needed.
6. When satisfied with the custom strategy definitions, click OK to close the A/E Strategies
dialog box and return to the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
Swarf Milling
Swarf Milling is a different type of Surface Milling, which lets you machine a
series of surfaces by cutting with the side of the tool. By default, Swarf
Milling produces a slice-by-slice tool path, with the slice shape corresponding
to the 5-axis geometry being machined. You can define other shape for the
slices, if desired.
At any point on the tool path, the tool is positioned tangent to the surface
being machined. You can change the default axis definitions, as desired, by
specifying a series of axis directions at a number of points selected. The
default axis directions correspond to the machined geometry (the axes follow
the boundary edges of the surfaces) or follow the ruling lines of the surfaces
that are ruled. If you want to ignore the ruling lines of the ruled surfaces, set
the IGNORE_RULINGS parameter to YES (the default is NO). You can also
choose between two algorithms for the axis interpolation between the
surfaces to be machined by using the AXIS_DEF_CONTROL parameter.
Swarf Milling supports tapered tools, as well as the regular (cylindrical) ones.
209
To Create a Swarf Milling NC Sequence
When you create a Swarf Milling NC sequence, you are given a choice of
several methods for defining the cut. Depending on the selected method, the
tool path will be different. You can change the Cut Type (that is, select a
different method of defining the cut and specify the new parameters and
references) at any time when you redefine a Swarf Milling NC sequence.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
Þ Define Cut—Define the method of surface milling and specify the appropriate
parameters.
The required options are selected automatically. Select additional options, if desired, and
choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
4. When you start to define the cut, the system opens the Cut Definition dialog box.
Specify a method of defining the cut by selecting one of the following options:
Þ Straight Cut—Mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts parallel to the
XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system. The cuts are spaced evenly along
the z-axis in STEP_DEPTH increments.
210
Þ From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-v
lines. The user interface is similar to defining the cut for a Surface Milling NC
sequence.
Þ Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, and
some intermediate cuts. When generating other cuts, the system gradually changes
their shape to accommodate surface topology. The user interface is similar to
defining the cut for a Surface Milling NC sequence.
Depending on the selected method, the system displays the appropriate options in the
lower portion of the Cut Definition dialog box.
5. Select the appropriate options in the Cut Definition dialog box and specify geometric
references to define the cut according to the selected method. When satisfied with the cut
definition, click OK to close the Cut Definition dialog box and generate the tool path.
6. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Play Path to verify the tool path automatically
generated by the system. Use the Customize functionality, if needed, to adjust the tool
path.
Face Milling
The Face option allows you to face down the workpiece with a flat or radius
end mill. You can select a planar surface, or coplanar surfaces, parallel to the
retract plane. All inner contours in the selected faces (holes, slots) will be
automatically excluded. The system will generate the appropriate tool path
based on the selected surface(s).
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
211
Þ Start Point—Allows you to start machining at a specified corner of the selected
face. The following options are available:
Show—Highlight the current start point (available only if a user-defined start point
is specified).
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
You can specify multiple cuts to depth using the STEP_DEPTH and
NUMBER_CUTS parameters. The system will compute the number of cuts
according to STEP_DEPTH, compare with NUMBER_CUTS, and use the
greater value. If you want just one cut at full depth, you can set
NUMBER_CUTS to 1 and STEP_DEPTH to a relatively large value (greater
than thickness of the stock to be removed).
Exit motion
STEP_OVER
Overtravel
motions
Approach
motion
Note: For Assembly machining, or workpiece with no geometry, these parameters will be
interpreted differently: NUMBER_CUTS will determine the amount of slices, and
STEP_DEPTH—the offset between slices, that is, the first slice will be offset from the
selected face by
(NUMBER_CUTS-1)*STEP_DEPTH.
212
The number of cuts per slice is determined in a similar way using the
combination of the STEP_OVER and NUMBER_PASSES parameters.
However, if NUMBER_PASSES is set to 1, the STEP_OVER value will be
ignored and only one pass per slice will be made. This is helpful and
meaningful only when a large enough tool is used.
NUMBER_PASSES = 1
EXIT_DISTANCE + END_OVERTRAVEL + tool radius
(for CLEARANCE_EDGE = HEEL)
The tool path can be extended past the selected surface edges using the
START_OVERTRAVEL and END_OVERTRAVEL parameters. The
APPROACH_DISTANCE and EXIT_DISTANCE parameters apply to the
first approach into a slice and the last exit from a slice, respectively. The
APPROACH_FEED and EXIT_FEED can be specified for these motions if
desired, otherwise, CUT_FEED will be used. All these parameters are
measured with respect to a certain point of the tool, defined by the
ENTRY_EDGE and CLEARANCE_EDGE parameter values, described
following.
The following graphic illustrates the approach, exit, and overtravel motions
based on the parameter values.
213
EXIT_DISTANCE + END_OVERTRAVEL
START_OVERTRAVEL
END_OVERTRAVEL
tool
END_OVERTRAVEL
Reference part (selected face)
APPROACH_DISTANCE + START_OVERTRAVEL
ENTRY_EDGE = HEEL
CLEARANCE_EDGE=LEADING_EDGE
214
Reference part
(selected face)
Tool
Workpiece
CLEARANCE_EDGE = CENTER
END_OVERTRAVEL
CLEARANCE_EDGE =
LEADING_EDGE END_OVERTRAVEL
The entire part is used to calculate tool clearance. That is, when
ENTRY_EDGE is LEADING_EDGE or CLEARANCE_EDGE is HEEL, the
tool is tangent to the entire section of the part (as shown in the following
illustration).
Profile Milling
Profile milling is used to rough or finish mill vertical or slanted surfaces. The
surfaces selected must allow for a continuous tool path. The depth of the cut
is defined by the depth of the selected surfaces. You can also use the
AXIS_SHIFT parameter.
Notes:
Þ To just make one profile pass around the part at full depth, make STEP_DEPTH
greater than part thickness.
215
Þ To create a succession of profiling passes with horizontal offset, use the
NUM_PROF_PASSES and PROF_INCREMENT parameters.
part
tool
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIP_ONLY
3-Axis profiling will clean up the top horizontal edges of selected surfaces, as
shown in the following figure. If there is another surface bounding the top
edge, select it as a Check Surface to avoid gouging.
5-Axis surface profiling can be used for swarf cutting, as shown in the
following illustration. The tool axis will stay tangent to the surface being
machined. Set the AXIS_SHIFT parameter to a positive value.
216
AXIS_SHIFT
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
2. Choose Profile from the MILL SEQ menu. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis if applicable
(the options available depend on the number of axes specified for the workcell). Choose
Done.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
217
Pocket Milling
Pocketing can be used to finish mill after a Rough Volume operation, or for
direct finishing. The surfaces selected must allow for a continuous tool path.
The pocket may include horizontal, vertical, or slanted surfaces. The walls of
the pocket will be milled as with Profiling, the bottom—as the bottom
surfaces in Volume milling.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
218
Example: Pocket Milling
Trajectory Milling
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
2. Choose Trajectory from the MILL SEQ menu. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis if
applicable (the options available depend on the number of axes specified for the
workcell). Choose Done.
3. If you have specified the tool, site, coordinate systems, and retract surface at setup time,
you do not have to select Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 4. If
you choose Seq Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available
for all the NC sequence types, and the following specific option:
Check Surfs—Select surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed. If the
tool comes in contact with a Check Surface, it will retract to avoid this surface, and then
proceed to the next millable portion of the specified trajectory.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for
all selected options in turn.
219
When specifying the tool for 3-Axis Trajectory milling, selecting Set brings you the
following options:
4. Choose Customize and interactively specify the Automatic Cut motions. Connect the
Automatic Cut motions using the Approach and Exit Tool Motions.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
For 3-Axis Trajectory milling, you can either use standard tools, or sketch
your own tool for the NC sequence. The tool is sketched as a revolved
protrusion:
• The sketch represents half of the tool cross-section. The whole sketch must lie on one side
of the axis of symmetry. The axis of symmetry must be vertical, with the sketch lying on
the right.
For a sketched tool, you can specify a control point other than its tip by
adding a coordinate system to the tool section sketch, as shown in the
following illustration. The tool will then be swept so that its control point
follows the specified trajectory.
For standard (edited) tools, and for sketched tools with no control point
specified, the tip of the tool will be used. The tip of a standard tool is
determined by the tool’s control point. The tip of a sketched tool is
determined as the lowest point of the tool section sketch (the lower-left if
there are several equally low vertices).
Note: Make sure to specify the tool offset option correctly when using a control point. For
example, if you select side edges of the slot and place your control point on the periphery
of the tool, choose None for the tool offset direction. Also make sure to select the cut
direction depending on the orientation of the coordinate system used as the tool control
point: when the tool travels along the trajectory, the X-axis must point towards the
trajectory while the Y-axis is pointing up.
The following illustration shows specifying a control point for a sketched tool.
220
Select these edges.
The way cut motion is created depends on the cut motion type. The following
procedure lists the steps common to creating all types of cut motions. For
information on specific aspects of creating a cut motion, refer to the following
procedures.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Select the type of cut motion from the INTERACT PATH menu (Sketch, Edge) and Done.
4. The Cut option in the INT CUT menu is selected automatically. Select the appropriate
options in the CUT ALONG menu, depending on the cut motion type, and create a cut
motion.
5. Choose Ends if you want to adjust the ends of the cut motion.
7. You can use the Check Surfs option to select surfaces against which gouge checking will
be performed.
8. Choose Play Cut to display the cut motion as it is currently defined. The Info option
brings up the INFO ITEMS menu. You can use the Parameters option in the INT CUT
menu, if needed, to modify the cut motion parameters.
10. If you want to define another cut motion, choose Next Cut from the NEXT SLICED menu,
and repeat steps 3 through 9. When finished, choose Done/Return from the NEXT
SLICED menu.
If you use the same type of cut motion for a subsequent slice, the CUT ALONG
menu settings will be modal. For example, to mill a horizontal slot in step
221
depth increments, you can define the edges, direction, and offset for the first
cut motion only, and then just change the height for each subsequent cut
motion. Note, however, that whenever you select Edge or Curve from the
CUT ALONG menu, the Direction and Offset options will be selected
automatically.
2. The Sketch option in the CUT ALONG menu is automatically selected. Choose Done.
3. Set up the sketching plane and the sketcher reference plane. If Height is not specified,
the cut motion will be located in the sketching plane.
4. Sketch the cut motion. Dimension and regenerate the sketch. Choose Done.
1. Choose Edge (Curve) and Done from the INTERACT PATH menu.
Þ Fit—Fit the tool between surfaces adjacent to specified edges. This option is only
applicable when using a ball endmill.
3. The Edge (Curve), Direction, and Offset options in the CUT ALONG menu are
automatically selected. Choose Done.
4. The CHAIN menu appears with the options One By One, Tangnt Chain, Bndry
Chain, Surf Chain, Select, and Unselect. Select edges to follow using the CHAIN
menu options. All selected edges must form a continuous tool path.
5. Specify direction of trajectory using Flip and Okay, according to the red arrow.
222
The offset distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of the offset is with
respect to direction of trajectory, selected in the previous step; when you select an offset
option, the red arrow will show the offset direction. Choose Done when satisfied.
When you use a ball endmill in a 3-Axis Trajectory milling NC sequence, and
create a cut motion using Edges, you can use the Fit option to fit the tool
between surfaces adjacent to specified edges. Another way to produce a
similar tool path (for any type of Mill tool) is to use Cut Line machining with
Tool Extent.
The following illustration shows fitting the tool between the surfaces when
milling along an edge.
Select this edge using the Fit option and indicate Right
for offset direction.
The following illustration shows fitting the tool between the surfaces using
Cut Line machining.
223
To Define a Cut Motion Using Surfaces
2. The Surface, Direction, and Height options in the CUT ALONG menu are selected
automatically. Choose Done.
3. Select surfaces to follow. The surfaces must allow for a continuous tool path.
4. Specify direction of cutting motion using Flip and Okay, according to the red arrow.
5. Specify height.
6. The cut motion will be created along the selected surfaces at the specified height.
To Specify Height
You can specify the height of the cut motion using the Height option in the
CUT ALONG menu. The height specification is mandatory if you use surfaces
to define the cut motion; for other types it is optional.
When you choose Height, the HEIGHT menu appears with the options:
• Add—Brings up the CTM DEPTH menu, containing the commands Specify Plane,
Select, and Z Depth. To specify the height or depth of the cut motion, create or select a
plane, select nonplanar surfaces, or enter a value for height with respect to the NC
sequence coordinate system. The tool trajectory, when defined, will then be projected in
the level of the selected surface or plane.
• Remove—Remove the currently used height reference. You will have a choice of
selecting the reference(s) to delete using Remove Single, or deleting all references using
Remove All.
• Show—Show the plane or surface that is currently used for height reference. If Z depth
is used, the appropriate depth will be marked by a cyan rectangle enclosing the contour
of the manufacturing model.
224
Example: Specifying Height and Surfaces
You can select nonplanar surfaces of the part for Height specification. These
are the surfaces that will be machined by the end portion of the tool, rather
than its side. The following shows an example of selecting surfaces to create
the desired cut motion for 3-Axis Trajectory milling.
Note: A Height plane will always override the location of CSYS in a Sketched Tool.
Cut motion
Select this surface to The tool fits within the
create the cut motion. selected surfaces.
225
Multi-step Trajectory milling can be performed by specifying either the
desired STEP_DEPTH (in which case the cuts will be repeated in these step
depth increments), or the desired NUMBER_CUTS. If both are specified, the
higher of the two numbers of cuts will be used. The last pass will coincide
with the specified trajectory.
The Start Height option in the CUT ALONG menu allows you to specify the
height of the first pass. If Start Height is not specified, the top of the
workpiece will be used. For Assembly machining, or workpiece with no
geometry, you have to either specify the Start Height, or specify both the
STEP_DEPTH and NUMBER_CUTS. In this last case, the parameters are
interpreted differently: NUMBER_CUTS will determine the number of
passes, and STEP_DEPTH—the offset between the passes, that is, the first
pass will be offset from the specified trajectory by (NUMBER_CUTS-
1)*STEP_DEPTH.
Note: The Start Height option is grayed out if neither STEP_DEPTH nor
NUMBER_CUTS has been specified for the NC sequence.
The user interface for specifying Start Height is the same as specifying
Height.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
4. The CUT MTN menu will appear with Define Cut already chosen, causing the
CUTMOTION SETUP menu to appear as well. The following commands will be listed:
226
Þ Height—Specify the height of the cut.
Þ Start Height—Specify the height of the first pass for multi-step Trajectory milling.
Þ Axis Control—Apply additional control to tool axis orientation. Activates the AXIS
CNTRL menu with the following options:
Along Z—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate
system.
Axis Def—Displays the AXIS DEF menu, which lets you add, remove, redefine, and
show axis definitions at selected locations along the trajectory.
Þ Offset—Specify the direction in which the cut motion will be offset (None, Left, or
Right). The offset distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of the
offset is with respect to direction of trajectory; when you select an offset option, the
red arrow will show the offset direction. Choose Done when satisfied.
Þ Matrl Side—Specify the material side using the Left and Right options in the
MATRL SIDE menu.
5. Choose Done from the CUTMOTION SETUP menu to begin specifying the cut. The system
will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
227
4. The CUT MTN menu will appear with Define Cut already chosen, causing the
CUTMOTION SETUP menu to appear as well. The following commands will be listed:
Þ Drive Surfaces—Define the trajectory by selecting surfaces that the tool will follow
with its side. The surfaces must allow for a continuous tool path.
Þ From/To Control—If you do not want to machine all the selected surfaces, select
edges to machine. The CHAIN menu appears with the options One By One, Tangnt
Chain, Bndry Chain, Surf Chain, Select, and Unselect. Using the CHAIN menu
options, select edges on drive surfaces. All selected edges must form a continuous
tool path. The following illustration shows an example of using From/To Control.
Þ Start Height—Specify the height of the first pass for multi-step Trajectory milling.
228
5. Choose Done from the CUTMOTION SETUP menu to begin specifying the cut. The system
will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
6. Once you have specified the cut, the system displays the TRAJ PREVIEW menu with the
following opitons:
Þ Preview—The system shows the edges on surfaces to be machined, and displys the
tool axis orientation as vectors along these edges.
If a drive surface can not be machined without gouging, the system outputs the
estimated value of possible gouge in the message area at the same time as the TRAJ
PREVIEW menu appears. The surfaces being gouged are highlighted and the points of
possible gouge are indicated.
Note: Another way to call up the TRAJ PREVIEW menu is to select Preview from the
CUT MTN menu.
1. Select the Axis Control option in the CUTMOTION SETUP menu. If defining the cut
motion using edges or curves, choose Axis Def from the AXIS CNTRL menu. The system
displays the AXIS DEF menu, which lets you add, remove, redefine, and show axis
definitions.
2. Choose Add.
4. Specify a parameter value along this segment to place the point, with 0 corresponding to
the beginning of the segment and 1 to its end. The ENTER VAL menu will contain the
value corresponding to your select point, as well as 0, 1, and the Enter option, which
allows you to type a value you want.
5. Specify the tool axis orientation at selected point using one of the following options in the
AXIS DEF TYPE menu:
Þ Along Z Dir—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence
coordinate system.
Þ Enter Value—Type the i, j, k values in the appropriate text boxes of the Axis
Direction dialog box and click OK.
229
Example: Adding Axis Definitions
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
4. The CUT MTN menu will appear with Define Cut already chosen, causing the
CUTMOTION SETUP menu to appear as well. The following commands will be listed:
230
Þ Side Surfs—Indicate the contours of the cut by selecting side surfaces. This
command is used in place of the Contour1 and Contour2 commands.
Þ Offset—Specify the direction in which the cut motion will be offset (None, Left, or
Right). The offset distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of the
offset is with respect to direction of trajectory; when you select an offset option, the
red arrow will show the offset direction. Choose Done when satisfied.
5. Choose Done from the CUT ALONG menu to begin specifying the cut.
6. The TRAJ OPT menu will appear in turn for Contour1 and Contour2; choose Sketch or
Select to indicate the contour.
7. If you are creating synch points, the SYNCH menu appears with the following commands:
Þ Done/Return—Quit the SYNCH menu and return to defining the cut motion.
8. Choose Play Cut from the CUT MTN menu to display the cut motion.
Note: If you get an error message “Cut motion cannot be created try adding more synch
points.
231
1. Choose Ends from the INT CUT menu.
2. Choose Start from the CUT ENDS menu to adjust the start point.
Þ On—Place the start point of the cut motion at the start of the defined trajectory (the
default).
Þ Specify—Move the start point along the defined trajectory. When you select this
option, the start point of the cut motion starts following the mouse (along the cut
motion, if trimmed, and tangent to the first segment, if extended). The new cut
motion definition is temporary highlighted in green for better visibility.
4. If the cut motion is adjusted using Specify, select the dimensioning type:
Þ Arc Length—Enter arc length along the chain, i.e, length ratio of the added or
subtracted segment to the original length of the cut motion. Positive value
corresponds to extended cut motion, negative—to a trimmed one.
Þ Offset Plane—Select a plane to measure offset from, then enter the offset value.
Positive value means that the offset is to the positive side of the surface (away from
the solid material).
Þ Offset Csys—Select a coordinate system to measure offset from. Select axis along
which to measure the offset, then enter the offset value. Positive value means the
positive axis direction.
5. Choose End from the CUT ENDS menu to adjust the end point and repeat Steps 3 and 4.
Þ Delete Last—Deletes the corner condition that has been added last. You can use
this option more than once; when there are no more corner conditions left, the
Delete Last option becomes inaccessible.
3. When you choose Add from the CORNER COND menu, the CORNER ADD menu appears
with the following options:
232
Þ Specify—Select points on the cut motion and specify type by selecting the
appropriate option. After each selection, the corner condition will be added at the
selected point. Choose Done Sel when finished.
If the system is unable to determine the type of the contour, you will be prompted to
specify if this is in inside or an outside contour using the following options:
After the corner conditions are automatically added, you can review and change them
using the AUTO SELECT menu:
Þ Change Type—Specify a different corner condition type for the highlighted corner.
Þ Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Straight corner
conditions will be highlighted in yellow, convex—in red, and concave—in cyan.
Þ Info—List information about the highlighted corner condition type in the Message
Window.
Corner conditions can be specified for the vertices of the cut motion created
using the Edge or Curve option, to avoid gouging sharp corners. Wherever a
corner condition is added, a small parallelogram will be incorporated in the
cut motion: the tool will continue moving along the first entity, then return to
enter tangent to the second entity. The size of the parallelogram is defined by
the path parameter CORNER_LENGTH.
If you add a corner condition along an entity or between two tangent entities,
the angle of the parallelogram will be defined by the CORNER_ANGLE
parameter; if the condition is at a vertex and the corner is sharp, the
233
CORNER_ANGLE value will be ignored and the sides of the parallelogram
will be formed as a continuation of the adjoining entities.
CORNER_LENGTH
CORNER_LENGTH
CORNER_ANGLE
• Loop—Create a loop corner motion. Available for convex corner conditions only.
Thread Milling
Thread (helical) milling allows you to cut internal and external threads on
cylindrical surfaces.
• Define the thread by specifying whether it is external or internal, specifying the major or
minor thread diameter, selecting cylindrical surface(s) to create the thread on, and
specifying the machining and entry/exit parameters.
234
To Create a Thread Milling NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Thread | Done. You must be in a Mill
or Mill/Turn workcell.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu contains the following specific option:
Define Cut—Specify the thread parameters and placement references by using the
Thread Mill dialog box.
The required options are selected automatically. Select additional options, if desired, and
choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
3. Click Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
The top portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains the following icons
and options:
• Internal—For internal threads, you have to specify Major Diameter, located on the
Define Thread tabbed page.
• External—For external threads, you have to specify Minor Diameter, located on the
Define Thread tabbed page.
The middle portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains four tabbed pages:
Define Thread, Place Thread, Mill Thread, and Thread Entry & Exit.
235
The Define Thread tabbed page contains the following options:
• Major Diameter—If the Thread Style is specified as Internal, type a value for the
thread's major diameter. If you have specified a value for the manufacturing parameter
THREAD_DIAMETER, this value appears as the default in the Major Diameter text
box.
• Minor Diameter—If the Thread Style is specified as External, type a value for the
thread's minor diameter. If you have specified a value for the manufacturing parameter
THREAD_DIAMETER, this value appears as the default in the Minor Diameter text
box.
Þ Blind—Specify the initial and final depth for the thread by selecting planar surfaces
or creating datum planes parallel to the retract plane.
The Place Thread tabbed page contains the options for thread placement.
You can also set the order of machining for multiple threads.
236
(such as "=") and a value. The system displays the selected parameter and its value in
the list box below and selects all features with the appropriate parameter value.
• Datum Axes—Select the datum axes that belong to the holes or cylindrical protrusions
where you want to place the threads.
Once you have selected a thread placement method, click the Plus (+) icon to
add references of the appropriate type (for example, select the diameters or
datum axes). All the selected references are listed in the list box in the
middle of the Place Thread tabbed page. To remove a reference, click the
Minus (-) icon and select the reference to remove in the list box.
The lower portion of the Place Thread tabbed page contains the options for
setting the order of machining for multiple threads:
• Closest—The system determines which order results in the shortest machine motion
time. You can click the Start hole/boss for scan selection arrow and select the first hole
or boss to be machined.
• Pick Order—The threads are cut in the same order as the holes or bosses are selected.
If one choice results in more than one hole or boss being selected (for example, Collect
On Surface selection), these features are scanned by incrementing the Y coordinate and
going back and forth in the X direction. Then the pick order is resumed.
Þ Thread Overlap—Type a value (in degrees) for thread overlap. If a value is other
than 0 (the default), the start and end of the cut for each tooth are not coincident.
237
Þ Pickup Overlap— Type a value (in threads or degrees) for pickup overlap. If a
value is other than 0 (the default), the next cut will start earlier than the coincident
position.
• Climb— The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
Corresponds to the CLIMB value of the CUT_TYPE manufacturing parameter.
The following options define the beginning and end of the cut motion:
• Start Overtravel—Specifies the initial height of the tool above the start surface at the
beginning of the tool path.
• End Overtravel— Specifies the height at the end of the tool path that the tool
overtravels below the end surface.
• Thread Start Angle—Specifies the angle in the XY plane that determines where the
thread mill starts to cut the thread.
The Thread Entry & Exit tabbed page contains the options and parameters
for defining the Entry and Exit moves:
Þ Helical—The tool approaches the start of the cut motion in a helical motion.
Þ Normal to Thread—The entry motion is a straight line normal to the cut motion.
Þ Normal to Thread—The exit motion is a straight line normal to the cut motion.
The following parameters define the Entry and Exit moves (the initial values
correspond to those specified when defining the manufacturing parameters
for the NC sequence):
238
• Lead Radius—The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading
in or out.
• Normal Lead Step—The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent
portion of the lead-in or lead-out motion.
• Tangent Lead Step—The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular
lead-in or lead-out motion.
The lower portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains the OK, Cancel
and Preview buttons.
239
Helical tool Minor Diameter
path Tool
Start plane
Thread cylinder
End plane
The following illustration shows Approach and Exit motions for thread
milling.
Radial exit
Helical motion
approach
motion Entry Angle
Exit Distance
Engraving
About Engraving
For 5-Axis Engraving, there are two ways to specify the tool trajectory:
• By selecting a reference Groove feature to follow. The tool axis will be normal to the
surface that the reference Groove feature is projected onto.
• By selecting a set of edges for the tool to follow. In this case, you will have to select a
control surface, that is, a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. The control surface
must be a surface adjacent to one of the edges selected for the tool trajectory. For all
other edges, the surface to the same side of the edge will be used as control surface.
240
To Create an Engraving NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
Þ Edges—Select the edges for the tool to follow. Available for 5-Axis Engraving only.
Must be used together with the following Norm Surf option.
Þ Norm Surf—Select a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Available for 5-
Axis Engraving only. Must be used together with the Edges option above.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Plunge Milling
You can use flat and radius end mills, as well as plunge milling tools, to
create Plunge milling NC sequences.
Note: Ball end mills can not be used for Plunge milling.
241
To Create a Plunge Milling NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
Þ Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Surfaces are mutually
exclusive. If you use the Window option, then all the surfaces within the specified
Mill Window will be selected.
Þ Start Axes—Specify predrilled axes to define the start point for every plunge region.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to
adjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Plunge milling tools can not cut with their centers. Therefore, in Plunge
milling the tool makes its first plunge within a region along a predrilled axis,
which must be located at the deepest point of the region.
When you choose Start Axes from the SEQ SETUP menu, the system displays
the START AXES menu with the following options:
242
• Remove All—Remove all Start Axis definitions.
You have to specify a Start Axis for each milling region. The system will then
compute the tool path for the region based on the SCAN_TYPE and using the
Start Axis as a start point.
Select these
surfaces.
Select these
axes as Start
Axes.
CUT_ANGLE 90
PLUNGE_STEP
Mill Geometry
To create a milling NC sequence, you have to define geometry that you want
to mill. Pro/NC provides several tools that let you define mill geometry as a
separate feature, and then use this definition repeatedly for various NC
sequences within the manufacturing model.
243
The simplest way to define geometry for a Volume or a 3-Axis Conventional
Surface milling NC sequence is by using a Mill Window, that is, by sketching
or selecting a closed contour in the retract plane. All surfaces visible within
the contour will be milled. Mill Windows are separate features that can be
created at setup time, as well as at the time of defining an NC sequence.
You can also select surfaces from a Mill Volume when defining Surface
milling NC sequences (Conventional or Contour Surface milling, Facing,
Profiling, and Pocketing).
Mill Window
When you choose Mill Window from the MFG GEOMETRY menu, the
DEFINE WIND menu appears with the options:
• Redef Wind—Redefine a pre-existing Mill Window. Select the window to redefine from a
namelist menu.
244
3. The feature creation dialog box appears. The elements are:
Þ Plane—Specify the start plane, parallel to the XY plane of the coordinate system.
When you create an NC sequence, the retract plane is the default.
Þ Tool Side (Optional)—Specify how far the tool will go with respect to the window
outline. The default is Tool In.
Þ Depth (Optional)—Specify the depth of the window. If you do not specify this, the
system performs milling up to the surfaces visible from the Mill Window; through-all
vertical and slanted surfaces will be milled up to the bottom of the reference part.
4. When you start defining Window, the MILL WIND menu appears with the following
options:
Þ Sketch—Define the window by sketching a closed contour. The system uses the
start plane as the sketching plane and orients the sketch so that the X-axis of the
coordinate system points to the right, and the Y-axis points up.
Þ Select—Define the window by selecting edges or curves that form a closed contour.
This contour is then projected on the start plane to form the window outline.
5. If you choose to redefine the Tool Side, the TOOL SIDE menu appears with the following
options:
Þ To—The tool will always be completely within the window outline. The
corresponding value in the dialog box is Tool In.
Þ On—The tool axis will reach the window outline. The corresponding value in the
dialog box is Tool On.
Þ Past—The tool will go completely past the window outline. The corresponding value
in the dialog box is Tool Past.
6. If you choose to define Depth, the WND DEPTH menu appears with the following options:
245
Þ Define—Specify the window depth either by selecting a plane parallel to the start
plane (Specify Plane), or by entering a Z value with respect to the window
coordinate system (Z Depth).
Þ Remove—Remove the depth definition, that is, revert to the default depth.
Þ Show—Show the current depth definition. The system will display a cyan rectangle
at the level of the current window depth.
You can specify reference quilts to define the depth of your Mill Window. Use
this functionality if the surfaces below the window contain multiple small
patches at different depths (for example, geometry created as a result of
IGES import).
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Machining > Mfg Setup > Ref Quilts.
Mill Volumes
If defining the volume at setup time, you have to specify the upward
direction:
1. Select a planar surface, or create/select a datum plane that will be parallel to the XY
coordinate plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
2. A red arrow appears showing the current upward direction. Set the desired upward
direction using Flip and Okay options.
246
To Gather a Mill Volume
Gathering allows you to reference surfaces and edges of the design model.
1. Select surfaces to be machined. The Select option provides multiple ways of surface
selection, which are described below. All surfaces included in the volume definition will
be “sewn together to form a single quilt, and the system will “close the volume
automatically by extruding the boundaries of this quilt vertically up to the retract plane
(or, if defining the volume at setup time, the plane selected for upward direction).
2. If selected surfaces contain inner loops (holes, slots), that you want to ignore, use the Fill
option. You can fill loops by individually selecting them, or by selecting a surface to fill
all internal loops on it.
3. If you want to ignore some outer loops or exclude some of the selected surfaces from the
volume, use the Exclude option.
4. If you want to specify ways of “closing the volume, other than the default way described
above, use the Close option.
As you modify the surface quilt and closing instructions, the volume is
recalculated. It can be displayed at any time using the Show Volume
option.
• Add—Select additional references (this is the only option available when you start
defining the volume).
• Remove—Unselect some of the references. select surfaces or loops you want to unselect.
• Remove All—Unselect all references of the current type. For example, if the Bndry
Srfs option is highlighted, choosing Remove All will clear the definition of bounding
surfaces.
When you choose Select for the first time and start selecting surfaces to be
included in a volume definition, the following options are available:
247
• Surf & Bnd—Select one of the surfaces to be machined (“seed surface), and the bounding
surfaces. The system will include the selected surface and all its neighboring surfaces
until the ones selected as bounding. You will be prompted to select the seed surface
immediately after you choose Surf & Bnd for the first time. Then use the following
options:
Repeatedly choosing Select will bring up the GATHER SPEC menu with the
options:
• Type—Respecify the type (for example, Surf & Bnd instead of Surfaces). If you change
the type, all previous selections will be discarded. Therefore, whenever you attempt to
change the type, the system will prompt for confirmation.
• References—Reselect the feature references. This will bring up the SURF BND menu if
the gather type is Surf & Bnd, and the FEATURE REFS menu in all other cases.
Once the surfaces are selected, the other options in the GATHER menu
become available. You can unselect surfaces, fill or exclude loops of edges,
and otherwise enhance the volume definition created in the first step. The
ways to do it depend on the option which you have used for surface selection:
volumes gathered using Surf & Bnd follow different rules than those
created using one of the other options.
At any point, you can display the currently selected surfaces using the Show
Select option. Outer (bounding) edges of selected surfaces will be displayed
in yellow; inner (two-sided) and silhouette edges—in magenta.
The following illustration shows using Surfaces vs. Surf & Bnd when
gathering a Mill Volume:
248
Select seed Mill Volume
surface
Hidden
hidden
Surface
The following illustration shows using the Features option when gathering a
Mill Volume:
Select
this
feature.
The following illustration shows using the Mill Surf option when gathering a
Mill Volume:
249
To Exclude Surfaces and Outer Loops
The Exclude option is available only if you gather using an option other than
Surf & Bnd (for example, Surfaces). It allows you to:
• Loops—Exclude outer loops. Use this option to delete unwanted portions of surfaces
selected for gathering.
When you fill an inner loop of edges on a surface selected for gathering it is
equivalent to “patching the base quilt of the Mill Volume. The volume will be
built as if there was a smooth surface with no perforations. The Fill option
brings up the GATHER FILL menu:
• All—Fill all loops on a selected surface. Select a surface. All inner loops on this surface
will be filled, whether they belong to bounding surfaces or not.
250
• Loops—Select loops to be filled. For each loop to be filled, you have to select only one
edge. If you gather using Surf & Bnd, the edges must lie on the bounding surfaces.
Select additional bounding surfaces if necessary.
The following illustration shows filling loops when gathering using Surf &
Bnd:
The following illustration shows filling loops when gathering using Surfaces:
This volume
Select this surface will not be
using Surfaces. milled. Mill Volume
251
Note: A loop can not be filled if it belongs to more than two adjoining
surfaces.
The system will close the volume automatically, by extruding the boundaries
of the selected surface quilt vertically up to the retract plane (or, if defining
the volume at setup time, the plane selected for upward direction). If you
want to specify a different way to close the volume, select Close. The
following options are available:
When you choose Define or Redefine, the following options are available:
• Cap Plane—Select a planar surface or datum plane to be used for closing the volume.
• All Loops—All boundary loops in the current quilt will be extended to the cap plane.
• Sel Loops—Select loops to be extended to the cap plane. You have to select only one
edge in each loop.
When milling through pockets, you have to extend the edges at the bottom of
the pocket downward, to indicate that the tool must go through, as shown in
the following illustration:
252
Select top of workpiece as Cap
Plane, then select top edge
using Sel Loops. Select seed surface.
hidden
The Show Volume option allows you to check the current volume definition,
to see if you need to exclude more loops, close differently. The Mill Volume
will be displayed in magenta. As you gather more references, the volume
display will change. To view the changes, repaint the screen and select Show
Volume again.
After you choose Done from the VOL GATHER menu, the Mill Volume you
have defined will be displayed in magenta. You can add and remove volumes
to mill using Sketch, offset the sides, round some edges.
2. If a volume is already present in the current definition, choose Add or Remove. Add
will add a “protrusion to the current volume, Remove will subtract the sketched volume
from the current volume (as a “cut). If no volume is present, a volume “protrusion will be
automatically created.
Note: Think of Sketch as creating a protrusion or cut in a part that consists of just the
Mill Volume itself.
253
Þ Extrude—Creates a feature that is formed by projecting the section straight away
from the sketching plane.
Þ Blend—Creates a feature that consists of a set of planar sections that are connected
by transition surfaces to form a solid.
4. Choose attributes appropriate for the selected form, such as depth option, degrees of
rotation.
5. Set up the Sketcher: select or create the sketching plane, choose the feature direction,
specify the sketcher reference plane.
6. Sketch the section. Volume sections are sketched the same as for regular features
(protrusions and cuts). Sketched entities can be aligned and dimensioned both to part
geometry and to the entities of other volume “chunks.
The Sketch option can be used as many times as you like within a single
volume definition.
Mill Volume can be defined by sketching, very much like you create regular
features (protrusions and cuts) in Pro/ENGINEER. If Sketch is selected as
the first option from the CREATE VOL menu, the sketched volume will be
automatically added. If a volume is already present in the current definition,
you will have to specify if you wish to Add or Remove the volume you are
about to sketch.
254
Examples: Combining Sketch and Gather
Sketch can be used after gathering part references to extend the Mill
Volume, or to exclude some areas from milling.
Use Sketch,
Add.
Mill Volume
Milling NC sequence
completed.
255
Gather, Surf & Bnd
Seed surface
Bounding surfaces
Section
sketch
A sketched volume can be trimmed by the reference model using the Trim
option in the CREATE VOL menu. When you select Trim, the system will
automatically subtract the reference model from the current volume
definition. Only the remaining volume will be machined.
To make sure there will be no gouging, this option can also be used after
offsetting all surfaces.
Note: Using Trim after defining the volume by gathering only does not make sense:
Trim will use the same references as Gather does, so nothing will change.
256
Example: Trimming a Mill Volume
Step 1:
Sketch extruded Thru All volume.
Make sure it is deeper than the
pockets to mill.
Section sketch Step 2:
Remove extra volume outside the
workpiece by sketching. This step can
be omitted if TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
is set to YES.
Section
sketch
area to
Step 3: Select Trim from the remove
Create Vol menu. The
reference part is subtracted
from the volume to mill. Milling
volume
A sketched section does not have to correspond exactly to the desired Mill
Volume. It can be sketched larger than needed, and then “trimmed to size
using:
• The Trim option—To subtract the reference model from the sketched volume.
257
• Tool Radius—The offset distance will be equal to the tool radius.
Note: In order to offset by tool radius, you have to create the volume at the time of
creating the NC sequence, after the tool is specified.
Machined
volume
Tool
Horizontal Tangential
258
To Create Rounds on a Mill Volume
As a refining touch, you can create rounds on some of the volume edges. This
is another way to simulate the tool geometry as it cuts the material.
The Copy Volume option in the CREATE VOL menu allows you to copy an
existing volume definition as the “start point for defining a new volume, to
avoid time-consuming repetitions.
In order to see a Mill Volume definition better, you can shade the volume.
This functionality is available only at setup time (you cannot shade a volume
when creating an NC sequence).
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then Mfg
Geometry.
The screen is repainted to display only the shaded image of the selected volume.
5. Choose Continue from the CntVolSel menu to select another volume for shading, or
choose Done/Return to finish.
1. Choose Mfg Setup > Mfg Geometry > Mill Volume > Modify Vol.
2. Select the name of the volume from the namelist menu. The current volume definition is
displayed in magenta.
3. Use options from the CREATE VOL menu to change the volume as desired: add and
remove pieces, offset.
259
During the time of creating an NC sequence, you can similarly modify a
volume using the Modify Vol option in the DEFINE VOL menu.
Note: There is a special technique of reordering Mill Volumes. Click for details.
You can modify any volume using the Modify Vol option under the MILL
VOLUME menu.
When not needed, volume display can be turned off using the Blank option.
After you choose it, the namelist menu of displayed volumes and Mill
Surfaces appears; select the volume name. Blanked volumes can later be
displayed again using the Unblank option.
3. Choose the volume by clicking on the screen (the volume must be unblanked). To select
by menu, choose Quilt from the SELN OPTION menu, then select the volume name.
260
Mill Surfaces
Note: Milling surfaces are a good tool for defining complex Mill Volumes.
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose Mfg
Geometry.
4. When the SURF DEFINE menu comes up for the first time, the only option available is
Add. It allows you to create the base patch of the Mill Surface.
5. Once the first surface patch is created, you can use other SURF DEFINE options: extend
its edges, trim it, or add other patches and include them in the Mill Surface definition by
merging.
Note: Mill Surface can also be created “on the fly when defining a Surface milling NC
sequence. The techniques are the same.
The Add option in the SURF DEFINE menu brings up the SRF OPTS menu
with the following options:
261
• Flat—Create a planar datum surface by sketching its boundaries.
1. On the MFG GEOMETRY menu, click Mill Surface > Create and type a name for the
Mill Surface.
2. On the SURF DEFINE menu, click Add > Advanced | Done > Sloped | Done.
The Mill Surface for Slope Control dialog box opens with the following elements:
262
Þ Angle—Specify the slope angle.
Þ Steep/Shallow—Specify whether you want to keep the steep or the shallow side.
3. Define the Surfaces element. You can include the surfaces using any combination of the
following options:
Þ Surf & Bnd—Gather surfaces to be included by selecting the seed surface and the
bounding surfaces.
Þ Plane—Select a plane. The system displays a red arrow normal to the plane.
Finalize the direction by using the Flip and Okay options.
Þ Csys—Select a coordinate system; then specify which of its axes to use. The system
displays a red arrow along the selected axis. Finalize the direction by using the Flip
and Okay options.
Þ Keep Steep Side—The system keeps only those portions of the selected surfaces
where the angle between the surface normal and the Direction vector is greater than
the specified Angle value.
Þ Keep Shallow Side—The system keeps only those portions of the selected surfaces
where the angle between the surface normal and the Direction vector is less than the
specified Angle value.
263
Sloped Mill Surfaces
With Sloped Mill Surfaces you can easily adjust machining strategy for finish
milling based on the orientation of the surface.
When you need to machine a cavity, you may want to use Conventional
Surface milling on the bottom of the cavity and other near-horizontal
surfaces, and profile surfaces that are near-vertical, such as cavity walls.
You can use similar technique when machining the outside of a part.
1. Create a parent Mill Surface by gathering all surfaces in the pocket, as shown below.
Bounding surfaces
Seed surface
2. Create a new Mill Surface using the Sloped option. To define the Surfaces element, use
the Quilt Surfs option and select the parent Mill Surface. Use the Z-axis of the
264
coordinate system to define Direction (the direction vector is shown in red) and type 45
to specify Angle.
3. Choose Keep Shallow Side. The resulting Mill Surface is shown in blue in the following
illustration.
265
4. To define a complementary Mill Surface for Profiling, repeat Step 2 and then choose Keep
Steep Side. The resulting Mill Surface is shown in blue in the following illustration.
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose Mfg
Geometry.
4. When the SURF DEFINE menu comes up for the first time, the only option available is
Add. It allows you to create the base patch of the Mill Surface.
Once the first surface patch is created, you can use other SURF DEFINE options: extend
its edges, trim it, or add other patches and include them in the Mill Surface definition by
merging.
Note: Mill Surface can also be created “on the fly when defining a Surface milling NC
sequence. The techniques are the same.
5. From SRF OPTIONS choose Advanced, and from ADV FEAT OPT, choose Machinable
Area. The SURFACES: Machinable Area Dialog Box will open.
6. Define the following elements: Machine Srf, Check Srf, Tool Radius, Tool Axis. Note
that Srf Option is already defined.
266
7. After all elements have been defined you can examine the created surface by clicking the
Preview button. Click the OK button to confirm that the surface has been created
successfully.
There are cases where you may wish to add your own toolpath strategies to
the internal surface model, An advanced mill surface type “by tool contact
will give you access to the mechanisms that create explicit surface
representations of the local machining remainder area and to the cutline
milling machinable area. This mill surface is made available under the
Advanced option of the mill surface definition. Elements defined that you
define include: Selected Surface, Check Surface, Tool Radius, and Tool
Orientation.
The Extend option allows you to extend all or specified edges of the current
Mill Surface by a specified distance or up to a selected planar surface or
datum plane.
When you create additional patches using the Add option, they are not
automatically included into the Mill Surface definition. You have to connect
them with the base quilt (the one that includes the first added surface) by
joining or intersecting.
The Trim option allows you to access the Surface Trim functionality.
In order to better see a Mill Surface definition, you can shade the surface.
This functionality is available only at setup time (you cannot shade a surface
when creating an NC sequence).
267
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then Mfg
Geometry.
The screen is repainted to display only the shaded image of the selected surface.
1. Choose Mfg Setup, Mfg Geometry, Mill Surface, then Modify Surf.
2. Select the name of the Mill Surface from the namelist menu. The current surface
definition is displayed.
3. Use options from the SURF DEFINE menu to change the surface definition.
Note: A Mill Surface created or selected for a Surface milling NC sequence can be
modified “on the fly using the Modify Srf option in the DEFINE SRF menu. All changes
made at this time will stay after the NC sequence is completed.
You can turn off the Mill Surface display using the Blank option. After you
choose it, the namelist menu of displayed Mill Surfaces and volumes appears;
select the surface name. A blanked Mill Surface can later be displayed using
the Unblank option.
Mill Surfaces can be renamed using the same procedure as Mill Volumes.
268
Mill Surfaces, or their portions, can be deleted or suppressed by
deleting/suppressing the appropriate feature(s) on the workpiece. Features
can be selected by clicking on the patches (use Query Sel if necessary), or by
feature number. Dimensions of a Mill Surface can be modified using the
Modify Dim option.
Note: There is a special technique of reordering Mill Surfaces. Click for details.
You can modify any Mill Surface using the Modify Surf option in the MILL
SURFACE menu.
Turning
• Area—Define the area in the model cross section where you want the material to be
removed. The tool path will be generated by scanning this area to remove material in
step depth increments. Use for rough cut turning.
• 4 Axis Area—(Appears in 4-Axis workcells only.) Define the NC sequence the same as
regular Area turning, above. The system will automatically generate the tool path for two
synchronized heads.
• Groove—Turn narrow grooves using a tool with cutting edges on both sides and a peck-
type motion.
For each of the turning NC sequences, you define the cut geometry by
creating or selecting a Turn Profile. The system will attempt to automatically
determine the location of the area of the cut with respect to the Turn Profile;
in case of ambiguity, it will prompt you to select the material side by flipping
an arrow. The cut will be created on the opposite side of the Turn Profile.
Depending on the type of NC sequence, you may then have to further define
the cut by specifying the stock boundary and cut extensions.
269
your post-processor requires XY input, set up separate Machine and NC
Sequence coordinate systems, with the Machine coordinate system axes
pointing in the desired directions for correct post-processing. In this case the
system will output CL data in the XY coordinates without the transformation
vector (i,j,k).
The Machine coordinate system can be created at any location and using any
option, as long as its axes point in the appropriate directions. An easy way to
create a Machine coordinate system by referencing the NC Sequence
coordinate system is described below.
1. Orient the NC Sequence coordinate system so that the Z-axis is colinear with the turning
axis and points away from the lathe headstock.
2. Create another coordinate system using the Offset option and select the NC Sequence
coordinate system.
6. Choose Done Move from the MOVE menu. The coordinate system is created.
Note: If there is no translational offset, the NC Sequence coordinate system will not be
visible after the Machine coordinate system is created. Use Sel By Menu for coordinate
system selection.
!AL("About_Turning_NC_Sequences",0,`',`')
270
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Mfg Model > Turning Envelope.
Click Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens. It contains the following elements:
The system generates the Turning Envelope by intersecting the rotational outline of the
specified model with the XZ plane of the selected coordinate system.
6. Click OK.
271
You can also use the Turning Envelope functionality if you are machining a
circular part with a very complex profile. To simplify defining the Turn
Profiles for such a part, you can create a Reference Envelope and then define
the Turn Profiles by using the Select Ref Envlp command and selecting the
appropriate chains on the Reference Envelope.
Þ Sketch—Sketch the stock boundary. Pro/NC reorients the model so that the XZ
plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system is parallel to the screen and displays
the Sketcher side bar. Select the Sketcher references, sketch the outward boundaries
of the cut, dimension as necessary, then click on the Sketcher side bar.
The Turn Profile for Area and Groove turning is defined by specifying the
final stock outline. The system then determines the area of the cut by
extending the two endpoints of this outline in the specified direction up to the
boundaries of the workpiece cross section. However, if the workpiece has no
geometry, or in case of assembly machining, the system cannot make any
assumptions as to the current workpiece outline. Therefore, you will have to
explicitly define the stock boundary, that is, the outward boundaries of the
cut, by using the Stock Bound option in the INT CUT menu. The graphic
below illustrates how the cut area is determined.
272
Stock boundary sketch
Workpiece
Cut extensions
Cut extensions
Cut sketch
Cut sketch
Note: Since the area of the cut is determined using the workpiece cross section, it is
recommended that you perform material removal for each NC sequence right after it is
created, to avoid air machining in subsequent NC sequences. If you do not want to
perform material removal, use the Stock Bound option to define the new stock outline.
273
Example: Using Stock Boundary for Area Turning
Cut sketch
Reference part
You can change the stock boundary outline at any time; however, it will
automatically cause the cut definition to be regenerated. The system will
issue a warning and prompt if you want to continue. If you answer “yes, the
STOCK BOUND menu will appear:
• Add—Modify the stock boundary definition. You will have a choice of Select (for
Assembly machining only), Sketch, and Stock Envelope options. If you use Sketch
and the current stock boundary is sketched, the old sketch will be retrieved for you to
modify (if you want to start a new sketch, use the Remove option first). Note that only
one stock boundary definition can exist at a time; therefore, choosing Add actually
replaces the old definition with a new one.
• Remove—Remove the stock boundary definition. In regular Part machining (when the
workpiece has geometry), the system will the use the workpiece cross section as a stock
boundary. In assembly machining, or if the workpiece does not have geometry, you have
to supply another definition using the Add option.
• Done—The system recalculates the cut area using the new stock boundary definition.
274
the cut are highlighted, an arrow shows the default cut extension direction,
and you are prompted to specify the cut extensions. You can do this by
selecting options from the EXT DIR menu:
• Positive Z—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint parallel to the turning axis, in
the direction of the Z-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
• Negative Z—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint parallel to the turning axis, in
the direction opposite to that of the Z-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
• Positive X—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint perpendicular to the turning
axis, in the direction of the X-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
• Negative X—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint perpendicular to the turning
axis, in the direction opposite to that of the X-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
• None—Do not extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint. None is generally used with
facing NC sequences to specify no cut extension at the endpoint closest to the turning
axis. The tool retracts once the cut reaches this endpoint.
Note: If the cut endpoint for a facing NC sequence is located on the turning axis, you
have to specify None for cut extension at this point.
You can extend or trim the ends of a cut motion after selecting or creating the
Turn Profile using the following procedure.
Þ On—Place the start point of the cut motion at the start of the defined trajectory (the
default).
Þ Specify—Move the start point along the defined trajectory. When you select this
option, the start point of the cut motion starts following the mouse (along the cut
motion, if trimmed, and tangent to the first segment, if extended).
4. If the cut motion is adjusted using Specify, select the dimensioning type:
Þ Ext Length—Type the extension length along the chain, that is, length ratio of the
added or subtracted segment to the original length of the cut motion. Positive value
corresponds to extended cut motion, negative—to a trimmed one.
275
Þ Offset Plane—Select a plane to measure offset from, then type the offset value.
Positive value means that the offset is to the positive side of the surface (away from
the solid material).
Þ Offset Csys—Select a coordinate system to measure offset from. Select axis along
which to measure the offset, then type the offset value. Positive value means the
positive axis direction.
5. Click End to adjust the end point and repeat Steps 3 and 4.
Þ Delete Last—Deletes the corner condition that has been added last. You can use
this option more than once; when there are no more corner conditions left, the
Delete Last option becomes inaccessible.
3. When you choose Add from the CORNER COND menu, the CORNER ADD menu appears
with the following options:
Þ Specify—Select points on the cut motion and specify type by selecting the
appropriate option. After each selection, the corner condition will be added at the
selected point. Choose Done Sel when finished.
After the corner conditions are automatically added, you can review and change them
using the AUTO SELECT menu:
Þ Change Type—Specify a different corner condition type for the highlighted corner.
276
Þ Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Convex corner
conditions will be highlighted in red, concave—in cyan.
Þ Info—List information about the highlighted corner condition type in the Message
Window.
Corner conditions can be specified for Area, Profile, and Groove turning, to
avoid gouging sharp convex corners, as well as to easily add necessary fillets
and chamfers at the time of machining.
• Fillet—A fillet which can be added both at concave and convex corners. The fillet radius
is defined by either the CONCAVE_RADIUS or the CONVEX_RADIUS parameter,
depending on the type of the corner.
• Chamfer—A chamfer which can be added both at concave and convex corners. The
chamfer size is defined by the CHAMFER_DIM parameter, which represents the
distance cut on each side of the corner.
Part Part
Fillet Chamfer
R = CONVEX_RADIUS d = CHAMFER_DIM
For Area turning, both the rough and profile passes will take the corner
condition into account.
Part
277
To Specify Local Stock Allowance
2. Click Define. In Area, 4 Axis Area, and Groove Turning, you can specify separate local
stock allowance for Rough and Profile cuts by using the Rough Portion or Profile
Portion option, respectively.
3. Select a chain of entities on the Turn Profile by using the From-To option and selecting
two vertices (or choose Select All), and enter a value for local stock allowance.
The system displays the expected final tool pass by applying the values listed below and
the local stock allowance you specified to the Turn Profile:
Þ For Rough Portion and for Profile Turning—Ends adjustments, corner conditions,
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW, Z_STOCK_ALLOW.
4. Repeat Step 3 to apply other local stock allowances, or choose Done/Return to finish.
Note: You can not apply more than one local stock allowance to the same entity.
5. The following options are available to manipulate existing local stock allowances:
Þ Modify—All local stock allowance values are displayed. Use the Dimension option,
select a value you want to modify, and enter a new value. You can also modify the
underlying parameter values: use the Parameter option, check off the stock
allowance parameter(s) you want to modify, and enter the new value(s).
Þ Remove—Select the pair(s) of vertices where local stock allowance is specified (you
can also use Select All). Once you remove a pair, stock allowance control reverts to
parameter values.
Þ Info—Displays the expected final tool pass, along with stock allowance values.
278
You can specify local stock allowance by selecting a chain of segments on a
Turn Profile and entering a value that will apply to this chain only. This
functionality is available for Area, 4 Axis Area, Groove, and Profile Turning.
You can mirror the tool about its vertical axis by setting the Holder_Type
parameter to Right. This allows you to perform back turning of diameters
behind the shoulders of parts.
Holder_Type Holder_Type
Right Left
If you perform 4 Axis Area turning, the HEAD1 and HEAD2 options are
grayed out, because the system will automatically use both heads for this NC
sequence.
279
To Create an Area Turning NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Area | Done. You must be in a Lathe
or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have
to click Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 3. If you click Seq
Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NC
sequence types.
Select the desired options and click Done. The system will start the user interface for all
selected options in turn.
4. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
5. If the stock boundary is not defined, the system selects the Stock Bound command on
the INT CUT menu. Specify the stock boundary.
6. The system selects the Turn Profile command on the INT CUT menu and displays the
TURN PROFILE menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
7. The system selects the Extensions command on the INT CUT menu and displays the
EXT DIR menu. Specify the cut extensions.
8. You can use the other commands on the INT CUT menu:
Þ Ends—Extend or trim the ends of the cut section. Turning extensions will be applied
to the adjusted ends of the cut section, as specified.
9. Click Done Cut. The system creates an Automatic Cut and a Follow Cut motion.
10. Create additional Approach and Exit motions, if needed, by selecting the appropriate
options from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box.
280
Area Turning
Area turning allows you to define the area in the model cross section where
you want the material to be removed. The tool path will be generated by
scanning this area to remove material in step depth increments.
You can control how the intermediate reference part diameters are machined
using the combination of the STEP_DEPTH and MIN_STEP_DEPTH
parameters. Pro/NC will generate passes at STEP_DEPTH until a reference
part diameter is located. It will then calculate the depth of a pass at this
diameter plus stock allowance, and compare the distance between that pass
and the previous one to MIN_STEP_DEPTH. If this distance is more than
MIN_STEP_DEPTH, the system will make the pass along the diameter, and
the scanning algorithm will start from this pass. If the distance is smaller
than MIN_STEP_DEPTH, the diameter pass is ignored and the scanning
algorithm continues from the previous pass.
281
Positive X
Turn Profile
None
7. Define the Turn Profile by selecting surfaces of the reference part and specify the cut
extensions as shown in the following illustration.
Positive X
Turn Profile
Positive Z
8. On the INT CUT menu, click Ends > Start > Specify | Done. Use the mouse to extend
the Turn Profile to the left, as shown in the following illustration. On the END DIM
TYPE menu, click Ext Length and accept the default value.
282
The resulting tool path is shown in the following illustration.
283
Turn Profile
Positive Z
Negative Z
With the 4 Axis Area option, available in 4-axis workcells only, you can
define an Area turning NC sequence with two synchronized heads
simultaneously machining the area.
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > 4 Axis Area | Done. You must be in a
2-turret Lathe or a Mill/Turn workcell. Note that once you click 4 Axis Area, the
HEAD1 and HEAD2 options become unavailable, because the system will use both
heads for this NC sequence.
2. Follow the procedure for defining an Area turning NC sequence. When you are finished,
the system automatically generates the tool path for two synchronized heads.
284
To Create a Profile Turning NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Profile | Done. You must be in a
Lathe or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have
to click Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 3. If you click Seq
Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NC
sequence types.
Select the desired options and click Done. The system will start the user interface for all
selected options in turn.
4. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
5. The system displays the TURN PROFILE menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
6. By default, the cut motion will be offset from the Turn Profile by NOSE_RADIUS (if the
OUTPUT_POINT parameter is set to CENTER). If you want the Turn Profile to
represent the trajectory of the tool control point, rather than the finished geometry, on
the INT CUT menu, click On/Offset > On. The cut motion will then coincide with the
Turn Profile.
7. Adjust the cut motion ends, if needed, and specify corner conditions. You can also specify
local stock allowances, if desired. Connect the cut motions using the Tool Motion
functionality.
8. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
9. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Profile Turning
Profile turning allows you to interactively specify the cut motion trajectory.
When defining cut motions, the On/Offset option in the INT CUT menu
provides you with the following choice:
• Offset (default)—The turn profile represents the finished geometry, that is, the
trajectory of the tip of the tool cutting material. This means that if the OUTPUT_POINT
parameter is set to CENTER (the default), the cut motion will be automatically offset by
NOSE_RADIUS in the appropriate direction from the specified trajectory (up for outside
turning, down—for inside, to the right—for face turning). If OUTPUT_POINT is TIP, no
offset will be applied.
285
• On—The turn profile represents the trajectory of the tool control point. No offset will be
applied when creating the cut motion.
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Groove | Done. You must be in a
Lathe or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have
to click Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 3. If you click Seq
Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NC
sequence types.
Select the desired options and click Done. The system will start the user interface for all
selected options in turn.
4. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
5. If the stock boundary is not defined, the system selects the Stock Bound command on
the INT CUT menu. Specify the stock boundary.
6. The system selects the Turn Profile command on the INT CUT menu and displays the
TURN PROFILE menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
286
7. The system selects the Extensions command on the INT CUT menu and displays the
EXT DIR menu. Specify the cut extensions.
8. You can use the other commands on the INT CUT menu:
Þ Ends—Extend or trim the ends of the cut section. Turning extensions will be applied
to the adjusted ends of the cut section, as specified.
9. Click Done Cut. The system creates an Automatic Cut and a Follow Cut motion.
10. Create additional Approach and Exit motions, if needed, by selecting the appropriate
options from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box.
Groove Turning
Groove turning is performed with a different type of tool, which has cutting
edges on both sides. Note that the tool origin is at the center of the left-side
nose radius.
For Groove turning, the tool always cuts normal to the groove bottom. The
distance between two neighboring cuts is defined by the STEP_OVER
parameter, the height of retract between the cuts (the system start level) is
set to CLEAR_DIST. The final retract is controlled by the PULLOUT_DIST
parameter. If you specify the ROUGH_OPTION parameter value as
ROUGH_&_PROF, the tool will also make a profiling pass across the groove.
The ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW and PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameters
define the amount of stock to be left for the finishing NC sequence.
STEP_OVER
PULLOUT_DIST
CLEAR_DIST
Profiling pass
287
The SCAN_TYPE value TYPE_ONE_DIR allows you to start the rough
grooving NC sequence at one side of the groove and move to the other side,
while with TYPE_1 (the default) the tool starts in the middle and moves to
each of the sides in turn. If you want to start from the other side, set
CUT_DIRECTION to REVERSE. To ensure uniform stock allowance on the
sides of the groove after the rough pass, set SCAN_TYPE to
TYPE_1_CONNECT.
The following illustration shows scan types for Rough Groove turning.
42 1 35 5 4 3 2 1 Profiling
Profiling
pass
pass
SCAN_TYPE SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1 TYPE_ONE_DIR
Peck Cycle
The peck cycle (illustrated by the following graphic) will be performed for
rough groove turning only if the PECK_DEPTH parameter is set to a value
other than 0 (0 is the default):
1. The tool is positioned at the CLEAR_DIST level above the top of the groove.
3. Retract by PULLOUT_DIST.
4. Cut to the (PECK_DEPTH * 2) offset below the top of the groove, retract by
PULLOUT_DIST.
5. If FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH is other than 0 (the default), the tool will retract all the way
back to CLEAR_DIST upon reaching this depth below the top of the groove. After
retracting, the tool will return rapidly and proceed cutting at peck increments.
6. Upon reaching the bottom of the groove (plus ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW, if any), the tool
will dwell (if DELAY is not “-), retract back to the CLEAR_DIST level (8), step over (9),
and continue from Step 1.
288
CLEAR_DIST
PECK_DEPTH
1 2
PULLOUT_DIST FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
3 PECK_DEPTH
4
CLEAR_DIST
5 FULL_RETRACT STOCK_ALLOW
_DEPTH 6
CLEAR_DIST CLEAR_DIST
8
7
STEP_OVER
Note: Finish turning NC sequences created prior to Release 12.0 cannot be redefined.
289
PULLOUT_DIST
CLEAR_DIST
CLEAR_DIST
PULLOUT_DIST
SIDEWALL_OFFSET
ROUGH_OPTION PROF_ONLY ROUGH_OPTION PROF_ONLY
GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE CONTINUOUS GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE NO_BACKCUT
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Thread | Done. You must be in a
Lathe or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. Specify the thread type by selecting Unified, Acme, Buttress, or General; the thread
orientation by selecting Outside, Inside, or Face; and the output type by selecting ISO
or AI Macro; then click Done.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific option:
Turn Profile—Select or create a Turn Profile. The Turn Profile must consist of a single
line, which represents the first tool motion. For an external thread, the line must
correspond to the major diameter; for an internal thread—to the minor diameter.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not
satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Thread Turning
Thread NC sequences are used to cut threads on a lathe. The threads can be
external and internal, blind and through. This NC sequence does not remove
290
any material from the workpiece on the screen. The proper cutter path will,
however, be generated.
Use Edge
291
Use Edge
2. In the PLAY PATH dialog box, click View > Show Remaining Material.
The system highlights the portions of the Turn Profile where the tool path did not
provide specified stock allowance and displays an error dialog box that explains the
meaning of the different color-coded segments. If there is no remainder material left, the
system displays a message "No under-machined regions found."
Turn Profile
About Turn Profile
To define cut geometry for a Turning NC sequence, you have to create a Turn
Profile. A Turn Profile is a separate feature (similar to a Mill Volume or Mill
Window), which you can define either at setup time or when you define an
292
NC sequence. You can then reference the Turn Profile in more than one
Turning NC sequence. This functionality enables you to define the cut
references once, and then use this definition to create rough, semi-finish, and
finish NC sequences.
You can predefine Turn Profiles by choosing the Turn Profile option in the
MFG GEOMETRY menu.
A Turn Profile defines the cut geometry for various types of Turning NC
sequences in the following manner:
• For Area and Groove turning, you must define the area of the cut by specifying the final
stock outline; usually this is done by specifying the part edges or surfaces to be
machined. You can use part edges or surfaces for rough cuts as well, since the amount of
stock left after the rough cut for the finish cut is defined by the
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW and PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameters.
• For Profile turning, you must specify the trajectory of the cut motion for the tool. Then, if
the OUTPUT_POINT parameter is set to CENTER (the default), the cut motion will be
automatically offset by NOSE_RADIUS in the appropriate direction from the specified
trajectory (up for Outside turning, down—for Inside, to the right—for Face). If
OUTPUT_POINT is TIP, no offset will be applied.
• For Thread turning, you must specify the first tool movement, which corresponds to the
major diameter for an external thread and to the minor diameter for an internal thread.
When you choose Turn Profile from the INT CUT or the MFG GEOMETRY
menu, the TURN PROFILE menu appears with the following options:
• Select Profile—Select a predefined Turn Profile. Available only at the time of defining
an NC sequence.
• Redefine Profile—Redefine an existing Turn Profile. Choose the profile name from a
namelist menu.
• Delete Profile—Delete an existing Turn Profile. Available only at setup time. Choose
the profile name from a namelist menu.
2. Select a method of creating the Turn Profile by using one of the following commands on
the CREATE PROFILE menu:
293
Þ Sketch—Sketch the profile in the XZ plane of the profile coordinate system.
Þ Select Surface—Select From and To surfaces, and specify on which side of the
centerline the profile is to be located. The system creates the profile at the
intersection of the selected chain of surfaces and the XZ plane of the profile
coordinate system.
Þ Select Curve—Select segments of a datum curve. You must create the curve before
you define the Turn Profile, for example, by using the Use Xsec option. With this
option, you can also select segments of existing Turn Profiles.
Þ Section—The system generates a model cross section in the XZ plane of the profile
coordinate system. Select From and To vertices of this cross section, then toggle the
chain, if necessary.
Þ Select Ref Envlp—Select an existing Reference Envelope, then select From and To
vertices to specify the desired portion of this envelope.
Þ Create Ref Envlp—Create a Reference Envelope, then select From and To vertices
to specify the desired portion of this envelope.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens. Depending on the selected method, it will
contain some specific elements, as well as the following common elements:
Þ Csys—Specify the coordinate system. This element is available only at setup time.
When you create a Turn Profile while defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC uses the NC
Sequence coordinate system. If you are creating the Turn Profile by selecting a
Reference Envelope, Pro/NC uses the coordinate system of the Reference Envelope.
3. Define the required elements of the CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box.
4. Click Preview to verify the Turn Profile. Adjust the Turn Profile, if necessary.
5. Click OK.
294
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system
(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequence
coordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
Pro/NC reorients the model so that the XZ plane of the Turn Profile coordinate system is
parallel to the screen and displays the Sketcher side bar.
3. Select the Sketcher references, sketch the Turn Profile, and dimension as necessary. The
sketch must consist of a single chain of entities. Click Continue to exit Sketcher.
4. Specify the material side by using the Flip and Okay commands. The arrow must point
towards the reference part.
5. Click OK.
• If the workcell is defined as Horizontal—with the z-axis pointing to the right and x-axis
pointing up.
• If the workcell is defined as Vertical—with the z-axis pointing up and x-axis pointing to
the right.
However, you can sketch in any view orientation of the model provided the
XZ plane is parallel to the screen and the sketch is completely on one side of
the NC Sequence x-axis.
Section sketch
Define a Turn Profile by sketching using the Sketch option in the CREATE
PROFILE menu:
• For Area and Groove turning, sketch the final stock outline.
295
• For Profile turning, sketch the cut motion.
• For Thread turning, sketch the first tool movement, which corresponds to the major
diameter for an external thread and to the minor diameter for an internal thread.
Multiple loops or chains are not allowed when sketching the Turn Profile,
that is, the sketch can only contain one continuous chain of entities. However,
you can sketch the final outline for Area or Groove turning so that it crosses
the workpiece boundary (or the Stock Bound section) more than once, thus
forming multiple machining areas.
Workpiece boundary
Section sketch
A Turn Profile can also be defined by selecting the start and end surfaces on
the reference part. The system will then machine these two surfaces and all
the surfaces in between. If you want to machine one surface only, select it
twice.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system
(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequence
coordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
Þ Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in the
positive X area.
Þ Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in the
negative X area.
296
6. Click Done. The system creates an internal cross section of the reference part in the XZ
plane of the Turn Profile coordinate system and selects the appropriate chain of entities
in this cross section (between the selected surfaces in either positive or negative X area)
as the Turn Profile.
Cut extensions
Turn Profiles are datum curves. With the Select Curve option, you can
define new Turn Profiles by selecting segments from existing Turn Profiles.
You can also select segments of other types of datum curves; however, these
datum curves must lie in the XZ plane of the Turn Profile coordinate system.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system
(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequence
coordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
3. Use the commands on the CHAIN menu to select segments of a datum curve, for example,
of an existing Turn Profile. All segments must form a single continuous chain. Click
Done.
4. Specify the material side by using the Flip and Okay commands. The arrow must point
towards the material.
5. Click OK.
297
To Define a Turn Profile by Section
If a reference part for turning has a complex contour, the process of defining
the cut by selecting edges, or sketching and aligning, can be time consuming.
You can accelerate this process by using the following technique.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system
(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequence
coordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
Pro/NC generates a cross section of the model in the XZ plane of the Turn Profile
coordinate system and displays it as a closed loop of cyan entities, with all vertices
highlighted in green.
Þ Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in the
positive X area.
Þ Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in the
negative X area.
4. Click Done.
5. If the system selected the wrong portion of the cross section loop, click Toggle Profile.
7. Click OK.
298
To vertex From vertex
Use this technique if your reference part has a non-circular cross section.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system
(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequence
coordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
Pro/NC generates a Turning Envelope of the reference part and displays it as a closed
loop of cyan entities, with all vertices highlighted in green.
Þ Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in the
positive X area.
Þ Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in the
negative X area.
4. Click Done.
5. If the system selected the wrong portion of the Turning Envelope, click Toggle Profile.
7. Click OK.
299
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting a Reference Envelope
This option is available only when you have defined a Reference Turning
Envelope at setup time. You can then use this envelope to create multiple
Turn Profiles by selecting appropriate chains of entities from the Turning
Envelope.
2. Select the name of the Reference Envelope from the Names dialog box.
Pro/NC displays the Turning Envelope as a closed loop of cyan entities, with all vertices
highlighted in green.
Þ Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in the
positive X area.
Þ Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in the
negative X area.
4. Click Done.
5. If the system selected the wrong portion of the Turning Envelope, click Toggle Profile.
7. Click OK.
1. In the CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box, select the Adjust Turn Profile element and
click Define.
The Adjust Profile dialog box opens. It contains the following adjustment options:
Þ Line Connect—Replace a chain on the Turn Profile with a straight line. Specify the
chain to replace by selecting the From and To vertices.
300
Þ Trim in Z—Trim the Turn Profile by extending an entity from the selected vertex in
the Z direction until it intersects the Turn Profile.
Þ Trim in X—Trim the Turn Profile by extending an entity from the selected vertex in
the X direction until it intersects the Turn Profile.
2. To add an adjustment to the Turn Profile, select the desired adjustment option, click the
Select arrow next to the Adjust Profile label, select the appropriate vertices on the
Turn Profile, and click Add.
The system displays the name of the adjustment in the list box at the top of the Adjust
Profile dialog box.
4. To remove an adjustment, select its name in the list box at the top of the Adjust Profile
dialog box and click Remove.
Holemaking
About Holemaking
A Holemaking NC sequence is created by selecting the cycle type and
specifying the holes to drill by defining the Hole Set(s). The order of
machining the holes is defined by the SCAN_TYPE parameter value; you can
also build the traversal path between the selected holes either by sketching
or by connecting the hole axes.
A Hole Set includes one or more holes to be drilled; each Hole Set has a
drilling depth specification or countersink diameter value associated with it.
You can include more than one Hole Set in a single Holemaking NC
sequence; this allows drilling of holes with different depth specifications, as
well as having multiple countersink diameter values, within a single NC
sequence.
There are various methods of selecting the holes to be included in a Hole Set:
• By including all holes with chamfers machinable by the current tool (for countersinking)
301
• By selecting individual datum points to mark the drill locations
• By reading in a file containing the datum points’ coordinates with respect to a specified
coordinate system
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Lathe, Mill, or
Mill/Turn workcell.
2. Choose Holemaking and specify the number of machine axes, if applicable. Choose
Done.
5. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ
SETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
Þ Check Surfs—Select the surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed.
Use this option if there are obstacles (protrusions) along the traversal path between
the holes. When the tool traverses from hole to hole and a motion will result in
gouging a surface selected as Check Surface, the system will issue the CYCLE / OFF
command after machining the previous hole, the tool will retract along Z axis to the
height of CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW above the obstacle height, and move at
FREE_FEED in XY-plane to the location above the next hole, then reissue the
CYCLE / ... statement. This functionality is available for all 3-Axis Holemaking NC
sequences except Back boring.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,
and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
6. The tool path is created automatically depending on the SCAN_TYPE parameter value.
Choose Play Path to verify the tool path. If not satisfied, you can either modify the
parameters, or choose Customize to specify the traversal path between the selected
holes.
7. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
302
Holemaking Cycle Types
• Drill—Drill a hole. Depending on the additional option selected, the following statement
will be output to the CL file:
Þ Deep—CYCLE / DEEP
• Face—Drill a hole with an optional dwell at final depth to help assure a clean surface at
the bottom of the hole. The CYCLE / FACE statement will be output to the CL file.
• Bore—Bore a hole to create a finish hole diameter with high precision. The CYCLE /
BORE statement will be output to the CL file.
• Tap—Drill a threaded hole. Pro/NC supports ISO standard thread output. The CYCLE /
TAP statement will be output to the CL file. Two additional options are available:
Þ Fixed—The feed rate is determined by the combination of thread pitch and spindle
speed.
• Ream—Create a precision finish hole. The CYCLE / REAM statement will be output to
the CL file.
303
TOOLS CYCLE TYPES
Drill • • • • • • • •
Countersink • • • • • • • •
Tap •
Ream • • • • • • •
Bore • • • • • • •
Center Drill • • • • • • • •
Back Spotting •
End Mill • • • • • • •
5-Axis Holemaking allows you to drill holes with axes not necessarily normal
to the retract surface. 5-Axis Holemaking is available only when you are in a
4- or 5-Axis Mill, or a Mill/Turn workcell.
If 4-Axis Turning is available, the HEAD 1 and HEAD 2 options in the TURN
SEQ menu will allow you to specify which head is to perform the Holemaking
NC sequence.
For 5-Axis Holemaking, if you use a retract plane, the tool moves as shown in
the following drawing: it rapids to the point defined by the
CLEARANCE_OFFSET parameter above the intersection of the hole axis
with the start surface, orients itself parallel to the hole axis, drills the hole
(stopping at the offset defined by the CLEAR_DIST parameter), then retracts
back to the CLEARANCE_OFFSET, and traverses to the next hole.
304
Tool is positioned for drilling
the second hole. Tool starts
drilling.
CLEARANCE_OFFSET
start surface for
the second hole
Tool retracts after drilling.
after drilling CLEAR_DIST
Drilling cycle finished for
the first hole.
for drilling the second hole.
start surface for
the first hole CLEAR_DIST
If you define a retract surface of revolution for 5-Axis Holemaking, the tool
retracts to this surface after drilling a hole, moves along this surface and
normal to it to the point above the next hole, orients itself parallel to the hole
axis, rapids to CLEAR_DIST, drills the hole, then retracts back to the retract
surface.
1. Choose Peck Table from the PARAM SETUP menu or the MFG PARAMS menu. The
PECK TABLE menu appears with the following options:
Þ Create—Bring up the Pro/TABLE editor to create a new peck table. An empty table
of the proper format will be displayed.
Þ Modify—Bring up the Pro/TABLE editor to modify the peck table values. The
current peck depth table will be displayed for editing.
Þ Delete—(Available only at setup time.) Delete the current peck table. You will be
asked to confirm your command to delete the table.
Þ Show—Brings up the Information Window, displaying the values in the peck table.
2. Choose Create or Modify from the PECK TABLE menu. The Pro/TABLE editor window
appears. Enter values for Low Diameter, High Diameter, Peck Depth Ratio, and Feed
Rate.
3. When you are finished entering values, exit the Pro/TABLE editor and save the changes.
Peck Table
For Deep Drilling, two additional options are available in the HOLE MAKING
menu:
305
• Constant Peck—Causes the NC sequence to be executed using a single peck depth.
• Variable Peck—Causes a peck table to be used for controlling the peck depth. When
using a peck table, the PECK_DEPTH parameter will not be included in the list of Cut
Parameters.
• Low Diameter—Low end of the tool diameter range. This value must be less than the tool
diameter, and cannot be equal to the High Diameter.
• High Diameter—High end of the tool diameter range. This value must be greater than or
equal to the tool diameter.
• Peck Depth Ratio—The ratio of the peck depth to the tool diameter.
If you have specified Variable Peck for the NC sequence, and the peck table
has not been set up, you will not be allowed to quit the MFG SET UP menu
unless you have entered values in the peck table.
- - 0.350000 12.000000
- - 0.300000 12.000000
- - 0.200000 12.000000
- - 0.100000 10.000000
- - 0.400000 8.000000
- - 0.100000 8.000000
306
This table will produce the following CL output:
RAPID
CYCLE / OFF
$$-> END /
FINI
The Hole Set option in the HOLES menu allows you to define and modify
Hole Sets. If no Hole Sets have been defined, selecting it will immediately
start creating a new Hole Set; otherwise, a selection menu will appear.
Selecting an existing Hole Set name will allow you to modify this Hole Set,
choosing the New Set option will allow you to create a new Hole Set.
1. Choose Hole Set from the HOLES menu. If the SEL MENU appears, choose New Set.
307
2. The system displays the HoleSet dialog box.
The upper portion of the dialog box contains six tabulated pages that provide means of
hole selection:
3. Specify the holes to be drilled using any combination of methods listed above. See
Combining Selection Methods for information on how to use more than one selection
method for defining a Hole Set.
Note: Selection by Points can not be used in combination with any of the other selection
methods.
4. Click Depth to select the desired depth option and specify references as appropriate to
the depth type.
You can also use the following options, located in the lower portion of the Hole Set dialog
box:
Þ Use Prev—Select a Hole Set used in a previous NC sequence. You can then modify
this Hole Set for the current NC sequence.
Þ Auto Chamfer—If the checkmark is on, the system will automatically include all
holes with chamfers that can be machined with the current tool, and automatically
determine depth and direction for Countersink drilling.
Note: If you set the CUT_DIRECTION parameter to REVERSE, this hole will be
machined last.
Þ Direction for 5-axis drilling—Allows you to flip the direction of drilling for a
selected axis (except axes selected with Auto Chamfer).
308
Þ Show rules used in selection—Displays an Info Window listing all the axes,
surfaces, diameters, and so on, selected or explicitly unselected in the current Hole
Set.
The Preview button at the bottom of the Hole Set dialog box highlights the axes or
points selected so far, as well as the start and end surfaces, if appropriate. The drilling
depth will be listed in the message window.
5. Click OK at the bottom of the Hole Set dialog box when finished selecting the holes.
Hole Sets can be deleted using the Delete option in the HOLES menu. The
Show option in the HOLES menu will highlight the axes included in a
selected Hole Set, as well as start and end surfaces, if appropriate. The
drilling depth will be listed in the message window.
The Axes method lets you explicitly select and unselect hole axes, regardless
of other rules used in Hole selection.
When you select Groups, the system copies the rules used for defining the
selected Drill Group, as well as explicitly selected and unselected axes, into
the current Hole Set, and applies them to the model according to the
principles described above.
Selection by Points can not be used in combination with any of the other
selection methods.
To Define Depth
All Hole Sets (except for Countersink drilling), require specifying the drill
depth type. To define the depth type and references, click Depth in the
HoleSet dialog box. The system displays the Hole Set Depth dialog box. Use
one of the following Hole Depth option buttons:
• Blind—Drill from the start surface (or Z height) to specified depth. Specify the Start and
End surfaces (by either selecting a surface or entering a Z depth). If you select the
309
checkbox next to the Use breakout distance option, the system adds the
BREAKOUT_DISTANCE parameter value when calculating depth.
Note: Auto depth is not available for Tap and Ream tools.
• Thru All—Drill a through hole, from the retract surface all the way through the
workpiece(s) or reference part(s) that the hole intersects. By default, all the reference
parts and workpieces are used for depth calculation; you can unselect some of the parts,
if desired, or explicitly select parts, by using the Select and Unselect buttons in the
Hole Set Depth dialog box. Select All selects all the reference parts and workpieces.
The Tool Depth option buttons, Shoulder and Tip, available for Blind and
Auto drilling, determine if the drilling depth will be with reference to the
shoulder or the tip of the tool.
Drill up to this
DTM1 DTM1
Shoulder Tip
For Countersink drilling, and for other types with the drill depth Blind,
you have to specify the start surface. You can specify one of:
310
• Surface—Select a surface or create a datum plane whose intersection with the hole axis
will be used as the starting point.
For other depth types, the starting point will be automatically determined as
the point of intersection of the axis with the topmost surface among the
workpiece(s) and reference part(s) that the hole intersects.
By default, all the reference parts and workpieces are used for determining
the starting point; you can unselect some of the parts, if desired, or explicitly
select parts, by using the Select and Unselect buttons in the Hole Set Depth
dialog box. Select All selects all the reference parts and workpieces. When
you select a hole to drill, the system will look for the appropriate surface
among the selected parts, and use its intersection with the hole axis as the
starting point.
Selected axis
• Surface—Select a surface or create a datum plane to drill up to. If you select a non-
planar surface, the depth is defined by the point of intersection of this surface with the
hole axis.
• Z Depth—Enter an offset value from the starting point (the offset will automatically
point towards the workpiece, that is, in the negative Z direction).
311
Click Add and select hole axes to add them to the Hole Set.
When you have a pattern of holes, it is not necessary to select all the hole
axes. Select Pattern to indicate that you want all the pattern members to be
drilled, then select any axis belonging to a pattern. You can drill only some
holes in the pattern using the Single option.
All axes currently included in the Hole Set are listed in the central list box. If
you have selected holes using a different method (for example, Diameters),
the names of these axes also appear on the Axes tab.
To remove a previously selected axis from the Hole Set, highlight its name in
the central list box and click Delete. Similar to adding axes, you can use the
Pattern button to remove a whole pattern of holes.
Retract
plane
Click Add and select surfaces to add all holes located on these surfaces to the
Hole Set.
The names of selected surfaces are listed in the central list box on the
Surfaces tab. To remove all holes located on a surface, select its name in the
list box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes on a surface, use the
Axes tab.
When you click Add, the Select hole diameter dialog box appears. It lists all
the hole diameters present in the model. Select a diameter from the list, or
click Select and select a cylindrical surface on the model to specify the
diameter. The system adds all holes of the specified diameter to the Hole Set.
312
The diameter values selected so far are listed in the central list box on the
Diameters tab. To remove all holes of a specified diameter, select its value in
the list box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes of a specified
diameter, use the Axes tab.
When you go to the Parameters tab, the Feature Parameter list box
contains a list of all feature parameters associated with Hole and Cosmetic
Thread features in the model. When you select a parameter name in the list,
the Value text box below will contain a drop-down list of all the currently
present values for this parameter.
2. Select an operator from the drop-down list. For parameter types Integer and Real, the
operators available are: “=, “!=, “>, “<“. For other parameter types, the only operators
available are: “= and “!=.
4. Click Add.
5. The system displays the selected parameter and its value in the list box below and
includes all holes with the appropriate feature parameter values in the Hole Set.
Notes:
Þ If you use the Points method, Auto drill depth is not available.
Þ The Points method can not be combined with other methods of hole selection. If you
try using Points when some of the holes have already been selected using another
method (or vice versa), the system will ask you if you want to discard the previous
selections.
313
There are three ways to select points for drilling:
• File—Specify a coordinate system to be used as origin for the datum point array file (the
coordinate system is assumed to be Cartesian), then either read in a file with the datum
points’ coordinates using the Browse button (the expected file extension is “.pts), or
enter the coordinate values from the keyboard using the Edit button. The Edit button
also allows you to edit an existing datum point array file after it has been read in.
• On Surface—Surfaces selected for collecting the datum points will also be used as
projection surfaces.
• By Points or File—For 3-Axis Holemaking, the projection surface is the retract surface.
For 5-Axis Holemaking, you have to explicitly select projection surfaces.
Start surface
Csink Diam
314
To Use the Automatic Chamfer Selection
If your design model contains Chamfer features that you need to
Countersink, you can automate the selection process by using the Auto
Chamfer option, as described below.
1. Create a Countersink NC sequence and set up a tool with the Point_Angle corresponding
to the chamfer geometry that you want to machine (see example).
2. When defining the Hole Set, select the checkbox next to the Auto Chamfer option in
the Options section of the dialog box (this option is available for Countersink drilling
only).
3. The system evaluates all the holes in the manufacturing model, and machines only those
with chamfers corresponding to the Point_Angle of the current tool. The names of the
axes to be machined are listed in the central list box of the Axes tab.
Notes:
• You can apply another rule if you want to narrow the selection. For example, if you want
to machine only chamfered holes on a certain surface, use Surfaces and select the
surface you want.
• If you change the tool to a one with a different Point_Angle, the system will
automatically update the Hole Set to include the holes matching the new tool.
CHAMFER 45 x .2
Countersink Countersink
sequence #1 sequence #2:
use tool with use tool with
Point_Angle 90 Point_Angle 120
315
To Define Plates for Web Drilling
Web drilling enables you to drill holes through two or more plates, separated
by a certain distance, with the tool moving with FEED_RATE while drilling a
plate, and then making a RAPID motion along the tool axis to position above
the next plate.
If you perform Auto or Thru All drilling, the system will determine start and
end of drilling for each plate based on the intersection of the hole axes with
the parts selected for depth calculation. By default, all the reference parts
and workpieces are used for depth calculation; you can unselect some of the
parts, if desired, or explicitly select parts, by using the Select and Unselect
buttons in the Hole Set Depth dialog box. Select All selects all the reference
parts and workpieces.
If you perform Blind drilling, the Hole Set Depth dialog box contains an extra
section at the bottom, Plate Selection, which lists all the plates defined so
far, and has the following buttons:
• Add—Adds a new plate. Define the Start and End surfaces for a new plate, then click
this button. The system adds the plate name to the list in the Defined Plates for Web
Drilling box.
• Change—Changes the Start and End surfaces for an existing plate. Highlight the plate
name in the Defined Plates for Web Drilling list box and respecify the Start and End
surfaces for this plate, then click this button.
The Back cycle allows you to perform back bore and countersink NC
sequences with a special type of tool, called Back Spotting.
Back drilling is always Blind. You have to specify a start surface or Z depth,
and then either select a surface or enter an offset value to define the drilling
depth. Unlike other types of drilling, the offset will automatically point in the
positive Z direction. See the example for more information on setting up an
NC sequence and resulting tool motions for Back drilling and countersinking.
316
Cutter_Diam 2.4
Length 4
Csink_Angle 30
Cutting_Offset 0.4
Body_Diameter 1.3
Insert_Length 0.6
317
For Back Countersink drilling, you have to specify a start surface and a
countersink diameter, similar to regular countersink drilling. The illustration
below shows a Back Countersink NC sequence performed with the same tool
as in the previous example.
318
Select this face as the start surface (similar to
the previous example).
Type 2.2 for countersink diameter.
You can also use the Auto Chamfer option for Back Countersink drilling, in
which case the system will automatically include all holes with chamfers that
can be machined with the current tool, that is, with the chamfer angle
corresponding to the Csink_Angle of the tool.
Drill Groups
About Drill Groups
You can define groups of hole axes at setup time for later use in Holemaking
NC sequences. Drill Groups allow you to:
• Simplify the hole selection. Once a Drill Group is defined, it can be selected for any
Holemaking NC sequence by just selecting its name from a namelist menu.
• Delete—Delete an existing Drill Group. Select the name of the group from a namelist
menu.
319
• Blank—Blank a Drill Group which was previously displayed. Select a name (only
unblanked Drill Groups are shown in the namelist menu), the axes are displayed in the
default color (yellow).
• Unblank—Display a Drill Group as it is currently defined. Once you select a Drill Group
name from the namelist menu, all axes included in the group are displayed in magenta.
3. The system displays an abbreviated version of the Hole Set dialog box. It has four tabbed
pages: Axes, Surfaces, Diameters, and Parameters, to let you select holes to be
included in the Drill Group. The mechanism of hole selection for Drill Group is the same
as when creating a Hole Set.
4. Click OK when finished. To display the Drill Group definition, choose Unblank and
select the group name.
2. Choose Modify and select the Drill Group name from the namelist menu.
3. The system again displays the abbreviated version of the Hole Set dialog box, as when
defining a Drill Group, allowing you to select more holes or unselect some of them. Click
OK when finished.
Drill Groups can not be modified at the time of creating an NC sequence. You
can select more holes to be included in the Hole Set, but they will not be
included in the Drill Group. You can also remove some of the holes from the
320
Hole Set, either by adding more rules or by explicitly removing axes in the
Axes tab.
If a hole in the selected Drill Group is not selectable for the current
Holemaking NC sequence (for example, its axis is not parallel to the Z-axis of
the NC Sequence coordinate system for 3-Axis Holemaking), this hole will be
ignored. The rest of the group, however, will be included.
• If you add a new hole to the Drill Group and the Customize functionality has not been
utilized (that is, the holes are drilled according to the SCAN_TYPE), the NC sequence
will be automatically updated to drill the new hole.
• If you add a new hole to the Drill Group and the Customize functionality has been
utilized, the new hole will not be drilled until you adjust the Tool Motions.
Auto Drilling
The Auto Drilling user interface is based on a single dialog box. The system
automatically identifies all the holes present in the model and lists them in a
single table. You can customize the look of the table by selecting the
parameters you want to display and changing the width of the columns.
You can also edit the values of hole parameters, such as hole dimensions,
upper and lower tolerances, or thread parameters. These values override the
design part information when you are creating the Auto Drilling sequences.
321
The system displays the Auto-Drilling dialog box, which shows the names of the default
NC Sequence coordinate system and retract plane. You can select a different coordinate
system or retract plane, if desired.
2. Click View > Auto-Drilling Table to list all the holes that can be auto drilled using this
coordinate system and retract plane. The auto-drilling table lists the holes with their
parameters, as well as the existing hole machining strategies. You can further filter the
holes (for example, by specifying a starting surface or a diameter), edit hole parameters,
or add more machining strategies. You can also customize the table format by selecting
the parameters to display, and change the sorting order.
3. Select the hole(s) you want to machine; then select the desired drill method in the right
pane and click << to apply this method to the selected holes. Proceed applying drill
methods to machine all the holes.
The system again displays the Auto-Drilling dialog box, which now shows all the NC
sequences being created as a result of applying the drill methods. For each NC sequence,
the system displays the pocket number, the tool name, the cycle type, the sequence name,
as well as the minimum diameter and maximum length. You can reorder the NC
sequences, if desired.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays the names of the currently selected coordinate
system and retract plane in text boxes labeled NC Sequence Program Zero and NC
Sequence Retract Plane, respectively. There is a Select icon next to each text box.
There are also three buttons below the text boxes: Apply, Default, and Previous. The
list box on the right contains all the previously specified combinations of the Program
zero coordinate system and retract plane.
2. To change the coordinate system, click the Select icon and select a coordinate system on
the screen (or create a new one).
3. To change the retract plane, click the Select icon use the following options in the Retract
Selection dialog box:
322
Þ Along Z Axis—Type the offset value along the z-axis of the currently selected
coordinate system.
4. You can also select an existing combination of the Program Zero coordinate system and
retract plane from the list box on the right.
To Filter Rows
The Auto-Drilling table initially lists all the holes with the axes parallel to
the z-axis of the specified coordinate system. You can apply further filtering
rules to these holes, if desired.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays three list boxes: the Filter by box, on the left, lists
all the available filters; the middle box lists the values available for the filter selected in
the left box; and the Selected Filters box, on the right, lists the currently selected
filtering rules. There are three buttons between the middle and right boxes: >>, <<, and
Preview; and three buttons below the list boxes: OK, Apply, and Cancel.
2. Select a name of the filter in the Filter by box. The central box is updated to list the
values available for the current filter (for example, diameter of the holes present in the
model).
323
3. Select the desired value and click the >> button. The filtering rule appears in the
Selected Filters box under the appropriate heading.
4. To view the holes that correspond to the current combination of filtering rules, click
Preview. The system highlights the appropriate holes on the screen (move the dialog
box, if necessary, to view the model).
5. To remove a filtering rule, select it in the Selected Filters box and click the << button.
To remove all the filtering rules, select Default in the Filter by box.
6. To complete the filtering process, click one of the three buttons below the list boxes:
Þ OK—Accept the current filtering rules and return to the Auto-Drilling table.
• Surface—Filters holes based on their start surface. The middle list box contains a list of
the existing start surfaces.
• Diameter—Filters holes based on their diameter. The middle list box contains a list of
the existing hole diameters.
• Hole Style—Filters holes based on the assigned drilling method. The middle list box
contains a list of the existing Hole Strategies.
• Parameters—Filters holes based on the specified parameter value. The middle list box
contains a list of all feature parameters associated with Hole and Cosmetic Thread
features in the model. When you select a parameter name in the list, the Value text box
below will contain a drop-down list of all the currently present values for this parameter.
Select the desired operator (for example, “!=) from the drop-down Operator list, and a
value from the Value drop-down list to specify a relation. The system displays the
resulting relation in the bottom list box.
If you specify a combination of filters, the system searches for holes that
satisfy all of them; that is, if you specify a diameter value and select a
surface, the system includes only the holes of the specified diameter that are
located on the selected surface.
324
To Edit Hole Parameters
You can edit the values of hole parameters, such as drilling depth, upper and
lower tolerances, or thread parameters. These values override the design part
information when you are creating the Auto Drilling sequences.
1. Click View > Edit Hole Dimensions or View > Edit Thread Parameters. While in
Edit mode, you can toggle between editing the hole dimensions and the thread
parameters by selecting either Edit Hole Parameters or Edit Cosmetic Thread
Parameters in the right pane of the Auto-Drilling dialog box.
The system displays the text boxes for the appropriate parameters in the right pane.
3. To change the start surface, click the Select icon below the Start Surface label and
select the desired surface on the screen.
The surface name appears in the text box below the Start Surface label.
4. To edit other parameters, type the new values in the appropriate text boxes.
The system updates the fields in the Auto-Drilling table to reflect the new parameter
values.
6. To revert to the design part parameters, select the hole in the Auto-Drilling table and
click Reset. To reset only one parameter, select From Reference Model in the
appropriate text box and click Apply.
2. Select the hole(s) in the Auto-Drilling table. To select one or more holes, click in the
appropriate row(s). To select a range of holes, select the first hole in the range, then hold
down the SHIFT key and select the last hole in the range. Once you select a hole, its row
is highlighted. To unselect a single hole and retain the rest of selections, click again in
the highlighted row.
3. Select the Hole Strategy you want to apply to these holes. The existing Hole Strategies
are listed in the right pane of the Auto-Drilling dialog box. You can browse through the
directory structure to search for the Hole Strategies. By default, the search starts in the
directory specified by using the configuration option autodrill_udf_dir <pathname>,
or, if not specified, in your working directory.
325
Þ From Table—The drill depth is defined by the Depth parameter in the Auto-
Drilling table. If you select this option, the Hole Strategy will have the <T> prefix
when it is listed in the Hole Style field of the Auto-Drilling table.
Þ From Param—The drill depth is defined either by the table or by the UDF NC
sequence, depending on the DEPTH_BY_TABLE parameter value. This feature
parameter of type Yes or No must be assigned to the UDF NC sequence before you
create the UDF. If the parameter is set to Yes, then the drill depth is defined by the
Depth parameter in the Auto-Drilling table; if it is No, then the drill depth is defined
by the UDF NC sequence. If you select this option, the Hole Strategy will have the
<P> prefix when it is listed in the Hole Style field of the Auto-Drilling table.
Þ From Seq—The drill depth is defined by the UDF NC sequence. If you select this
option, the Hole Strategy will have the <S> prefix when it is listed in the Hole Style
field of the Auto-Drilling table.
The system displays the name of the Hole Strategy with the appropriate depth prefix in
the Hole Style field of the Auto-Drilling table and changes the Status field from
Incomplete to Complete.
6. To remove a previously applied Hole Strategy, select the hole(s) in the Auto-Drilling
table and click Remove.
7. To exit the Auto-Drilling dialog box and create the appropriate Holemaking NC
sequences, click OK.
The Holemaking NC sequence used to define a UDF for Auto Drilling has the
following characteristics:
• Can machine only one hole (including any coaxial holes, bores, countersinks, and so on)
When defining the UDF, you must specify the following references:
• operation—The operation.
326
• axis—The hole axis.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays a list of available parameters, with a check box
located to the left of each parameter label. Using the text box located to the right of the
parameter label you can switch between two names for this parameter, one long and one
short. This name will be used as a heading in the Auto-Drilling table. If you select short
names, you can later manually change the width of the appropriate columns to make the
table more compact.
Immediately below the list of parameters there are two icons: Select All and Unselect
All. Immediately below these icons there are three buttons: OK, Cancel, and Defaults.
Parameters that are currently displayed in the Auto-Drilling table have their check
boxes selected.
2. Select or clear the check boxes as desired, to specify which parameters are to be
displayed in the Auto-Drilling table. You can use the Select All and Unselect All icons
to speed up the selection process.
3. To change the name of a column, switch the parameter name by clicking the drop-down
arrow next to the text box.
Þ OK—Accept the current selections and return to the Auto-Drilling table. The table
display will be updated to reflect the new parameter selections and column widths.
Þ Defaults—Use the default set of parameters and the default column widths.
327
maximum length. You can reorder these NC sequences both automatically
and manually.
If the Consider Orientation checkbox is selected, the system will reorder based on the
coordinate system associated with the holes being drilled.
2. To manually reorder the NC sequences, highlight the appropriate row(s), click Cut, then
place the cursor in the new location and click Paste.
The system inserts the row(s) immediately above the new cursor location.
Wire EDM
Use 2-Axis Wire EDM NC sequences for any type of 2-axis contouring,
including Wire EDM, flame cut, water jet, and laser.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a WEDM workcell.
4. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have
to select Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 5. If you choose Seq
Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NC
sequence types.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for
all selected options in turn.
328
General techniques for creating Automatic Cut motions in Wire EDM are similar to that
in Trajectory Milling. You can automatically create Rough, Finish, and Detach motions
referencing the same contour. You can also create No Core cut motions. Connect the cut
motions using the Tool Motion functionality.
6. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
7. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
• Contouring—The tool will follow a specified trajectory. You can create Rough, Finish, and
Detach cut motions by referencing the same contour.
For 2- and 4-Axis Contouring, the INTERACT PATH menu is called WEDM
OPT, because it contains additional options that allow you create Rough and
Finish motions within the same NC sequence and using the same contour, as
well as create separate Detach motions to cut off previously machined parts.
These options also appear in the CUT ALONG menu for 2- and 4-Axis
Contouring.
If you check off the Rough option, a single Cut Motion will be created. If you
also check off the Finish option, the system will additionally create as many
329
Finish motions as specified by the NUM_PROFILE_PASSES parameter
value. If the appropriate information is present in the register table, it will be
used; if the information is missing, the remaining passes will be computed
using the PROF_INCREMENT parameter value.
ATTACH_WIDTH
REVERSE_DIST
Approach move Thread Point
Contour of
the part to
be machined
Rough cut
motion
1st Finish
cut motion
2nd Finish
cut motion
PROF_INCREMENT
STOCK_ALLOW + SPARK_ALLOW + 0.5*CUTTER_DIAM
NUM_PROFILE_PASSES 2
330
Example 1: Example 2:
Machine outside the contour Machine outside the contour (punch),
(punch), start point outside the start point inside the contour
contour
Thread point
Contour Contour
CUTCOM RIGHT CUTCOM RIGHT
reference
part reference
approach approach
CUTCOM part CUTCOM LEFT
Thread
point RIGHT
Example 4: Machine inside the
Example 3:
contour (die), start point inside
Machine inside the contour (die),
the contour
start point outside the contour
Thread
point
Contour contour
CUTCOM CUTCOM
LEFT LEFT
Approach Reference
Thread Approach
CUTCOM part
point CUTCOM
Reference part RIGHT LEFT
Note: If CUTCOM_MOVE is specified, it will use the CUTCOM direction for the cut
motion, as before. It is not recommended to specify CUTCOM_MOVE for cases 2 and 3
shown in the illustration above.
The Connect moves between multiple cut motions are defined by the
parameter CUT_MOTION_CONNECT.
If you check off the Detach option, a Detach motion will also be created. It
will have the same shape as the Rough motion for which it is created, with its
length being equal to (REVERSE_DIST + ATTACH_WIDTH).
The following illustration shows multiple Rough cut motions with Approach
moves.
331
REVERSE_DIST
ATTACH_
WIDTH Thread
Point
Approach move
ATTACH_WIDTH +
REVERSE_DIST
When you create Automatic Cut motions in Wire EDM, the CUT ALONG
menu contains the following additional options:
• Thread Point—Specify the point for threading in the wire by selecting or creating a
datum point. By default (that is, unless you specify a separate Approach point using the
option below), the Thread point is also used as a start point for the Approach move, as
described above.
• Approach Point—Specify a datum point, other than the Thread point, to serve as a
start point for the Approach move. If you specify both a Thread point and an Approach
point, the system will load wire at the Thread point, invoke initial power, flush, and feed
registers, move the wire directly to the Approach point, and then make the shortest move
from the Approach point to the cut contour. The system will apply the number of cutcom
points and invoke the cutcom and taper registers on this move.
332
Example: Specifying Thread Point and Approach Point
Approach Point
ATTACH_WIDTH +
Thread Point Thread Point REVERSE_DIST
The Taper Angle option in the INT CUT menu, available for 2-Axis
Contouring Wire EDM only, allows you to select pairs of points on the tool
path: the first point is where the taper angle is turned on, and the second—
where it is turned off.
3. Choose Add.
4. Select an option from the NOW/NEXT menu to specify when the tool axis position is to be
changed:
5. Select a point on the cut motion to specify where the taper angle is to be turned on.
333
6. Select the appropriate option from the NOW/NEXT menu, if needed, and select another
point on the cut motion to specify where the taper angle is to be turned off.
7. Choose Enter and enter a value for the taper angle for this pair of points. Previously
specified values, if any, will be available for selection.
Þ Delete Last—Deletes the corner condition that has been added last. You can use
this option more than once; when there are no more corner conditions left, the
Delete Last option becomes inaccessible.
3. When you choose Add from the CORNER COND menu, the CORNER ADD menu appears
with the following options:
Þ Specify—Select points on the cut motion and specify type by selecting the
appropriate option. After each selection, the corner condition will be added at the
selection point. Choose Done Sel when finished.
If the system is unable to determine the type of the contour, you will be prompted to
specify if this is in inside or an outside contour using the following options:
After the corner conditions are automatically added, you can review and change them
using the AUTO SELECT menu:
334
Þ Next—Display the next assigned corner condition.
Þ Change Type—Specify a different corner condition type for the highlighted corner.
Þ Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Straight corner
conditions will be highlighted in yellow, convex—in red, and concave—in cyan.
Þ Info—List information about the highlighted corner condition type in the Message
Window.
Corner conditions can be specified for the vertices of the cut motion created
using the Edge or Curve option, to avoid gouging sharp corners. Wherever a
corner condition is added, a small parallelogram will be incorporated in the
cut motion: the tool will continue moving along the first entity, then return to
enter tangent to the second entity. The size of the parallelogram is defined by
the path parameter CORNER_LENGTH.
If you add a corner condition along an entity or between two tangent entities,
the angle of the parallelogram will be defined by the CORNER_ANGLE
parameter; if the condition is at a vertex and the corner is sharp, the
CORNER_ANGLE value will be ignored and the sides of the parallelogram
will be formed as a continuation of the adjoining entities.
CORNER_LENGTH
CORNER_LENGTH
CORNER_ANGLE
335
• Convex—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is convex.
• Bisect—The tool makes a straight cut into the material, bisecting the angle between
adjacent (non-tangent) edges. The length of the cut is defined by the CORNER_LENGTH
parameter. Cutter compensation will be turned off for the corner creation motion and
reactivated for the continuation of cut motion. This type of corner is used to allow the
part to flex and spring back during subsequent assembly.
• Loop—Create a loop corner motion. Available for convex corner conditions only.
1. Create a 2-Axis Wire EDM NC sequence, specify the tool and manufacturing parameters.
3. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
4. Choose No Core from the WEDM OPT menu. Select the type of geometric references to
use (Sketch, Edge, or Curve) and choose Done.
336
5. Use the Thread Point and Approach Point options in the CUT ALONG menu if you
are not satisfied with the system default start point. To specify a Thread point or an
Approach point, select or create a datum point, then choose Done/Return from the
DEFN POINT menu.
Þ For Edge—Select edges to define the area to be removed. The edges must form a
closed contour.
Þ For Curve—Select curves to define the area to be removed. The curves must form a
closed contour.
This contour will then be scanned according to the specified scan type (similar to a single
slice in milling).
7. Choose Done Cut or Next Cut from the INT CUT menu.
Default start
point
User-defined
start point
RETURN_TO_START YES
337
default), the wire will be unloaded and fed at FREE_FEED rate along a
straight line to the start point of the subsequent cut motion. If set to
CONTINUOUS, the wire will move from the end of the No Core motion to the
start point of the subsequent motion at the CUT_FEED rate.
If you specify both a Thread point and an Approach point, the system will
load wire at the Thread point, move it directly to the Approach point, and
then use the Approach point as a user-defined start point.
You can create new Automatic Cut motions by following previously created
ones. When you choose Use Prev from the WEDM OPT menu, the USE PRV
OPT menu will appear with the options:
• By NC Seq—If you choose this option, a namelist menu of all applicable NC sequences
will appear. Once you select an NC sequence name, all Automatic Cut motions present in
this NC sequence will be listed in a checkmark menu. You can check off as many motions
as you like, or use Select All.
• By Cut—If you choose this option, all applicable Automatic Cut motions in all the
previously created NC sequences will be listed. You can select one Automatic Cut motion.
When you redefine an Automatic Cut motion, the Ref Cut Mtn option in the
CUT ALONG menu allows you to select a reference Automatic Cut motion
using the same interface as the By Cut option above.
In Wire EDM, you can create Automatic Cut motions by mirroring previously
created cut motions. The mechanism for selecting a cut motion to mirror is
the same as when you create cut motions using the Use Prev option.
Note: You cannot mirror a cut motion that was created using the Mirror option.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Choose Mirror from the WEDM OPT menu. Notice that Use Prev highlights
automatically and all the other options become dimmed. Choose Done.
4. Using either By Cut or By NC Seq, select the cut motion to mirror from a namelist
menu. The selected cut motion highlights on the screen.
338
5. Select or create a plane to mirror about.
To create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequence with CL data output in XYZ / IJK
format or using the STAN statement, follow the procedure below.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a 4-axis WEDM
workcell.
2. Choose Taper Angle, 4 Axis, and Done from the MACH AUX menu.
3. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have
to select Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 5. If you choose Seq
Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NC
sequence types.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for
all selected options in turn.
4. Choose Customize and interactively specify the tool path. You can automatically create
Rough, Finish, and Detach motions referencing the same contour.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
339
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Head1/Head2 Format
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a 4-axis WEDM
workcell.
2. Choose XY-UV Type, 4 Axis, and Done from the MACH AUX menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu. The SEQ SETUP menu will include
the following commands:
Note: The XY Plane and UV Plane settings are modal. That is, you have to specify
the top and bottom planes for the first 4-Axis WEDM NC sequence in the
manufacturing model; for subsequent sequences, the system will automatically use
the previous top and bottom planes unless you explicitly change them.
The CTM DEPTH menu will appear twice to allow you specify both planes. Use:
Þ Z Depth—To locate the plane by entering a value for depth with respect to the NC
sequence coordinate system.
Þ Use Prev—To use a top or bottom plane from one of the previous NC sequences.
Select the sequence name from a namelist menu.
4. Choose Customize, then select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the
Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
5. The INT CUT menu will appear with Cut already chosen, causing the CUT ALONG menu
to appear as well, with Drive Surf already chosen. The following commands will also be
listed:
Þ Thread Point—Select or create a datum point as the loading point for the wire and
starting location of the tool path.
340
Note: When creating the cut motion, the system will attempt to synchronize the
entities in the two contours in the order they were sketched or selected: the first
entity of the first contour with the first entity of the second contour, and so on. Keep
this in mind when sketching or selecting the contours, or supply manual
synchronization.
Þ Side Surfs—Indicate the contours of the cut by selecting side surfaces. This
command is used in place of the Contour1 and Contour2 commands.
Þ Direction—Indicate the direction the tool will travel in to make the cut.
6. Choose Done from the CUT ALONG menu to begin specifying the cut.
7. Select or create a datum point to use as the Thread point. If you selected Approach
Point as well, select or create another datum point to use as the Approach point.
8. The TRAJ OPT menu will appear in turn for contour1 and contour2; choose Sketch or
Select to indicate the contour.
9. If you are creating synch points, the SYNCH menu appears with the following commands:
Þ Done/Return—Quit the SYNCH menu and return to defining the cut motion.
10. An arrow appears, originating at the start point that you created in step 7. Choose Flip
or Okay to indicate the direction of the cut motion.
11. The SLOT OFFSET menu appears with the options None, Left, and Right. Choose an
option to indicate the direction of the tool offset.
12. The INT CUT menu reappears; choose Show to display the cut motion.
Note: If you get an error message “Cut motion cannot be created try adding more synch
points.
341
functionality applies to 4-Axis Automatic Cut motions defined using the
Contour1/Contour2 or Side Surfs options.
The illustration above shows how automatic synchronization works. The cut
for the lower guide is the larger rectangular contour. The cut for the upper
wire guide is the smaller contour. On the initial engagement of the wire to
the lower contour, the upper contour will be synchronized automatically by
finding the shortest distance between the two contours. As the wire goes
around the profiles, they will automatically be synchronized by finding
corresponding vertices on each. If the vertices are at tangent edges, you have
an option to automatically synchronize the vertices between contours with
the same number of entities by setting the AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE
parameter to YES (the default is NO). You can also provide additional
synchronization by manually specifying Synch points.
As the wire approaches the end of the pass on the cut motion, the endpoint
synchronization will take effect. In this example, the wire will complete the
upper contour before the lower contour; therefore, a synchronization point
will be automatically made to swing the lower wire in line with the upper
wire using the shortest distance between the two contours. The wire will then
step in to the next pass and repeat the process.
Note: If an approach is made on a non-planar surface (for example, a cone), orienting the
wire axis as described above may cause a gouge because the axis may not line up with
the u-v lines of the surface.
In this case, you will get a message: “WARNING: Approach is made on non-planar
surface and may cause gouge. Based on this warning, you can either set
AUTOSYNCH_START_END to NO or change the Thread (Approach) point.
342
If you set AUTOSYNCH_START_END to NO, the start and end points of the
upper and lower contours will be mapped by cut entities; therefore, the upper
and lower contours will have different start and end points in XY.
Þ Create—Create a new register table. Enter the name for the table, then edit it in
Pro/TABLE. You have to store this table on disk using the Save option below in
order to use it in other models.
More than one register table can be added to the model. You can specify
which table is to be used in an NC sequence by supplying the name of the
table as the REGISTER_TABLE parameter value.
At the time of defining the NC sequence, the Register option appears in the
MFG PARAMS menu. It brings up the CR/SEL RGR menu with the following
options:
• Set Up—Brings up the REGISTER menu to allow you to create, read, or modify register
tables.
343
Register Tables
You can specify generator, cutcom, technology, offset, and flush registers, as
well as taper and feed values, for Wire EDM NC sequences by using a
register table. This allows you to set different register, taper, and feed values
for each cut motion type (Approach, No Core, Rough, up to 16 Finish motions,
and Detach). Register tables can be created either at setup time, or at the
time of defining the NC sequence.
Note: Cutcom and Taper registers are not supported for No Core motions.
Þ Create—Create a new radius substitution table. Enter the name for the table, then
select the radial type: Concave or Convex. This table will be used for corners of the
specified type only, and the appropriate suffix (“_cvv or “_cvx) will be added to the
table name. The Pro/TABLE comes up; edit the table by entering the radius values
as described in the reference topic. You have to store this table on disk using the
Save option below in order to use it in other models.
Þ Save—Save a radius substitution table on disk to use it in another model. The file
will be saved with the extension “.rdl.
Þ Show—Display a radius substitution table in the INFO window. Select the table
name from a namelist menu. Only tables that exist in the model can be displayed.
344
Any number of radius substitution tables can be added to a model. To specify
which table is to be used, choose Radius Subst from the MFG PARAMS menu
either when setting up the NC sequence or when defining a cut motion. It
brings up the CR/SEL RAD menu with the following options:
• Set Up—Brings up the RAD SETUP menu with the options described above.
• Select—Select existing radius substitution tables from a namelist menu: you can select
one for the concave and one for the convex corners. In order to be displayed in the
namelist menu, a table has to either be created in the model, or added to it using the
Retrieve option.
To perform radius substitution, choose Corners from the INT CUT menu,
then Table Corners from the CORNER ADD menu. The corner radii on the
tool path will be substituted according to the table values.
Radius substitution tables provide the value of the radius to be used in the
toolpath generation depending on:
When a table is used, the corner to be cut is evaluated to determine its type
and the current pass. The toolpath for that pass is modified to have the
radius from the table rather than that of the contour. The table is
interpolated for contour radii not explicitly listed. Value of 0 (zero) means
substituting a sharp corner for the radius. There is no interpolation between
0 and another substitution value. When a column has zeros in it, sharp
corners are substituted for all values up to that where a non-zero substitution
radius is listed. In the example below, sharp corners will be substituted on
the Rough pass for all radii up to 0.007.
345
Auxiliary NC Sequences
About Auxiliary NC Sequences
Auxiliary NC sequences produce a point-to-point tool path. They can be used
to specify the connecting tool motions and change the tool axis orientation, if
needed, between two machining NC sequences. They also allow you to access
the on-machine probe functionality. Auxiliary NC sequences are available for
any workcell type, and can be performed with any type of tool.
You do not have to specify a tool for an Auxiliary NC sequence. You will be
able to create Tool Motions even though no tool is specified.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You can be in any type of workcell.
3. If you have specified the site and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have to
select Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 4. If you choose Seq
Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NC
sequence types.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for
all selected options in turn.
4. Choose Customize to specify the auxiliary tool motions (the only Tool Motion types
available for Auxiliary NC sequences are Goto Point, Go Delta, Go Home, and Follow
Sketch), or to access the on-machine probe functionality by inserting CL Commands in
the Customize dialog box.
5. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
User-Defined NC Sequences
346
If you do not reference a design UDF, the information about the reference
part will be stored with the group. If you then place the group in another
manufacturing model containing the same reference part, you will have an
option to automatically resolve the placement references.
Note: If you include a child NC sequence in a group (for example, local milling), make
sure the parent NC sequence is also included. Otherwise, the system will not know which
NC sequence to reference when making the group.
1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then UDF Library from the MFG UTILS
menu.
5. Define the UDF elements as you would when creating a group of part features. Select
manufacturing features (NC sequences and material removal features) to be grouped.
6. If there is a features’ group referenced by selected NC sequences, the MFG UDF REF
menu will appear:
Þ Design UDF—Use a reference group of features for resolving references. If only one
design UDF is referenced, it will be selected automatically, otherwise select a group
to use.
Þ Ref Part—Use the reference part for resolving references. For assembly machining,
you will have to select a part.
If no design UDF is referenced, the MFG UDF REF menu will not appear. In regular
manufacturing, the reference part information will be automatically stored. In assembly
machining, you will have to select a reference part to use. If you do not want to select a
reference part, choose Done Sel without selecting a part.
Note: If you have specified a reference design UDF, you will not be prompted for the
corresponding placement references; they will be resolved automatically.
347
Including Operations, Workcells, and Reference Superfeatures in a
Manufacturing UDF
Operation and workcell features can also be included when creating a
manufacturing UDF. When you place such a group:
• The default names for the operation and workcell created in the new model will be
OP_CPY### or MACH_CPY##, respectively (for example, OP_CPY010 and
MACH_CPY01).
• All the parameters and tools associated with the workcell will be copied. If tools with the
same IDs already exist in the new model, a message will appear and the workcell tools
will not be copied.
• The NC sequences that referenced this operation and workcell in the original model will
automatically retain these references.
• If you include the reference superfeature (Mill Volume, Mill Surface, or Drill Group) in
the group definition, then, at the time of defining the group, you will be requested to
enter prompts for the geometric references used to create this superfeature. When you
make this group in another model, you will be prompted to select these references, and
the superfeature of the same name (complete with all component features such as
Gather, Trim) will be created in the new model, then the NC sequence will be created
based on this superfeature.
• If you do not include the reference superfeature, then, at the time of defining the group,
you will be requested to enter prompt for the superfeature itself. When you make this
group in another model, you will be prompted to select a pre-existent superfeature of
appropriate type, and the NC sequence will be created using the superfeature in the new
model.
348
Example: Manufacturing a Group of Features
Define a group of
NC sequences
and material
removal features.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You can be in any type of workcell.
Choose User Defined from the MACH AUX menu and enter the name of a previously
defined group.
...or...
From the MFG UTILS menu, choose Group > Create > From UDF Lib and retrieve the
group by name.
2. As when placing a group of features, you will have to select if the group is to be
Independent or UDF Driven, and will be prompted for the group elements. If the
checkmark next to the Use CurOper option is on, all the NC sequences in the group
will be placed in the currently active operation. If the Use CurOper option is not
selected, you will be prompted to select a parent operation in the new model, unless the
operation is included in the group. When all the prompts are answered successfully, the
manufacturing group will be placed.
Note: The Use CurOper option is available only for UDFs created in Release 16.0 and
later.
When you are answering the prompts for group elements, the WHICH REF menu will
appear with the following options:
349
Þ Same—Use the same reference as in the reference part. This option appears only if
the group contains a reference part information, and this reference part is present in
the current manufacturing assembly.
Þ Skip—Skip the current prompt without selecting a reference. After you have
answered all the other prompts, the system will allow you to redefine the skipped
element.
Note: The Skip option is not available for UDFs created prior to Release 16.0.
3. After the UDF placement is completed, a namelist menu of all NC sequences included in
the group will appear. Check off the NC sequence(s) whose tool or parameters you want
to modify (you can use Select All). The MOD NC SEQ menu will appear with the
following options:
4. If some of the prompts have been skipped, the system starts the appropriate user
interface to allow you redefine the skipped element. Then the GRP PLACE menu will
appear with the following options:
Choose Done from the GRP PLACE menu to finalize the group.
350
1: Center Drilling 2: Deep Drilling
3: Reaming 4: Boring
5: Countersinking
• Center drilling
• Deep drilling
• Reaming
• Boring
• Countersinking
351
These relations:
• Set the value of a user-defined parameter “bore_ream based on the value of the hole
diameter
Note that both Bore and Ream NC sequences are included in the UDF. The
system is going to determine which one to perform based on Pro/PROGRAM
logic.
352
IF BORE_REAM = fl"REAM"
ENDIF
IF BORE_REAM = fl"BORE"
ENDIF
Retrieve another model and place the group there using the Group option
from the MFG UTILS menu. Choose UDF Driven and Read Only, then
follow the placement prompts. Regenerate the model.
You can now modify the diameter of the hole in the new model (regenerate
twice) and see how the system performs different NC sequences and selects a
different tool based on the built-in logic.
When you choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu, the system
displays the Customize dialog box. The box enables you to create, modify, and
delete the Tool Motions and CL Commands. At the same time, the system
displays the NC sequence CL file, as it currently looks, in the NCL File
window.
353
system highlights these items, and all items in between, in the list box. It
also highlights the portion of the toolpath on the screen corresponding to all
the selected items, and highlights the first and the last CL lines for the block
of selected items in the NCL File window. The tool is positioned at the
beginning of the first selected Tool Motion.
The middle portion of the Customize dialog box contains the following
buttons:
• Insert—Add a Tool Motion or CL command before the selected item in the list box above.
Select the type of entity to insert from the drop-down list to the right of the Insert button,
then click Insert.
• Copy—Copy the selected Tool Motion(s) and CL command(s) and place them on the
Clipboard, to insert them at a different control point.
• Cut—Remove the selected Tool Motion(s) and CL command(s) and place them on the
Clipboard, to insert them at a different control point.
The bottom portion of the Customize dialog box contains the OK and Cancel
action buttons.
Tool Motions
You can insert the following types of Tool Motions:
• Automatic Cut—Reference model geometry to generate the path followed by the tool
while actually cutting workpiece material.
• Follow Sketch—Set up the sketching plane and sketch the tool path.
• GoTo Point—Go to a datum point or to a point on the tool path. For 4- and 5-Axis NC
sequences, you can also specify the tool axis orientation.
• Go Delta—Allows you to specify tool motions in terms of increments along the axes of
the NC sequence coordinate system (with respect to the current position of the tool).
• Go Home—Go directly to the Operation HOME point (if specified, using the Home
option, when creating the operation).
354
• Plunge—Create a plunge before another Tool Motion. The tool will move horizontally
(that is, at its current Z depth) straight to the location directly above the start of the
selected motion and then plunge down.
• Appr Along Tool Axis—Create an approach motion along the tool axis. Appears for 4-
and 5-axis NC sequences only.
• Exit Along Tool Axis—Create an exit motion along the tool axis. Appears for 4- and 5-
axis NC sequences only.
• Normal Exit—Create an exit motion normal to the direction of the Automatic Cut
motion.
• Lead In—Approach the Automatic Cut motion tangentially, along an arc of specified
radius.
• Lead Out—Exit from the current point tangentially to the Automatic Cut motion along
an arc of specified radius.
• Helical Exit—Create a helical exit motion. This option is available for Milling NC
sequences, except Thread milling. For Thread milling, you can automatically generate
helical exit motions using the EXIT_TYPE parameter.
Generally, you create the Automatic Cut motions first, and then connect
them using other types of tool motions.
Notes:
Þ For Automatic Cut motions composed of closed loops, an approach motion will reset
the start point of the loop.
355
A control point is an internal datum point on the tool path that you can
reference as a target point for tool motions. Control points can be created “on
the fly as necessary when creating tool motions.
Whenever you need to reference a control point (to define a Follow Sketch
motion, specify the portion of an Automatic Cut motion to follow), the CTRL
PNT menu will appear with following options:
Once a control point is created, you will be able to select it for reference in
other steps.
4. Click OK to create the offset point, Cancel—to quit. The Reset button resets all the
offsets to 0.
• GoTo Point
• Plunge
• Tangent Approach
• Normal Approach
356
To Create an Automatic Cut Motion
The types of Automatic Cut motions depend on the type of the NC sequence;
refer to the topic describing NC sequences of a particular type for information
on the Automatic Cut motions for this NC sequence. Once an Automatic Cut
motion is generated, you can incorporate it in the tool path fully or partially.
1. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
2. The system displays the menus appropriate for creating Automatic Cut motions within
the current NC sequence type. Create an Automatic Cut motion.
The system creates an implicit Follow Cut motion that follows the Automatic Cut motion
from start to end.
3. If you want to the tool to follow only certain portions of the Automatic Cut motion, or to
change the Follow Cut parameters, redefine the Follow Cut motion. Click for details.
4. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
• A Retract motion is implicitly created before an Automatic Cut motion if other tool
motions are already present.
• An implicit Plunge motion (Auto Plunge) is created where the tool automatically plunges
to the beginning of an Automatic Cut.
If you are not satisfied with the implicitly created motions, you can delete or
redefine them.
When you create an Automatic Cut motion, the system creates an implicit
Follow Cut motion that follows the Automatic Cut motion from start to end.
If you want to the tool to follow only certain portions of the Automatic Cut
motion, or to change the Follow Cut parameters, redefine the Follow Cut
motion.
1. Select the Follow Cut motion in the list box at the top of the Customize dialog box and
click Redefine.
357
The Follow Cut dialog box opens.
Þ Change the Follow Cut limits, that is, specify the start and end points for the tool, to
make it follow only a portion of the Automatic Cut motion.
Þ Add other Follow Cut motions (for example, following a different portion of the same
Automatic Cut motion).
3. Click OK to finish redefining the Follow Cut motion and close the Follow Cut dialog box.
If you created multiple segments of a Follow Cut motion, they will all be listed in the
Customize dialog box below the Automatic Cut motion that they follow.
The top portion of the Follow Cut dialog box contains a list box with the
names of all the Follow Cut motion segments. Below this list box there are
the following action buttons:
• Split—Split the selected segment of the Follow Cut motion into multiple segments.
• Add—Add a Follow Cut motion segment. When you click Add, the system adds a default
Follow Cut motion that follows the Automatic Cut motion from start to end. Click
Redefine to change the Follow Cut limits as needed.
The middle portion of the Follow Cut dialog box contains the options for
redefining a Follow Cut motion:
• Name—Displays the name of the selected Follow Cut segment. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you can not modify it. Click next to the Name label
to preview the Follow Cut segment as it is currently defined.
• Follow Cut Limits—Change the start and end points of the Follow Cut motion:
358
Þ First Point—Specify a different start point for the Follow Cut motion. You can
select or create a datum point on the tool path, or select Start of Cut to make the
Follow Cut segment start at the Start point of the Automatic Cut motion.
Þ Second Point— Specify a different end point for the Follow Cut motion. You can
select or create a datum point on the tool path, or select End of Cut to make the
Follow Cut segment end at the End point of the Automatic Cut motion.
• Reverse Cut Direction—Select this option to reverse the direction of the Follow Cut
motion.
• Follow Cut Parameters— Edit the Follow Cut motion parameters. Click the Right
arrow next to the label to expand this field; then click the Feed, Spindle, or Coolant
button to open the appropriate dialog box and edit the parameter values.
Once you redefined a Follow Cut segment, click Apply to finalize the changes
you made. To discard these changes, click Reset.
1. Select the Follow Cut motion segment in the list box at the top of the Follow Cut dialog
box and click Split.
2. Click Add and select a point on the tool path where you want to split the Follow Cut
motion.
3. If you want to split the Follow Cut motion into more than two segments, repeat Step 2 to
create additional split points.
4. Once a split point is created, you can select its name in the list box at the top of the
Create Split Point dialog box and click one of the following buttons:
Þ Move—Move the selected split point. The system highlights the selected point.
Select the new location on the tool path.
359
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion
Follow Sketch motions let you sketch the tool path that the tool will follow.
You can change the tool axis orientation at selected points along the sketch
for 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences.
1. Choose Follow Sketch from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Click Sketch to sketch the tool motion. The sketching plane setup depends on the
following selection:
Þ If the Control Point option button is selected, you will be prompted to select or
create a control point. The sketching plane will pass through the specified control
point. The axis belonging to the control point will lie horizontally in the sketching
plane.
Þ If the Setup Plane option button is selected, use the regular sketcher setup
technique to select or create the sketching plane and the Sketcher orientation
reference.
5. Once the model is reoriented, sketch the tool motion. The SKETCHER menu will contain
two additional options, specific to sketching the Tool Motions:
Note: Sketcher CL commands are listed in the Customize dialog box under the
Follow Cut motion they belong to. They are indented to show that their placement is
controlled by the sketch. To modify placement of such a command, redefine the
Follow Sketch motion and modify dimensions of the point entity corresponding to the
CL command.
7. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation at
selected points along the sketch using the Specify Axis button.
The AXIS DEF menu then appears with the following options:
360
Þ Add—Add an axis orientation definition.
Þ Show—Display existing axis definitions. The SHOW menu appears with the listing
of existing axis definitions (Axis Def #1, Axis Def #2, ...). Placing the cursor over a
definition name in the menu displays the corresponding axis definition as a cyan
vector, which disappears once you move the cursor away from the menu item.
To add an axis definition, choose Add and select a point on the sketched tool motion
where you want to specify the tool axis orientation. Once you selected a point, you will be
prompted to enter a parameter value along the entire sketch (with the start point of the
sketch 0.0 and the end point 1.0). The parameter value corresponding to your selection
will appear as an option in the selection menu, or you can choose Enter and enter
another value.
Once you specified the location, the DEFINE AXIS menu will appear with the following
options:
Þ Along Z Dir—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the Machine coordinate
system.
Þ Datum Axis—Select or create a datum axis that the tool axis will be parallel to,
then specify the axis direction using Flip and Okay options.
Þ Enter Value—Specify tool axis orientation be entering i,j,k values with respect to
the Machine coordinate system.
8. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
Sketching
plane
361
To produce the tool path shown above, where the tool machines the edge and
stops right before touching the part to check gauge, create a Follow Sketch
motion, as shown in the following illustration.
362
1. Choose Follow Sketch from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Click the Sketch button to sketch the tool motion. The location of traversal path will
depend on the following:
Þ If the At Retract Plane option button is selected, the traversal path will lie in the
retract plane. If you later modify the retract plane height, the traversal path will
update automatically.
Þ If the Specify Plane option button is selected, you will have to select a plane
parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system and enter offset from
this plane in the indicated direction. The traversal path will lie in the offset plane.
As you start sketching, all selected holes are automatically marked by Sketcher points at
the selected axes’ locations. The sketched path may contain as many entities as you
want. If the sketched path passes through the Sketcher point that marks a selected axis,
this hole will be drilled (you do not have to break the sketched entity at this point, or
align it to the hole axis—the system will automatically make these assumptions). All
entities included in the same sketch are parts of a single Tool Motion segment. A valid
sketch must pass through at least one hole axis.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
363
The following illustration shows creating the traversal path using the
Connect option.
• If it is a sketched segment, you can re-specify your sketching plane, then sketch the tool
path (note that the old sketch is deleted automatically).
Once you are finished, the rest of the tool path is regenerated. The
subsequent Connect segments may change depending on modifications to the
current segment. If you redefine a segment immediately preceding a sketched
one, it is your responsibility to place the end of the segment being redefined
at the beginning of the next sketched segment, or to redefine the sketched
segment as well.
Select this
axis.
364
To Create a GoTo Point Motion
GoTo Point motions enable the tool to go to any datum point (not just a
control point). You can restrict moves along some of the axes of the NC
sequence coordinate system. For 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences, you can also
change the tool axis orientation.
1. Choose GoTo Point from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Click Specify Point to create or select the control point. The CR/SEL POINT menu
appears with the options:
Datum Point—Create a new datum point using the regular functionality for
creating datum points. The datum point will belong to the workpiece in Part
machining, and to the manufacturing assembly in Assembly machining.
5. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the control
point created using the Specify Point button, described above.
6. The next portion of the dialog box allows you to restrict moves along some of the axes of
the NC Sequence coordinate system:
Þ If the Z First option button is selected, the tool moves along the Z-axis from the
current position to the level of target point; it then moves using all remaining
available axes to the target point (for Turning, this is the X-axis; for other types of
NC sequences, this is the XY plane).
Þ If the Z Last option button is selected, the tool moves along the X-axis (for Turning),
or in the XY plane (for other types of NC sequences), from the current position to the
location of the selected point, and then moves along the Z-axis to arrive at selected
point.
365
7. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation at
target point:
Þ Along Z Axis—Use the default orientation of the tool (parallel to the Z-axis of the
NC Sequence coordinate system).
Þ Specify New Axis—Click Specify Axis and select an edge or axis that the tool axis
will be parallel to, or a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Finalize the tool
orientation using Flip and Okay options; note that the red arrow must point from
the tool tip towards the toolholder.
8. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Go Delta from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Enter offsets along the axes of the NC Sequence coordinate system. The Reset button
resets all the offset values to 0.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation at
target point:
Þ Along Z Axis—Use the default orientation of the tool (parallel to the Z-axis of the
NC Sequence coordinate system).
Þ Specify New Axis—Click Specify Axis and select an edge or axis that the tool axis
will be parallel to, or a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Finalize the tool
orientation using Flip and Okay options; note that the red arrow must point from
the tool tip towards the toolholder.
6. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
366
Modifying the Go Delta Increments
You can later modify all the increments for a Go Delta motion using the
Modify button in the Customize dialog box. The Go Delta increments can
also be included in relations. To find out the dimension symbols
corresponding to the Go Delta increments, use the Seq Info option, choose
List and select the GO DELTA motion from the menu. The information
displayed will include the increment values and dimension symbols assigned
to the increments.
1. Choose Go Home from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start point
of the Tool Motion that you plunge to.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
367
6. Edit the Clear Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
Plunge Motions
Plunge motions make the tool plunge before a selected Automatic Cut motion
(or another approach motion).
• Move at RAPID speed along the retract surface to the location directly above the start
point of the next Tool Motion. This location is determined as follows:
Þ In case of a retract plane, the projection of the start point of the next Tool Motion on
the retract plane.
Þ In case of a retract surface of revolution, the intersection of the tool axis at the start
point of the next Tool Motion with the retract surface.
• Plunge at RAPID speed to the location offset from the start point of the next Tool Motion
by (CLEAR_DIST + a), where a is an extra offset value, which depends on the type of NC
sequence. It is:
1. Choose Retract from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
368
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Tangent Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and
click Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, and
Cutcom buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start of the
selected Automatic Cut motion.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
6. Edit the Approach Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Tangent Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
5. Edit the Exit Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
369
6. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Normal Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and
click Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, and
Cutcom buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start of the
selected Automatic Cut motion.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
6. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicates
from which side the tool will approach the control point.
7. Edit the Approach Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
8. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Normal Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Edit the Exit Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
370
6. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicates
the exit direction.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, and
Cutcom buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
5. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicates
from which side the tool will approach the control point.
6. Edit the Entry Angle, Tangent Lead Step, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in
the corresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a
parameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to this
parameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in the
text box.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
Lead Out motions let you make the tool exit from the current point
tangentially to the Automatic Cut motion along an arc of specified radius.
The radius of the arc is determined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter value,
the lengths of the linear segments—by TANGENT_LEAD_STEP and
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, the angle of the arc is defined by the EXIT_ANGLE
parameter value.
371
NORMAL_
LEAD_STEP
TANGENT_ TANGENT_
LEAD_STEP Lead In Lead Out
LEAD_STEP
LEAD_RADIUS
EXIT ANGLE
ENTRY_ANGLE Automatic Cut motion
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
5. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicates
the exit direction.
6. Edit the Exit Angle, Tangent Lead Step, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in
the corresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a
parameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to this
parameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in the
text box.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Helical Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and
click Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, and
Cutcom buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
372
5. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicates
from which side the tool will approach the control point.
6. Edit the Entry Angle, Clear Distance, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in the
corresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a
parameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to this
parameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in the
text box.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Helical Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the
Specify Axis button.
5. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicates
the exit direction.
6. Edit the Exit Angle, Pullout Distance, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in the
corresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a
parameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to this
parameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in the
text box.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Appr Along Tool Axis from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and
click Insert.
373
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Edit the Approach Distance, Clear Distance, and Pullout Distance values in the
corresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a
parameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to this
parameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in the
text box.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Choose Exit Along Tool Axis from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and
click Insert.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant
buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Edit the Exit Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,
Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
1. Press the appropriate button (Feed, Spindle) in the Tool Motion dialog box.
2. Another dialog box pops up with input fields for all parameters in the selected group. For
example, if you press Spindle for a Tool Motion in a Volume milling NC sequence, the
Spindle Parameters dialog box will contain input fields for:
Þ Spindle Speed
Þ Spindle Control
Þ Spindle Sense
374
Þ Range Number
Þ Spindle Range
Each of the input fields contains the current parameter value. Inherited values are
shown in parentheses.
3. You can either enter the new value directly in the corresponding input field, or press the
down arrow to the right of the input field to select from a drop-down list of values.
For FEED_RATE, for example, you can either enter numeric values, or use one of the
following keywords: APPROACH, EXIT, RETRACT, PLUNGE, CUT, FREE (only those
that are applicable for the current NC sequence will appear in the drop-down list in the
dialog box).
4. When finished modifying the parameters, press OK in the dialog box used for editing.
The new parameter values will appear in the read-only fields in the Tool Motion dialog
box.
When you change Feed or Machine parameters at the Tool Motion level, the
appropriate statements (SPINDL, COOLNT, CUTCOM, or FEDRAT) will be
output in the CL data file before the GOTO commands of the Tool Motion.
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. You
can either select a location on the tool path, or insert a command at the
current tool position. Additional location options, Near Datum Point and
On Surface, are available if you associate the CL Command with a Follow
Cut motion. In order to do this, highlight the name of the Follow Cut motion
in the list box at the top of the Customize dialog box before inserting the CL
command.
1. Choose CL Command from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click
Insert.
3. Select location for the CL command by using the following option buttons:
Þ On Tool Path—Click Select and select a location on the tool path. You can select
anywhere on the tool path as it is defined so far.
For WEDM NC sequences with multiple passes, you can place the CL command on
all the passes in the selected location, or on some of the passes, by using an
375
additional button, Multi Passes. When you click Multi Passes, the Select Passes
dialog box opens with a list of all the passes and the Select All and Unselect All
icons. Select the passes where you want to insert the CL command and click OK. If
you use Select All, and later add some more passes, the CL command will be placed
on the new passes as well.
Þ Near Datum Point—The CL command will be placed on the tool path at the closest
location to a datum point. You can either create a datum point, or select an existing
point.
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and type the command, line-by-line. Note
that this method does not provide syntax checking.
Þ Click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the
syntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
Þ Click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser window
will appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
Notes:
Þ You can edit the contents of the Command text box at any point by placing the
cursor in it and using the keyboard.
Þ If you supply more than one command line, they will be treated as a “block, that is,
you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
5. The Preview button inserts the command line(s) in the CL file at the selected location to
let you preview the result. Click OK to insert the command at selected location,
Cancel—to quit inserting the command.
CL Commands
The CL Command option in the drop-down list of the Customize dialog box
allows you to add the specific post-processor words required for correct NC
output. These commands will be output to the NC sequence CL file. If you
add a tool motion command, the corresponding motion will be also shown in
the tool path display on the screen.
When typing values for CL commands, you can input model parameters,
preceded by an ampersand(&) sign. If there is a corresponding parameter
defined in relations, its value will be used in the CL command. If the
parameter is not found, the system will prompt you for the parameter’s type
376
and value, and this parameter will be added to the relations. This way, the
CL command can be changed at the top level (through Relations).
Modifying CL Commands
Once you insert a CL command, its first line appears in the list in the upper
portion of the Customize dialog box.
You can modify both the contents and the placement of a previously added
user-defined CL command by selecting it in the list and clicking Redefine.
This will bring up the CL Command dialog box. Use the same techniques for
specifying the new location or editing the contents, as when inserting a CL
command.
Note: This way, you can also modify contents of a Sketcher CL command (that is, a
command added while creating a Follow Sketch motion). However, if you modify
placement of such a command, it will no longer be connected with the sketch. To modify
placement of a Sketcher CL command and retain associativity, redefine the Follow
Sketch motion and modify dimensions of the point entity corresponding to the CL
command.
You can also copy, cut, paste, and delete previously added CL commands by
using the appropriate command buttons in the Customize dialog box.
• CL Command—Add CL commands along the tool path. You can place CL commands on
specific instances of a pattern and Pro/NC will remember the commands parametrically.
Note: These options apply to the current operation. Before selecting these options,
activate the operation whose tool path you want to customize.
The Output Order option in the MACHINING menu allows you to specify the
order of tool path output for the NC sequences within the operation. This
377
affects the order of CL data output only. It does not reorder the NC sequences
in the feature list; use the Reorder functionality to change the order in which
the NC sequences are regenerated.
By Tool—Minimize the tool changes. All tools used within the operation will be
listed in the ORDER TOOL menu. You will be prompted to select the tools in desired
order. The system will output the tool paths for all NC sequences using the first
selected tool, then move to the next tool. NC sequences using the same tool will be
output in the order they appear in the feature list.
The Info option in the OPER ORDER menu displays the current order of the
NC sequence output. The following information is provided for each NC
sequence:
• Sequence type
• Tool ID
• Feature number
• Feature ID
1. Choose Synchronize.
378
2. Select which head will control the spindle speed by selecting HEAD1 or HEAD2 from
the HEAD SELECT menu.
3. The system displays the SYNCH OPER menu with the following options:
4. Choose Define.
5. The system displays the HEAD1 NCSEQ menu containing the names of all NC sequences
created using Head1. Put checkmarks next to NC sequences you want to synchronize
with sequences on Head2 (you will have the options to Select All and Unsel All), then
choose Done Sel.
6. The system displays the HEAD2 NCSEQ menu containing the names of all NC sequences
created using Head2. Again, select the NC sequences to synchronize and choose Done
Sel.
7. The system creates a synchronized group with a default name (SYNCHRONIZE #1,
SYNCHRONIZE #2).
3. The system displays the tool paths of synchronized NC sequences and the SYNCH
POINTS menu with the following options:
Þ Add—Define pairs of synchronized points on tool paths for Head1 and Head2.
Þ Move—Modify location of an existing synch point. Select a synch point, then select a
new location for it on the appropriate tool path.
Þ Show—Show the synch pairs currently defined. You can either show them in turn
by using the Next and Previous options, or use Show All.
379
4. Choose Add.
5. The system displays the tool paths for Head1 in cyan. Select a point on the tool path.
6. The system displays the tool paths for Head2 in cyan. Select a point to be synchronized
with the first point.
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. For
your convenience, separate options allow you to insert CL commands at the
beginning and at the end of the tool path, or at the current tool position.
Þ Beginning—The CL command will be output before the first cutter position of the
NC sequence (or the first cutter position of the operation if you are optimizing an
operation tool path).
Þ End—The CL command will be output after the last cutter position of the NC
sequence (or the last cutter position of the operation if you are optimizing an
operation tool path).
3. The CL file in the Info Box is scrolled to the appropriate line. The CREATE CMD menu
appears with the options:
Keyboard—Enter the command line-by-line using the keyboard. This method does
not provide syntax checking, as opposed to the method above.
From File—Read in a file containing the CL command lines. The file must have an
extension “.cmd.
Þ Edit—Brings up a system window to allow you to edit the command using the
system editor. No checking as to the syntax, is done at this point.
380
4. Enter the command line(s) using the options above, then choose Done from the CREATE
CMD menu. The command line(s) are inserted in the CL file at the selected location.
Notes:
• If you add more than one command line at a certain point, they will be treated as a
“block, that is, you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command
lines.
• Only one CL command can be specified as located at the beginning or end of the tool path
(it can have multiple lines). Therefore, if you try to repeatedly select the Beginning or
End option, a message will inform you that a command already exists at this location,
and you can modify it. Add the appropriate lines to the existing CL command using the
Command option in the MODIFY CMD menu, described below.
When you choose CL Command from the MACHINING menu, the current CL
data file is displayed in the NCL File window, and the CL COMMAND menu
appears with the options:
To Modify a CL Command
You can modify either the contents or the placement of a previously added
user-defined CL command by following the procedure below.
2. Locations of the previously added user-defined CL commands are highlighted in cyan and
all the commands are listed in a namelist menu. You can select a command by either
selecting on the screen or from the menu. Once a command is selected, it is
simultaneously highlighted on the screen and in the menu. Choose Done Sel if that is
the command you want.
381
Þ Placement—Relocate the command using the LOCATE CMD options described
above.
Þ Command—Add more lines or edit the command text using the CREATE CMD
options described above.
4. Check off either one or both options and choose Done. If both options are checked off, the
system will start the appropriate user interface in turn.
To Find a CL Command
Þ Enter String—Enter a string to search for. The system will search through all the
commands in the Info Box (both system-generated and user-defined). You can view
the results using the Next, Previous, and Show All options in the SHOW DATA
menu.
If a block of commands has been added, only the first command will appear in the search
list, followed by the number of lines in the block. For example, if you choose
“FEDRAT/1.000000, IPR (2 lines) from the namelist menu, locations of all two-line blocks
starting with the “FEDRAT/1.000000, IPR command will be shown, even if the other
commands in the block are different.
To Delete a CL Command
You can only delete user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commands
previously added by using the Insert CL Command option.
382
3. The system deletes the selected command from the CL file listing.
To Copy a CL Command
2. A namelist menu with all the inserted commands appears. Select a command you want to
copy. A block of commands is selected by the first command and number of lines. The
system will highlight in red the location where the selected command or block is
currently inserted (that is, where it will be copied from).
3. Select a new location on the tool path. The command is added, with a cyan point
indicating the new location.
CL Data
About CL Data
Cutter Location (CL) data files are generated from the cutter paths specified
within Pro/NC NC sequences. Each NC sequence generates a separate CL
file. You can also create a single file for a whole operation. These CL data
files can then be passed to machine-specific or generic post-processors for NC
tape generation or DNC communications.
383
3. Choose File to print the CL data to a file.
Þ CL File – Generate a CL data file. Type a filename, or press ENTER to accept the
default filename generated by the system.
Þ MCD File – Generate an MCD file. If you select this option, the system will first
generate a CL file (you will be prompted for the file name), and then post-process it.
This option is not available with the Batch option below.
Notes:
Þ File extension length is limited to 3 characters. If you specify a longer file extension,
it will be truncated and a warning will be issued.
Þ Do not change the CL file extension if you are using a default post-processor, a
dedicated post-processor, or a post-processor created with Pro/NCPOST.
When you output CL data to a file, the system generates a default name for
this file, based on the following rules:
• If you output CL data for an operation, the default name will be the operation name. For
example, if the operation name is OP010, the default CL file name is op010.ncl.1.
• If you output CL data for an NC sequence that has a name, the default name will be the
NC sequence name. For example, if the NC sequence name is volume01, the default CL
file name is volume01.ncl.1.
• If you output CL data for an NC sequence that does not have a name, the default name
will be seq#####, where ##### is the sequence number. For example, for the 5th NC
sequence in the manufacturing model, the default CL file name is seq00005.ncl.1.
• If you output CL data for a set of NC sequences, the default name will be the set name.
For example, if the set name is nc_set, the default CL file name is nc_set.ncl.1.
You can customize the default CL file name for an operation or NC sequence
using the NCL_FILE parameter at the appropriate level. If the NCL_FILE
384
parameter is set to something other than the default (-), the system will use
the parameter value as the default name for CL data output (and add the
extension and version number to it).
When the system suggests a default name, you can either accept it by
pressing ENTER, or type a different name. The system will add the extension
and version number to the name you typed.
4. The system brings up a namelist menu containing all operation and NC sequence names.
Put the checkmarks next to the NC sequences you want included in the set. When you
select or unselect an operation makes the system automatically select or unselect all the
NC sequences in this operation. You can also use the Select All and Unsel All options.
Sets of NC Sequences
Note: When outputting a set of NC sequences, you have to add the appropriate
connection moves, if needed.
When you choose Select Set from the OUTPUT menu, the system displays
the OUTPUT SET menu with the following options:
385
• Delete—Delete an existing set of NC sequences (this option deletes the name of the set;
it does not affect the NC sequences themselves).
2. Choose Output.
4. Choose the desired output type option (such as File or Display) from the PATH menu,
then follow the appropriate procedure, as if outputting a single operation or NC
sequence.
The Batch option in the OUTPUT TYPE menu allows you to perform the tool
path computation in the background, as a separate process, and even on a
separate host machine, which lets you do other work while the tool path
computation occurs. It is your responsibility to avoid working on a model
until its toolpath computation is complete.
The Queue Manage option in the CL DATA menu enables you to perform
management of the jobs in the queue:
386
To enable toolpath computation on a separate host machine, set up the
following configuration option on your machine:
prorembatch_queue_manager proc_name:host:0:proc_num:1
where:
You can “play an existing CL file by reading it in. The system will display the
corresponding tool path.
Note: If the first feature in a CL data file is a 4-axis Wire EDM NC sequence, and the
file contains any NC sequence other than a Wire EDM NC sequence, the input process
will be quit.
You can display the tool path for an operation or an NC sequence by following
the procedure below.
3. Choose Display from the PATH menu to display the tool path on the screen.
387
4. Use the DISPLAY CL menu options to customize the tool path display and click Done.
Click for details.
If you are displaying tool path for an operation, all NC sequence tool paths will be
displayed in turn. Synchronized display for HEAD1 and HEAD2 will be used for 4-Axis
turning where appropriate. VERIFY and PROBE statements will be graphically
simulated during CL data display.
When displaying the tool path, the solid line represents the tip of the cutter as it cuts the
material (kerf display is available for certain NC sequence types). The tool path
displayed as a dotted line corresponds to the RAPID movements (that is, when
FREE_FEED is 0). If you specify a nonzero FREE_FEED, rapid traverse will be
displayed as a solid line.
Notes:
Þ In some cases, the display may not reflect the exact coordinates in the generated
Pro/CLfile.
Þ You can display tool motions in different colors according to their feed values.
You can abort the cutter path display at any time by clicking on the STOP
sign in the bottom-right corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window.
• Disp Cycles—Appears only for Holemaking NC sequences and Thread Turning. If the
checkmark is on, all the tool motions included in the CYCLE command or in the thread
cycle will be displayed. If the checkmark is off, a simplified display will be used.
• Status Box—When you display the tool path, additional information appears in the Info
Box, such as the feedrate, the spindle speed, the current XYZ coordinates of the tool, the
current IJK coordinates of the tool axis. This option causes the cutter coordinates in the
Info Box to update with each GOTO statement, to reflect the intermediate cutter
positions during the tool path display.
388
• StopAtStart—Makes the tool stop at the beginning of the tool path, to allow you check
the cutter location coordinates in the Info Box. Choose Continue from the CL CONTROL
menu when you are ready to proceed displaying the tool path.
• Compute CL—Forces the system to recompute the CL data at this time; if this option is
not selected, the system will use CL data stored in the “manufacturename.tph file and
only recompute it if you made changes affecting the CL data (such as changing the
manufacturing parameters or model geometry) after the tool path has last been stored by
the system.
The next two options represent two ways to control the frequency of
consecutive tool displays on the tool path. They are mutually exclusive; the
one that you select last will be used.
• Time Increment—Puts the tool display in the real time mode. Enter a value for the
time increment (in seconds) between two consecutive tool displays.
• Cutter Step—Displays the tool at uniform distances along the tool path. Enter a value
for step size (in the units of the workpiece). If you enter a large value for step size, the
tool will be displayed at the GOTO locations only.
Notes:
Þ If a solid tool model is used when creating the NC sequence, you will have an option
to display model geometry instead of the default tool.
Þ Once you display a tool path, Pro/NC will remember the options used and select
them as defaults when next displaying a tool path within the manufacturing session.
If the options last used are inapplicable for a particular NC sequence type (for
example, you used Kerf display before, and now are displaying a Turning tool path),
the system will automatically reset the default as appropriate.
Once you have set up the CL display environment, choose Done CL. The
tool path is displayed according to the specified options. Then the CL
CONTROL menu appears with the following options:
• Position—Select a point along the tool path. The tool will be positioned at this point.
• Next—The tool is displayed at the location corresponding to the next GOTO command.
389
• Continue—Proceed with the tool path display from the current position of the tool.
• Done—Display the tool path for the next NC sequence, or, if only a single NC sequence
is present, exit the CL CONTROL menu.
• Quit—Exit the CL Control menu. This command will appear only if multiple NC
sequences are present.
Note: The tool will always be displayed while you move it using the CL CONTROL menu
options, even if the Tool checkmark in the DISPLAY CL menu was turned off. Once you
choose Continue from the CL CONTROL menu, the tool display will again be controlled
by the CL display environment.
You can interrupt the cutter path display at any time by clicking on the
STOP sign in the lower-right corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window.
You can display the cutter path and a simulation of the tool prior to
completing the NC sequence, to verify the tool path and make a visual check
for interference with fixtures and model features. All simulated tool
dimensions represent the parameters defined during tool setup. All tools
except turning appear three dimensional in isometric or trimetric views.
When you choose Play Path from the NC SEQUENCE menu, the PLAY PATH
menu appears with the following options:
• Compute CL—Forces the system to recompute the CL data at this time; if this option is
not selected, the system will use CL data stored in the “manufacturename.tph file and
only recompute it if you made changes affecting the CL data (such as changing the
manufacturing parameters or model geometry) after the tool path has last been stored by
the system.
• Screen Play—Display the tool path on the screen and view the contents of the CL data
file using the PLAY PATH dialog box. Click for details.
• Play Steps—Appears only if the tool path has been customized. Allows you to display
the tool path step-by-step. Use Continue to display the next step, Quit—to quit the
display process.
390
To Rotate or Translate CL Data
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select a
set of NC sequences.
3. Choose the NC Sequence coordinate system axis to rotate or translate about from the CL
TRANSF menu.
CL data rotations and translations are cumulative. You can repeat Steps 2–4
as many times as necessary to change the CL output location. To change
rotation or translation value back to 0, choose Quit from the CL TRANSF
menu.
To Mirror CL Data
391
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select a
set of NC sequences.
4. The CL data is mirrored. Choose File or Display from the CUT PATH menu.
Mirroring CL Data
CL data can also be mirrored before sending it to file or displaying on the
screen.
To Scale CL Data
The Scale option in the PATH menu allows you to scale CL data before
displaying it or writing to a file.
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select a
set of NC sequences.
4. The CL data is scaled. Choose File or Display from the CUT PATH menu.
392
When an NC sequence is created, the CL data is generated in the units of the
workpiece. Later, however, CL data can be output in any units.
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select a
set of NC sequences.
3. Select the units for CL data to be output in from the LENGTH menu.
Note: You can use only standard units. The Other unit option is inapplicable for CL
data output.
The Edit option in the CL DATA menu allows you to edit CL data for an
operation, or view CL data for an NC sequence. Changes to CL data are
played back only when the CL data for the operation is output.
When editing an operation, you will be asked if you want to create a new file.
This will output the current CL data for this operation in a file (you will be
prompted for the file name), and then bring it up for editing in a text window
at the top of the screen.
If you answer [n], you can edit an existing CL file for this operation (you will
be prompted for the file name). In this case, however, it is the file and not the
current operation data that will be edited. For example, if some changes
occurred to the CL data after it was last output, these changes will be lost for
editing. It is therefore recommended to output the CL data to a new file, to
make sure that all the latest changes are reflected.
Note: The first four lines of a CL file act as a header, and must be kept intact if the file is
to be read in during editing or inputting CL data. Changing or reordering these lines will
cause an error message to appear.
• Insert File—Insert a move into the CL file, before the current line.
• Save File—Save the CL file (as is). You can enter a different file name.
• Show Path—Show tool path from the start of file to the current position.
393
• Show Edits—Bring up the Information Window, listing all of the changes that have
been made in the CL data file. The information will include the line number, the editing
function that was performed, and the CL commands that were added.
• Clear Edits—Delete any changes you have made to the CL data file.
• Insert—Add any valid line to the CL file, before the current line.
• Append—Add any valid line to the CL file, after the current line.
• Delete—Delete the specified number of lines, starting from the current line. Enter the
number of lines to delete (the default is 1). If you enter 0, no lines will be deleted.
• Copy Text—Copy lines in the CL file to another location. Select the range of lines to
copy by entering the first and the last line number (to copy one line only, enter its
number for both prompts). Then enter the number of the destination line.
• Move Text—Move lines in the CL file to another location. Works the same as Copy
Text, the difference being that with Move Text selected lines will be deleted from the
original location.
• Step—Move through the CL file step-by-step, displaying tool and path for every line on
your way.
• Jump—Move directly to the specified line without displaying the tool path. The tool will
be immediately displayed in its new position.
• Position—Position the file by line number or by selecting a point. When you choose
Position, you will have two options:
Þ Line—Position the cursor in the CL file (and the tool on the screen) by entering the
line number to go to. The valid range is shown in the prompt.
394
• Rew—Search backward to a particular text pattern.
As you step through the file, the cutter location updates accordingly. The
STOP sign is displayed at the right end of the message window. You can click
on it at any moment to interrupt scrolling the file and stop at the current
cursor position.
In Holemaking NC sequences, for deep and break chip cycles, the cycles will
be displayed as you edit the CL file.
The screen editing mode allows you to use the cursor, arrow keys, and some
built-in functions directly in the text editor window.
Þ <F7>—Cut—Cut the highlighted lines (edit mode only). To highlight several lines,
press the LEFT mouse button and hold it down while dragging the mouse across the
file.
Þ <F9>—Search—Search for a text string. Enter the string. The file is repositioned
with the cursor on the first occurrence of the search pattern.
You can use the mouse to position the cursor and move through the file using the arrow
keys, <PgDn> and <PgUp>, scroll bar at the side of the window.
3. When done, hit <F1> or <ESC> to quit the screen edit mode and return to the CL EDIT
menu. Whichever key you use, all changes made in the screen edit mode will stay in the
file. If you do not want to keep the changes, choose Quit from the CL EDIT menu.
Note: If you are running on a SUN workstation, you may need to modify your “.xinitrc
file to allow the use of function key <F1> by your applications.
395
To Perform Search/Replace
The automatic replacement procedure allows you to search the CL data file
for a text pattern and replace all or some occurrences with another string.
5. If you have chosen All, all the occurrences of the search string will automatically be
replaced. If Some has been chosen, each occurrence will be highlighted in turn. Use one
of:
3. The SELECT SRFS menu appears. Select the surfaces you want to check for gouging. The
following options are available:
Surface—Individual surfaces.
396
Þ Remove—Unselect some of the selected surfaces. You can also use the Surface and
Part options above.
Þ Show—Show the surfaces selected so far. The surfaces will be highlighted in blue.
4. Choose Done/Return from the SELECT SRFS menu when finished selecting surfaces.
5. Choose Run from the GOUGE CHECK menu to start the gouge checking process. You can
interrupt this process at any time by clicking on the STOP sign at the right end of the
message window. If you press the STOP sign, the following options will be available:
6. If no gouges are detected upon completing the check, the system will inform you with a
message. Otherwise, the first detected gouge will be shown and the SHOW GOUGE menu
will appear with the following options:
Þ Info—Output clearance between the tool and check surfaces, as well as information
about all detected gouges, to a file. The number of decimal places output for cutter
position will be defined by the configuration option “mfg_xyz_num_digits (this option
also defines the number of decimal places when outputting tool coordinates in CL
data files). If this option is not specified, the default number of decimal places for
Gouge Checking is 4.
7. You can check another NC sequence by choosing Filename from the GOUGE CHECK
menu and selecting or creating another CL file. The Surfaces option in the GOUGE
CHECK menu allows you to add or remove surfaces to check for gouging. You can also
change the accuracy of system calculations by selecting Tolerance and entering the
gouge tolerance value. The smaller the tolerance value, the greater the accuracy.
Note: The tolerance value specified for Gouge Checking should not be less than the
TOLERANCE value used when creating the NC sequence. A good “rule of thumb is to set
the gouge check tolerance to 1.5 times the NC sequence tolerance for the tool path being
checked.
The Step option in the GOUGE CHECK menu allows you to change the step size for gouge
checking (that is, the tool positions where gouge checking is performed). You can either
enter a value for step size, or let the system automatically calculate the value to
maximize the speed of display. Entering a smaller step size will increase the number of
gouge check positions.
397
8. Choose Done/Return from the GOUGE CHECK menu when finished.
To Specify an NC Alias
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose CL
Setup.
2. Choose NC Alias from the CL SETUP menu. The NC ALIASES menu appears with the
following commands:
Þ Save—Save the NC alias table in the current directory. NC alias tables are saved
with the extension “.ncd.
Þ Show—Bring up the Information Window to list all of the NC aliases specified for
the manufacturing model.
3. Choose Modify. The Pro/TABLE window appears. The table contains two columns,
labeled “CL Command and “User Command. The CL commands that are supported for
aliasing are listed under “CL Command.
4. For each supported CL command that you want to assign an alias to, enter the alias in
the corresponding cell in the “User Command column.
NC Aliases
The NC Alias option in the CL SETUP menu enables you to establish aliases
for CL commands. NC aliases are useful if the post-processor that you are
using does not support the default CL commands output by Pro/ENGINEER;
the NC aliases will substitute a command you have provided into the CL
data. The NC alias may also include additional CL data associated with the
command, as well as dimensions, user-defined parameters, and text. NC
aliases are saved in a file with the extension “.ncd. NC alias files will be
stored automatically whenever the manufacturing model is saved.
398
For example:
where:
• “LOADTL is the default CL command output by Pro/NC. For this example, the complete
output statement is: “LOADTL / 3, LENGTH, 5.0.
• “&nc_full_arg is the output which follows the “/ in the output. In this example, it is “3,
LENGTH, 5.0. The individual fields in this string can be output using
“&nc_arg[arg_num] (with “arg_num beginning at 1). For instance, “&nc_arg2 would
output “LENGTH.
• “param1 / “param2 are user-defined parameters; “& indicates that their values should be
displayed (as in drawing notes). For this example, the value of “param1 is “BLUE and
the value of “param2 is “GREEN.
The output in the CL data file will read: “MACRO_LOAD : 3, LENGTH, 5.0,
with 10.00 and BLUE and GREEN
Filenames are entered without the extension, and should have the extension
“.ncl, or the default CL file extension if specified in the configuration file.
The contents of these files will be included in the CL file of the current NC
sequence between “$$ —> BLOCK_START and “$$ —> BLOCK_END. These
399
contents will be ignored when reading a CL file using the Input option in the
CL DATA menu.
Notes:
• Both these files are included into a CL file before it goes to the post-processor.
• If you set the Startup and Shutdown files at the operation level, these files will be added
only when outputting CL data for the operation. The Startup file is output right after the
PARTNO, MACHIN, and UNITS commands, before the pre-machining file for the first
NC sequence; the Shutdown file is output at the very end of the CL file, after the post-
machining file for the last NC sequence.
To Convert a CL File
1. In the directory where your CL file resides, type:
pro_ncl_cvt
Converting CL Files
The Pro/ENGINEER editor can handle lines up to 80 characters long.
Therefore, the CIRCLE statements and GOTO statements with an axis (i, j, k
vector) will be broken in two lines, with the continuation character ($) output
automatically at the end of the first line.
Before sending CL files to the post-processor, you may need to convert them
to the format without the continuation character using the “pro_ncl_cvt
command.
When you display a tool path, the system opens the PLAY PATH dialog box.
The collapsible upper portion of this dialog box lists the cutter location (CL)
data for the NC sequence or operation. You can save this CL data in a CL file
or an MCD file directly from the PLAY PATH dialog box, by clicking the
appropriate option in the File menu.
400
Name Description
The Tool Clearance button lets you access the Measure functionality, to
compute tool interference, and clearance. If a solid tool model is used, its
geometry can be selected for measuring. If the tool is defined by parameters,
it will be temporarily converted into a “dummy part, with geometry based on
the appropriate tool parameters.
The Position Cutting Tool button lets you select a point on the tool path to
position the cutting tool. To position the cutting tool at a certain CL data line,
click NCL File > Position Tool.
At the bottom of the dialog box, there is a slider to adjust the display speed.
Moving the slider to the right makes the display faster; moving it to the left
slows the display.
When displaying the tool path, you can make the tool stop at certain points
by adding break points. You can also insert customized CL commands, such
as the specific post-processor words required for correct NC output, at desired
locations within the CL file. When you save the CL data, these commands
will be output to the CL file. If you add a tool motion command, the
401
corresponding motion will be also shown in the tool path display on the
screen.
1. When defining an NC sequence, on the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Play Path > Screen
Play.
The system opens the PLAY PATH dialog box and displays the cutting tool simulation in
the initial location.
2. Click the Play Forward button to start playing the tool motion.
The system starts scrolling through the CL data file, moving the tool to reflect its current
position on the screen. The solid red line represents the tip of the cutter as it cuts the
material.
3. Click the Stop button to stop the tool motion display. The tool also stops upon reaching a
break point placed in the CL file (indicated by a red downward arrow appearing to the left
of the CL record). Use the other tool positioning options in the PLAY PATH dialog box, as
needed.
4. You can save the current tool path to a CL or an MCD file. To do this, click File > Save or
File > Save As MCD, respectively.
5. To finish displaying the tool motion and close the PLAY PATH dialog box, click Close.
When displaying the tool motion, you can make the tool stop at certain points
by adding break points in the CL file listing.
1. In the CL data listing, select a line where you want the tool to stop.
3. The system indicates the break point by placing a red downward arrow to the left of the
selected CL line.
When you play the tool motion, the tool stops upon reaching the break point
line. You can, for example, click Tool Clearance at this point, to measure
tool interference or clearance. To resume playing the tool path, click the Play
Forward button again.
When you add break points in a CL file listing, the system indicates them by
placing a red downward arrow to the left of the appropriate CL line. When
402
you play the tool path, the tool stops upon reaching the break point line in
the CL data listing.
To display the tool motion without stopping at break points, click NCL File >
Suppress all break points. The break point information, however, will be
retained; when you click NCL File > Resume all break points, all the
break points will reappear.
To delete an existing break point, select the appropriate line in the CL data
listing, then click NCL File > Delete break point.
When you play the tool path, the position of the cutting tool on the screen
corresponds to the position of the cursor in the CL data listing in the top
portion of the PLAY PATH dialog box.
• Click the Position Cutting Tool button in the lower portion of the PLAY PATH dialog
box and select a point on the tool path to position the cutting tool.
• Select a line in the CL data listing, then click NCL File > Position Tool to position the
tool at this line.
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. Use
this functionality to add the specific post-processor words required for correct
NC output.
2. To select location for the CL command, click and select either a point on the tool path
on the screen or a line in the CL file listing.
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and type the command, line-by-line. Note
that this method does not provide syntax checking.
Þ Click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the
syntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
Þ Click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser window
will appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
403
Notes:
Þ You can edit the contents of the Command text box at any point by placing the
cursor in it and using the keyboard.
Þ If you supply more than one command line, they will be treated as a “block, that is,
you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
4. The Preview button inserts the command line(s) in the CL file at the selected location to
let you preview the result. Click OK to insert the command at selected location, Cancel—
to quit inserting the command.
When typing values for CL commands, you can input model parameters,
preceded by an ampersand(&) sign. If there is a corresponding parameter
defined in relations, its value will be used in the CL command. If the
parameter is not found, the system will prompt you for the parameter’s type
and value, and this parameter will be added to the relations. This way, the
CL command can be changed at the top level (through Relations).
To Delete a CL Command
2. All the CL command locations are indicated by cyan points and all the commands are
listed in a namelist menu. You can select a command by either selecting on the screen or
from the menu. Once a command is selected, it is simultaneously highlighted on the
screen and in the menu. Choose Done Sel if that is the command you want.
If the selected location contains a block of commands, the whole block will be deleted. A
single command can be deleted from the block using the Modify option.
To Redefine a CL Command
You can only redefine user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commands
previously added by using the Insert CL Command option.
404
The CL Command dialog box opens.
3. To select a new location for the CL command, click and select either a point on the
tool path on the screen or a line in the CL file listing.
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and edit the command. Note that this
method does not provide syntax checking.
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then,
click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the
syntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then,
click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser window
will appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
Note: If you do not delete the contents of the Command text box before using the Menu
or File option, you will create additional command lines. From then on, these lines will
be treated as a “block, that is, you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole
block of command lines.
5. The Preview button lets you preview the result. Click OK to complete redefining the
command, Cancel—to quit.
When you display a tool path, you can save the current CL data in a CL file
or an MCD file directly from the PLAY PATH dialog box:
1. On the top menu bar of the PLAY PATH dialog box, click File.
Þ Save—Output CL data to a CL file, with the name corresponding to the name of the
Tool Path feature.
Þ Save As—Output CL data to a CL file with a different name. Type the new name in
the browser window.
405
Subroutine Programming
About Subroutine Programming
4. The top portion of the dialog box contains the option buttons and checkboxes that allow
you to specify the type of subroutine pattern and desired CL output format:
Þ If you select the Group option button, the sequences you have selected will be
patterned as a group. This means that the selected sequences and all the sequences
in between form a patterned internal group. If you select Individual, each selected
sequence is patterned individually; the sequences in between are not affected.
Þ If you select the Absolute option button, CL data for the subroutine will be output
in absolute mode. If you select Incremental, the system will output the
MODE/INCR and MODE/ABSOL commands for each NC sequence that is placed in
a subroutine.
406
Þ If you select the Multax checkbox, the system will output transformed CL data
rather than outputting Rotate Table commands.
Þ If you select the Copy CL checkbox, the system will output CL data without the
subroutine definitions and calls. Redefine a pattern to use this option if you want to
temporarily suppress subroutine pattern definitions in CL output.
5. The 1st Direction tab lets you define the pattern in the first direction:
Translate—Translate the CL data along the axes of the base coordinate system.
Type the translation values in the X value, Y value, and Z value text boxes.
Rotate—Rotate the CL data about one of the axes of the base coordinate system.
Specify the desired axis by selecting the X, Y, or Z option button. Type the rotation
value in the Angle text box.
Csys—This option enables you to select or create coordinate systems for placing
instances of the subroutine. The system calculates the correct TRANS/ROTATE
statements for each instance, based on the location of the coordinate system specified
for this instance with respect to the base coordinate system. Click Select to create,
select, remove, or show the coordinate systems.
5. The 2nd Direction tab lets you define the pattern in the second direction. It contains
the same options as the 1st Direction tab, except the Csys option button is replaced by
None, which means no pattern in this direction (this is the default).
6. The Fixture tab lets you increment the fixture offset register value.
If you select Use Fixture Compensation, the system will output the “SET/OFSETL, n
command for each patterned sequence, where n is the fixture offset register number,
defined as follows:
Þ Initial Register specifies the fixture offset register number for the first instance.
Þ 1st Direction Increment specifies the incremental value for each subsequent
instance in the first direction.
Þ 2nd Direction Increment specifies the incremental value for instances in the
second direction. This text box only appears if the subroutine pattern is bidirectional.
Þ If you click Custom, the system displays the Subroutine Fixture Offsets Setup
dialog box, where it lists all instances of the pattern (based on the number of
instances in each direction), and current register numbers for each instance (based
on the values for Initial Register, 1st Direction Increment, and 2nd Direction
Increment).
407
Select an instance where you want to customize the fixture offset and type the new value
in the Fixture Offset text box. The Reset button resets all the offsets back to default
values. Click OK to finish customizing the offsets.
Limitations
If subroutines are present, the following limitations on modifying CL data
exist:
• The CL Edit functionality lets you display and scan CL data, but you cannot modify it.
Group Individual
CALSUB / 1 CALSUB / 1
CALSUB / 2 CALSUB / 1
CALSUB / 3 SEQ2
CALSUB / 1 CALSUB / 3
CALSUB / 2 CALSUB / 3
CALSUB / 3 SEQ4
SEQ4
408
If Incremental is selected, the system outputs two additional commands,
MODE/INCR and MODE/ABSOL, for each NC sequence that is placed in a
subroutine. This triggers the post processor to process and output the data as
incremental moves (the output in the subroutine is still absolute):
DEFSUB / 1
MODE / INCR
MODE / ABSOL
ENDSUB
Þ Pattern Def—Brings up the Subroutines dialog box to let you redefine the pattern.
4. Select the desired option(s) from the REDEF SUB menu, then choose Done. The system
will start the user interface for all the selected options in turn.
NC Post-Processing
About NC Post-Processing
Pro/NC generates cutter location (CL) data files in an ASCII format that need
to be post-processed to create Machine Control Data (MCD) files before any
machining operation occurs.
409
• ncpost—Use the Pro/NCPOST post-processors.
Other post-processors are certified for use with Pro/NC CL data files.
External Post-Processors
The following post-processors are certified for use with Pro/NC CL Data files:
Post-Processor Supplied by
CAM-POST® ICAM Technologies Corporation
IntelliPost® Software Magic, Inc.
NC Post Plus™ CAD/CAM Resources, Inc.
Other post-processor reading APT should also, with little additional code, be
able to process Pro/NC CL files.
410
6. Type a filename. The files will be named <fname>.ncl.# for the CL file and <fname>.tap
for the MCD file (where <fname> is the name you typed and # is the version number).
Þ MACHIN—Use the post-processor file for the machine specified in the MACHIN
statement of the CL file. If this option is not checked off, you will be prompted to
select a post-processor from the namelist menu of all available post-processors.
Þ PID—If this option is checked off, you will be prompted for the process identification
string. The string should not contain any spaces.
9. The post-processor is started with the specified options. The post-processed file will be
named <fname>.tap, where <fname> is the name of the CL file being processed.
The system opens a browser window with a listing of CL data files, starting from the
current directory.
4. The post-processor is started with the specified options. The post-processed file will be
named <fname>.tap, where <fname> is the name of the CL file being processed.
CL Output
About CL Output
A subset of the Automatically Programmed Tools (APT) commands is
automatically sent by Pro/NC to a CL data file. These commands are shown
below with their associated parameters and definitions.
Other commands can be included in the CL data files using the Edit or CL
Command functionality. Please refer to your post-processor documentation
for description of the commands available.
411
Supported CL Data Commands
$$—any line or portion of a line preceded by “$$ is a comment or command
for the use of Pro/NC.
a=subroutine name.
CUTCOM / OFF
412
DEFSUB / a start of a subroutine where:
definition
a = subroutine name (by
default, the number of the
corresponding NC sequence).
DELAY / t where:
t = delay in seconds
FEDRAT/f,units where:
FROM / x, y, z {, i, j, k} where:
413
GENRTR / genrtr register
GOTO / x, y, z {, i, j, k} where:
LINTOL / r where:
414
MACHIN / name, m where:
m = the NC sequence
parameter MACH_ID
MULTRD, t = number of
threading starts in multiple
start threading.
415
depth
(NUMBER_FIN_PASSES).
PIVOTZ / z2, z1, z2, z1, z1 output for 4-Axis Wire z2 = the highest mid-point of
EDM only. the surfaces traversed
PPRINT output model
information. In order to
issue this command, you
have to set up the
PPRINT table.
PROBE / ON, OFF, probe statements.
RANGE, CALIB
RAPID next motion statement
will be a rapid traverse
feed.
ROTATE / AAXIS|BAXIS| rotational transition where:
CAXIS, INCR, a, between the Machine
CLW|CCLW and NC Sequence AAXIS, BAXIS, CAXIS—rotate
coordinate systems if about X, Y, or Z axis
CL_DATA_MODE is respectively.
TRANS_ROTABL
a = rotation angle value.
CCLW = counter-clockwise
motion.
SPINDL / RPM, s,
CLW|CCLW, MAXRPM, m,
416
RANGE, r
SPINDL / ON
SPINDL / OFF
r = range value
(SPINDLE_RANGE). Can be
LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH. If
SPINDLE_RANGE is
NUMBER, then r is equal to
the RANGE_NUMBER
parameter value. If
SPINDLE_RANGE is
NO_RANGE, “RANGE, r will
not be output.
STAN / a, [ LEAD | LAG, b output for tool axis in NOW—Update the tool axis
], [ NOW | NEXT ] Wire EDM, if position at the current point
CL_OUTPUT_MODE is (available for 2-Axis Wire EDM
set to TAPER only).
417
AT, percent = the percentage of
remaining metal to be removed
with each pass
(PERCENT_DEPTH).
OFSETL
n = the number of times the tool
is positioned to a multiple cut.
o = offset distance between each
of the cuts.
418
LOADTL.
“XAXIS, x and “ZAXIS, z
will only be output if
GAUGE_X_LENGTH
and
GAUGE_Z_LENGTH for
the tool are other than
dash (-).
UNITS / u length units used for the
NC sequence (INCHES,
MM, etc.)
VERIFY / CORNER, PNT, probe statements.
RCTNGL, ROUND, XYZ
where:
type = DRILL, DEEP, BRKCHP, THRU, FACE, CSINK, TAP, BORE, REAM, OFF.
f = feedrate.
units = units for cycle feedrate. Can be IPM, IPR, MMPM, MMPR.
r = rapid to r depth.
DRILL Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Drill, Standard.
where:
419
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
DEEP Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Drill, Deep. The deep cycle allows
for incremental steps into a deep hole.
where:
b—Given by PECK_DEPTH.
d—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
f—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
BREAKCHIP Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Drill, Break Chip. The breakchip
cycle is similar to the deep cycle, except that the retraction at each increment
does not come all the way out of the hole. A full retraction out of hole is also
allowed.
where:
b—Given by PECK_DEPTH.
420
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
d—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
f—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
THRU Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Drill, Web. It enables you to drill
holes through two or more plates, separated by a certain distance, with the
tool moving with FEED_RATE while drilling a plate, and then making a
RAPID motion along the tool axis to position above the next plate.
CYCLE / THRU, DEPTH, a1, a2, a3, ..., IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d,
RETURN, e
where:
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
421
FACE Cycle
Output when using the cycle type option Face. It is essentially the same as
the drill cycle, except face allows for an optional dwell at depth.
where:
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
COUNTERSINK Cycle
Output when using the cycle type option Countersink. Allows the addition
of a chamfered edge to a hole. It also provides for dwell at depth to assure
good finish.
where:
d—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
422
f—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
TAP Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Tap and either Fixed or Floating.
Allows the creation of a threaded hole. Floating tap cycle allows a modified
feed rate other than that given by the combination of thread pitch and
spindle speed.
where:
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
BORE Cycle
Output when using the cycle type option Bore. Used to create a finish hole
diameter with high precision. In order to assure good quality finish, there are
provisions to allow dwell at depth and to back an asymmetric tool away from
the finished wall before retraction.
where:
c1—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
423
c2—Given by JOG_DIST, if programmed.
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
REAM Cycle
Output when using the cycle type option Ream. An alternative for creating a
precision finish hole. It creates the good surface finish by feeding out of the
hole with the spindle turning.
where:
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the
CLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
424
GOTO / x, y, z
CIRCLE / x, y, z, i, j, k, r
GOTO / x, y, z
x, y, z
x, y, z
x, y, z
The GOTO statement preceding the CIRCLE command specifies the start
point of the arc. The following GOTO statements specify the points on the
arc, the last line specifying the arc end point. For POINTS_&_ARC, the
number of points output is controlled by the tolerance (the smaller the
tolerance, the greater the number of points). For ARC_ONLY, a minimum
number of points, determined by the NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS parameter
value, is output.
Note: The GOTO statements have the format shown above if the tool axis is parallel to
the Z-Axis of the Machine coordinate system; otherwise, the tool axis vector will also be
output.
i, j, k—Plane vector.
r—Radius.
The plane vector determines the plane and direction using the “right hand
rule:
i j k Plane Direction
0 0 1 XY CCW
0 0 -1 XY CW
0 1 0 ZX CCW
0 -1 0 ZX CW
1 0 0 YZ CCW
-1 0 0 YZ CW
APT Format
425
If CIRC_INTERPOLATION is set to APT_FORMAT, the CL output for each
arc or circle encountered will be in the auxiliary format:
INDIRV / i, j, k
TLON
GOFWD / (CIRCLE / x, y, z, r), ON, (LINE / x1, y1, z1, x2, y2, z2)
where:
r—Circle radius.
x1, y1, z1 and x2, y2, z2—Coordinates of the two points defining the exit line.
Helical Interpolation
Helical interpolation is provided for Thread Milling. Output format uses
CIRCLE with differing Z coordinates at the start and end point. Difference in
Z values is based on the thread pitch and the fraction of the distance
travelled around the helix. For the CIRCLE statement, Z dimension used is
the same as the initial point. Sample output is shown below:
...
...
426
Command Description
SET/ UPPER, a, LOWER, b Indicates the Z values of the upper and lower
contours. “a and “b are real numbers.
n
LOAD / WIRE, n Indicates that wire “n should be threaded. “n is
an integer.
NC Check
About NC Check
427
Do not confuse the automatic material removal simulation with the NC
Check process:
• At the time of creating an NC sequence (from the PLAY PATH menu) to check the current
tool path.
• From the CL DATA menu after the NC sequence or operation is created. You will be
prompted for a CL file name. At this point, you can either select an existing file, or create
a new one.
You can control which NC Check simulation module to use by setting the
configuration option nccheck_type. The values are:
• nccheck—Use Pro/NC-CHECK.
Modifying NC Sequences
To Modify an NC Sequence
428
1. Choose Modify from the MFG UTILS menu and NC Sequence from the MOD PROCESS
menu.
or
Choose Modify from the MANUFACTURE menu, then choose Mod NC Seq from the MFG
MODIFY menu.
Þ Tool—Modify the tool used for the NC sequence. You can retrieve another tool or
modify parameters of the current tool.
Þ Dimensions—Modify the Tool Motion dimensions. Select which Tool Motions you
want to modify using the namelist menu (you can select all). The appropriate
dimensions are displayed. Select the dimension you want to modify and enter a new
value.
1. Type the new value in a cell (for example, in the first column).
429
4. The system changes the parameter values for the whole row, that is, in all the columns of
the table.
To Redefine an NC Sequence
The MFG UTILS menu option Redefine allows you to modify how an NC
sequence is created. When the NC sequence has children (e.g., material
removal), you will be prompted to delete all the children before proceeding
with the NC sequence redefinition.
2. Choose NC Sequence from the SELECT FEAT menu and select the NC
sequence to be redefined.
The NC sequence will be recreated using the new definitions. If any changes are made to
the NC sequence that cause its regeneration to abort, then the redefining process will
abort and the NC sequence will return to its original references.
Note: If you want to just redefine References of an existing NC sequence, you can
choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu and then select the name of the NC
sequence from the namelist menu.
To Reorder an NC Sequence
430
Note: If you want to just change the order of outputting CL data for the NC sequences
within an operation, it is not necessary to reorder the NC sequences themselves. The
Output Order functionality provides multiple ways of reordering the tool path output: by
pick, as well as sorting by tool.
Note: If you reorder an NC sequence for which a material removal feature has been
created, the material removal feature will not be reordered automatically. The material
removal feature must also be reordered if it is to immediately follow the NC sequence.
Cut motions can be reordered within the NC sequence (to select a cut motion,
use Sel By Menu and feature number), but no Cut Motion or Tool Path
feature can be reordered to a place outside its NC group.
Mill volumes and surfaces can also be reordered using the Reorder option in
the MFG UTILS menu. The whole set of features included in the
volume/surface will be moved to the specified position in the workpiece
feature sequence.
To select a volume/surface for reordering, you can either select its first
feature (base volume or quilt), or use Sel By Menu and select the
volume/surface name.
• User Def Vol—Select a name of a Mill Volume from the namelist menu to suppress or
delete all features included in the Mill Volume.
• User Def Srf— Select a name of a Mill Surface from the namelist menu to suppress or
delete all features included in the Mill Surface.
431
Patterning NC Sequences
About Patterning NC Sequences
You can create patterns of NC sequences using the Pattern option in the
MFG UTILS menu. These patterns can be either Coordinate or Reference
(similar to Dimensional and Reference patterns in regular Pro/ENGINEER):
• Coordinate patterns are created using the Csys Pattern option by translating or
rotating CL data with respect to either the NC Sequence or the Machine coordinate
system.
• Reference patterns are created using the Ref Pattern option. This type of pattern can be
created only if the NC sequence to be patterned references a patterned feature (e.g.,
Holemaking).
A pattern can be deleted using the Del Pattern option in the MFG UTILS
menu.
You can create Coordinate patterns of NC sequences that have Tool Motion
features. You can also create a regular Dimensional pattern of an NC
sequence if it contains a Tool Motion with dimensions that can be used to
drive the pattern.
If you try to pattern an NC sequence that has Tool Motions, the system
creates an internal local group containing these features and patterns this
local group. If the NC sequence references another feature, such as Mill
Volume or Drill Group, two situations are possible:
1. If the reference feature immediately precedes the NC sequence in the feature list, the
system will prompt you if you want to include the reference feature in the pattern or not.
2. If there are other features in between the reference feature and the NC sequence, the
system will issue a warning and the reference feature will not be patterned. If you want
the reference feature to be patterned along with the NC sequence, reorder it to be
immediately before the NC sequence in the feature list before creating the pattern.
432
To Create a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence
4. Select patterning type in first direction by choosing Rotate or Translate from the PAT
TYPE menu.
Þ If you have chosen Translate, choose either NCSeq Csys or Mach Csys and enter
displacements in X, Y, and Z directions.
Þ If you have chosen Rotate, enter rotation angle, then specify which coordinate
system to use, and which axis to rotate about, by selecting options from the ROT
TYPE menu.
6. Select patterning type in second direction, or if you want a unidirectional pattern, choose
None. If you want a bidirectional pattern, repeat actions in steps 4 and 5 for the second
pattern direction.
Note: Patterning in second direction will use the same coordinate system as specified for
the first direction.
433
Using Relations
You can use relations when specifying displacements and rotation angles. For
example, when prompted to enter displacement in the Y direction, you can
enter:
STEP_OVER:FID_# / 2
Note: The Index Table patterns can be created only with respect to the Machine
coordinate system.
4. Choose Rotate from the PAT TYPE menu as the patterning type in first direction.
6. Choose Mach Csys, Index Table, and the axis to rotate about from the ROT TYPE
menu.
If you use a Rotary table, CL Data for all instances of the pattern will be
displayed at the same location (that of the first instance), with the NC
Sequence coordinate system rotating appropriately for each instance.The
following graphic illustrates the difference in CL Data display depending on
the ROT TYPE option used.
434
Tool moves from Coordinate system
instance to instance. rotates for each instance.
1. Choose Modify from the MANUFACTURE menu, then choose Mod Pattern.
Þ Num Inst—Modify only the number of instances in the selected direction. If the
number of instances is modified to 1, the pattern in this direction will be deleted.
Þ All Opts—Modify all options for this direction. If you choose it, the PAT TYPE menu
comes up.
5. Depending on the selected option, either enter number of instances, or select the
patterning type and enter all the necessary values.
Only one pattern direction can be modified at a time. To modify the second
direction, choose Mod Pattern again.
435
3. Choose Ref Pattern, and Done.
Reference Patterns
A Reference manufacturing pattern can be created when the NC sequence to
be patterned references a patterned feature. The functionality is similar to
creating Reference patterns of features in regular Pro/ENGINEER.
Note: If silhouette edges are used by the sketch, the Reference pattern will not be
created. For Turning, the work-around would be to use datum curves.
2. Reference pattern the volume. Choose Utilities, Pattern, Sel By Menu, and select the
volume name.
436
Changing Feed Colors
About Changing Feed Colors
The Feed Color option in the CL SETUP menu (accessible by choosing CL
Setup from the MFG SETUP menu) allows you to display tool motions in
different colors depending on the feed value.
The system default feed ranges and the corresponding colors are:
• < 20—White
• 20-40—Blue
• 40-60—Green
• 60-80—Cyan
• 80-100—Magenta
• > 100—Orange
You can at any time modify both the range limits and the color corresponding
to a certain range.
The procedure below shows you how to use a different color to display a
certain feed range. You can not mix your own colors for this purpose; the
system will let you choose from a built-in set of predefined colors. You can set
the same color to more than one range, if desired.
2. Choose Set Colors. The COLOR/RANGE menu appears; for each feed range, the current
color definition is shown in a small window inside the menu button.
Þ Color 1—Red
Þ Color 2—Yellow
437
Þ Color 3—White
Þ Color 4—Blue
Þ Color 5—Green
Þ Color 6—Cyan
Þ Color 7—Magenta
Þ Color 8—Orange
5. Choose a color definition. It will be used to display tool motions in the appropriate range
of feeds.
When modifying range limits, keep in mind that ranges cannot overlap. If
you try to enter a minimum or maximum value that falls into any of the
currently specified ranges, the system will not accept it. Therefore, the order
of modifying range limits is important: for example, if you have two ranges,
20-40 and 40-60, and want to modify them to be 20-30 and 30-60, modify the
20-40 range first.
2. Choose Set Range. The COLOR/RANGE menu appears; for each color definition, the
current feed range is shown.
4. Enter the minimum value for feed range (the current minimum value is shown as default
in the prompt). Entering [0] will make the range start with a “less than sign.
5. Enter the maximum value for feed range (the current maximum value is shown as
default in the prompt). Entering [0] will make the range start with a “greater than sign.
6. The new feed range is shown in the COLOR/RANGE menu. All tool motions in the
specified feed range will be displayed in the color shown in a small window inside the
menu button.
Model Tree
438
When you create or retrieve a manufacturing model, the system displays the
Model Tree Window.
2. Put the checkmark next to Features. By default, the system displays all the
manufacturing features in the Model Tree window.
3. Choose Tree > Expand > All to see all the manufacturing features at all levels.
2. The system displays the MFG Features Filter dialog box. Put a checkmark next to the
feature type(s) you want to appear in the Model Tree Window:
Þ Operation
Þ Workcell
Þ Sequence
Þ Mfg Geometry
Þ Material Removal
Þ Show all features—If you select this option, the checkmarks next to all the opitons
above disappear. The Model Tree Window will contain all the features (including
regular Pro/ENGINEER features) in the manufacturing assembly and in all the
components.
3. Press OK to display the selected feature types in the Model Tree Window.
3. The Model Tree Window displays the name of the parent in square brackets after the
name of each manufacturing feature. For example, the operations will list the name of
associated workcell, the NC sequences—the name of the parent operation.
439
The Add/Remove Columns dialog box in Pro/NC contains an additional
option, Machining Params, which allows you to add columns with the
manufacturing parameter values to the Model Tree Window.
2. Under the Type panel, scroll to the Machining Params filter. All the parameter names
appear in the Available panel below. Selecting one of the filters below Machining
Params (such as Names. Feeds, Cut Options) will display only the appropriate subset
of the parameter names.
3. Select a parameter name in the Available panel and move it to the Current panel by
pressing the << button. After selecting all the parameters you want to add, press the OK
button.
Process Information
3. Select the type of report you want using the option buttons in the top portion of the
dialog box:
440
Filter button. All NC sequences included in the selected operations will be output
according to the current Filter configuration for the NC sequence.
4. Use the Screen and File checkboxes to specify if you want to output information on the
screen, to a file, or both.
3. Select one of the option buttons in the top portion of the dialog box:
441
4. The system displays the applicable filters in the middle portion of the dialog box. If a
filter has a checkmark next to it, this type of information will be output. Select and clear
the checkboxes as appropriate to set up the desired Filter configuration (you can use the
Select All and Unselect All buttons to speed up the process).
2. Select the Route Sheet option button in the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
3. The system displays the route sheet in an editor window. You can edit the route sheet as
desired, then save it. The route sheet is saved in the current directory as
manufacturename.ppl.
The default route sheet consists of three sections. The first section identifies
the route sheet by supplying the design model name. You can edit the route
sheet to add the name of the author in the first section.
The third section consists of totals for removed volume, set up time, and run
time. You can edit the route sheet to account for additional set up time.
Route Sheet
A route sheet is a list of all NC sequences performed on the workpiece and
the associated setup and cutting times for a particular manufacturing
process. The route sheet can be edited within Pro/NC, as well as outside,
using the system editor.
442
4. Choose Views from the REPORT menu and enter the name of the manufacturing
assembly as a model name.
7. Define the repeat regions using the Repeat Region option in the TABLE menu.
8. Choose Enter Text option in the TABLE menu. Enter the table headings using the
Keyboard option. Use the Report Sym option to enter the report symbols in the repeat
region cells.
9. To fill in the table, choose Repeat Region from the TABLE menu, then Update Tables.
443
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.offset_reg Lists the offset registers for the
turrets.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.orient Lists the turret orientation.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.standard Lists the turret standard.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.tool_name Lists the tool names for the
turret.
&mfg.oper.ncseq.name Lists the NC sequence names.
&mfg.oper.ncseq.User Defined Lists the specified NC sequence
parameters.
&mfg.oper.ncseq.cutmtn.name Lists the cut motion names.
&mfg.oper.ncseq.cutmtn.User Defined Lists the specified cut motion
parameters.
444
Outer region Inner region
mfg.oper.name
mfg.oper.workcell.name
mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_id
mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_comment
mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_position
The resulting table may look like the one shown below.
A0010 7
445
Outer region Inner region
mfg.oper.name mfg.oper.ncseq.name
mfg.oper.ncseq.tool_id mfg.oper.ncseq.cut_feed
mfg.oper.ncseq.coolant_option
Note: To enter TOOL, FEED, and COOLANT symbols in the example above, choose
Report Sym from the ENTER CELL menu, then choose mfg, oper, ncseq, User
Defined, and type tool_id, cut_feed, or coolant_option, respectively.
Naming Conventions
About Naming Conventions
The following naming conventions are used in this optional module:
446
.drl Holemaking parameter data file
.drw Drawing file
.edm Wire EDM parameter data file
.gph User-defined feature file (including workcells)
.grv Mill grooving parameter data file
.inf Information data file
.memb Assembly member information file
.mfg Manufacturing process file
.mil Milling parameter data file
.mtn Tool motion parameter file
.ncd CL syntax alias file
.nck NC Check image file
.ncl CL data file (including pre- and post-machining
files)
.plt Plot file
.ppl Route sheet data file
.ppr PPRINT settings table file
.prt Part file
.ptd Part family table file
.sec Section file
.shd Shade display file
.sit Site parameter data file
.tph Tool path storage file
.tpm Tool parameter file
.trn Turning parameter data file
Expert Machinist
Getting Started with Expert Machinist
1. Set up the NC Model. Bring in the reference model and create stock.
2. Set up the database. It may contain such items as machine tools, cutting tools, fixture
configurations, or machining templates. This step is optional. If you do not want to set up
all your database first, you can go directly into the machining process and later define any
of the items above when you actually need them.
Þ Operation name
447
Þ Machine tool
Þ Fixture setup
Þ Operation comments
You have to define a machine tool and a Program Zero coordinate system before you can
start creating machining features. Other setup elements are optional.
4. Define the machining features for the specified operation. Machining features establish
what material needs to be removed from the stock to achieve the reference model
geometry. Each closed volume of material to be removed comprises a separate machining
feature.
Define the machining features in the order you want them machined (one exception:
create an Entry Hole feature after you have created the closed feature for which you need
it). As you define machining features, the system allocates the appropriate material to be
removed, and calculates the subsequent feature geometry based on existing machining
features.
5. Create tool paths for each machining feature. Once the features are defined, you can
machine them, that is, create the appropriate tool paths, at any time and in any order.
You can also machine the features by applying predefined machining templates. These
templates represent certain frequently used machining strategies; each strategy contains
a complete set of the machining options and values that you would normally define when
machining a feature.
6. After you have defined all the machining features and created the appropriate tool paths,
output the complete operation to a CL file and postprocess it, or output the tool path data
directly in the MCD format.
Modal Settings
Most of the machining setup elements are modal: that is, all subsequent
machining features will use this setting until you explicitly change it. Among
those are:
• Operation setup (including the machine tool and Program Zero coordinate system)
• Tool (provided the tool type is compatible with the machining feature type)
448
• Program Zero coordinate system within the machining feature (for the first machining
feature, the Program Zero coordinate system specified at the time of setting up the
operation will be implicitly used, unless you explicitly specify another one)
4. Unless you want to accept the default, type a name for the new machining process in the
Name text box.
5. Click OK.
6. The system displays the Model Tree and adds the Expert Machinist-specific menus to the
Pro/ENGINEER menu bar. Use the NC Setup menu commands to define the NC model
and the operation.
2. By default, all files are listed in the browser window. To narrow the search, choose
Manufacturing from the Type drop-down list. The browser window then lists all the
process files in the Manufacturing family of products, that is, all the objects that have the
“.mfg extension (including Cast, Mold, Sheet Metal manufacturing, and so on). If you have
various types of manufacturing processes, and want to filter out inapplicable types, select
NC Assembly from the Sub-type list. The browser window then lists all the Assembly
manufacturing models, both for the Expert Machinist and Pro/NC processes.
3. Select the name of the process to retrieve from the browser window.
The system displays the NC model and the Model Tree, and adds the Expert Machinist-
specific menus to the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar.
Note: In order to retrieve processes into the Expert Machinist application by default, set
the configuration option assy_mfg_open_mode to feature. Otherwise, the system
opens the process using the Pro/NC application (you will see the MANUFACTURE menu
instead of the Expert Machinist-specific menus and icons). To switch to the Expert
Machinist application, on the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click Applications > Expert
Machinist.
449
To Create a New NC Model
1. On the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click NC Setup > NC Model > Create Model.
2. Type the NC Model name, or press RETURN to accept the default name.
The system opens a new Pro/ENGINEER window, the NC MODEL menu with the Add
Ref Model option already selected, and the browser window listing all parts and
assemblies in the current directory.
The system retrieves the selected model and displays it in the Pro/ENGINEER window.
Þ Create Stock—Create a new part by selecting a default billet or bar and specifying
stock allowance with respect to the reference model.
The system closes the Pro/ENGINEER window used for defining the model and displays
the NC Model in the original window.
• Replace Ref Model—Replace a reference model with another member of the same
family.
• Create Stock—Create a new part by selecting a default billet or bar and specifying
stock allowance with respect to the reference model.
450
• Delete Stock—Remove a stock part from the NC model.
1. On the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click File > New (or click the Create new object
icon). The New dialog box opens.
4. Unless you want to accept the default, type a name for the new NC model in the Name
text box.
5. Click OK.
7. When finished, store the NC Model on disk by clicking the Save icon on the top toolbar.
The model is saved in a file called <modelname>.asm, where <modelname> is the name
of the NC model.
1. On the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click NC Setup > NC Model > Add Model.
2. The browser window opens listing all models of type Assembly and sub-type NC Model
present in the current directory.
The system retrieves the selected model and displays it in the Pro/ENGINEER window.
You can replace a reference model of type Part by a member of the same part
family.
451
3. INSTANCES menu opens with a list of instances (including the generic part) and two
additional options Show Table and Edit Table.
5. Regenerate.
When you replace a reference model and regenerate the stock, the tool paths
and material removal are updated according to the new model. You can now
output the NC or MCD data for machining the new reference model.
To Create Stock
As you modify the stock shape, size, allowances and so on, the system
dynamically updates the stock display.
2. Use the options in the Setup Stock area of the dialog box to specify the stock shape and
size.
3. For custom-size stocks, use the options in the Stock Size area of the dialog box to modify
the stock size, if necessary.
4. When in Envelope mode, modify the stock allowances as needed by clicking the
Allowances field in the Options area of the dialog box.
5. If you are not satisfied with the default stock placement with respect to the reference
model, click the Modify Outline field in the Options area of the dialog box. You can
452
then rotate stock about the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system, or align the axes
of the Stock Origin coordinate system to the entities of the reference model geometry.
6. As you modify the stock allowances or outline, you can use the Undo, Redo, and Undo
All buttons to cancel or repeat your changes.
7. When satisfied with the stock shape, size and location, click OK.
8. Type the name for the stock part, or press RETURN to accept the default name.
The system closes the Create Stock dialog box and displays the stock in green.
Þ Envelope—The stock size is based on the envelope of the reference model; that is,
the system generates the smallest billet-shape outline that totally encloses the
geometry of the reference model. If, at a later time, you modify the shape or size of
the reference model and switch back to Envelope mode, the system will update the
stock size based on the new reference model geometry and the stock allowance
values (as specified using the Allowance Rules option, described below).
Þ Custom—Specify the stock dimensions by typing values in the Stock Size area of
the Create Stock dialog box. You can then use the Allowance Rules option to
locate stock with respect to the reference model.
• Default Bar—Create a bar-shaped stock. The Stock Instance drop-down list contains
the following options:
Þ Envelope—The stock size is based on the envelope of the reference model; that is,
the system generates the smallest bar-shape outline that totally encloses the
geometry of the reference model, while the stock axis is coincident with the axis of
revolution of the reference model. If the reference model has no axis of revolution,
the system places the Stock Origin coordinate system at one of the vertices. Use the
Modify Outline options, if needed, to move the stock origin to a desired location.
If, at a later time, you modify the shape or size of the reference model and switch
back to Envelope mode, the system will update the stock size based on the new
453
reference model geometry and the stock allowance values (as specified using the
Allowance Rules option, described below).
Þ Custom—Specify the stock dimensions by typing values in the Stock Size area of
the Create Stock dialog box. You can then use the Allowance Rules option to
locate stock with respect to the reference model.
Þ Standard sizes, such as 10x10 or 10x20—The system lists only those standard sizes
that are large enough to completely encase the reference model. You can modify the
stock dimensions by typing values in the Stock Size area of the Create Stock
dialog box. You can also set up your own default stock sizes by modifying the
dimensions of the system-supplied stock parts. These parts are located in the
directory <loadpoint>/text/ncmdl_data, where <loadpoint> is the
Pro/ENGINEER load point directory.
• Other—Retrieve a previously created stock part (of any shape and size). For example,
you can retrieve a part that has been partially machined elsewhere, and bring it into the
current NC Model. You can also use the Open icon in the Setup Stock area of the
Create Stock dialog box to access this functionality.
The Stock Size area of the Create Stock dialog box contains the stock
dimensions. When you create stock using the Envelope option, the
dimensions are listed for information purposes; you cannot modify them. For
other types of stock, you can modify the stock dimensions by typing a value in
the appropriate text box.
Þ Length—The stock dimension along the x-axis of the Stock Origin coordinate
system.
Þ Width—The stock dimension along the y-axis of the Stock Origin coordinate system.
Þ Thickness—The stock dimension along the z-axis of the Stock Origin coordinate
system.
Þ Length—The stock dimension along the z-axis of the Stock Origin coordinate
system.
The Options area of the Create Stock dialog box contains the following
options.
• Allowances—Click this option to expand the Allowances area of the dialog box, which
lets you specify Allowance Rules and change current stock allowances.
454
• Modify Outline—Click this option to expand the Modify Outline area of the dialog box,
which lets you change the position of the stock with respect to the reference model by
rotating the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system or aligning them to the reference
part geometry.
The lower part of the Create Stock dialog box contains the following
buttons:
• Undo—Cancel the latest change to the stock. You can click this button repeatedly,
canceling a series of previous changes.
• Redo—Repeat the last canceled change to the stock. You can click this button
repeatedly, recreating the cancelled changes in the same order they were made initially.
• Undo All—Cancel all changes to the stock that you made since you opened the Create
Stock dialog box.
• OK—Complete creating or modifying stock and close the Create Stock dialog box.
• Cancel—Quit creating or modifying stock and close the Create Stock dialog box.
455
The Create Stock dialog box opens. The default options are Default Billet and
Envelope. The system creates a default billet just big enough to enclose the reference
model, as shown in the next illustration. Stock edges are displayed in green where they
coincide with the reference model edges, otherwise in cyan. The Stock Origin coordinate
system is displayed in red.
The Allowances area of the dialog box opens, with the Allowance Rules option selected
by default.
3. To add a .4 stock allowance at the top (that is, along the positive z-axis of the Stock Origin
coordinate system), type 0.4 in the plus (+) text box for Thickness.
The system dynamically updates the stock display, as shown in the next illustration.
456
4. Click OK.
5. Type the name for the stock part, or press RETURN to accept the default name.
The system closes the Create Stock dialog box and displays the NC model with the
stock in green, as shown in the next illustration.
1. Click the Allowances field in the Options area of the Create Stock dialog box.
The Allowances area of the dialog box expands. It contains the following options:
Þ Current Allowance—Show the current stock allowance values. For Custom stocks,
you can redistribute the current extra material among the stock faces, that is, shift
the stock with respect to the reference model. For Envelope stocks, the current stock
allowances are listed for information purposes only; you cannot change them. For
Default Bar stocks, the Diameter stock allowance is also listed for information
purposes only.
457
2. For Envelope stocks, select Allowance Rules and type the desired stock allowance
values in the plus (+) and minus (-) textboxes for Length, Width, and Thickness, and in
the Diameter textbox.
As you change a value, the system adds the stock allowance along the appropriate axis of
the Stock Origin coordinate system (x-axis for Length, y-axis for Width, and z-axis for
Thickness) and updates the stock display.
3. For Custom stocks, you can also specify Allowance Rules, if desired. This does not
directly affect the stock size. However, if you define Allowance Rules for a Custom stock
and later modify the Stock Size, the system will not let you decrease the stock
dimensions to violate these rules. For example, if your reference model length is 10.000
inches, and you specified both a plus (+) and minus (-) stock allowance for Length as
0.500, the system will not let you decrease the Length value in the Stock Size area of
the dialog box to less than 11.000 inches.
4. For Custom stocks, you can change current stock allowances to shift the stock with
respect to the reference model. To do this, select Current Allowance and type the desired
value in one of the textboxes, for example, in the plus (+) textbox for Length.
The system updates the value in the second textbox and shifts the stock (in this example,
along the x-axis of the Stock Origin coordinate system).
1. Click the Modify Outline field in the Options area of the Create Stock dialog box.
The Modify Outline area of the dialog box expands. It contains the following options:
Þ Rotate—Rotate stock about the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system.
Þ Align Axis—Align the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system to the entities of
the reference model geometry. If the Move to axis checkbox is selected, the Stock
Origin coordinate system will be moved to the selected reference, otherwise it is
rotated about its origin to align the direction of the coordinate system axis with the
selected reference.
2. Click Rotate, select an axis option (X, Y or Z), and move the slider below to the desired
angle. The current slider position is shown in the Value text box. You can also type the
desired rotation angle in the Value text box.
The system rotates the stock and displays the Stock Origin coordinate system in the new
orientation.
3. Click Align Axis, select an axis option (X, Y or Z), select or clear the Move to axis
checkbox, as necessary, then click the button with the Select arrow.
The GEN SEL DIR menu opens with the following commands:
458
Þ Plane—Use a plane normal to specify direction.
4. Click the command you want on the GEN SEL DIR menu and select an entity on the
reference model. Then use the Flip and Okay commands to reverse or accept the
direction (shown by a red arrow).
The system moves the stock and displays the Stock Origin coordinate system in the new
position.
Operations
To Create an Operation
You have to create an operation before you can start defining machining
features. When creating the operation, the required elements are the
machine tool name and the Program Zero coordinate system.
The Operation Setup dialog box opens. It contains the default settings for the operation
name and output parameters. To change the default name, type the new name in the
Operation Name text box.
Note: If you already have defined some operations for the current machining process,
click the New icon at the top of the dialog box to start creating a new operation.
2. Select or create a machine tool. If you have set up some machine tools prior to creating
the operation, their names appear in the NC Machine drop-down list. To create a
machine tool, click the Machine button.
3. Define the Program Zero. Click next to the Program Zero text box and select or
create a coordinate system. Once the Program Zero is defined, the name of the coordinate
system appears in the Program Zero text box, and clicking the Show button next to it
will highlight the coordinate system on the screen.
4. Use any of the other, optional, elements of operation setup, if needed. You can:
Þ Select a name of the stock material type and condition, if you have a preset Material
directory structure.
459
Þ On the From/Home Locations tab, specify datum points to serve as FROM and
HOME locations.
Þ On the Output tab, change the output parameters or type the operation comments,
to be output using PPRINT.
5. Click OK to finalize creating the operation and close the dialog box.
6. If you want to immediately create another operation, click Apply, and then click the New
icon at the top of the Operation Setup dialog box.
• NC Machine—The name of the machine tool used to perform the operation. If you have
set up some machine tools prior to creating the operation, their names appear in the NC
Machine drop-down list. To create or redefine a machine tool, click the Machine button.
In the lower portion of the Operation Setup dialog box there are three tabs:
General, From/Home Locations, and Output. They contain the following
elements:
• Defaults—Opens the Expert Machinist - Defaults dialog box, which lets you specify
the default template to be used for machining of every type of feature. You can launch
the Template Manager directly from the Expert Machinist - Defaults dialog box, to
create the templates you need. As you save new templates to disk, you can read their
names into the appropriate lists in the Expert Machinist - Defaults dialog box by
clicking the Refresh icon at the top of the dialog box. Other icons at the top of the dialog
box let you save the default settings to a file (with the .tda extension), which can be later
retrieved into a different operation; read a previously saved file into the current
operation; and reset all the default template types to Unspecified.
Notes:
Þ The name of a .tda file can not be longer than 31 characters and must all be
lowercase.
Þ Expert Machinist uses the concept of a modal tool; that is, once you specify a cutting
tool, all subsequent machining features will use this tool until you explicitly change
it. (Look in the Index for details on other modal settings in Expert Machinist.)
460
Therefore, when you use a Default template to create a Tool Path, the system does
not copy the tool information from the template; instead, it uses the modal tool.
• Program Zero—Select or create a coordinate system used for NC output and for other
machining references.
Note: You have to set up the material directory structure up front; otherwise, the only
option available in the Stock Material drop-down list is Unspecified.
• FROM Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the FROM location. Once set,
the name of the datum point appears in the text box. Clicking Show highlights the
datum point on the screen. Clicking Remove cancels the FROM setting.
• HOME Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the HOME location. Once set,
the name of the datum point appears in the text box. Clicking Show highlights the
datum point on the screen. Clicking Remove cancels the HOME setting.
• Part Name—The part name, output with the PARTNO command, as well as using
PPRINT. You can type any name. Clicking Reset sets it back to the system default.
• NCL File Name—The default name for the operation cutter location (CL) data file. You
can type any name. Clicking Reset sets it back to the system default.
• Comments—Type the operation comments in the text box below. These comments can
be output using PPRINT.
1. To define Program Zero at the operation level, click Program Zero in the Operation
Setup dialog box.
To define Program Zero at the feature level, click Program Zero in the appropriate
machining feature dialog box (for example, Pocket Feature).
461
2. The MACH CSYS or the SEQ CSYS menu, respectively, appears with the following
commands:
Þ Create—Select which model the coordinate system will belong to, then create the
coordinate system.
Þ Use Prev—Lets you select a coordinate system used for an earlier operation or
machining feature.
3. Click Done.
If you click Show, the operation Program Zero is highlighted in red; if you specify a
different Program Zero at the feature level, it is highlighted in magenta.
• Operation Program Zero—Specified at the time of operation setup; acts as the default
origin for the NC output. All machining features created within a certain operation will
use the same operation Program Zero.
If you do not explicitly define a feature Program Zero, the system will
implicitly use the operation Program Zero to define the orientation of the
stock on the machine and generate tool path. However, the Program Zero
setting is modal, that is, once you specify a separate Program Zero for a
feature, it will stay for all subsequent features until you change it.
If the operation and feature Program Zeroes are different, then, upon
creating the tool path for a feature, all the cutter location (CL) data will be
transformed and output in the coordinates of the operation Program Zero
coordinate system. If the z-axes of the two coordinate systems are not
parallel, the tool orientation vector (i,j,k) or table rotation will be provided.
This functionality allows you to postprocess 3-axis operations to be performed
on the 5-axis machines.
Note: You can specify that the linear and rotational transitions between the
two Program Zero coordinate systems be output in the CL file, instead of
transforming all CL coordinates, by using the Multiple Axis Output options
in the Machine Setup dialog box.
462
Z-axis Orientation
The Program Zero coordinate system at the feature level should be oriented
so that the positive z-axis points away from the holding fixtures of the
machine. For example, on a vertical milling machine, the positive z-axis
points up, away from the table surface. The following illustration shows the
z-axis orientation for milling.
Machine Tools
1. Click NC Setup > Machine Tool Manager. Another way to access this functionality is
to click the Machine button in the Operation Setup dialog box.
The Machine Tool Settings dialog box opens. It contains the default settings for the
machine name, type, and parameters. You can click OK or Apply at this point to create a
machine tool with default name and parameters, and no cutting tools associated with it.
Note: If you already have defined some machine tools for the current machining process,
click the New icon at the top of the dialog box to start creating a new machine tool.
2. To change the machine name, type the new name in the Machine Name text box.
3. To change the number of axes, use the Number of Axes drop-down list.
4. To change the parameters, use the tabs located in the lower portion of the dialog box.
5. To set up the cutting tools for the machine, click the Cutting Tool Setup button located
on the Cutting Tools tab. You can also set up the tools later by clicking NC Setup >
Cutting Tool Manager.
6. Click OK to finalize the machine tool creation and close the dialog box.
7. If you want to immediately create another machine tool, click Apply, and then click the
New or the Open icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box.
463
You can save the current machine tool, along with its parameters, by clicking the Save
icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box. You can then use the Open
icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box to create a new machine tool
with the same parameters, whether in this or in another NC process.
• Machine Name—The machine name identifies the machine tool within the
manufacturing process. The default machine names have the format MACH01, MACH02,
where the number gets automatically incremented by the system. You can type any
name.
When you save the machine tool data on disk, the system uses the Machine Name as a
filename (with the .cel extension).
The tabs on the Machine Tool Settings dialog box enable you to specify the
following parameters of a machine tool.
• PP Name—The name of the default postprocessor associated with the machine. Type the
name in the text box. The Reset button lets you change the name back to the system
default.
PPRINT—Opens the PPRINT menu to let you set up your PPRINT options.
• FROM—Specifies how the FROM statement will be output to an operation CL data file:
464
the tool path for the first machining feature. All other tool paths are added to the
operation without a FROM statement.
Þ At Every Tool Path—FROM statements are output at the beginning of each tool
path for a machining feature. For the first tool path, this FROM statement
corresponds to the location of the operation From point, if specified, or to the first
location on the tool path for this machining feature.
• LOADTL—Controls the output of the LOADTL command in the operation CL data file:
Þ Not Modal—Outputs the LOADTL statement at the beginning of each feature tool
path, regardless of whether the tool is the same or changed.
Þ Output (default)—The SPINDL /OFF statement is output at the end of each feature
tool path.
Þ Do Not Output—SPINDL /OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
These options become accessible when you set Number of Axes to 4 Axis.
• Use Rotate Output—If this option is not selected (default), all CL data is transformed
and output in the coordinates of the Program Zero coordinate system. When you select
this option, the system outputs the applicable TRANS and ROTABL commands to specify
linear and rotational transformations. Only select this option when indexing to a new
table position is desired.
• Rotation Direction—Available only when Use Rotate Output is selected. Allows you
to specify that rotation is performed in a particular direction (this may occur when there
is an obstruction in one rotation direction but not another). The values are:
465
Þ CLW—Always rotate in the clockwise direction.
Cutter Compensation
When you expand this field, the Output cutter position options become
available:
• Tool Center—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the tool center.
• Tool Edge—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the cutting edge of the
tool. If you select this option, type the desired value in the Safe Radius text box. This
value represents the smallest concave corner radius that can be safely machined, and
must be slightly bigger than the radius (Cutter Diameter/2) of the biggest tool on the
machine. The Adjust Corner drop-down list gives you a choice of corner condition
options for convex corners:
Þ Straight—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straight
segments extended until they intersect.
Þ Fillet—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straight
segments connected with an arc.
Þ Automatic—The system adds a fillet corner condition at all the convex corners on
the outside contour of the part, and a loop corner condition at all the convex corners
on the inside contour of the part.
• Maximum Speed—Maximum allowable spindle speed for the machine tool (optional).
Type the maximum speed value in RPM (revolutions per minute).
• Feed Units—Select the rapid feed rate units from the Rapid Traverse drop-down list.
The values are:
466
• Feed Limits—Type the value of the feed rate used for rapid traverse in the Rapid Feed
Rate text box (optional).
• Tool Change Time—Time needed for changing a tool, in seconds (optional). Type the
value in the text box, or use the UP and DOWN arrows next to the text box to increase or
decrease the value, respectively.
• The Cutting Tool Setup button opens the Tool Setup dialog box to let you set up the
cutting tools associated with the machine tool.
Lets you specify the travel limits for the machine tool: X-Axis Travel, Y-
Axis Travel, and Z-Axis Travel. Specifying these values is optional. Values
for the travel limits along the axes should be the actual dimensions that
indicate the extent of the machine tool workspace relative to the Program
Zero coordinate system. For example, if a machine tool is 60 inches wide, and
the origin of the Program Zero coordinate system is located halfway between
the ends, specify the travel limits for X-Axis Travel as follows: type -30 in
the left text box and 30 in the text box on the right.
If you display or otherwise output the CL data for a machining feature that
exceeds the limitations of the machine tool where it is defined, the
Information Window will appear, listing the values of the limits that have
been exceeded and their corresponding actual values.
Type the comments associated with the machine tool in the text box
(optional).
467
Þ Save—Save the current PPRINT table for later use. You will be prompted for the
name of the file. The file will have an extension “.ppr and will be stored in the
current working directory.
2. If the table has not been set up, the Modify option will be grayed out. Choose Create. If
you have previously set up a PPRINT table, you can either change your former settings
using the Modify option, or start with a clean table using Create.
The system displays the Activate PPRINT dialog box. It contains all the items that can
be output through PPRINT. Whether an item will be output or not is determined by the
flag value. The default flag value for all items is “NO. Change it to “YES if you want the
item to be output.
3. To change the flag value, highlight the item or items in the PPRINT table by clicking on
them once, then click on the appropriate action button (Yes or No), located in the lower-
left portion of the dialog box. To unselect an item, click on it once more. You can also use
the Select All and Unselect All icons located in the lower-right portion of the dialog box.
4. To supply comments for an item, highlight it and type the comment in the Comments
text box. When you highlight an item with an existing comment, the comment is
displayed in the Comments text box. While editing a comment, you can revert to the
previous value by clicking the drop-down arrow next to the Comments text box.
Whenever you output CL data to file, the system will check the PPRINT
table. If any flag is set to “YES and the appropriate information is available,
the corresponding PPRINT command will be output to the CL file.
• PART_NAME
• DATE_TIME
• SCALE
• TRANSLATE
468
• ROTATE
• OPERATION_NAME
• OPERATION_COMMENTS
• LAYER_NAME
• UDF_NAME
• TOOL_TABLE
• ONLY_OUTPUT_USED_TOOLS
• FEATURE_ID
• CUTCOM_REGISTER
• SPINDLE_SPEED
• CUT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• ARC_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• FREE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• RETRACT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• PLUNGE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• SCAN_TYPE
• RETRACT_HEIGHT
• NUMBER_OF_SLICES
The following items are output once per LOADTL or TURRET statement:
• TOOL_NAME
• TOOL_POSITION_NUMBER
469
• TOOL_COMMENTS
• TOOL_PARAMETERS
• TOOL_OFFSET_NUMBER
• CHAMFER_LENGTH
• CORNER_RADIUS
• CSINK_ANGLE
• CUTTER_DIAM
• DRILL_DIAMETER
• DRILL_LENGTH
• END_ANGLE
• END_OFFSET
• GAUGE_Z_LENGTH
• GAUGE_X_LENGTH
• HOLDER_TYPE
• INSERT_LENGTH
• LENGTH
• LENGTH_UNITS
• NOSE_RADIUS
• NUM_OF_TEETH
• POINT_ANGLE
• SHANK_DIAMETER
• SIDE_ANGLE
• SIDE_WIDTH
• TOOL_MATERIAL
• TOOL_ORIENTATION
• TOOL_TYPE
470
Cutting Tools
• On the top menu bar, click NC Setup > Cutting Tool Manager (this option becomes
available after you set up an operation and a machine tool).
• On the Cutting Tools tab of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box, click Cutting
Tool Setup.
• At the time of machining a feature, click next to the Cutting Tool text box in the
feature-specific machining dialog box (for example, Pocket Milling).
Either of these actions opens the Tool Setup dialog box, with its name
preceded by the name of the current machine tool. From the Tool Setup
dialog box, you can create, modify, and delete tools, as well as review the
tools already defined for the current machine.
The upper portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains the Tool Table for
the current machine. The Tool Table defines the correspondence between a
descriptive tool name (Name) and its location on the machine, that is, its
pocket number (Number). You can optionally supply a value for the gauge
length register (Offset) and comments output for the tool (Comments). Each
machine tool has its own Tool Table.
When you select a Tool Table entry in the upper portion of the Tool Setup
dialog box, the system updates the middle and lower portions to display this
tool’s parameters and section sketch.
471
The middle portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains the Tool Preview
window, with the current tool section sketch, and the text boxes for defining
the following tool elements:
• Name—A descriptive tool name (for example, BALL125), which uniquely identifies the
tool with a certain set of parameter values. The tool name is used throughout Expert
Machinist to identify the tool. You can store the tool’s parameters in a text file and then
retrieve it to use in a different manufacturing process. The tool Name serves as the
name for this parameter file, therefore, all the operating system’s restrictions for file
names apply to Name (for example, it cannot contain spaces or periods). The name must
be less than thirty-two alphanumeric characters long.
Note: The tool name can not contain hyphens (-). Underscores (_), however, can be used.
• Type—Select one of the predefined tool types available in Expert Machinist. Tool types
correspond to the type of the machine tool and of the machining feature (for example, you
will need a milling tool to mill a Pocket; to machine a Hole Group feature, you can use
both milling and drilling tools). The tool type, in turn, defines the tool’s cross section and,
therefore, the set of parameters you have to specify for the tool.
• Units—Length units of the tool. The default length units of a tool are those of the stock.
If you change the Units, this will affect the actual tool dimensions.
The lower portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains three tabs:
Geometry, Settings, and Speeds & Feeds.
The Geometry tab contains the text boxes for defining the Geometry
parameters, that is, parameters that specify all the dimensions of the tool.
These dimension values are used in calculating the tool path and material
removed, and should accurately reflect the actual tool dimensions and length
units. Some of the parameters are required for defining the tool's cross
section, others are optional. The actual parameter names in this category
depend on the tool Type.
The Settings tab contains the text boxes for defining some of the tool table
elements and various optional parameters that define tool properties other
than geometry:
• Tool Number—Corresponds to the Number field of the Tool Table, which defines the
tool's pocket number.
• Offset Number—Corresponds to the Offset field of the Tool Table, which supplies a
value for the gauge length register.
• Comments—A text string that will be stored along with the tool parameters and output
with the tool table using PPRINT. If you want the tool table to show this comment, click
Edit > Table Comments in the top menu bar of the Tool Setup dialog box, and select
the Use TOOL_COMMENT parameter option. If you want the tool table to show a
472
comment different than the tool Comments parameter string, click Edit > Table
Comments, select New Comment, and type in a new comment string.
The Speeds & Feeds tab lets you supply cutting data (feed, speed, axial and
radial depths) for roughing and finishing with this tool, based on the stock
material type and condition.
Expert Machinist stores all the cutting tool data in a Tooling directory, which
is specified by using the pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option. For
example, you can set this configuration option as follows:
pro_mf_tprm_dir /home/users/toolcrib
Expert Machinist will then place all the tool parameter files (.tpm files) in
the /home/users/toolcrib directory.
When you later define an operation or a cutting tool, the system will list the
available material subdirectories for you to choose from.
When you save the cutting tool data, the system will store the tool geometry
parameters in a .tpm file in the Tooling directory, and create a .tpm file with
the same name, containing the feeds and speeds data, in the appropriate
material subdirectory. This feeds and speeds data can be used to initialize the
values in the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
pro_mf_tprm_dir /home/users/toolcrib
473
2. In the toolcrib directory, create a subdirectory and name it materials.
3. In the materials directory, create subdirectories for all your materials and conditions.
For example, create three subdirectories: steel20, steel40, and aluminum.
Your Material directory structure is now complete. Now, when you start
Expert Machinist, you will have your three material subdirectories listed
when you set up an operation (for stock material), and when you set up the
cutting tools. If, for example, you specified your stock material as steel20,
and then created a mill tool with the Name ball25, your directory structure
will look as follows:
-home
--users
---toolcrib
----ball25.tpm (the file containing tool geometry parameters)
----materials
-----aluminum
-----steel20
------ball25.tpm (the file containing tool feeds and speeds)
-----steel40
2. The system fills in the fields in the dialog box with the default values:
Þ Type is the first one in the list of the currently applicable tool types.
Þ Parameters that appear on the Geometry tab are defined by the tool Type.
Required parameter fields contain a system-supplied default value, optional
parameters have a default value of dash (-).
Þ On the Settings tab: Tool Number is incremented by 1 with respect to the last one
currently in the Tool Table; Offset Number is blank; other, optional, parameters
have a default value of dash (-).
Þ On the Speeds & Feeds tab, the Stock Material value is that of the stock material
specified in the Operation Setup dialog box; the cutting data fields are empty.
3. If you want to set up a tool of a different type, click on the arrow next to the Type
parameter and select the appropriate value. The system displays the parameter names
and default values for the new tool type.
4. Modify the parameter values, if desired. The Revert button restores the initial values.
474
5. Click Preview to display the tool section based on the current parameter values. The
Tool Window button opens a separate, bigger, window with the tool section.
8. To save the tool parameters and cutting data, click File > Save tool.
1. Go to the Speeds & Feeds tab of the Tool Setup dialog box.
2. Select stock material. The Stock Material drop-down list corresponds to your Material
directory structure. The value displayed by default is that of the stock material specified
in the Operation Setup dialog box.
3. You can supply separate data for Rough and Finish cutting. Select an Application:
Roughing or Finishing.
4. Type the desired values in the text boxes for Speed, Feed, Axial Depth, and Radial
Depth. The drop-down list on the right of each text box lets you change the units, as
needed. You can also switch between the English and metric unit systems by selecting the
appropriate option in the Properties group; this will change the options available in the
units' drop-down lists.
6. Save the tool. The system stores the cutting data in the appropriate Material
subdirectory, in the <name>.tpm file, where <name> is the tool Name.
7. If you want to use the tool to cut a different material, repeat Steps 2 through 6.
The system uses the cutting data supplied for the tool when initializing the
values in the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
2. The system displays the browser window, which lists all the files with the .tpm extension
in the directory defined by the pro_mf_tprm_directory configuration option. If the
pro_mf_tprm_directory configuration option is not set, the search starts in your
current working directory.
3. Select a file name from the browser window and click Open.
4. The system searches the Tool Table for the Name of the tool being retrieved:
475
Þ If not found, the system appends the tool at the end of the Tool Table. Number
(pocket number) is incremented by 1 with respect to the last one currently in the
Tool Table. The Offset field is left blank.
Þ If the system finds a tool in the current Tool Table that has the same name and the
same parameters as the one being retrieved, it highlights the appropriate Tool Table
entry and displays its parameter values and section sketch.
Þ If the name belongs to a tool that already exists in the current Tool Table but has a
different set of parameters, the system issues a warning and queries you if you want
to overwrite an existing tool. If you confirm, it highlights the appropriate Tool Table
entry and displays the tool’s new parameter values and section sketch.
At the same time, the system looks for a .tpm file with the same name in the Materials
subdirectory corresponding to the stock material (as specified in the Operation Setup
dialog box). If found, it retrieves the cutting data stored in this file into the appropriate
Speeds & Feeds tab fields.
Note: When you retrieve a tool parameters’ file, its type must correspond to the Type
value in the Tool Setup dialog box; otherwise, the system will issue an error message
and the tool will not be retrieved.
1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click Edit > Sketch.
2. The system increments the pocket Number by 1 with respect to the last one currently in
the Tool Table and generates a default Name for the tool. The Offset field is left blank.
4. Click Sketcher.
5. The system starts the Sketcher user interface and opens a new window. Sketch the tool
section.
2. The system updates the lower portion of the Tool Setup dialog box to display this tool’s
parameters and section sketch.
4. Click Preview to display the tool’s section based on the new parameter values.
476
To Delete a Tool
1. Highlight the appropriate entry in the Tool Table.
2. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click Edit > Delete.
2. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Save tool.
3. The system saves the tool parameters in a text file called <name>.tpm, where <name> is
the tool Name, in the directory defined by the pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option. If
you have supplied the cutting data, that is, the speeds and feeds for the tool, this data is
stored in a <name>.tpm file in the appropriate Materials subdirectory.
2. Create a coordinate system to represent the tool origin, that is, the tool control point. This
is the point that will follow the tool path computed for machining a feature. Make sure
the z-axis of the coordinate system is pointing in the upward direction (into the tool).
Change the coordinate system’s name to “TIP (use Set Up, Name).
3. Establish associativity between the model’s dimensions and tool’s parameters. There are
two ways to do this:
Þ Add parameters to the model with the names exactly corresponding to the tool
parameter names. This method is convenient when you want to define the tool
parameters directly in the tool assembly (for example, Cutter_Diam for an insert
drill, not for a drill bit).
Notes:
• In some cases, parameter names do not exactly match the labels in the Tool Setup
dialog box. For example, spaces are generally replaced with underscores. Sometimes, the
477
parameter name is truncated. To find out the exact parameter name, look in a .tpm file
for the appropriate type of tool.
• Parameter names are case-insensitive. For example, when modifying a dimension symbol
or adding a model parameter for Cutter Diameter, you can use Cutter_Diam,
cutter_diam, or CUTTER_DIAM; the system will recognize either of these strings as a
tool parameter name.
• If an assembly is to be used as a tool model, you can modify dimension symbols or add
parameters to any of the component parts as well as to the assembly itself.
However, you can enhance the CL data display and interactively check for
interference by showing a “real tool. In order to do this, design your tool as a
regular Pro/ENGINEER model (part or assembly), and then establish
associativity between this model’s dimensions and the tool parameters. When
such a tool is used, you will see the real tool model instead of the default tool
simulation. This is also another way to create your tool library.
Standard Library
If you have a Pro/LIBRARY license, you can also use the standard tool library
of solid tools. It contains common tools (mills, taps, and drills) of sizes
corresponding to ANSI standards. For more information, refer to the
TOOLING LIBRARY Catalog.
1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Open Tool Library.
478
Þ By Copy—The tool information will be copied into the manufacturing process. The
tool parameters for a machine tool can be modified using the Tool Setup dialog box;
the library model will not be changed. If the library model is later modified, it will
not affect this manufacturing process. If some of the parameters are missing in the
tool model, the system will prompt you for the missing values.
4. The system reads in the tool parameters from the model (the model name is used as the
tool Name).
If, after all components are searched, some of the tool parameters are
missing, an error message will appear and you will be asked to select another
tool (if using the tool By Reference) or to supply the missing values (if using
the tool By Copy).
Machining Features
Define the machining features in the order you want them machined (one
exception: create an Entry Hole feature after you have created the closed
feature that you need it for). Use the proper machining feature type
depending on the shape of the volume, and on the combination of Hard and
Soft Walls bounding this volume. Hard Walls are surfaces of the reference
model; Soft Walls are surfaces of the stock. The bottom surface of the volume
is called the feature Floor; again, it is called a Hard Floor if this is a surface
of the reference model and a Soft Floor if this is a surface of the stock.
• Face—An open volume with a Hard Floor, completely surrounded by Soft Walls.
• Slab—An open volume with a Hard Floor, surrounded by Soft Walls. Unlike the Face
feature, the Slab may contain islands (bosses) on its Floor, or partial Hard Walls.
479
• Pocket—A closed volume with a Hard Floor, completely surrounded by Hard Walls. The
Floor may contain protruding bosses (islands).
• Through Pocket—A closed volume with a Soft Floor, completely surrounded by Hard
Walls.
• Step—An open volume with a Hard Floor, surrounded by one continuous chain of Hard
Walls and one continuous chain of Soft Walls. The Floor may contain protruding bosses
(islands).
• Profile—An open volume with a Soft Floor, surrounded by one continuous chain of Hard
Walls and one continuous chain of Soft Walls.
• Channel—An open volume with a Hard Floor, surrounded by alternating chains of Hard
and Soft Walls.
• Slot—An elongated volume with a Hard Floor, completely surrounded by Hard Walls,
with full radii on two opposite ends.
• Through Slot—An elongated volume with a Soft Floor, which can be either completely
surrounded by Hard Walls, or have one chain of Soft Walls.
• Boss Top—Material left on top of a boss, for example, located inside a Pocket or Step
feature.
• Flange—An open volume with a Hard Floor, surrounded by Soft Walls, and containing a
single large boss or void in the middle, so that only a relatively thin flange is being
machined.
• O-Ring—A special case of a Slot feature, which has a Hard Floor and two chains of Hard
Walls at a constant offset from each other (that is, a cross section of this feature is
constant throughout). The hard walls can be of any shape as long as they meet these
requirements. In other words, this feature is a continuous closed groove or slot.
• Entry Hole—A hole predrilled before machining a closed volume (such as a Pocket,
Through Pocket, or Slot), to be used for the tool entry.
Once the features are defined, you can machine them, that is, create the
appropriate tool paths, at any time and in any order.
The machining feature dialog box (for example, Pocket Feature) opens.
2. Define the elements of the machining feature dialog box, as needed. Usually, you are
required to select the Floor surfaces; other elements are optional.
480
3. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit. The Preview button lets you check the
feature geometry by highlighting the Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
1. In the machining feature dialog box (for example, Pocket Feature), click .
The system reorients the model so that the XY-plane of the Program Zero coordinate
system is parallel to the screen. All the walls become Sketcher entities; they are
displayed in cyan.
2. Use the SKETCHER menu options to delete some entities or sketch new ones.
3. If the Intent Manager option is not selected, click Regenerate once the sketch is
completed.
5. Click Preview to display the feature. All the Sketcher entities that you created while
adjusting feature boundaries become the feature Walls. If you use edges of the reference
model, or sketch, these entities become Hard Walls. If you use edges of the stock, these
entities become Soft Walls. Use the Adjust Soft Walls option to change the type of Walls,
if needed.
1. Select the bottom of the slot as the Floor surface. The system creates a Slot feature as
shown in the following illustration.
481
Select this surface.
2. Click to adjust feature boundaries. The system reorients the model and displays the
Sketcher grid. All the feature walls become Sketcher entities; they are displayed in cyan,
with vertices highlighted in yellow. Delete the entities corresponding to the walls of the
thin slot, as shown below.
482
3. Sketch two Tangent End arcs to close the contour, as shown below.
The system creates a Slot feature as shown in the next illustration. The Hard Walls are
highlighted in red.
483
To machine the thin slot, create two more Slot features, each with one Soft
Wall:
1. Create the second Slot feature. Select the same surface (the bottom of the slot) as the
Floor surface. The system creates the Slot feature consisting of two contours left after the
first Slot, each with a Soft Wall, as shown in the next illustration.
2. Click to adjust feature boundaries, and delete the entities corresponding to one of
the contours.
The system creates a Slot feature as shown in the next illustration. The Hard Walls are
highlighted in red, the Soft Wall in cyan.
484
3. Create the third Slot feature. Select the same surface (the bottom of the slot) as the Floor
surface. The system creates the Slot feature, with a Soft Wall, containing the material
left after creating the first two Slot features.
1. In the machining feature dialog box (for example, Pocket Feature), click next to the
Adjust Soft Walls element.
The system highlights all the feature walls, both Hard and Soft, in magenta.
Þ Show—Highlight the Soft Walls in cyan. Hard Walls stay highlighted in magenta.
1. In the machining feature dialog box (for example, Profile Feature), click next to the
Adjust Feature Depth element.
The system opens the WND DEPTH menu, with the Define option selected
automatically, and the WIND DEPTH menu.
Þ Z Depth—Type a value along the z-axis of the Sequence Program Zero coordinate
system.
3. Once you have adjusted the feature depth, you can use the following options on the WND
DEPTH menu:
485
To Machine a Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the appropriate machining dialog box, corresponding to the feature
type.
3. Specify the cutting tool, define the machining method and options, and type the values in
the machining dialog box, as needed. For more information on machining a feature of
specific type, get help for the machining dialog box corresponding to the feature type.
Every machining dialog box contains a Tool Path Properties button. It opens the Tool
Path Properties dialog box, where you can specify feeds and speeds, as well as general
machining, entry/exit, and cut control options.
4. Click Play Path at the bottom of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Once you have completely defined the tool path for the feature, you can save this
machining strategy as a template, and then apply the template to other features of the
same type.
To save the current machining strategy as a template, click next to the Tool Path
Name text box, then type the template name in the New Name text box of the Save As
dialog box and click OK.
Note: When you save a machining strategy as a template, it is automatically saved with
the Prompt for a tool option; that is, the template contains no cutting tool information
and the system prompts you to select or define the cutting tool at the time you apply the
template. If you want to modify the template to always use a specific tool, open the
template in Template Manager and change it there.
6. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar type feature, click Next. This will finalize the creation of the
current tool path (equivalent to clicking OK), and then prompt you to select a feature to
be machined using the current settings, similar to the Mimic Toolpath functionality.
1. In a feature machining dialog box (for example, Pocket Milling), click Tool Path
Properties.
486
The Tool Path Properties dialog box opens. It contains five tabs: Machine Options,
Feed Rates, Clearance, Entry/Exit, and Cut Control. Each tab lists the options and
values that define your machining strategy. Initially, the Tool Path Properties dialog
box contains either the default system values, or, if you are placing a machining template
or mimicking a Tool Path, the values from the template or the original Tool Path,
respectively.
2. On the appropriate tabs of the Tool Path Properties dialog box, select the desired
options and type values, as needed.
On the Feed Rates tab, each feed rate has two fields: the first one lists the available
methods of specifying this feed rate, the second one is a text box with the actual value:
Þ RAPID—The system will output the RAPID command for these moves. The
corresponding Feed Rate text box is then empty and grayed out.
Þ Enter—Type the desired value in the corresponding Feed Rate text box.
Þ From Tool—The system retrieves the cutting data stored with the tool. This option
is available only if the tool contains associated cutting data. The corresponding Feed
Rate text box lists the retrieved value and is grayed out.
The Speed setting on the Machine Options tab and the Depth of Cut and Stepover
settings on the Cut Control tab also have a From Tool option, which utilizes the
cutting data stored with the tool.
3. When you have changed all the necessary settings, click OK.
The system closes the Tool Path Properties dialog box and brings you back to the
feature machining dialog box, where you can verify you selections by clicking Play Path.
Use the Mimic Toolpath functionality when you have an existing tool path
and want to use the same settings on a similar type feature.
1. On the top menu bar, click NC Create > Tool Paths > Mimic a Toolpath.
2. Select the Tool Path feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. Click OK.
3. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box (only features of the same type
as the one machined by the selected tool path are listed). As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the appropriate machining dialog box, with all the settings in this
dialog (except the cutting tool name) copied from the original Tool Path feature.
Note: Expert Machinist uses the concept of a modal tool; that is, once you specify a
cutting tool, all subsequent machining features will use this tool until you explicitly
487
change it. (Look in the Index for details on other modal settings in Expert Machinist.)
Therefore, when you mimic a tool path, the system does not copy the tool information
from the Tool Path feature that you mimic; instead, it uses the modal tool.
4. Change the cutting tool and the selected options, and modify the parameters, if needed.
5. Click Play Path at the bottom of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
6. Click OK to complete machining the feature. Once the new tool path is created, it is
completely independent from the original tool path.
Face Features
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Face.
The Face Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Face1 (the system increments
the number for the next Face feature). You can type a customized name.
Þ Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature (that is, the top
surface of the reference model).
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
2. Select the Floor surface. On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Change Program Zero, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the Soft
Walls in cyan.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
488
The system opens the Face Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box contains
three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as FACE1_TP1 (the
system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name). The
system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized name.
You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name text
box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Face Milling dialog box contains the options for defining the
Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom of
the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Machining Mode
• Rough—Face down the stock and leave stock according to the Rough to value.
489
• Finish—Finish mill the reference model surface(s). When you select this option, you can
use the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth
increments.
Cut Motion
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the tool
returns to the opposite side, to start the next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Face feature, moving back and
forth. At the end of a pass, it retracts and moves to the beginning of the next pass, unless
the Reverse Multiple Passes option is selected.
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of the
Program Zero coordinate system for One Direction and Back and Forth
cut motion types. The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel to
the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cut
direction, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connections
between the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material for
each cut.
• Clear Part on Last Cut—If Stay in Cut is selected, this option will make the tool clear
the part on the final cut of each pass.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cutting
motions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of the
next cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool Path
Properties dialog box).
490
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Face Milling dialog box contains the following
options:
• Reverse Multiple Passes—If Back and Forth is selected, this option will reverse the
Cut Angle on successive passes. Use this option to perform continuous back and forth
machining between passes.
• Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in a register
on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text box to the right. If
you use this option, NC output will contain the SET/OFSETL statements.
Slab Features
491
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Slab.
The Slab Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Slab1 (the system increments
the number for the next Slab feature). You can type a customized name.
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
492
The system creates a Slab feature as shown in the next illustration. The
walls of the two islands on the top face are Hard Walls; they are highlighted
in red. The outer boundaries of the stock are Soft Walls; they are highlighted
in cyan.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Slab Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box contains
three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as SLAB1_TP1 (the
system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name). The
system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized name.
You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name text
box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
493
The middle portion of the Slab Milling dialog box contains the options for defining the
Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom of
the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Roughing
Rough Slab—Remove the material inside the Slab feature using rough
milling and leaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stock
values:
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can use
the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth
increments.
• Back Off Walls—When you do rough milling and finish floors within the same tool path,
you can keep the tool off the walls by a specified additional distance while the Floor is
being finished. You can then finish the walls later. This option becomes available when
both the Rough Slab and Finish Floors options are selected and the Finish Walls
option is cleared. When you select this option, type the back-off distance in the text box to
the right.
494
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass, the
tool returns to the opposite side, to start the next pass in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Step feature, moving back and
forth. At the end of a pass, it retracts and moves to the beginning of the next pass, unless
the Reverse Multiple Passes option is selected.
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of the
Program Zero coordinate system. The default is 0, which means that the tool
cuts parallel to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change
the cut direction, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the Hard Walls after the rough cut and before the
finish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the value for the
minimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock text box to
the right.
Connect Motions
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connections
between the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material for
each cut.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cutting
motions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
495
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of the
next cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool Path
Properties dialog box).
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Slab Milling dialog box contains the following
options:
• Reverse Multiple Passes—If Back and Forth is selected, this option will reverse the
Cut Angle on successive passes. Use this option to perform continuous back and forth
machining between passes.
• Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in a register
on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text box to the right. If
you use this option, NC output will contain the SET/OFSETL statements.
Pocket Features
To Create a Pocket Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Pocket.
The Pocket Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Pocket1 (the system increments
the number for the next Pocket feature). You can type a customized name.
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
496
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Pocket Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box
contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as POCKET1_TP1
(the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name).
The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized
name. You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name
text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Pocket Milling dialog box contains the options for defining
the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom
of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
497
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Roughing
Rough Pocket—Remove material inside the pocket using rough milling and
leaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stock values:
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor of the pocket. When you select this option, you can
use the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth
increments.
• Back Off Walls—When you do rough pocket milling and finish floors within the same
tool path, you can keep the tool off the walls by a specified additional distance while the
Floor is being finished. You can then finish the walls later. This option becomes available
when both the Rough Pocket and Finish Floors options are selected and the Finish
Walls option is cleared. When you select this option, type the back-off distance in the text
box to the right.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the walls of the pocket. When you select this option, you can
use the Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth
increments.
• Corners Only—Clean up the corners with a smaller tool after removing material from
the pocket with a large tool.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define the way the tool scans the horizontal cross-sections of
the pocket:
498
• One Direction—Cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the tool retracts and
returns to the opposite side of the pocket, to start the next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—Continuously machines the pocket, moving back and forth.
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of the
Program Zero coordinate system for One Direction and Back and Forth
cut motion types. The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel to
the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cut
direction, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the walls of the pocket after the rough cut and
before the finish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the value
for the minimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock text
box to the right.
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the pocket:
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate
system. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Properties
button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Helix—The tool enters along a helical path. You can customize the helical entry by
clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool
Path Properties dialog box. Type the new values for the Helix Angle and the Radius
of the helix (the default for which is calculated by the system based on the size of the
part).
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you must
first create and machine an Entry Hole feature for this pocket.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Pocket Milling dialog box contains the following
option:
499
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in
a register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text
box to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain the
SET/OFSETL statements.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Thru Pocket.
The Through Pocket Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Thru Pocket1 (the system
increments the number for the next Through Pocket feature). You can type a
customized name.
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
Þ Adjust Feature Depth—Adjust the Floor depth of feature (by default, a Through
Pocket extends all the way through the stock). To specify a different Floor depth,
select a surface, a datum plane, or type a value along the z-axis of the feature-level
Program Zero coordinate system.
2. Select the walls of the pocket. Use the following commands on the SURF/LOOP menu:
500
5. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
2
1
The resulting Through Pocket feature is shown in the next illustration (Hard
Walls are shown in red):
501
To Machine a Through Pocket Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Through Pocket Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog
box contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as THRU
POCKET1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the
tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type
a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under the
Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Through Pocket Milling dialog box contains the options for
defining the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At
the bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
502
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Wall Machining
• Rough—Remove material inside the pocket using rough milling and leaving stock on the
walls of the pocket according to the Rough to value.
• Finish—Finish mill the walls of the pocket. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define the way the tool scans the horizontal cross-sections of
the pocket:
• One Direction—Cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass, the tool
retracts and returns to the opposite side if the pocket, to start the next pass in the same
direction.
• Back and Forth—Continuously machines the pocket, moving back and forth.
503
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of the
Program Zero coordinate system for One Direction and Back and Forth
cut motion types. The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel to
the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cut
direction, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the walls of the pocket after the rough cut and
before the finish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the value
for the minimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock text
box to the right.
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the pocket:
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate
system. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Properties
button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Helix—The tool enters along a helical path. You can customize the helical entry by
clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool
Path Properties dialog box. Type the new values for the Helix Angle and the Radius
of the helix (the default for which is calculated by the system based on the size of the
part).
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you must
first create and machine an Entry Hole feature for this pocket.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Through Pocket Milling dialog box contains the
following option:
504
Step Features
To Create a Step Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Step.
The Step Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Step1 (the system increments
the number for the next Step feature). You can type a customized name.
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
505
The system opens the Step Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box contains
three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as STEP1_TP1 (the
system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name). The
system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized name.
You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name text
box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Step Milling dialog box contains the options for defining the
Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom of
the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Roughing
Rough Step—Remove the material inside the Step feature using rough
milling and leaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stock
values:
506
• Floor Stock—Stock to be left on the Floor surfaces.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can use
the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth
increments.
• Back Off Walls—When you do rough milling and finish floors within the same tool path,
you can keep the tool off the walls by a specified additional distance while the Floor is
being finished. You can then finish the walls later. This option becomes available when
both the Rough Step and Finish Floors options are selected and the Finish Walls
option is cleared. When you select this option, type the back-off distance in the text box to
the right.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the tool
returns to the opposite side, to start the next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Step feature, moving back and
forth.
• Follow Hard Walls—The tool follows the shape of the Hard Walls.
• Straight Line—The tool cuts straight at a constant angle to the Program Zero
coordinate system.
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of the
feature-level Program Zero coordinate system if Straight Line is selected.
The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel to the x-axis of the
507
Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cut direction, type the new
value in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the Hard Walls after the rough cut and before the
finish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the value for the
minimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock text box to
the right.
Connect Motions
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connections
between the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material for
each cut.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cutting
motions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of the
next cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool Path
Properties dialog box).
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Step Milling dialog box contains the following
option:
Profile Features
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Profile.
The Profile Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
508
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Profile1 (the system increments
the number for the next Profile feature). You can type a customized name.
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
Þ Adjust Feature Depth—Adjust the Floor depth of feature (by default, a Profile
extends all the way through the stock). To specify a different Floor depth, select a
surface, a datum plane, or type a value along the z-axis of the feature-level Program
Zero coordinate system.
2. Select the Hard Walls. Use the following commands on the SURF/LOOP menu:
5. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Profile Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box
contains three text boxes:
509
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as PROFILE1_TP1
(the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name).
The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized
name. You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name
text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Profile Milling dialog box contains the options for defining
the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom
of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Wall Machining
• Rough—Remove material using rough milling and leaving stock on the Hard Walls
according to the Rough to value.
• Finish—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
510
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass, the
tool returns to the opposite side, to start the next pass in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Profile feature, moving back and
forth.
• Follow Hard Walls—The tool follows the shape of the Hard Walls.
• Straight Line—The tool cuts straight at a constant angle to the Program Zero
coordinate system.
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of the
feature-level Program Zero coordinate system if Straight Line is selected.
The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel to the x-axis of the
Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cut direction, type the new
value in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the Hard Walls after the rough cut and before the
finish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the value for the
minimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock text box to
the right.
Connect Motions
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connections
between the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material for
each cut.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cutting
motions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
511
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of the
next cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool Path
Properties dialog box).
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Profile Milling dialog box contains the following
option:
Channel Features
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Channel.
The Channel Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
512
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
The system creates a Channel feature as shown in the next illustration. The
Hard Walls are highlighted in red; the Soft Walls are highlighted in cyan.
513
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Channel Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box
contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as
CHANNEL1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the
tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type
a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under the
Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Channel Milling dialog box contains the options for defining
the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom
of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
514
The Channel Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Channel Milling dialog box contains
the following options.
Roughing
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can use
the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth
increments.
• Back Off Walls—When you do rough milling and finish floors within the same tool path,
you can keep the tool off the walls by a specified additional distance while the Floor is
being finished. You can then finish the walls later. This option becomes available when
both the Rough and Finish Floors options are selected and the Finish Walls option is
cleared. When you select this option, type the back-off distance in the text box to the
right.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Corners Only—Clean up the corners with a smaller tool after removing material from
the pocket with a large tool.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only, following the trajectory of the
Channel feature. At the end of each cut, the tool returns to the opposite side, to start the
next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Channel feature, following its
trajectory and moving back and forth.
• Spiral—Generates a cutting path where the tool starts from one Soft Wall, cuts down
the center of the Channel, and then makes alternating cuts to the left and to the right
from the first cut. When necessary, the cuts follow the Hard Walls to remove all the
515
material inside the Channel feature. Use this option if the walls of the Channel feature
are not parallel, or if it has more than two Soft Walls.
Connect Motions
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connections
between the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material for
each cut.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cutting
motions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of the
next cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool Path
Properties dialog box).
Start Wall
• Automatic—The Soft Wall where the tool starts cutting the material is chosen
automatically. Click next to the option to display the current Start Wall.
• Select—Select the Soft Wall where the tool starts cutting the material. Click next to
the option to select the Start Wall.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Channel Milling dialog box contains the
following option:
516
Example: Channel Machining
This example shows machining the Channel feature shown in the illustration
below.
• Rough
• Spiral
• Clear Part
• Stay Down
• Automatic
The resulting tool path is shown in the next illustration. The tool starts from
the default Soft Wall, cuts down the center of the Channel, and then makes
alternating cuts to the left and to the right from the first cut. It traverses the
Soft Walls and does not retract between the cuts. When the tool reaches the
widening of the Channel, the cuts follow the Hard Walls to remove all the
material inside the Channel feature. When the tool encounters the third Soft
Wall, it traverses this wall as well, and does not retract between the cuts,
according to the selected options.
517
Slot Features
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Slot.
The Slot Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Slot1 (the system increments
the number for the next Slot feature). You can type a customized name.
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
518
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Slot Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box contains
three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as SLOT1_TP1 (the
system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name). The
system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized name.
You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name text
box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Slot Milling dialog box contains the options for defining the
Machining Method and Options, and the lower, collapsible, portion provides the options
for Advanced Slot Milling. At the bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK,
Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
519
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle portion of the dialog box. The lower portion of the dialog box contains
the options for Advanced Slot Milling; use them if needed. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Roughing
Rough Slot—Remove the material inside the Slot feature using rough
milling and leaving stock on the Floor according to the Floor Stock value.
Stock left on the Hard Walls depends on the Advanced Slot Milling options
selected.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can use
the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth
increments.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the slot:
520
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate
system. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Properties
button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Helix—The tool enters along a helical path. You can customize the helical entry by
clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool
Path Properties dialog box. Type the new values for the Helix Angle and the Radius
of the helix (the default for which is calculated by the system based on the size of the
part).
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you must
first create and machine an Entry Hole feature for this slot.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
Options
The Advanced Slot Milling section of the Slot Milling dialog box contains the
following options:
• Single Center Cut (default)—The tool performs a single cut along the center of the slot.
When you use this option, the amount of material left on the walls of the slot depends on
the difference between the width of the slot and the cutter diameter of the tool.
• Multiple Cut—The tool performs multiple cuts to remove the material inside the slot.
Use the Wall Stock text box to specify the stock allowance left on the Hard Walls of the
slot. When you use this option, the following additional options become available:
Þ One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the tool
retracts and returns to the opposite side if the slot, to start the next cut in the same
direction.
Þ Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the slot, moving back and forth.
521
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Thru Slot.
The Through Slot Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
Þ Adjust Feature Depth—Adjust the Floor depth of feature (by default, a Through
Slot extends all the way through the stock). To specify a different Floor depth, select
a surface, a datum plane, or type a value along the z-axis of the feature-level
Program Zero coordinate system.
2. Select the walls of the slot. Use the following commands on the SURF/LOOP menu:
5. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
522
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Through Slot Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog
box contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as
THRU_SLOT1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of
the tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can
type a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under the
Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Through Slot Milling dialog box contains the options for
defining the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At
the bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
523
Roughing
Rough Slot—Remove the material inside the Slot feature using rough
milling.
Finishing
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box. This option becomes available
only when you select the Finish Walls option above.
Cut Motion
Start Position
This group of options can be used only if the Through Slot feature is
completely surrounded by Hard Walls. If the Through Slot feature contains a
chain of Soft Walls (there can only be one such chain), then the start position
is determined automatically based on the Soft Wall location and the
Climb/Conventional setting.
If the Use Default option is selected, the tool will start at a default position
along the through slot.
If you clear the Use Default checkbox, you can click next to it and
select a point anywhere on the edges surrounding the through slot. The tool
will start at the position closest to the selected point. Click to view the
start position.
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the slot:
524
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate
system. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Properties
button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Helix—The tool enters along a helical path. You can customize the helical entry by
clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool
Path Properties dialog box. Type the new values for the Helix Angle and the Radius
of the helix (the default for which is calculated by the system based on the size of the
tool).
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you must
first create and machine an Entry Hole feature for this slot.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
Options
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Bosstop.
The Boss Top Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
525
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
To machine the top of the boss, create a Boss Top feature. Select the top face
of the boss as the Floor surface.
526
Select this surface.
The system creates a Boss Top feature as shown in the next illustration. The
Soft Walls are highlighted in cyan.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
527
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Boss Top Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box
contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as
BOSS_TOP1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of
the tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can
type a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under the
Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Boss Top Milling dialog box contains the options for defining
the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom
of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Machining Mode
528
• Rough—Face down the boss top and leave stock according to the Rough to value.
• Finish—Finish mill the boss top. When you select this option, you can use the Finish
Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth increments.
Cut Motion
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the tool
returns to the opposite side, to start the next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Face feature, moving back and
forth. At the end of a pass, it retracts and moves to the beginning of the next pass, unless
the Reverse Multiple Passes option is selected.
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of the
Program Zero coordinate system for One Direction and Back and Forth
cut motion types. The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel to
the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cut
direction, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connections
between the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material for
each cut.
• Clear Part on Last Cut—If Stay in Cut is selected, this option will make the tool clear
the part on the final cut of each pass.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cutting
motions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of the
next cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool Path
Properties dialog box).
529
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Boss Top Milling dialog box contains the
following options:
• Reverse Multiple Passes—If Back and Forth is selected, this option will reverse the
Cut Angle on successive passes. Use this option to perform continuous back and forth
machining between passes.
• Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in a register
on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text box to the right. If
you use this option, NC output will contain the SET/OFSETL statements.
Select a tool with Cutter Diameter bigger than the diameter of the boss (to
make one cut per pass).
• Rough
• Finish
• One Direction
530
• Climb
• Clear Part
• Retract
Click Tool Path Properties > Cut Control and adjust Depth of Cut, as
needed.
Flange Features
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Flange.
The Flange Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Flange1 (the system increments
the number for the next Flange feature). You can type a customized name.
531
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
The system creates a Flange feature as shown in the next illustration. The
outer boundaries of the stock are Soft Walls; they are highlighted in cyan.
532
To Machine a Flange Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Flange Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box
contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as FLANGE1_TP1
(the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name).
The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized
name. You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name
text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Flange Milling dialog box contains the options for defining
the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom
of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
533
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Roughing
Rough Flange—Remove the material inside the Flange feature using rough
milling and leaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stock
values:
• Wall Stock—Stock to be left on the Hard Walls. If the Flange feature does not have
Hard Walls, this text box will be unavailable.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can use
the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth
increments.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments. If the
Flange feature does not have Hard Walls, this option and the Finish Cuts button will be
unavailable.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
534
These options define the cut motion pattern:
• Follow Outer Contour—The tool follows the outer contour of the Flange.
• Follow Inner Contour—The tool follows the inner contour of the Flange.
Start Location
• Start From Outer Contour—The tool starts at the outer contour of the Flange and
moves inward.
• Start From Inner Contour—The tool starts at the inner contour of the Flange and
moves outward. This option is not available if the inner contour is comprised of Hard
Walls.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Flange Milling dialog box contains the following
option:
O-Ring Features
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > O-Ring.
The O-Ring Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
Þ Feature Name—The default feature name, such as O-Ring1 (the system increments
the number for the next O-Ring feature). You can type a customized name.
535
Þ Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
Þ Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definition
and machining.
Þ Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the current
setting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the
Hard Walls in red.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the O-Ring Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box
contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as O-RING1_TP1
(the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name).
The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized
name. You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name
text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
536
The middle portion of the O-Ring Milling dialog box contains the options for defining
the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom
of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
Roughing
Rough Groove—Remove the material inside the O-Ring feature using rough
milling and leaving stock on the Floor according to the Floor Stock value.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can use
the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth
increments.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use the
Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box. This option becomes available
only when you select the Finish Walls option above.
Cut Motion
537
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
Start Position
If the Use Default option is selected, the tool will start at a default position
along the closed groove.
If you clear the Use Default checkbox, you can click next to it and
select a point anywhere on the edges surrounding the closed groove. The tool
will start at the position closest to the selected point. Click to view the
start position.
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the groove:
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate
system. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Properties
button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you must
first create and machine an Entry Hole feature.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the O-Ring Milling dialog box contains the following
option:
538
Select the bottom of the groove.
Select a tool with Cutter Diameter corresponding to the width of the groove
(to make one cut per pass).
• Rough
• Climb
• Use Default
• Plunge
539
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Hole Group.
The system opens the Drill Group dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box contains
two text boxes:
Þ Program Zero Selection—The name of the coordinate system used for machining.
To change it, click next to the text box and select the new coordinate system.
The middle portion of the Drill Group dialog box contains four tabulated pages that
provide means of Hole selection:
2. Specify the holes to be drilled using any combination of methods listed above. See
Combining Selection Methods for information on how to use more than one selection
method for defining a Hole Group. Click for details.
The Info button opens an information window that lists the rules currently used in Hole
selection.
The Preview button lets you view the currently selected holes by highlighting them in
red.
540
The Axes method lets you explicitly select and unselect hole axes, regardless
of other rules used in Hole selection.
Click Add and select hole axes to add them to the Hole Set.
All axes currently included in the Hole Group are listed in the central list
box. If you have selected holes using a different method (for example,
Diameters), the names of these axes also appear on the Axes tab.
To remove a previously selected axis from the Hole Group, highlight its name
in the central list box and click Delete. Similar to adding axes, you can use
the Pattern option to remove a whole pattern of holes.
When you click Add, the Select Hole Diameter dialog box opens. It lists all
the hole diameters present in the model. Select a diameter from the list, or
click Select and select a cylindrical surface on the model to specify the
diameter. The system adds all holes of the specified diameter to the Hole
Group.
The diameter values selected so far are listed in the central list box on the
Diameters tab. To remove all holes of a specified diameter, select its value in
the list box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes of a specified
diameter, use the Axes tab.
Click Add and select surfaces to add all holes located on these surfaces to the
Hole Group.
541
The names of selected surfaces are listed in the central list box on the
Surfaces tab. To remove all holes located on a surface, select its name in the
list box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes on a surface, use the
Axes tab.
You can create and modify feature parameters in Part or Assembly mode.
When you go to the Parameters tab, the Feature Parameter list box
contains a list of all feature parameters associated with Hole and Cosmetic
Thread features in the model. When you select a parameter name in the list,
the Value text box below will contain a drop-down list of all the currently
present values for this parameter.
2. Select an operator from the drop-down list. For parameter types Integer and Real, the
operators available are: “=, “!=, “>, “<“. For other parameter types, the only operators
available are: “= and “!=.
4. Click Add.
5. The system displays the selected parameter and its value in the list box below and
includes all holes with the appropriate feature parameter values in the Hole Group.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Drilling Strategy dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box
contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as
HOLE_PATTERN1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first
portion of the tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data
output. You can type a customized name. You can also click the Comments button
located under the Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy
Comments.
542
Þ Feature Name—The name of the Hole Group being machined. You can click the
Add button located under the Feature Name text box to select other Hole Group
features present in the model. The Remove button lets you remove previously
selected Hole Group features. All the names of the Hole Group features selected for
machining are displayed in the Feature Name text box. You can click the Preview
button located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the holes being
machined.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Drilling Strategy dialog box contains the options for defining
the Holemaking Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the
bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Holemaking Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar type feature, click Next.
Cycle Type
• Drill—Drill a hole. Depending on the Cycle Modifier option selected, the following
statement will be output to the NC file:
Þ Standard—CYCLE / DRILL
Þ Deep—CYCLE / DEEP
543
Þ Web—CYCLE / THRU (for multiple plates)
• Tap—Drill a threaded hole. Expert Machinist supports ISO standard thread output. The
CYCLE / TAP statement will be output to the NC file.
• Ream—Create a precision finish hole. The CYCLE / REAM statement will be output to
the NC file.
• Bore—Bore a hole to create a finish hole diameter with high precision. The CYCLE /
BORE statement will be output to the NC file.
• Spotface—Drill a hole with an optional dwell at final depth to help assure a clean
surface at the bottom of the hole. The CYCLE / FACE statement will be output to the NC
file.
Þ Edge Break—Type the desired value in the Edge Break text box Tool parameter
Point_Angle defines the chamfer angle.
Þ Auto Chamfer—When you select this option, the system automatically finds all the
chamfers with the angle matching the Point_Angle of the current tool, and makes
the necessary calculations for drilling based on the chamfer geometry.
Cycle Depth
544
• Thru All—Drill a through hole, all the way through the stock. If you specify a breakout
distance for Through drilling on the Cut Control tab of the Drilling Properties dialog
box, the system adds this value when calculating depth.
• Constant—Drill to specified depth. Type the drill depth value in the textbox below.
Measured Depth
These options define how the depth of drilling is measured with respect to the
tool:
• Tool Shoulder—The drilling depth is measured with reference to the shoulder of the
tool.
• Tool Tip—The drilling depth is measured with reference to the tip of the tool.
Shoulder Tip
Tool
Hole Order
• Shortest—The system determines which order of holes results in the shortest machine
motion time.
• One Direction—The system scans the holes with respect to the Program Zero
coordinate system, by incrementing the X coordinate and decrementing the Y.
• Back & Forth—The system scans the holes with respect to the Program Zero coordinate
system, by incrementing the Y coordinate and going back and forth in the X direction.
• Spiral—The system scans the holes clockwise starting from the hole nearest to the
Program Zero coordinate system.
545
y y y
x x x
Start Hole—Lets you select the first hole to be machined if the Hole Order
option is Shortest or Spiral.
The Drilling Properties button opens the Drilling Properties dialog box,
which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as spindle
and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut control
options. The Cut Control tab contains options for adjusting hole depth:
• Through Holes—Select this option to adjust the depth for through holes. Type the
adjustment value in the text box to the right.
• Blind Holes—Select this option to adjust the depth for blind holes. Type the adjustment
value in the text box to the right.
The Options section of the Drilling Strategy dialog box contains the
following option:
For the first Tool Path feature, use a tool with Point_Angle 90. It will
machine the 45-degree chamfers, as shown in the following illustration.
546
For the second Tool Path feature, use a tool with Point_Angle 120. It will
machine the 30-degree chamfers, as shown in the next illustration.
Use an Entry Hole feature to specify an entry point when machining a closed
feature (Pocket, Through Pocket, or Slot). Even though you are going to
machine the Entry Hole before you machine the closed feature, create the
Entry Hole feature after you have created the closed feature that you need it
for. You can use the same Entry Hole for more than one feature, if needed.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Features > Entry Hole.
The Entry Hole Feature dialog box opens. The top portion of the dialog box contains
three text boxes:
Þ Feature Name—The name of the parent closed feature. The drop-down list contains
the names of all the features of appropriate type (Pocket, Through Pocket, or Slot)
currently present in the model. Select the parent feature from the drop-down list.
547
Þ Program Zero—The name of the coordinate system used for machining the parent
feature. This name is displayed for information purposes only; you cannot change it.
You can click next to the text box to highlight the coordinate system.
The lower portion of the Entry Hole Feature dialog box contains the Setup Entry Hole
options. At the bottom of the dialog box there are three buttons: OK, Cancel, and
Preview.
2. Type the diameter value in the Hole Diameter text box. This is the expected size of the
drill to use for drilling the Entry Hole.
3. Use the other options, if needed, to specify the hole location and depth. By default, the
Entry Hole is created in the approximate center of the parent feature, and its depth
equals the depth of the parent feature. The Preview button lets you check the current
location and depth of the Entry Hole.
Hole Diameter—The expected size of the drill to use for drilling the Entry
Hole. Type the diameter value in the text box.
Hole Location
• Place—Define the Entry Hole placement either automatically, or using the X and Y
coordinates of the Program Zero coordinate system.
• Corner—Define the Entry Hole placement with respect to a corner of the parent feature.
These options appear when the Place option is selected for Hole Location:
• X Direction—Type the X coordinate of the Entry Hole axis with respect to the Program
Zero coordinate system.
• Y Direction—Type the Y coordinate of the Entry Hole axis with respect to the Program
Zero coordinate system.
These options appear when the Corner option is selected for Hole Location:
548
• Corner—Click and select a corner of the parent feature (either an edge or a
rounded surface). In a rounded corner, if the radius of the hole is less than the corner
radius, the system places the Entry Hole coaxial with the corner round. Otherwise (for
example, in a sharp corner), the system places the Entry Hole based on its diameter,
tangent to the adjacent walls. To modify this placement, use the Wall Offset option
below.
• Wall Offset—Type the minimum offset of the Entry Hole from the walls adjacent to the
selected corner.
Define the Entry Hole depth using one of the two options:
• Floor Offset—Specify how far above the floor of the parent feature the Entry Hole ends.
By default, this offset is 0, and the Entry Hole depth equals the depth of the parent
feature.
• Enter Depth—Type the Entry Hole depth. By default, it is the depth of the parent
feature.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menu
bar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
The system opens the Drilling Strategy dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box
contains three text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as
ENTRYHOLE000_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion
of the tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You
can type a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under
the Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
Þ Feature Name—The name of the Entry Hole being drilled. You can click the Add
button located under the Feature Name text box to select other Entry Hole features
present in the model. The Remove button lets you remove previously selected Entry
Hole features. All the names of the Entry Hole features selected for machining are
displayed in the Feature Name text box. You can click the Preview button located
under the Feature Name text box to highlight the holes being drilled.
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
549
The middle portion of the Drilling Strategy dialog box contains the options for defining
the Holemaking Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the
bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no active
tool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
4. Define the Holemaking Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar type feature, click Next.
Note: You can also use the Free Form feature just to supply certain CL
commands between other tool paths, if needed. In this case, you do not have
to specify a tool or define the Drive Geometry. When the Freeform Milling
dialog box opens, click Play Path and insert the required CL commands.
The Freeform Milling dialog box opens. The top portion of the dialog box contains two
text boxes:
Þ Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as
FREE_MILLING_TP1. The system will use this file name for NC data output. You
can type a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under
the Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
550
Þ Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for the
first time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displays
None. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Freeform Milling dialog box contains the options for defining
the Drive Geometry and the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the
machining Options. At the bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel,
Next, and Play Path.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on the
drop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. This
functionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Note: Unlike other machining features, for Free Form machining you can use a sketched
tool.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected tool
in a pop-up window.
3. Define the Drive Geometry. The Drive Geometry defines the tool trajectory in the XY-
plane of the Program Zero coordinate system. You can:
Þ Next to Use Model Edges, click and select edges from the reference model or
from the stock. To verify your selection, click . The system highlights the selected
edges in cyan and indicates with an arrow which side the tool will be on. Click Flip,
if needed, to change the side.
Þ Click next to the Sketch label and sketch the trajectory of the tool in the XY-
plane of the Program Zero coordinate system.
4. Define the Cut Depth, that is, the height of the last tool pass. Click next to Cut
Depth and then use one of the CTM DEPTH menu commands:
Þ Specify Plane—Select a planar surface or create a datum plane parallel to the XY-
plane of the Program Zero coordinate system.
Þ Z Depth—Type a value along the z-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system.
5. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typing
values in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottom
of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
6. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the same
settings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
551
Note: When you create a Free Form tool path, the system removes the appropriate stock
material, the same as for the other feature types. However, for Free Form features you
can specify that the system does not create the automatic material removal. To do this,
set the configuration option freeform_toolpath_matrem to no.
• Drive Geometry—Define the tool trajectory in the XY-plane of the Program Zero
coordinate system:
Þ Use Model Edges—Select edges from the reference model or from the stock.
Þ Sketch—Sketch the trajectory of the tool in the XY-plane of the Program Zero
coordinate system.
The Machining Method section of the Freeform Milling dialog box contains
the following options.
Direction of Cut
These options are available when you define Drive Geometry by selecting
model edges. They define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
Tool Side
These options are available when you define Drive Geometry by sketching.
They define where the tool is relative to the sketch:
• On—The tool follows the sketch. Use the Material Side options to specify cutter
compensation.
Material Side
552
These options define how to apply cutter compensation when the tool follows
the sketch:
Cut Ordering
These options define the order of machining if you specify multiple cuts and
passes:
• X-Y First—The tool makes all the cuts at a specific depth and then moves to the next
depth.
• Z First—The tool makes multiple passes to depth and then goes to the next cut.
The Multiple Cuts button opens the Finish Cuts dialog box, where you can
set up the number and depth of finish cuts.
The Multiple Passes button opens the Finish Passes dialog box, where you
can set up the number of finish passes and the depth increments.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialog
box, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as
spindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut
control options.
The Options section of the Freeform Milling dialog box contains the
following options:
• Use Cutcom—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customize
their format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the
Cut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in a register
on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text box to the right. If
you use this option, NC output will contain the SET/OFSETL statements.
553
simulated tool dimensions represent the parameters defined during tool
setup.
Whenever you display tool motion for a tool path or an operation, the system
opens the PLAY PATH dialog box. The collapsible upper portion of this
dialog box lists the cutter location (CL) data for the tool path or operation, as
it would be output to a CL data file through Output > Create CL File. You
can save this CL data in a CL file or an MCD file directly from the PLAY
PATH dialog box, by clicking the appropriate option in the File menu.
The lower portion contains the following buttons: Play Forward, Play
Back, Stop, Fast Forward and Rewind, as well as Go To Next CL
Record and Go To Previous CL Record. It also contains the buttons for
positioning the cutting tool and for accessing the Tool Clearance
functionality, and a slider to adjust the display speed.
When displaying the tool motion, you can make the tool stop at certain points
by adding break points. You can also insert customized CL commands, such
as the specific postprocessor words required for correct NC output, at desired
locations within the CL file. When you save the CL data, these commands
will be output to the CL file. If you add a tool motion command, the
corresponding motion will be also shown in the tool path display on the
screen.
You can display tool motion for a single tool path or for a whole operation. To
display tool motion for an operation, select the operation name in the Model
Tree window. To display tool motion for a single tool path, select the name of
the corresponding tool path in the Model Tree window.
Note: When you are machining a feature, or creating a Free Form tool path,
you can display the tool path as it is currently defined by clicking the Play
Path button at the bottom of the dialog box.
1. In the Model Tree window, select the operation or the Tool Path that you want to display.
Click the right mouse button and select Tool Path Player from the pop-up menu. Or, on
the top menu bar, click NC Create > Output > Tool Path Player.
The system opens the PLAY PATH dialog box and displays the cutting tool simulation
in the initial location.
2. Click the Play Forward button to start playing the tool motion.
The system starts scrolling through the CL data file, moving the tool to reflect its current
position on the screen. The solid red line represents the tip of the cutter as it cuts the
material.
554
3. Click the Stop button to stop the tool motion display. The tool also stops upon reaching a
break point placed in the CL file (indicated by a red downward arrow appearing to the left
of the CL record). Use the other tool positioning options in the PLAY PATH dialog box,
as needed.
4. You can save the current tool path to a CL or an MCD file. To do this, click File > Save or
File > Save As MCD, respectively.
5. To finish displaying the tool motion and close the PLAY PATH dialog box, click Close.
The collapsible upper portion of this dialog box lists the cutter location (CL)
data for the tool path or operation, as it would be output to a CL data file
through Output > Create CL File. You can save this CL data in a CL file or
an MCD file directly from the PLAY PATH dialog box, by clicking the
appropriate option in the File menu.
Name Description
555
The Tool Clearance button lets you access the Measure functionality, to
compute tool interference, and clearance. If a solid tool model is used, its
geometry can be selected for measuring. If the tool is defined by parameters,
it will be temporarily converted into a “dummy part, with geometry based on
the appropriate tool parameters.
The Position Cutting Tool button lets you select a point on the tool path to
position the cutting tool. To position the cutting tool at a certain CL data line,
click NCL File > Position Tool.
At the bottom of the dialog box, there is a slider to adjust the display speed.
Moving the slider to the right makes the display faster; moving it to the left
slows the display.
1. In the CL data listing, select a line where you want the tool to stop.
3. The system indicates the break point by placing a red downward arrow to the left of the
selected CL line.
When you play the tool motion, the tool stops upon reaching the break point
line. You can, for example, click Tool Clearance at this point, to measure
tool interference or clearance. To resume playing the tool path, click the Play
Forward button again.
To display the tool motion without stopping at break points, click NCL File >
Suppress all break points. The break point information, however, will be
retained; when you click NCL File > Resume all break points, all the
break points will reappear.
To delete an existing break point, select the appropriate line in the CL data
listing, then click NCL File > Delete break point.
556
To Position the Tool
When you play the tool path, the position of the cutting tool on the screen
corresponds to the position of the cursor in the CL data listing in the top
portion of the PLAY PATH dialog box.
• Click the Position Cutting Tool button in the lower portion of the PLAY PATH dialog
box and select a point on the tool path to position the cutting tool.
• Select a line in the CL data listing, then click NCL File > Position Tool to position the
tool at this line.
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. Use
this functionality to add the specific postprocessor words required for correct
NC output.
2. To select location for the CL command, click and select either a point on the tool path
on the screen or a line in the CL file listing.
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and type the command, line-by-line. Note
that this method does not provide syntax checking.
Þ Click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the
syntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
Þ Click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser window
will appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
Notes:
Þ You can edit the contents of the Command text box at any point by placing the
cursor in it and using the keyboard.
Þ If you supply more than one command line, they will be treated as a “block, that is,
you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
557
4. The Preview button inserts the command line(s) in the CL file at the selected location to
let you preview the result. Click OK to insert the command at selected location, Cancel—
to quit inserting the command.
To Delete a CL Command
You can only delete user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commands
previously added by using the Insert CL Command option.
3. The system deletes the selected command from the CL file listing.
To Redefine a CL Command
You can only redefine user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commands
previously added by using the Insert CL Command option.
3. To select a new location for the CL command, click and select either a point on the
tool path on the screen or a line in the CL file listing.
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and edit the command. Note that this
method does not provide syntax checking.
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then,
click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the
syntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
558
Þ Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then,
click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser window
will appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
Note: If you do not delete the contents of the Command text box before using the Menu
or File option, you will create additional command lines. From then on, these lines will
be treated as a “block, that is, you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole
block of command lines.
5. The Preview button lets you preview the result. Click OK to complete redefining the
command, Cancel—to quit.
1. On the top menu bar of the PLAY PATH dialog box, click File.
Þ Save—Output CL data to a CL file, with the name corresponding to the name of the
Tool Path feature.
Þ Save As—Output CL data to a CL file with a different name. Type the new name in
the browser window.
To Output a CL File
You can output the Cutter Location (CL) data for a single tool path or for a
whole operation to a CL data file. To output an operation, select the operation
name in the Model Tree window. To output a tool path, select the name of the
corresponding tool path in the Model Tree window.
1. In the Model Tree window, select an operation or a Tool Path feature. Click the right
mouse button and select Output Tool Path from the pop-up menu. Or, on the top menu
bar, click NC Create > Output > Create CL File.
The system opens the Save As dialog box, with the default name of the output file shown
in the New File text box.
2. To accept the default name, click OK. Or, type a different file name in the New File text
box of the Save As dialog box and click OK.
559
The system generates the CL file and saves it to disk.
Note: To output NC codes for a tool path or an operation, use the Create NC
Code command. You can also save the tool path in either CL or MCD format
directly from the PLAY PATH dialog box.
To Output NC Codes
You can output the Cutter Location (CL) data for a single tool path or for a
whole operation to a CL data file. This CL data file will then have to be
postprocessed to generate an MCD file, containing the proper NC codes.
You can also output the NC codes for a tool path or operation directly to an
MCD file. To output an operation, select the operation name in the Model
Tree window. To output a tool path, select the name of the corresponding tool
path in the Model Tree window.
1. In the Model Tree window, select an operation or a Tool Path feature. Then, on the top
menu bar, click NC Create > Output > Create NC Code.
Þ Automatic—The system uses the default postprocessor associated with the machine
tool (specified at the time of Machine Tool Setup).
Þ Select Post—The system lists the available postprocessors. Select the postprocessor
to use.
The Save As dialog box opens, with the default name of the output file shown in the
New File text box.
3. To accept the default name, click OK. Or, type a different file name in the New File text
box of the Save As dialog box and click OK.
Note: You can also save the tool path in either CL or MCD format directly
from the PLAY PATH dialog box.
560
Template Machining
About the Template Manager
If your company has certain frequently used machining strategies, you can
streamline the machining process by creating templates corresponding to
these machining strategies, and then applying the right template when
machining a feature.
A template may contain one or more strategies for machining the same type
of feature. Once you define the strategies (by selecting the desired options
and typing values, as needed), save the template. Then, once you have
created a feature in Expert Machinist, you can machine it by applying an
existing template.
• On the top menu bar in the Expert Machinist window, click NC Setup > Template
Manager.
• In the system window, type the name of the Template Manager executable:
<loadpoint>/apps/mfgapps/java/bin/template_run
Note: You can also create a template by machining a feature and then saving
the machining strategy, as it is defined by the selected options and specified
values, as a template.
dialog box, click next to the Tool Path Name text box and specify the
template name.
561
1. In the Template Editor window, select the feature type by clicking on one of the Features
icons, located in the lower-left portion of the window. These icons correspond to the icons
in the Expert Machinist toolbar that you use for creating features.
Once you select an icon, the picture to the right of the icons, which contains a schematic
visualization of the feature type, changes to reflect the selected feature type.
2. Click below the feature type icons, or click the New icon located in the top
toolbar of the Template Editor window.
The system loads the appropriate template and starts creating the first strategy. The
strategy has a default name based on the feature type (for example, Step0). You can
change the name by typing it in the Strategy Name text box.
Þ Prompt for a tool—The template contains no cutting tool information. At the time
you apply the template, the system prompts you to select or define the cutting tool.
Þ Specify a tool—Type the name of the cutting tool in the text box. The tool name is
stored with the template. At the time you apply the template, make sure the
appropriate cutting tool exists on the machine tool currently in use.
4. Use the other options, as needed, to define the machining strategy. The options on the
first tab correspond to those that appear in a machining dialog box of this type (for
example, if you define a Step strategy, the options on the Step tab are the same as you
would get in a Step Milling dialog box). The Properties tab contains the same tabs and
options as the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
5. Once a machining strategy is defined, you can add another strategy to the same template.
This way, you can, for example, define a rough milling and a finish milling strategy
within the same template. When you apply a template with more than one strategy, the
system creates the appropriate number of tool paths. To add a new strategy to the
template, click Edit > New Strategy. Then define the new strategy as described above.
6. When finished defining the machining strategies, save the template by clicking File >
Save. This will save the template with a .tpl extension.
Note: The name of a .tpl file can not be longer than 31 characters and must all be
lowercase.
7. Click in the lower-left corner of the dialog box to return to the main page of the
Template Editor dialog box and define another template, for a different type of feature.
562
To Convert an Existing TPL Template File to XML Format
The template files are currently saved in the XML format. In Beta version,
templates were saved in the TPL format. Currently, both formats are
supported within the Expert Machinist. However, if you created some
templates in Beta version and want to save them for future use, it is
recommended that you translate them into the XML format by following the
procedure below.
2. Click … next to the From text box and select the name of the template file in the browser
window. The path and name appear in the From text box.
3. Click … next to the To text box, select the path and type new name of the template file in
the browser window. The path and name appear in the To text box.
4. Click OK.
To Place a Template
Once you have created a template for a certain feature type, you can machine
features of this type by applying the template. You have to define the feature
before you apply a template to it.
1. On the top menu bar, click NC Create > Tool Paths > Place Template.
The system opens the browser window listing all template files in the current directory.
3. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over a
feature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.
Click OK.
4. If the template was created using the Prompt for a tool option, the system prompts you
to select or define a cutting tool.
If the template was created using the Specify a tool option, and the cutting tool does
not exists on the machine tool currently in use, the system issues an error message and
aborts placing the template. Define the appropriate cutting tool and apply the template
again.
Once the template is successfully placed, the system creates the appropriate
tool path and removes the stock material corresponding to the feature
geometry.
563
Miscellaneous
To Manipulate Features Using the Model Tree
You can manipulate existing features, for example, redefine or delete them,
directly from the Model Tree window by using a pop-up menu. For machining
features, this pop-up menu also provides the options of creating a tool path or
placing a template; and for tool paths, the options of displaying the tool path
on the screen or outputting it to a file.
If you select a machining feature, the system highlights the feature geometry on the
screen. If you select an operation, the system highlights the geometry of all the
machining features that belong to this operation.
The system opens a pop-up menu. The options in this menu correspond to the type of
selected feature.
Depending on the type of feature selected in the Model Tree, the pop-up
menu contains the following options:
564
Redefine Opens the Machine Tool Setup dialog
box, to let you redefine the current
machine tool.
565
Place Starts the user interface for placing a
Template machining template (equivalent to
clicking NC Create > Tool Paths >
Place Template).
566
Output Starts the user interface for outputting
Tool Path the tool path to a file (equivalent to
clicking NC Create > Output >Create
CL File).
By default, the stock model is displayed in its current machined state; that is,
it is shown as the entire model, less any material that has been removed by a
tool path.
Another option for stock display is to show it as it would exist if all currently
defined machining features were completely machined. This way, you can
easily view the material that is left to be machined off, and create
appropriate machining features.
The system displays the stock in such a way that only the "extra" material left to be
machined off is shown in green. The system temporarily removes from the stock model
all the material corresponding to the currently defined features. Whenever the edges of
the stock coincide with the edges of the reference model, they are shown in Geometry
color.
567
Pro/PROCESS for MFG
Introduction
The Pro/PROCESS for MFG part machining process consists of two distinct
phases:
After these two steps have been sufficiently defined, the manufacturing
engineer, or an NC programmer, creates the NC tool path for actual material
removal. The goal of Pro/PROCESS for MFG is to create a process plan with
as much detail as desired, document this process, and then use it to create a
manufacturing toolpath.
One of the setup steps for process planning involves the documentation and inventory of
all tools, fixtures, and holders for easy retrieval by the process planner. The library of
machining tools are classified by function, size, and application. The process planner can
create these fixtures, holders, and workcell as needed; that is, the database need not be
complete before the work begins.
The design part is typically in the released format. The released model contains
dimensions, tolerances—dimensional and geometric—and surface finish information.
568
sufficient to meet design requirements, the dimensional, surface or tolerance information
associated with the design part is used by the process planner to decide on tools and
fixtures.
To define the machining process plan work flow, the process planner may
need to perform:
Given the workpiece and design model information, the process planner assembles the
two parts in such a way as to provide sufficient machine allowance and co-locate critical
features; such as an axis for a boss and reference datum planes.
Sometimes, the process planner or user creates just the casting model, and then creates
the final design model through material removal. This way, the process planner or user
can better model the design through the manufacturing process, because the design
model incorporates limitations of the manufacturing process.
The process planner, or user, needs to define how the workpiece with the reference model
assembled inside will be assembled relative to a fixture.
If there are no preexisting fixtures, then the process planner, or user, passes the
workpiece along with manufacturing instructions to the tools department for creation of
a custom fixture
The process planner, or user, often wishes to create a representation of a design part that
is as simple as possible, yet contains all necessary details in the area to be machined.
Based on process planing requirements such as material, stock allowance, surface finish,
and tolerance, the process planner or user defines or retrieves a workcell and may choose
a tool for each machining step or NC sequence.
The process planner or user needs this representation for input to the next machining
step and also to document the process.
After defining all steps, the process planner may reorder the machining steps, add or
insert more steps, or delete some of the unnecessary machining operations.
569
To Use Pro/PROCESS for MFG
The following procedure outlines a typical session in Pro/PROCESS for MFG.
1. Click File > New to create a new process assembly, or click File > Open to open an
existing assembly.
6. Click Mfg Sequence, Step, or New Step to create or redefine a manufacturing step or
general step and click Done.
7. If no operation has been created, the operation creation user interface appears.
8. If an operation already exists, the STEP TYPE menu appears. Click one of the
commands:
Þ Machine—create milling, hole making, turning, and WEDM step types which can
be performed at this workstation type.
Þ General—create all of the step types which can be performed at any workstation
type. These steps include inspect, paint, debur, edge break, and so on.
Þ Surface—create all of the step types which are specific to surface workcells. These
steps do not perform any changes to the component geometries.
Þ Volume—create all of the step types which are specific to volume workcells. These
steps include heat treating and shrinkage. These steps do not perform any changes
to the component geometries.
9. Click Done to open the Step dialog box, allowing you to define elements specific to the
step type. Select components to be assembled directly from the screen or from the Model
Tree window.
10.Define additional elements (such as, description of the step, a simplified representation,
time, and cost estimates) for the step. Click OK in the dialog box when you are satisfied
that all desired elements are defined.
11.Define additional steps by clicking Step from the MFG SEQUENCE menu. The system
displays the existing steps in the STEP LIST menu. The previous list being referred to is
only for the current operation. To list steps for all operations, click All Operations from
the SEL STEP menu.
570
12.To replay the steps, click Play Steps from the MFG SEQUENCE menu.
13.Create detail drawings of the manufacturing process by adding the process step model to
a drawing. A Process State dialog box appears when the model is added to the drawing.
The Process State dialog box lists the steps in the manufacturing process. If you want
to, select the desired step and a simplified representation, then click OK. The VIEW
TYPE menu appears, from which you can place a view of the model in the specified step.
14.Use Pro/REPORT to create a manufacturing report table for the step, which lists only the
components assembled during the active step or a table of manufacturing parameters.
The system lists a new set of report symbols, beginning with a &mfg prefix, and unique to
process steps.
15.When you create a view of another step, set the current step by clicking Views from the
DRAWING menu, and then Dwg Models > Set State. The Set State command sets the
current default state which will be used for the next placed view. Use the View and
Modify View functions to change an existing Process State view.
• Create and manipulate manufacturing steps which may or may not generate NC
sequences.
• Group manufacturing steps into operations where you can define how the model changes
with material removal, refixturing, or use of a different tool.
• Leave a manufacturing step in a partially defined state so that the NC planner can
complete the step; that is, define the NC tool path.
• Examine the steps with the display of the manufacturing model accurately reflecting the
material removal, similar to the Play Steps functionality available in Pro/PROCESS for
ASSEMBLIES. You can easily pick a step to roll the model back to. Rolling back the
model from step to step represents successive processing steps.
• Access such features as workcell, tooling, and site parameters from the manufacturing
step level.
• Create process planning documentation reflecting the process planning steps and
parameters.
571
Existing Pro/MFG data may be used as a layout skeleton. Often sections of a preexisting
plan are used in the current definition. The planner can place text from existing third
party data by cutting and pasting the appropriate sections of an old plan, using UDFs
from other Pro/MFG or Pro/PROCESS for MFG models, or by using Pro/TOOLKIT
functionality.
The workpiece represents any form of raw stock; bar stock, casting, and so on that is
going to be machined during manufacturing operations. It may easily be created by
copying the design model and modifying the dimensions or deleting/suppressing features
to represent the real workpiece. The benefits of using a workpiece include:
The workpiece geometry serves as a start condition for the part machining process plan.
The engineer knows that by using some manufacturing techniques the start part can be
transformed into a finished part. The workpiece, at various stages of machining, also
defines the design and configuration of the fixture.
The design model represents the machining target. The design part also has the surface
finish, dimensions, and tolerances defined. No matter what approach the process planner
takes in getting from workpiece geometry to finished geometry, the process goal is to
achieve these surface finish, dimensions, and tolerances.
2. After defining a manufacturing process plan step, the user needs to document the process
planning step in a company accepted format. There are five classes of process planning
steps which require specific documentation:
Þ Fixturing—which includes a typical setup drawing; for example, place part A into
fixture B.
572
Þ Manufacturing model—which includes assembly of material or the creation of
additional workpieces.
In some cases, the user wants to simplify the display of any part geometry which is non-
critical to the particular machining step in order to simplify the manufacturing model
representation.
The user needs to document the material removal process including minimum sufficient
dimensioning, tool and holder information, along with any necessary machining
instructions.
5. Create drawing views or report tables for each machining process. The end products of the
process planning procedure include:
Þ The holder
Þ The process plan drawing which contains the workpiece and the necessary
dimensions, tolerances, and instructions to produce that material removal step
For some of the drawings, the user may need to create and dimension additional
breakout sections or auxiliary views as appropriate.
Process Steps
573
A process allows assembly and manipulation of entire reference models
relative to other models in the process assembly. A user can create a partially
complete manufacturing model and then retrieve the model into
manufacturing to finish defining the machining steps and to generate the
toolpath.
The system retrieves the process model in whatever state it exists at the end
of the process; that is, retrieves any components and sets the last step as the
active step. The system retrieves into memory all components required for
the process model and displays only the components that are active from the
last step.
2. Select Manufacturing under Type and Process Plan under Sub-type. Enter a name
for the new process assembly.
Þ Mfg Sequence—Manipulates a process step (add, create, redefine and so on). Opens
the MFG SEQUENCE menu.
Þ Play Steps—Views assembly at individual steps of the process plan. Opens the
STEP REGEN menu.
Þ Program—Accesses Pro/PROGRAM.
574
MFG SETUP Menu Commands
When you click Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURING menu, the MFG
SETUP menu opens with the following commands:
• Operation—Creates and redefines operations and sets the current operation. The
current operation is the last operation in the feature list which has not been rolled back.
Opens the Define Operation menu with the following commands:
You need not specify an exact workcell. The following are new types of workcells:
Surface—Specifies grinding machines and any other machine which doesn't change
the geometry of a workpiece surface.
575
Volume—Specifies heat treating workcells and any other workcell which does not
change the geometry of the part.
General—Specifies any workcell which does not affect the geometry of the
workpiece.
• Step—Creates and redefines step features. The types of steps available depends upon
the type of workcell defined for the operation. Opens the STEP TYPE menu with the
following commands:
Þ General—Specifies all of the step types which can be performed at any workstation
type. General step types include inspecting, painting, deburring, edge breaking, and
so on.
Þ Surface—Specifies all of the step types which are specific to surface workcells.
Surface step types do not perform any changes to the component geometries.
Þ Volume—Specifies all of the step types which are specific to volume workcells.
Volume step types include heat treating, plating, and shrinkage.
• Package—Uses the Package functionality to move packaged components that are not in
the design assembly.
• Delete—Deletes components and their children from the assembly. Process steps are
children of components; therefore, deleting a workpiece deletes process steps which
reference it.
576
• Suppress—Suppresses steps related to the workpiece to be deleted. Opens the
DELETE/SUPP menu.
• Reorder—Reorders components.
Þ Copy—Copies components.
577
• Mod Dim—Opens the MODIFY menu to modify dimensions.
• Mod Mach Step—Opens the STEP LIST menu to modify parameters for machine
steps.
• Mod Pattern—Opens the SELECT FEAT menu to modify machining step pattern
dimensions.
Play steps allow you to walk through the manufacturing process; set a
specific step and operation, roll the model back one step or operation, and
display information for the current step or operation.
Process steps describe all the actions used to manufacture the product. You
can only have one active step at any time. Process step types are: Fixture,
Manufacturing Model, Machine, General, Surface, and Volume.
578
To Create a Machine Step
1. Click MANUFACTURING > Mfg Sequence to open the MFG SEQUENCE menu.
2. Click Mfg Sequence > Step to open the DEFINE OPER menu.
3. The system opens the DEFINE OPER menu. The specific machining step type available
depends upon the active operation's workcell type:
Þ Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the machine step. This is an optional
field.
Þ Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the machine step. This is an optional
field.
4. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
579
To Create a Fixture Step
4. The system opens the FIXTURE STEP dialog box, which contains the following options:
Note: Use the COMPONENT menu to delete or redefine any of the fixture components.
Þ Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the fixture setup. This is an optional
field.
Þ Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the fixture setup. This is an optional
field.
5. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
General steps types handle operations which do not involve any change to the
geometry of the workpiece. These steps include painting, burnishing,
inspection, and so on.
3. The system opens the GEN STEPS menu and the STEP: General dialog box, which
contains the following options:
580
Þ Name—Specifies the general step name. This is an optional field.
Þ Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the general step. This is an optional
field.
Þ Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the general step. This is an optional
field.
4. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
Volume steps handle operations which involve scaling the part, such as heat
treating and shrinkage. Volume steps do not perform any changes to the
component geometries.
3. The system opens the GEN STEPS menu and the STEP: Volume dialog box, which
contains the following options:
581
Þ References—Specifies references for the volume step. This is an optional field,
which allows you to select component, feature, surface, edge, curve, quilt, datum,
dimension or tolerance references to add to this general step.
Þ Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the volume step. This is an optional
field.
Þ Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the volume step. This is an optional
field.
4. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
4. The system opens the STEP: Mfg Model dialog box,which contains the following options:
582
Þ Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the manufacturing model setup. This
is an optional field.
Þ Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the manufacturing model setup. This
is an optional field.
5. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
Surface steps handle operations which involve offsetting one or more surfaces
by some amount. Surface steps do not perform any changes to the component
geometries.
3. The system opens the GEN STEPS menu and the STEP: Surface dialog box, which
contains the following options:
Þ References—Specifies references for the surface step. This is an optional field. You
can use it to select component, feature, surface, edge, curve, quilt, datum, dimension
or tolerance references to add to this general step.
4. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
583
View Steps
2. Click Set Step from the STEP REGEN menu. The system opens the SELECT STEP
menu with the current active step check marked.
4. The system displays the current active step in the manufacturing process and highlights
general or process references and material removals in magenta.
Note: Highlighting is performed for all step level commands; for example Next Step, Prev
Step, Set Step, but not for any operation level commands; for example Previous Oper,
Next Oper, or Set Operation.
2. Click Previous Step from the STEP REGEN menu to view a previous step.
The system displays the previous step in the manufacturing and highlights general or
process references and material removals in magenta.
3. Click Previous Step from the STEP REGEN menu to view another previous step, or
click Done/Return.
The system displays the next step in the manufacturing process and highlights general
or process references and material removals in magenta.
2. Click Set Operation from the STEP REGEN menu. The system opens the SELECT
OPER menu with the current active operation check marked.
584
2. Click Previous Oper from the STEP REGEN menu. The system displays the model at
the end of the previous operation.
3. Click Next Oper from the STEP REGEN menu to display the model at the end of the
next operation, or click Done/Return.
You can use Drawing mode to easily create in process documents, similar to
the way you create a view of a part or assembly, by selecting a process step
from a list. The system creates a default view of the process component at
that step.
2. Click Dwg Models from the VIEWS menu to add, remove, or set as current one of the
drawing models.
3. Click Set State from the DWG MODELS menu to set the process state of the current
drawing model, and then designate the process representation.
Using the Process State dialog box, you can select a process step and simplified
representation.
The Process State dialog box contains a scrollable list that displays the
process component steps. You can select a step to show in the view. If
simplified representations are available, you can select one from the drop-
down list. The system selects the representation for that process state by
default.
The Process State dialog box also contains a Final Mfg State option which
appears at the end of the list of process states. The Final Mfg State
represents the state which was used when creating views or repeat regions of
assembly machining assemblies prior to Pro/ENGINEER Release 18.0. The
585
geometry is in its final state, and the active fixture is the last one activated in
Pro/Mfg.
• It allows you to obtain the state expected prior to Pro/ENGINEER Release 18.0. For
example, you may have a machining assembly—which you may or may not have
previously worked on in Pro/PROCESS for MFG—which is configured with the
expectation that the pre-Release 18.0 state is used when creating the drawing. Hence,
this state is necessary for compatibility with legacy models and legacy work habits
• If no fixture was activated in Pro/MFG, then it allows you to create views or repeat
regions which always reference the final state of the manufacturing process, regardless
of which steps are added, removed, or reordered in the future.
2. Click Type > Drawing from the File Open dialog box
4. From the New Drawing dialog box, you can specifiy a default model, also the sheet size
and orientation for the drawing.
5. Click OK.
The system copies the manufacturing processes and generates a new sheet. The Copy
Process function preserves the scale and orientation of the process component. Click
586
Cancel from the Process State dialog box to return to the DRAWING menu, or select
another step and click OK to create more copies.
4. Click Set Current from the SHEETS menu and enter the new sheet number.
If you have a license for Pro/DETAIL, you can use the Sheets command in
the DRAWING menu to create multiple sheet drawings and move items from
one sheet to another. You can view the sheets of a multi-sheet drawing using
Pro/ENGINEER.
• Set Current—Sets a current sheet. This option is only available when there is more
than one sheet.
• Process State—Sets or resets the state for the entire sheet, for both views and repeat
regions.
• Reorder—Moves a sheet from its present position to another. If there are only two
sheets, the system reorders them automatically.
• Switch Sheet—Moves items (views, detail and draft items, and drawing tables) from
one sheet to another. If the drawing has only one sheet, the system automatically creates
a second sheet after you click items to move.
When there is more than one sheet in a drawing, an additional tag, SHEET #
OF # displays at the bottom of the main window. When working with multi-
sheet drawings, keep in mind the following:
• When you switch a projection view to another sheet, it becomes independent. You can
then move the parent view, and the projection view on another sheet does not update. If
you switch these views again to the same sheet, the projection view immediately becomes
a child of the parent.
• Partial views stay unchanged on one sheet when you change the scale on another.
• If you erase a view on one sheet, you can resume it on any other sheet.
587
Read About Process State
1. Click Process State from the MODIFY VIEW menu, then select a view of a process
component.
The system displays the Process State dialog box with the process component state and
simplified representation used in the view selected in the lists.
2. Click the process component state and/or the simplified representation you want to
change
3. Click OK.
The system changes the view process state to the selected process state. The system
makes this state the current process component state when creating new views.
The system opens the Process State dialog box with the current process component
state and simplified representation selected in the lists.
2. Click the process component state and/or the simplified representation you wish to set.
3. Click OK.
The system sets this state as the current process component state when creating new
views.
When the current default model is a machining process assembly and a view
or repeat region of the current default model exists on the current sheet, then
the new view or repeat region's process state becomes that of the existing
view or repeat region. The simplified representation of the view or repeat
region being added becomes that of the current, default model.
588
About Modifying a View or Repeat Region
When you select a view of a machining process assembly using Modify View
and ProcessState and then change the process state, this change applies to
all views and repeat regions of this assembly on the current sheet. This
change also applies to any sheet containing child views from the current
sheet—-and so on recursively. Use the Model/Rep user interface to examine
tables describing this behavior.
The system prompts you to confirm or cancel this change if it affects any view
or repeat region which you did not originally select for modification. The
simplified representation specified only affects the views or repeat regions
which you originally selected.
• If there are no views or repeat regions of the assembly on the target sheet, or the process
state of such views or repeat regions is the same as that of the view or repeat region
being moved, then nothing changes from the current system behavior. This is the same
as the current Pro/PROCESS for ASSEMBLIES behavior.
• If there are views or repeat regions of the assembly on the target sheet, or the process
state of such views or repeat regions is not the same as that of the view or repeat region
being moved, each complete set of related views simply has its process state changed to
that existing on the target sheet.
If you select any view to move whose parent or child view you did not selected to move,
the system prompts you to confirm or cancel changing the state of all other sheets upon
which related views remain.
• The Dwg Models menu option Set State is dimmed except when the current sheet has
no views or repeat regions of this assembly.
• When you enter a sheet containing views or repeat regions of this assembly, the current,
default process state changes to that of the views or repeat regions on the entered sheet.
589
• If you use the Set Model option to switch the current model to a machining process
assembly which appears on the current sheet, the system switches the process state of
this newly current model to that appearing on the current sheet.
Reports
2. Enter the name of the report and click OK to open the New Report dialog box.
3. Specify a sheet size with Set Size, or use the Retrieve Format to retrieve a format that
you previously created.
4. Click an instance and click Open to display a drawing sheet in the active window, and
the REPORT menu.
6. Click Create.
7. Define a repeat region. Click Repeat Region from the TABLE menu, and then click Add
from the TBL REGIONS menu.
8. Pick the cells that you want to include to repeat with model.
9. Enter title text in a row or column outside of the repeat region (unless you want that text
to repeat with every occurrence of model data) by using Enter Text and typing the
desired text.
10.The repeat region in the table must contain symbol parameter information to be displayed
in the table. You can enter these using the keyboard by choosing Enter Text from the
TABLE menu and Keyboard from the ENTER CELL menu; or you can click Report
Sym from the ENTER CELL menu.
11.Add the process model to the report by clicking Views from the REPORT menu and
entering the name of the process.
12.To add views of the assembly to the report, continue by adding a general view to the
sheet. If you do not want views of the model in the report, click Quit from the VIEW
TYPE menu and Done/Return from the VIEWS menu. The system still adds the model
to the report, but it does not display it on the sheet. You can add the drawing views at any
time.
14.You can add a drawing format to the report or change it by selecting Format from the
SHEETS menu and Add/Replace from the DRAW FORMAT menu. You can predefine
tables on these drawing formats and save them to be recalled at any time into a report or
drawing.
590
You may also add the drawing table used in the report by including it in a drawing
format that you can retrieve. When you add a drawing format containing a table to a
report, drawing, or layout, the table becomes independent of the format. If you decide to
replace the format, the table highlights, and you can delete it.
591
&mfg.actoper.actstep. Lists the name of
name the currently active
step associated with
the currently active
operation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep. Lists the names of
param.name all parameters
associated with the
current process step
associated with the
currently active
operation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep. Lists the values of
param.value all parameters
associated with the
current process step
associated with the
currently active
operation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep. Lists the tool of the
tool currently active step
associated with the
currently active
operation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep. Lists the type of the
type currently active step
associated with the
currently active
operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.com Lists the name for
p.name each component
associated with the
currently active
operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.com Lists the types of all
p.type manufacturing
processes for all
steps associated
with the currently
active operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.com Lists the names of
p.param.name all parameters for
each process
component
associated with the
currently active
operation.
592
&mfg.actoper.step.com Lists the values of
p.param.value all parameters for
each process
component
associated with the
currently active
operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.nam Lists the name for
e each step associated
with the currently
active operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.par Lists the names of
am.name all parameters for
each step associated
with the currently
active operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.par Lists the values of
am.value all parameters for
each step associated
with the currently
active operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.too Lists the tool for
l each step associated
with the currently
active operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.typ Lists the type for
e each step associated
with the currently
active operation.
&mfg.oper.step.comp.n Lists the names of
ame all components for
all operations.
&mfg.oper.step.comp.p Lists the names of
aram.name all parameters for
each process
component for each
step associated with
all operations.
&mfg.oper.step.comp.p Lists the values of
aram.value all parameters for
each process
component for each
step associated with
all operations.
&mfg.oper.step.comp.t Lists the type of
ype component being
593
processed for each
step associated with
all operations.
&mfg.oper.step.name Displays the name
of each step
associated with all
operations.
&mfg.oper.step.param. Lists the names of
name all parameters
associated with the
steps associated
with all operations.
&mfg.oper.step.param. Lists the values of
value all parameters
associated with the
steps associated
with all operations.
&mfg.oper.step.tool Displays the tool for
every step
associated with all
operations.
&mfg.oper.step.type Displays the type
for every step
associated with all
operations.
A
Repeat Regions in Reports
• System and user-defined parameters (such as description, time, and cost) for which the
values are extracted from the model that is associated with the report.
By using repeat regions, your tables that contain report data can expand and
contract with varying quantities of data supplied by the models.
594
If you have a license for Pro/REPORT, you can create a repeat region in any
mode in which you can create a table (Drawing, Report, Layout, Diagram, or
Format mode). You can nest repeat regions or make them two-directional.
Using these options, you can access an information window that displays the
complete process sequence. It includes information such as the step type,
description, all attributes, and their values. The system saves this
information to a file as it is displayed, so you can print it without actually
stepping through all of the steps.
• Machining defined
• Time estimate
• Cost estimate
• Full description
595
When you show the status of components in the design assembly, you can add
a column in the model tree called process status, which lists the current
status of all components (that is, assembled, not assembled, assembling, and
so on.)
Simplified Representations
Note: When dealing with simplified representations on models, be sure that references you
have removed do not affect downstream applications. For example, if you place a
machine coordinate system on a fixture, and then use a simplified representation to
remove the fixture for display purposes, it is possible toolpaths will not compute as their
references no longer exist.
Components are excluded or substituted for only one step in the process
assembly by creating or setting the current representation when defining or
redefining the step.
2. Choose Simplfd Rep from the STEP dialog box to set or create a simplified
representation for the step.
You can use simplified representations of the design assembly when you create assemble
steps in the process assembly.
596
To Retrieve a Simplified Representation From a Process
1. Create a simplified representation of the process component before adding the design
model to the process.
Note: Components excluded in the design model do not appear on the screen in phantom line
font but appear in the Model Tree of the assembly where they are selected.
Sample Session
2. Enter the manufacturing part name. The system regenerates the process model, displays
the last step in the process model, and displays the part's model tree.
597
To Create Drawings
1. To create a new drawing sheet select File > New.
5. Click Done to create the drawing and open the DRAWING menu and the DETAIL menu.
6. To add or modify views and data placement on the drawing sheet, click Views > Add
View from the DRAWING menu.
2. Select the step you wish to set as active and click OK.
3. To roll the model forward one step, select Next Step from the Step Regen menu. The
system displays material removals and process references in magenta.
Note: The step display allows you to interactively examine the model.
598
The following three figures represent Step 2, Step 3, and Step 4 of the model.
Note: Rolling the model from step to step represents successive processing steps; that is
process planning stages.
599
To Use the Copy Process Functionality
The Copy Process functionality allows you to refer to a predefined sheet as
a template for subsequent sheets. The process plan model is maintained
within process plan files. It may be necessary for you to document route
sheets and/or process plan sheets using the Pro/DETAIL function.
2. Enter the name of the drawing. The system regenerates the drawing and displays the
first sheet in the drawing.
600
3. To move to the next drawing select Sheets > Next. The system displays the next drawing
sheet.
4. To copy the process select Sheets > Copy Process. The system displays the Process
State dialog box, from which you can select the process state for the next sheet by clicking
OK.
5. To set the current sheet select Sheets > Set Current, and enter the desired sheet
number directly.
601
Cover Plan Sheet 2 of 3 with Notes is shown below
602
603
Cover Plan Sheet 3 of 3 with Notes is shown below.
604
605
For this example, Sheet 4 is set as the current (see Copy Process Sheet 4 Set
as Current.)
606
To Define a New Operation
1. Click File > New.
2. Click Type > Manufacturing, and Sub-type > Process Plan to open the
MANUFACTURING menu..
4. Click Operation to open the DEFINE OPER menu from which you can define the new
operation.
For this example, Workcell is checked along with Done Oper, and menu commands
Workcell —> Use Prev —> OP020 are selected. This indicates that the workcell used
for this new step is the same as the one used in a previous operation (OP020).
As shown in the dialog box below, the name of the fixture step is defined as SETUP_2,
one fixture component is disassembled and then reassembled onto the part, comments
are entered, no simplified representation is defined, a time estimate of 0.15 and a cost
estimate of 5.00 are supplied.
607
608
Index
4
4 Axis Area ...........................................................................................................................................................280
TURN SEQ .......................................................................................................................................................280
4 Axis Plane ..........................................................................................................................................................163
4X_LEAD_ANGLE....................................................................................................................................... 104, 111
4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT ............................................................................................................................. 104, 111
4X_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE............................................................................................................................ 104, 111
4X_MIN_LEAD_ANGLE ............................................................................................................................. 104, 111
4X_TILT_ANGLE ................................................................................................................................................111
A
Abort.....................................................................................................................................................................392
GOUGE STOP ..................................................................................................................................................391
Above CtrLn..........................................................................................................................................................292
Acme.....................................................................................................................................................................286
Activate.................................................................................................................................................................153
FIXTURE SET....................................................................................................................................................47
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................153
Add ............................................................................................................................................................... 166, 356
AXIS DEF.........................................................................................................................................................355
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................166
CORNER COND...............................................................................................................................................330
CREATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375
FEATURE REFS...............................................................................................................................................243
HEIGHT ...........................................................................................................................................................221
SELECT SRFS
for Milling.....................................................................................................................................................160
SELECT SRFS
for Gouge Checking.......................................................................................................................................391
SKETCH VOL ..................................................................................................................................................251
STOCK BOUND...............................................................................................................................................271
SURF DEFINE.......................................................................................................................................... 258, 263
SYNCH
in Trajectory Milling......................................................................................................................................227
in Wire EDM.................................................................................................................................................335
TAPER ANGLE................................................................................................................................................329
Add Ref Prts..........................................................................................................................................................162
Add Slice...............................................................................................................................................................178
Adjust Tool............................................................................................................................................................169
PIVOT CRV......................................................................................................................................................169
Advanced ..............................................................................................................................................................250
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250
SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
AI Macro...............................................................................................................................................................286
All...........................................................................................................................................................................47
609
CLEAR ...............................................................................................................................................................47
GATHER FILL .................................................................................................................................................247
REPLACE.........................................................................................................................................................391
All Loops ..............................................................................................................................................................249
CLOSURE ........................................................................................................................................................249
All Operations .........................................................................................................................................................53
All Opts.................................................................................................................................................................430
ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES ...................................................................................................................................101
AlngToolAxis........................................................................................................................................................369
TOOL APPR .....................................................................................................................................................369
Along Cutline ........................................................................................................................................................167
AXIS DEF OPT.................................................................................................................................................167
Along Z.................................................................................................................................................................223
Along Z Dir ...........................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................166
DEFINE AXIS ..................................................................................................................................................355
ALT_OSETNO_VAL .............................................................................................................................127, 128, 132
Alternate................................................................................................................................................................345
WHICH REF.....................................................................................................................................................345
ALTERNATE_SIDE_OUTPUT..................................................................................................................... 127, 132
Append..................................................................................................................................................................388
Appr Walls ............................................................................................................................................................172
APPR_EXIT_EXT.................................................................................................................................................118
APPR_EXIT_HEIGHT ..........................................................................................................................................119
APPR_EXIT_PATH ..............................................................................................................................................118
Approach....................................................................................................................................................... 177, 178
BUILD CUT .....................................................................................................................................................177
Approach Point......................................................................................................................................................328
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................328
APPROACH_DISTANCE ............................................................................................................................. 119, 120
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
APPROACH_FEED ...................................................................................................................................... 112, 119
APPROACH_MOVE.............................................................................................................................................147
APPROACH_TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................120
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
APPROXIMATE_SPLINES ..................................................................................................................................142
Arc Length ............................................................................................................................................................272
END DIM TYPE ...............................................................................................................................................272
ARC_FEED...........................................................................................................................................................112
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
ARC_FEED_CONTROL .......................................................................................................................................112
Area ......................................................................................................................................................................276
TURN SEQ .......................................................................................................................................................276
Assemble.................................................................................................................................................................24
FIXT COMP .......................................................................................................................................................47
MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................23
Assembly machining................................................................................................................................................20
manufacturing model ...........................................................................................................................................27
manufacturing process ............................................................................................................................. 21, 22, 23
ATTACH_WIDTH ................................................................................................................................................143
Attributes ..............................................................................................................................................................425
610
REDEF NC SEQ ...............................................................................................................................................425
Auto ......................................................................................................................................................................306
Auto Drilling ................................................................................................................................................. 317, 323
create ................................................................................................................................................................318
reorder ..............................................................................................................................................................324
AUTO_INNER_CUTLINE....................................................................................................................................102
AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE.......................................................................................................................................102
Automatic................................................................................................................................................................58
CORNER ADD
in Milling ......................................................................................................................................................229
in Turning .....................................................................................................................................................273
in Wire EDM.................................................................................................................................................330
MAT REMOVAL................................................................................................................................................58
VOL..................................................................................................................................................................175
AUTOSYNCH_START_END ...............................................................................................................................142
Auxiliary ...............................................................................................................................................................342
Axis ......................................................................................................................................................................178
APPR EXIT OPT ..............................................................................................................................................177
Axis control...........................................................................................................................................................165
variable .............................................................................................................................................................165
Axis Def................................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS_DEF_CONTROL ........................................................................................................................................103
AXIS_SHIFT.........................................................................................................................................................109
B
BACK_BORE_CLEARANCE...............................................................................................................................141
BACK_CLEAR_ANGLE ......................................................................................................................................131
Beginning
LOCATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375
Below CtrLn..........................................................................................................................................................292
Bisect ....................................................................................................................................................................331
Blank ....................................................................................................................................................................257
DRILL GROUP.................................................................................................................................................315
Blend
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250
SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
Blind
DRILL DEPTH .................................................................................................................................................305
Bndry Chain ..........................................................................................................................................................198
Bndry Loops..........................................................................................................................................................244
Bndry Srfs .............................................................................................................................................................244
Bore .............................................................................................................................................................. 299, 300
Boss Top ....................................................................................................................................................... 518, 520
creating .............................................................................................................................................................518
machining .........................................................................................................................................................521
BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT..................................................................................................................................106
BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW ................................................................................................................................107
Break Chip ............................................................................................................................................................299
BREAKOUT_DISTANCE.....................................................................................................................................138
Build Cut...............................................................................................................................................................178
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................164
Build Slice.............................................................................................................................................................176
Buttress .................................................................................................................................................................286
611
By Copy
USE TOOL .........................................................................................................................................................79
By Cur Oper ............................................................................................................................................................53
By Cut
USE PRV OPT..................................................................................................................................................334
By FeatList............................................................................................................................................................373
By NC Seq
USE PRV OPT..................................................................................................................................................334
By Pick..................................................................................................................................................................373
By Reference
USE TOOL .........................................................................................................................................................79
By Region .............................................................................................................................................................178
By Rule .................................................................................................................................................................373
By Slice.................................................................................................................................................................178
By Tool .................................................................................................................................................................373
C
Cap Plane ..............................................................................................................................................................249
Chamfer
CORN MOTION ...............................................................................................................................................274
CHAMFER_DIM ..................................................................................................................................................131
Change
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
SELECT SRFS..................................................................................................................................................160
Change Type .........................................................................................................................................................330
Channel ......................................................................................................................................................... 505, 507
creating .............................................................................................................................................................505
machining ................................................................................................................................................. 507, 508
Check Surfs ...........................................................................................................................................................162
chk_part_surfs_profpock ........................................................................................................................................163
CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW........................................................................................................................ 111, 112
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
CIRC_INTERPOLATION .................................................................................................................................89, 90
Circular interpolation ...............................................................................................................................................90
set up ................................................................................................................................................................420
CL Command ........................................................................................................................................................372
SKETCHER......................................................................................................................................................355
CL data ......................................................................................................................................................... 379, 550
adding CL commands ........................................................................................................................................372
deleting a command ................................................................................................................................... 378, 551
display
in real time mode...........................................................................................................................................385
interrupting....................................................................................................................................................385
when creating an NC sequence.......................................................................................................................385
edit............................................................................................................................................................ 388, 390
including postprocessor words ...........................................................................................................................550
including post-processor words ..........................................................................................................................398
NC aliases .........................................................................................................................................................394
output
for a set of NC sequences...............................................................................................................................381
redefining a command................................................................................................................................ 400, 551
saving to file......................................................................................................................................................552
612
subroutine programming ....................................................................................................................................401
using parameters.................................................................................................................................372, 399, 551
CL file...................................................................................................................................................................379
CL Measure...........................................................................................................................................................385
CL TRANSF menu ................................................................................................................................................386
cl_arrow_scale.......................................................................................................................................................383
CL_DIST...............................................................................................................................................................144
CL_OUTPUT_MODE ...........................................................................................................................................144
Clear
FIXT COMP .......................................................................................................................................................47
Clear Edits.............................................................................................................................................................388
CLEAR_DIST ............................................................................................................................................... 116, 121
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CLEARANCE_EDGE ...........................................................................................................................................120
CLEARANCE_OFFSET........................................................................................................................................140
CntrSrfLocal..........................................................................................................................................................182
Cnvnl Local ...........................................................................................................................................................182
Colors
tool motions ......................................................................................................................................................432
Command
MODIFY CMD .................................................................................................................................................377
Comments
OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................................52
SEQ SETUP........................................................................................................................................................52
Component
DEFINE FIXT.....................................................................................................................................................47
COMPONENT menu.............................................................................................................................................569
commands .........................................................................................................................................................569
Concave
CORN MOTION ...............................................................................................................................................331
CONCAVE_RADIUS............................................................................................................................................130
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
Configuration options ............................................................................................................................................444
assy_mfg_open_mode........................................................................................................................................444
freeform_toolpath_matrem.................................................................................................................................543
pro_mf_tprm_dir ...............................................................................................................................................467
Constant Peck ........................................................................................................................................................301
Construct.................................................................................................................................................................58
Continue
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385
GOUGE STOP ..................................................................................................................................................391
Contour1 ...............................................................................................................................................................337
Contour2 ...............................................................................................................................................................337
Contouring ............................................................................................................................................................324
Convex
CORN MOTION ...............................................................................................................................................331
CONVEX_RADIUS ..............................................................................................................................................130
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
COOLANT_OPTION ..............................................................................................................................................90
COOLANT_PRESSURE .........................................................................................................................................90
Coord Sys
SEQ SETUP........................................................................................................................................................48
613
Coordinate system
machine...............................................................................................................................................................49
NC sequence .......................................................................................................................................................49
orientation ...........................................................................................................................................................49
select.............................................................................................................................................................48, 49
COORDINATE_OUTPUT.......................................................................................................................................90
Copy
CL COMMAND................................................................................................................................................378
SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
Copy Text..............................................................................................................................................................388
Copy Volume ........................................................................................................................................................256
Corner Edges
LOCAL OPT.....................................................................................................................................................180
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................183
CORNER_ANGLE................................................................................................................................................331
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE .....................................................................................................................................126
CORNER_LENGTH...................................................................................................................................... 331, 332
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
CORNER_OFFSET...............................................................................................................................................110
CORNER_ROUND_RADIUS ...............................................................................................................................108
Corners
INT CUT
in Milling ......................................................................................................................................................229
in Turning .....................................................................................................................................................273
in Wire EDM.................................................................................................................................................330
Countersink ...........................................................................................................................................................300
Create
CL COMMAND........................................................................................................................................ 375, 376
CTRL PNT........................................................................................................................................................351
DEF END............................................................................................................................................................53
DEF FROM.........................................................................................................................................................53
DEF HOME ........................................................................................................................................................53
DEF START .......................................................................................................................................................53
DRILL GROUP.................................................................................................................................................315
FIXT COMP .......................................................................................................................................................47
FIXTURE SET....................................................................................................................................................47
GROUP..................................................................................................................................................... 345, 346
MACH CSYS......................................................................................................................................................48
MDB SETUP ....................................................................................................................................................155
MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................23
NCSEQ COMM ..................................................................................................................................................52
PECK TABLE...................................................................................................................................................301
RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340
SEL...................................................................................................................................................................391
SEQ CSYS..........................................................................................................................................................48
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................151
SUBROUTINES........................................................................................................................................ 401, 403
Create Profile.........................................................................................................................................................289
Csys Pattern...........................................................................................................................................................428
Cur Workcell .........................................................................................................................................................153
Current Dir
SELECT SITE...................................................................................................................................................153
Curve Chain
614
CHAIN..............................................................................................................................................................293
Customize ...............................................................................................................................................................51
including post....................................................................................................................................................372
CUSTOMIZE_AUTO_RETRACT.........................................................................................................................104
Cut
INT CUT...........................................................................................................................................................218
Cut Motion
INFO ITEMS ....................................................................................................................................................175
Cut motions
for volume and profile milling............................................................................................................................174
CUT_ANGLE........................................................................................................................................................109
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CUT_DIRECTION ............................................................................................................................................98, 99
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CUT_ENTRY_EXT ..............................................................................................................................................122
CUT_EXIT_EXT...................................................................................................................................................122
CUT_FEED.............................................................................................................................................................89
CUT_MOTION_CONNECT..................................................................................................................................144
CUT_OFFSET.......................................................................................................................................................136
CUT_TYPE..................................................................................................................................................... 99, 114
CUT_UNITS ...........................................................................................................................................................89
CUTCOM ..............................................................................................................................................113, 114, 115
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CUTCOM_LOC_APPR.........................................................................................................................................114
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
CUTCOM_LOC_EXIT..........................................................................................................................................114
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
CUTCOM_MOVE.................................................................................................................................................145
CUTCOM_MOVE_APPROACH...........................................................................................................................145
CUTCOM_ON_SPIRAL........................................................................................................................................115
CUTCOM_REG_INCR .........................................................................................................................................146
CUTCOM_REG_START ......................................................................................................................................146
CUTCOM_REGISTER..........................................................................................................................................114
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CUTLINE_EXT_TYPE .........................................................................................................................................102
CUTLINE_TYPE ............................................................................................................................................ 94, 102
Cutter Step ............................................................................................................................................................385
Cutting tools ..........................................................................................................................................................468
adding a new tool...............................................................................................................................................468
deleting .............................................................................................................................................................471
materials setup...................................................................................................................................................467
modifying..........................................................................................................................................................471
retrieving...........................................................................................................................................................470
saving parameters ..............................................................................................................................................471
setting up...........................................................................................................................................................465
sketched tools ....................................................................................................................................................470
specifying speeds and feeds ...............................................................................................................................469
615
using solid tools......................................................................................................................................... 471, 472
CYCLE_FORMAT................................................................................................................................................138
CYCLE_OUTPUT.................................................................................................................................................138
D
Datum Axis ...........................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................166
DEFINE AXIS ..................................................................................................................................................355
Datum Point
APPR EXIT OPT ..............................................................................................................................................177
CREATE POINT...............................................................................................................................................360
Deep.............................................................................................................................................................. 299, 300
DEEP_GROOVE_OPTION ...................................................................................................................................128
Define
CLOSE LOOP...................................................................................................................................................249
CORNER EDG .................................................................................................................................................183
MILL START PNT ...........................................................................................................................................209
OPER ORDER ..................................................................................................................................................373
PIVOT CRV......................................................................................................................................................169
PIVOT PNT ......................................................................................................................................................168
SYNCH OPER ..................................................................................................................................................374
Define Order
ORDER PATCH ...............................................................................................................................................182
Del Pattern ............................................................................................................................................................427
DELAY
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
DELAY_UNITS ....................................................................................................................................................140
Delete
CL COMMAND................................................................................................................................................400
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
CLOSE LOOP...................................................................................................................................................249
DRILL GROUP.................................................................................................................................................315
FIXTURE SET....................................................................................................................................................47
HOLES .............................................................................................................................................................303
MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................24
PECK TABLE...................................................................................................................................................301
RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
SUBROUTINES................................................................................................................................................401
Delete Profile.........................................................................................................................................................289
Depth
SLICE ...............................................................................................................................................................176
Design model
replace ................................................................................................................................................................25
Design UDF ..........................................................................................................................................................343
Detach
WEDM OPT .....................................................................................................................................................325
Dialog boxes.................................................................................................................... 202, 480, 514, 516, 528, 530
Boss Top Feature...............................................................................................................................................518
Boss Top Milling...............................................................................................................................................521
Channel Feature.................................................................................................................................................505
Channel Milling.................................................................................................................................................508
616
CL Command .....................................................................................................................................398, 399, 550
Create Stock ......................................................................................................................................................448
Drilling Strategy ................................................................................................................................................536
Entry Hole................................................................................................................................................. 541, 542
Entry/Exit Move ................................................................................................................................................202
Face Feature ......................................................................................................................................................482
Face Milling ......................................................................................................................................................483
Flange Feature...................................................................................................................................................524
Flange Milling...................................................................................................................................................527
Freeform Milling ...............................................................................................................................................545
Machine Tool Settings ................................................................................................................................. 37, 458
Machining Properties.........................................................................................................................................480
Operation Setup........................................................................................................................................... 32, 454
O-Ring Feature..................................................................................................................................................528
O-Ring Milling..................................................................................................................................................530
PLAY PATH.....................................................................................................................................................548
Pocket Feature...................................................................................................................................................490
Pocket Milling...................................................................................................................................................492
Profile Feature...................................................................................................................................................502
Profile Milling...................................................................................................................................................504
Slab Feature ......................................................................................................................................................485
Slab Milling ......................................................................................................................................................488
Slot Feature .......................................................................................................................................................511
Slot Milling ............................................................................................................................................... 513, 514
Step Feature ......................................................................................................................................................498
Step Milling ......................................................................................................................................................500
Through Pocket Feature .....................................................................................................................................493
Through Pocket Milling .....................................................................................................................................496
Through Slot Feature .........................................................................................................................................514
Through Slot Milling .........................................................................................................................................516
Tool Setup.........................................................................................................................................................465
Dimensions
MOD NC SEQ ..................................................................................................................................................424
Direction
CUT ALNG.......................................................................................................................................................335
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................219
Disp Cycles ...........................................................................................................................................................385
Disp Model..............................................................................................................................................................79
Display
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................383
Done
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385
Done Oper...............................................................................................................................................................31
Drawing mode ............................................................................................................................................... 577, 578
about .................................................................................................................................................................577
creating customized documentation ....................................................................................................................577
enter a new or existing drawing..........................................................................................................................578
Drill .............................................................................................................................................................. 299, 300
Drill Group............................................................................................................................................................315
Drive Surf..............................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF OPT.................................................................................................................................................166
617
E
Edge......................................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF OPT.................................................................................................................................................166
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................219
INTERACT PATH ............................................................................................................................................219
Edges
SELECT CRNR ................................................................................................................................................183
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................238
Edit
CL DATA ................................................................................................................................................. 388, 389
CREATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375
TOOL MODE ...................................................................................................................................................216
End
CUT ENDS .......................................................................................................................................................272
LOCATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375
End Plane ..............................................................................................................................................................232
END_MOTION .......................................................................................................................................................91
END_OVERTRAVEL...........................................................................................................................................111
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
END_STEP_DEPTH .............................................................................................................................................128
END_STOP_CONDITION ......................................................................................................................................90
Ends
INT CUT...........................................................................................................................................................272
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................272
Engraving..............................................................................................................................................................238
Enter String ...........................................................................................................................................................377
Enter Value
DEFINE AXIS ..................................................................................................................................................355
Entry Hole ..................................................................................................................................................... 540, 542
creating .............................................................................................................................................................540
machining ................................................................................................................................................. 542, 543
ENTRY_ANGLE....................................................................................................................................116, 120, 121
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
ENTRY_EDGE .....................................................................................................................................................120
Excld Surfs............................................................................................................................................................171
Exclude .................................................................................................................................................................247
Exit
BUILD CUT .....................................................................................................................................................177
EXIT_ANGLE.......................................................................................................................................................121
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
EXIT_DISTANCE
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
EXIT_FEED..........................................................................................................................................................120
EXIT_TYPE..........................................................................................................................................................121
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
Expert Machinist....................................................................................................................................................443
creating a process ..............................................................................................................................................443
creating an NC Model........................................................................................................................................444
618
modal settings....................................................................................................................................................443
process overview ...............................................................................................................................................442
retrieving a process ............................................................................................................................................444
EXT DIR menu......................................................................................................................................................271
Extend...................................................................................................................................................................264
Extrude
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250
SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
F
Face ......................................................................................................................................................................482
creating .............................................................................................................................................................482
HOLE MAKING ...............................................................................................................................................299
machining .........................................................................................................................................................483
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................209
Features......................................................................................................................................................... 514, 528
adjusting boundaries ..........................................................................................................................................475
adjusting depth ..................................................................................................................................................479
adjusting Soft Walls...........................................................................................................................................479
Boss Top ...........................................................................................................................................................518
Channel.............................................................................................................................................................505
creating .............................................................................................................................................................475
Entry Hole................................................................................................................................................. 540, 541
Face ..................................................................................................................................................................482
Flange ...............................................................................................................................................................524
Free Form..........................................................................................................................................................543
GATHER SEL...................................................................................................................................................244
Hole Group .......................................................................................................................................................532
machining .........................................................................................................................................................480
O-Ring ..............................................................................................................................................................528
Pocket ...............................................................................................................................................................490
Profile ...............................................................................................................................................................502
Program Zero ....................................................................................................................................................456
Slab...................................................................................................................................................................485
Slot ...................................................................................................................................................................511
Step...................................................................................................................................................................498
Through Pocket .................................................................................................................................................493
Through Slot .....................................................................................................................................................514
types of machining features................................................................................................................................473
using the Model Tree .........................................................................................................................................556
Feed Color.............................................................................................................................................................432
Female Part ...........................................................................................................................................................330
FF
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
File
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................379
Filename
GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................391
Fill ........................................................................................................................................................................247
Fillet
CORN MOTION
in Milling ......................................................................................................................................................230
in Turning .....................................................................................................................................................274
619
in Wire EDM.................................................................................................................................................331
SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
FINA.......................................................................................................................................................................92
Find............................................................................................................................................................... 377, 378
Finish
WEDM OPT .....................................................................................................................................................325
First.......................................................................................................................................................................430
Fixed
HOLE MAKING ...............................................................................................................................................299
FIXT_OFFSET_REG ..............................................................................................................................................90
Fixture.....................................................................................................................................................................47
Fixtures ...................................................................................................................................................................46
Flange ........................................................................................................................................................... 524, 526
creating .............................................................................................................................................................524
machining ................................................................................................................................................. 526, 527
Flat........................................................................................................................................................................258
FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR........................................................................................................................................139
Floating .................................................................................................................................................................299
FLUSH_REG_APPROACH...................................................................................................................................146
FLUSH_REG_DETACH .......................................................................................................................................147
FLUSH_REG_INCR..............................................................................................................................................146
FLUSH_REG_START...........................................................................................................................................146
Follow Sketch........................................................................................................................................................355
Free Form machining ..................................................................................................................................... 543, 544
FREE_FEED ...........................................................................................................................................................89
From ............................................................................................................................................................. 174, 293
From Depth ...........................................................................................................................................................177
From Edges
CUT LINE DEF ................................................................................................................................................198
From File
CL INSERT.......................................................................................................................................................375
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
G
Gen Assem ..............................................................................................................................................................26
General
THREAD TYPE................................................................................................................................................286
GENRTR_APPROACH.........................................................................................................................................147
GENRTR_DETACH..............................................................................................................................................147
GENRTR_FINISH.................................................................................................................................................147
GENRTR_REG_INCR ..........................................................................................................................................147
GENRTR_ROUGH ...............................................................................................................................................147
Go Delta................................................................................................................................................................362
Go Home ...............................................................................................................................................................363
GoTo Point ............................................................................................................................................................360
Gouge Check .........................................................................................................................................................391
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Groove
TURN SEQ .......................................................................................................................................................283
Groove Feat...........................................................................................................................................................238
620
GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE......................................................................................................................127, 128, 131
Group
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................345
H
HEAD 1 ................................................................................................................................................................276
HEAD 2 ................................................................................................................................................................276
Height
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................221
High speed machining............................................................................................................................................173
HOLDER_TYPE ...................................................................................................................................................276
Hole Group.................................................................................................................................................... 533, 535
combining selection methods .............................................................................................................................533
creating .............................................................................................................................................................532
machining .........................................................................................................................................................536
pattern selection.................................................................................................................................................534
selecting holes by axes.......................................................................................................................................534
selecting holes by diameter ................................................................................................................................534
selecting holes by feature parameters..................................................................................................................535
selecting holes on a surface ................................................................................................................................534
Hole Set .................................................................................................................................................303, 304, 305
Holemaking...........................................................................................................................................................298
5-axis ........................................................................................................................................................ 300, 301
depth options .....................................................................................................................................................305
selecting holes
by axes..........................................................................................................................................................307
by diameter ...................................................................................................................................................308
by feature parameters.....................................................................................................................................309
by points .......................................................................................................................................................309
on a surface ...................................................................................................................................................308
pattern selection.............................................................................................................................................307
using Drill Group...........................................................................................................................................316
using previous Hole Set .................................................................................................................................303
starting point ............................................................................................................................................. 306, 307
Holes............................................................................................................................................................. 298, 299
Horizontal
OFFSET SURF .................................................................................................................................................254
I
In Session
SELECT SITE...................................................................................................................................................153
Index Table ...........................................................................................................................................................429
INFEED_ANGLE..................................................................................................................................................137
Info
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330
GRP PLACE .....................................................................................................................................................345
OPER ORDER ..................................................................................................................................................373
SHOW GOUGE ................................................................................................................................................391
SUBROUTINES................................................................................................................................................401
UPTO DEPTH ..................................................................................................................................................175
Insert
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
621
Insert File ..............................................................................................................................................................388
ISO........................................................................................................................................................................286
J
JOG_DIST.............................................................................................................................................................141
Jump .....................................................................................................................................................................388
K
Keyboard...............................................................................................................................................................376
L
Lathe .................................................................................................................................................................35, 36
horizontal ............................................................................................................................................................36
vertical ................................................................................................................................................................36
Lead In
TOOL MOTION................................................................................................................................................367
Lead Out
TOOL MOTION................................................................................................................................................367
LEAD_RADIUS
in Milling ..........................................................................................................................................................141
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Left
SLOT OFFSET .................................................................................................................................................219
Library
fixtures..........................................................................................................................................................46, 47
tool models..........................................................................................................................................................77
Line
EDIT POS .........................................................................................................................................................388
LINTOL ..................................................................................................................................................................89
Local Mill..............................................................................................................................................................182
Location ................................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF OPT.................................................................................................................................................166
Loop
CORN MOTION ...............................................................................................................................................331
SURF ................................................................................................................................................................160
Loops
GATHER EXCL................................................................................................................................................247
GATHER FILL .................................................................................................................................................247
M
Mach Csys
OPERATION ................................................................................................................................................48, 49
Mach DB...............................................................................................................................................................155
MACH_ID...............................................................................................................................................................88
MACH_NAME .......................................................................................................................................................88
Machinability Database
setup .................................................................................................................................................................155
use ....................................................................................................................................................................158
Machine Srfs
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................184
622
Machine tools ........................................................................................................................................................458
creating .............................................................................................................................................................458
cutter compensation output ..................................................................................................................................36
default post.................................................................................................................................................. 36, 458
lathe ..............................................................................................................................................................36, 40
mill .....................................................................................................................................................................36
mill/turn .................................................................................................................................................. 36, 39, 40
wedm ..................................................................................................................................................................36
Machining ...............................................................................................................................480, 481, 482, 515, 529
Boss Top ...........................................................................................................................................................521
Channel.............................................................................................................................................................507
Entry Hole.........................................................................................................................................................542
Face ..................................................................................................................................................................483
Flange ...............................................................................................................................................................526
Free Form...........................................................................................................................................543, 544, 545
Hole Group .......................................................................................................................................................536
mimicking a tool path ........................................................................................................................................481
O-Ring ..............................................................................................................................................................529
Pocket ...............................................................................................................................................................491
Profile ...............................................................................................................................................................503
saving as template..............................................................................................................................................480
setting Tool Path Properties ...............................................................................................................................480
Slab...................................................................................................................................................................487
Slot ...................................................................................................................................................................512
Step...................................................................................................................................................................499
Through Pocket .................................................................................................................................................495
Through Slot .....................................................................................................................................................515
using settings for next tool path..........................................................................................................................480
using the Model Tree .........................................................................................................................................556
Male Part...............................................................................................................................................................330
Manufacture
assembly machining.......................................................................................................................................22, 23
coordinate systems...............................................................................................................................................48
Info Box ..............................................................................................................................................................30
machining process ...............................................................................................................................................28
material removal..................................................................................................................................................58
NC sequence .......................................................................................................................................................50
parameters............................................................................................................................................... 83, 84, 85
part machining...............................................................................................................................................22, 23
route sheet .........................................................................................................................................................437
setting up
machinability database...................................................................................................................................155
sites ..............................................................................................................................................................150
tool motion colors..........................................................................................................................................432
subroutine programming ....................................................................................................................................401
using part families ...............................................................................................................................................25
using Pro ................................................................................................................................................... 346, 438
workpiece............................................................................................................................................................20
MANUFACTURING menu ...................................................................................................................................566
Manufacturing model
assembly machining.............................................................................................................................................26
part machining
example .............................................................................................................................................. 20, 21, 22
Manufacturing UDF...............................................................................................................................................342
623
Material removal......................................................................................................................................................58
Matrl Remove..........................................................................................................................................................58
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
MCD File ..............................................................................................................................................................406
MDB Library.........................................................................................................................................................158
Measure
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
Mfg Assem..............................................................................................................................................................26
Mfg Geometry .......................................................................................................................................................243
Mfg Model ..............................................................................................................................................................24
MFG MODIFY menu ............................................................................................................................................570
MFG SEQUENCE menu........................................................................................................................................568
MFG SETUP menu................................................................................................................................................567
mfg_auto_ref_prt_as_chk_srf.................................................................................................................................163
mfg_xyz_num_digits
for Gouge Checking output ................................................................................................................................391
Mill .........................................................................................................................................................................35
Mill Surf................................................................................................................................................................244
Mill surface
adding patches...................................................................................................................................................258
creating .............................................................................................................................................................258
merging.............................................................................................................................................................264
modifying..........................................................................................................................................................265
shade......................................................................................................................................................... 264, 265
trim ...................................................................................................................................................................264
Mill Surface
MFG GEOMETRY ................................................................................................................................... 258, 263
SURF PICK.......................................................................................................................................................160
Mill Volume
MFG GEOMETRY ...........................................................................................................................................243
SURF PICK.......................................................................................................................................................160
Mill Window
MFG GEOMETRY ...........................................................................................................................................241
Mill/Turn.................................................................................................................................................................35
Milling ..................................................................................................................................................................207
4-axis ................................................................................................................................................................163
Build Cut at NC sequence level..........................................................................................................................164
defining mill window.........................................................................................................................................241
defining volume.................................................................................................................................................243
engraving ..........................................................................................................................................................237
facing ................................................................................................................................................................209
local .......................................................................................................................................................... 180, 181
pocketing...........................................................................................................................................................215
profiling .................................................................................................................................................... 213, 214
region................................................................................................................................................................178
swarf.................................................................................................................................................................207
thread................................................................................................................................................................231
trajectory...........................................................................................................................................................216
volume ...................................................................................................................................................... 170, 171
Milling volume
copying .............................................................................................................................................................256
for through pockets............................................................................................................................................249
624
example ........................................................................................................................................................252
gathering ...........................................................................................................................................................244
modifying..........................................................................................................................................................257
offset.................................................................................................................................................................255
round.................................................................................................................................................................256
shading..............................................................................................................................................................256
sketching...........................................................................................................................................................251
trim ...................................................................................................................................................................253
MIN_STEP_DEPTH
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Mirror
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................387
WEDM OPT .....................................................................................................................................................334
Mod NC Seq..........................................................................................................................................................424
Mod Pattern...........................................................................................................................................................430
Model
SURF PICK.......................................................................................................................................................160
Model Tree.................................................................................................................................................... 433, 434
Modify
CL COMMAND................................................................................................................................................377
DRILL GROUP.................................................................................................................................................316
FIXTURE SET....................................................................................................................................................47
MDB SETUP ....................................................................................................................................................155
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................424
NCSEQ COMM ..................................................................................................................................................52
pattern...............................................................................................................................................................430
PECK TABLE...................................................................................................................................................301
RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
Modify Dim...........................................................................................................................................................257
Modify Input .........................................................................................................................................................158
Modify Srf.............................................................................................................................................................265
Modify Surf...........................................................................................................................................................265
Modify Vol
MILL VOLUME ...............................................................................................................................................256
Motion Params ......................................................................................................................................................424
Move Text.............................................................................................................................................................388
N
Name
DEFINE FIXT.....................................................................................................................................................47
OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................................31
SEQ SETUP........................................................................................................................................................52
NC Alias ....................................................................................................................................................... 394, 395
NC Model..............................................................................................................................................................444
creating .............................................................................................................................................................444
creating separately .............................................................................................................................................445
creating stock ....................................................................................................................................................446
manipulating......................................................................................................................................................445
replacing a reference model................................................................................................................................446
NC Seq Info...........................................................................................................................................................150
NC sequence
auxiliary.................................................................................................................................................... 341, 342
625
create ..................................................................................................................................................................50
group.................................................................................................................................................................342
pattern...............................................................................................................................................................427
reorder ..............................................................................................................................................................426
Wire EDM ........................................................................................................................................................324
NC Sequence
INFO ITEMS ....................................................................................................................................................175
MACHINING......................................................................................................................................................51
MOD PROCESS ...............................................................................................................................................424
redefine .............................................................................................................................................................425
SELECT FEAT ...................................................................................................................................................53
NC SEQUENCE menu ............................................................................................................................................51
NCL_FILE ..............................................................................................................................................................88
ncl_file_extension..................................................................................................................................................380
Negative X ............................................................................................................................................................271
EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271
Negative Z.............................................................................................................................................................271
EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271
New Sequence .........................................................................................................................................................51
Next
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
NOW ................................................................................................................................................................329
SHOW GOUGE ................................................................................................................................................391
Next Cut................................................................................................................................................................218
Next Slice..............................................................................................................................................................176
No Core.................................................................................................................................................................332
No Model ................................................................................................................................................................79
None
APPR EXIT OPT ..............................................................................................................................................177
EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271
MFG UDF REF.................................................................................................................................................343
PAT TYPE........................................................................................................................................................428
SLOT OFFSET .................................................................................................................................................219
Norm Surf
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................238
Norm to Part..........................................................................................................................................................223
Normal
TOOL MOTION........................................................................................................................................ 365, 366
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
in Milling ..........................................................................................................................................................141
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Now
NOW ................................................................................................................................................................329
Num Inst ...............................................................................................................................................................430
NUM_PROF_PASSES
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
NUM_PROFILE_PASSES
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS ...............................................................................................................................136
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
NUMBER_CUTS
626
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
NUMBER_FIN_PASSES ......................................................................................................................................136
NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS.......................................................................................................................................90
NUMBER_PASSES
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
NUMBER_STARTS..............................................................................................................................................136
O
Offset
CUT ALNG.......................................................................................................................................................335
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................219
ON....................................................................................................................................................................282
Offset Csys
END DIM TYPE ...............................................................................................................................................272
Offset Plane...........................................................................................................................................................272
On .........................................................................................................................................................................282
CUT START .....................................................................................................................................................199
ON....................................................................................................................................................................282
On Toolpath ..........................................................................................................................................................360
One By One...........................................................................................................................................................198
Operation
CL data output...................................................................................................................................................379
MACHINING......................................................................................................................................................31
MFG SETUP.......................................................................................................................................................31
REDEF NC SEQ ...............................................................................................................................................425
SELECT FEAT .................................................................................................................................................379
Operations .............................................................................................................................................................453
Program Zero ............................................................................................................................................ 456, 457
setup .................................................................................................................................................................454
Order Regions........................................................................................................................................................178
ORIENT_ANGLE .................................................................................................................................................141
O-Ring ...................................................................................................................................................528, 529, 530
creating .............................................................................................................................................................528
machining ................................................................................................................................................. 529, 530
OSETNO_VAL
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Output Order .........................................................................................................................................................373
OUTPUT_POINT...................................................................................................................................125, 127, 128
OUTPUT_THRD_PNTS........................................................................................................................................136
P
Param Files..............................................................................................................................................................83
Parameters
MOD NC SEQ ..................................................................................................................................................424
SEQ SETUP........................................................................................................................................................83
SLICE ...............................................................................................................................................................176
UPTO DEPTH ..................................................................................................................................................175
using in relations ...............................................................................................................................................150
Part
SEL SURF ........................................................................................................................................................162
Part machining............................................................................................................................................... 561, 564
Process plan .......................................................................................................................................564, 565, 566
627
work flow defined..............................................................................................................................................561
PAT MODIFY menu .............................................................................................................................................430
PAT TYPE menu...................................................................................................................................................428
Pattern
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................427
Pattern Def ............................................................................................................................................................404
PECK_DEPTH
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
PERCENT_DEPTH...............................................................................................................................................136
Pick
EDIT POS .........................................................................................................................................................388
Pivot Curve ...........................................................................................................................................................169
Pivot Pnt................................................................................................................................................................168
Placement
MODIFY CMD .................................................................................................................................................377
Play Cut
SLICE ...............................................................................................................................................................176
UPTO DEPTH ..................................................................................................................................................175
Play Path ...............................................................................................................................................................385
Play Steps..............................................................................................................................................................385
Plunge ........................................................................................................................................................... 363, 364
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................239
Plunge milling .......................................................................................................................................................238
PLUNGE_ANGLE ................................................................................................................................................133
PLUNGE_FEED......................................................................................................................................................89
PLUNGE_UNITS ....................................................................................................................................................89
Pnts on Srf.............................................................................................................................................................166
Pocket ........................................................................................................................................................... 490, 491
creating .............................................................................................................................................................490
machining .........................................................................................................................................................491
Pocketing...............................................................................................................................................................215
Position
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
Positive X..............................................................................................................................................................271
EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271
Positive Z
EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271
POST_MACHINING_FILE.....................................................................................................................................88
PPRINT..................................................................................................................................................... 43, 44, 462
PPRINT table ...........................................................................................................................................44, 462, 463
PRE_MACHINING_FILE .......................................................................................................................................88
Prev
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
Prev NC Seq..........................................................................................................................................................180
Prev Tool...............................................................................................................................................................184
Preview
ADJ TOOL........................................................................................................................................................169
Previous
SHOW GOUGE ................................................................................................................................................391
Pro/PROCESS for MFG.................................................................................................................. 560, 561, 562, 563
628
goals .................................................................................................................................................................560
how to use .........................................................................................................................................................562
introduction to ...................................................................................................................................................560
specific uses ......................................................................................................................................................563
Pro/REPORT.........................................................................................................................................................583
parameters.................................................................................................................................. 583, 584, 585, 586
pro_mdb_dir..........................................................................................................................................................155
pro_mf_tprm_dir .....................................................................................................................................................74
pro_mf_workcell_dir ...............................................................................................................................................43
Process ...................................................................................................................................................566, 567, 581
defined ..............................................................................................................................................................566
specific considerations .......................................................................................................................................581
to use Process mode...........................................................................................................................................566
Process drawing.....................................................................................................................................................579
to copy ..............................................................................................................................................................579
Process State.................................................................................................................................................. 578, 580
dialog box options .............................................................................................................................................578
set state .............................................................................................................................................................580
Process Steps ............................................................................................................571, 572, 573, 574, 575, 576, 577
Fixture step .......................................................................................................................................................572
General step ......................................................................................................................................................573
Machine step ............................................................................................................................................. 571, 572
Manufacturing Model step ......................................................................................................................... 574, 575
Play step............................................................................................................................................................571
Surface step............................................................................................................................................... 575, 576
to create views...................................................................................................................................................577
Viewing ............................................................................................................................................................576
Volume .............................................................................................................................................................574
PROF_INCREMENT
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Profile ........................................................................................................................................................... 502, 503
creating .............................................................................................................................................................502
machining ................................................................................................................................................. 503, 504
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................214
TURN SEQ .......................................................................................................................................................281
Program Zero.........................................................................................................................................................456
defining.............................................................................................................................................................456
feature level.......................................................................................................................................................457
operation level...................................................................................................................................................456
z-axis orientation ...............................................................................................................................................457
PULLOUT_ANGLE..............................................................................................................................................133
PULLOUT_DIST
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Q
Quit
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385
629
R
Radius Subst..........................................................................................................................................................340
RANGE_NUMBER
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Rapid feed rate.......................................................................................................................................................461
set up ............................................................................................................................................................37, 40
set up ........................................................................................................................................................ 459, 461
RAPTO_DIST .......................................................................................................................................................141
Ream............................................................................................................................................................. 299, 300
Redefine
AXIS DEF.........................................................................................................................................................355
CLOSE LOOP...................................................................................................................................................249
CUSTOMIZE
in Holemaking...............................................................................................................................................359
GRP PLACE .....................................................................................................................................................345
MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................24
PROC ACTION.................................................................................................................................................425
SUBROUTINES................................................................................................................................................404
TAPER ANGLE................................................................................................................................................329
Redefine Profile.....................................................................................................................................................289
Redo
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................168
BUILD CUT .....................................................................................................................................................178
CORNER COND...............................................................................................................................................330
CORNER EDG .................................................................................................................................................183
Ref Cut Mtn
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................334
Ref Model ...............................................................................................................................................................26
Ref Part
MFG UDF REF.................................................................................................................................................343
Ref Pattern ............................................................................................................................................................430
Ref Sequence.........................................................................................................................................................182
References
GATHER SPEC ................................................................................................................................................244
REDEF NC SEQ ...............................................................................................................................................425
Register
MFG PARAMS.................................................................................................................................................339
PARAM SETUP................................................................................................................................................339
REGISTER_TABLE..............................................................................................................................................147
Relations ...............................................................................................................................................................149
using manufacturing parameters .........................................................................................................................150
Remove
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330
AXIS DEF.........................................................................................................................................................355
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................168
CORNER EDG .................................................................................................................................................183
DEF END............................................................................................................................................................53
DEF FROM.........................................................................................................................................................53
DEF HOME ........................................................................................................................................................53
DEF START .......................................................................................................................................................53
FEATURE REFS...............................................................................................................................................243
HEIGHT ...........................................................................................................................................................221
630
MILL START PNT ...........................................................................................................................................209
PIVOT CRV......................................................................................................................................................169
PIVOT PNT ......................................................................................................................................................168
SELECT SRFS
for Milling.....................................................................................................................................................160
SELECT SRFS
for Gouge Checking.......................................................................................................................................391
SKETCH VOL ..................................................................................................................................................251
STOCK BOUND...............................................................................................................................................271
SYNCH OPER ..................................................................................................................................................374
TAPER ANGLE................................................................................................................................................329
Remove All
FEATURE REFS...............................................................................................................................................243
REMOVE CRN.................................................................................................................................................183
REMOVE SURF ...............................................................................................................................................160
SELECT SRFS..................................................................................................................................................391
Remove Single
REMOVE CRN.................................................................................................................................................183
REMOVE SURF ...............................................................................................................................................160
Remove Slice.........................................................................................................................................................178
Reorder
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................425
Repeat regions ............................................................................................................................................... 581, 587
adding ...............................................................................................................................................................581
modifying..........................................................................................................................................................581
switching sheets.................................................................................................................................................581
Replace
CONF REPL .....................................................................................................................................................391
MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................25
Replacing a design model or a workpiece .................................................................................................................25
Report ........................................................................................................................................................... 437, 438
Reports.......................................................................................................................................................... 582, 587
create ................................................................................................................................................................582
repeat regions ....................................................................................................................................................587
Retract
TOOL MOTION................................................................................................................................................364
Retract surface ...................................................................................................................................................54, 55
RETRACT_FEED ...................................................................................................................................................89
RETRACT_RATIO ...............................................................................................................................................134
RETRACT_UNITS..................................................................................................................................................89
Retrieve
MFG PARAMS...................................................................................................................................................83
RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
RETURN_TO_START..........................................................................................................................................147
REVERSE_DIST...................................................................................................................................................143
Revolve
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250
SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
Rew
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
Right
SLOT OFFSET .................................................................................................................................................219
Rotate
631
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................386
PAT TYPE........................................................................................................................................................428
Rough
WEDM OPT .....................................................................................................................................................325
ROUGH_OPTION
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Route Sheet ...........................................................................................................................................................437
Run
GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................391
S
Same
WHICH REF.....................................................................................................................................................345
Sample session ......................................................................................................................................................589
Save
RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
Save File ...............................................................................................................................................................388
SCA ......................................................................................................................................................................122
Scale
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................388
SCAN_TYPE
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
Screen Edit ............................................................................................................................................................391
Screen Play............................................................................................................................................................385
Search ...................................................................................................................................................................391
Second...................................................................................................................................................................430
Seed Surface..........................................................................................................................................................244
Sel By Menu............................................................................................................................................................48
Sel Loops
CLOSURE ........................................................................................................................................................249
Sel Surf
SRF PRT SEL ...................................................................................................................................................162
Select
ADD BOUND ...................................................................................................................................................269
CLEAR ...............................................................................................................................................................47
CR ............................................................................................................................................................ 339, 340
CTRL PNT........................................................................................................................................................351
DEF END............................................................................................................................................................53
DEF FROM.........................................................................................................................................................53
DEF HOME ........................................................................................................................................................53
DEF START .......................................................................................................................................................53
GATHER STEP ................................................................................................................................................243
LOCATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375
MACH CSYS......................................................................................................................................................48
SEL...................................................................................................................................................................160
SEL...................................................................................................................................................................391
SEQ CSYS..........................................................................................................................................................48
WORKCELL.......................................................................................................................................................31
Select All
SEL...................................................................................................................................................................160
632
Select Curve
CREATE PROFILE...........................................................................................................................................293
Select Profile .........................................................................................................................................................289
Select Set
OUTPUT...........................................................................................................................................................381
Select Step menu ...................................................................................................................................................571
Select Surface
CREATE PROFILE...........................................................................................................................................292
Seq Info...................................................................................................................................................................51
Seq Setup ................................................................................................................................................................51
Sequences
REDEF SUB .....................................................................................................................................................404
Set
MFG PARAMS...................................................................................................................................................85
Set Axis
ADJ TOOL........................................................................................................................................................169
Set Colors..............................................................................................................................................................432
Set Range ..............................................................................................................................................................433
Set up
machinability database.......................................................................................................................................155
manufacturing database........................................................................................................................................28
sites...................................................................................................................................................................150
Set Up
CR ............................................................................................................................................................ 339, 340
Setup Time ............................................................................................................................................................437
DEFINE FIXT.....................................................................................................................................................47
Shade
MILL SURFACE ..............................................................................................................................................264
MILL VOLUME ...............................................................................................................................................256
Sheets menu options ..............................................................................................................................................579
Show
AXIS DEF.........................................................................................................................................................356
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................168
CLOSE LOOP...................................................................................................................................................249
CORNER EDG .................................................................................................................................................183
CREATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375
GOUGE STOP ..................................................................................................................................................391
HEIGHT ...........................................................................................................................................................221
HOLES ..................................................................................................................................................... 304, 305
MDB SETUP ....................................................................................................................................................155
MILL START PNT ...........................................................................................................................................209
ORDER PATCH ...............................................................................................................................................182
PECK TABLE...................................................................................................................................................301
PIVOT CRV......................................................................................................................................................169
PIVOT PNT ......................................................................................................................................................168
RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340
SELECT SRFS
for Milling.....................................................................................................................................................160
SELECT SRFS
for gouge Checking .......................................................................................................................................393
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
STOCK BOUND...............................................................................................................................................271
TAPER ANGLE........................................................................................................................................ 329, 330
Show All
633
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330
SHOW GOUGE ................................................................................................................................................391
Show Edits ............................................................................................................................................................388
Show Error ............................................................................................................................................................158
Show Input ............................................................................................................................................................158
Show Mach DB .....................................................................................................................................................158
Show Path
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
Show Regions........................................................................................................................................................178
Show Result
GRP PLACE .....................................................................................................................................................345
Show Select...........................................................................................................................................................245
Show Slices ...........................................................................................................................................................178
Show Volume ........................................................................................................................................................250
Side Surfs ..............................................................................................................................................................335
simplified representations............................................................................................................................... 588, 589
add to a step ......................................................................................................................................................588
apply to the process model .................................................................................................................................588
retrieve from a design model ..............................................................................................................................589
with large design assemblies ..............................................................................................................................588
Simulated tool path .................................................................................................................................385, 396, 546
Site
CELL SETUP....................................................................................................................................................153
MFG PARAMS.................................................................................................................................................149
PARAM SETUP................................................................................................................................................150
Sites
setting up...........................................................................................................................................................150
using .................................................................................................................................................................149
Sketch
ADD BOUND ...................................................................................................................................................269
APPR EXIT OPT ..............................................................................................................................................177
CREATE PROFILE...........................................................................................................................................291
CREATE VOL ..................................................................................................................................................250
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................219
INTERACT PATH ............................................................................................................................................219
TOOL MODE
in Milling ......................................................................................................................................................216
Skip
CONF REPL .....................................................................................................................................................391
WHICH REF.....................................................................................................................................................345
Skip Patch .............................................................................................................................................................182
Skip Region...........................................................................................................................................................178
Slab............................................................................................................................................................... 486, 487
creating .............................................................................................................................................................485
machining ................................................................................................................................................. 487, 488
Slice .............................................................................................................................................................. 176, 177
Slot ........................................................................................................................................................511, 512, 513
creating .............................................................................................................................................................511
machining ................................................................................................................................................. 512, 513
Solid.............................................................................................................................................................. 250, 251
Some
REPLACE.........................................................................................................................................................391
SPARK_ALLOW ..................................................................................................................................................144
Specify
634
CORNER ADD .................................................................................................................................................330
CUT START .....................................................................................................................................................199
Specify Plane
CTM DEPTH ....................................................................................................................................................177
SPEED_CONTROL
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
SPINDLE_RANGE
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
SPINDLE_SENSE
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
SPINDLE_SPEED
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
SPINDLE_STATUS ..............................................................................................................................................139
Stand Alone
UDF OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................................343
Standard ................................................................................................................................................................299
Start
CUT ENDS .......................................................................................................................................................272
Start Axes..............................................................................................................................................................240
Start Height
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................222
Start Point
CHAIN..............................................................................................................................................................294
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................209
START_MOTION...................................................................................................................................................91
Status Box .............................................................................................................................................................385
Std Size ...................................................................................................................................................................76
Step............................................................................................................................................................... 498, 499
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
creating .............................................................................................................................................................498
GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................391
machining ................................................................................................................................................. 499, 500
STEP REGEN menu ..............................................................................................................................................570
STEP_OVER
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
Stock ............................................................................................................................................................. 446, 447
creating .............................................................................................................................................................446
material display .................................................................................................................................................560
modifying allowances ........................................................................................................................................451
modifying outline ..............................................................................................................................................452
retrieving...........................................................................................................................................................444
Stock Allow...........................................................................................................................................................274
Stock Bound ..........................................................................................................................................................270
STOCK_ALLOW
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
STOP_DIST ..........................................................................................................................................................143
StopAtStart............................................................................................................................................................385
Straight
CORN MOTION ...............................................................................................................................................331
Subordinate
UDF OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................................343
Subroutine programming........................................................................................................................................401
Subroutines............................................................................................................................................................401
Suggest..................................................................................................................................................................183
635
Surf & Bnd
GATHER SEL...................................................................................................................................................244
Surf Chain .............................................................................................................................................................198
SURF DEFINE menu.............................................................................................................................................258
Surface
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................221
INTERACT PATH ............................................................................................................................................221
SEL SURF ........................................................................................................................................................162
SURF ................................................................................................................................................................161
Surface milling ......................................................................................................................................................202
entry and exit moves ..........................................................................................................................................202
Surfaces
GATHER EXCL................................................................................................................................................247
GATHER SEL...................................................................................................................................................244
GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................391
OFFSET SURF .................................................................................................................................................254
SELECT CRNR ................................................................................................................................................183
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................160
Sweep
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250
SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
Synch ....................................................................................................................................................................337
Synchronize
MACHINING....................................................................................................................................................374
T
Table Corners ........................................................................................................................................................340
Tangent
TOOL MOTION........................................................................................................................................ 364, 365
Tangent Chain .......................................................................................................................................................198
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
in Milling ..........................................................................................................................................................141
Tangential
OFFSET SURF .................................................................................................................................................254
Tap................................................................................................................................................................ 299, 300
Taper Angle
INT CUT...........................................................................................................................................................329
MACH AUX .....................................................................................................................................................335
TAPER_ANGLE ...................................................................................................................................................144
Templates...............................................................................................................................................553, 554, 556
creating ..................................................................................................................................................... 554, 555
placing ..............................................................................................................................................................556
saving................................................................................................................................................................554
saving machining strategy..................................................................................................................................480
Template Manager.............................................................................................................................................554
using the Model Tree .........................................................................................................................................556
Thin ......................................................................................................................................................................251
Thread
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................232
TURN SEQ .......................................................................................................................................................286
Thread Cyl.............................................................................................................................................................232
Thread Point
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................328
636
THREAD_FEED
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
Through Pocket ............................................................................................................................................. 494, 496
creating .............................................................................................................................................................493
machining .........................................................................................................................................................496
Through Slot.................................................................................................................................................. 515, 516
creating .............................................................................................................................................................514
machining .........................................................................................................................................................516
Thru All
DRILL DEPTH .................................................................................................................................................305
Time Increment .....................................................................................................................................................385
To Depth ...............................................................................................................................................................177
TOLERANCE ............................................................................................................................................. 88, 89, 90
GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................393
Tool
DISPLAY CL....................................................................................................................................................385
INFO ITEMS ....................................................................................................................................................175
MOD NC SEQ ..................................................................................................................................................424
Tool change time ............................................................................................................................................. 36, 458
Tool control point ....................................................................................................................................................65
Tool Info ...............................................................................................................................................................150
Tool Kerf
SKETCHER......................................................................................................................................................355
Tool Motion
control points.....................................................................................................................................................351
incorporating cut motions...................................................................................................................................352
incremental motions...........................................................................................................................................362
point.......................................................................................................................................................... 360, 361
Tool path ........................................................................................................................................ 546, 547, 548, 549
adding break points.................................................................................................................................... 397, 549
displaying the tool motion.......................................................................................................................... 397, 548
outputting CL data .............................................................................................................................................552
outputting NC codes ..........................................................................................................................................553
positioning the tool .................................................................................................................................... 398, 550
saving to file.............................................................................................................................................. 400, 552
Tool path (see CL data)..........................................................................................................................................385
Tool Radius ...........................................................................................................................................................255
Tool travel limits ............................................................................................................................................. 36, 458
TOOL_OVERLAP
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
Tools
creating models ...................................................................................................................................................78
models library......................................................................................................................................................77
sketch................................................................................................................................................................217
solid tools in Turning...........................................................................................................................................81
using models .......................................................................................................................................................79
Top Surfaces..........................................................................................................................................................172
Trajectory
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................216
Translate
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................386
PAT TYPE........................................................................................................................................................428
637
Trim
CREATE VOL ..................................................................................................................................................253
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
in Milling
offsetting Mill Volumes .................................................................................................................................255
trimming Mill Volumes .................................................................................................................................254
Turn Profile ................................................................................................................................................... 289, 290
in Thread Turning..............................................................................................................................................286
Turning .................................................................................................................................................................288
4-axis area .........................................................................................................................................................280
area ...................................................................................................................................................................277
groove ................................................................................................................................................284, 285, 286
multiple machining areas ...................................................................................................................................292
output coordinates .............................................................................................................................................266
profile ...............................................................................................................................................................282
remainder material analysis................................................................................................................................288
thread................................................................................................................................................................287
Turn Profile.......................................................................................................................................................289
using tool outline .................................................................................................................................................81
Turning Envelope .......................................................................................................................................... 267, 268
Two Contour .........................................................................................................................................................227
Type
GATHER SPEC ................................................................................................................................................244
U
UDF (User.............................................................................................................................................................342
UDF Library
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................343
Unblank.................................................................................................................................................................257
DRILL GROUP......................................................................................................................................... 315, 316
Undo
BUILD CUT ............................................................................................................................................. 178, 179
CORNER COND...............................................................................................................................................330
Undo Last
CORNER COND...............................................................................................................................................330
Undo Skip
ORDER PATCH ...............................................................................................................................................182
Unified ..................................................................................................................................................................286
Units
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................388
Unselect
DEFINE CHAIN ...............................................................................................................................................198
Update Slices.........................................................................................................................................................178
Upto Depth............................................................................................................................................................174
Use CurOper..........................................................................................................................................................345
Use Prev
INTERACT PATH ............................................................................................................................................334
MACH CSYS......................................................................................................................................................48
MFG PARAMS.................................................................................................................................................148
SEQ CSYS..........................................................................................................................................................48
WORKCELL.......................................................................................................................................................31
Use Quilt ...............................................................................................................................................................250
User Def Srf ..........................................................................................................................................................426
638
User Def Vol .........................................................................................................................................................426
UserDefCmd .........................................................................................................................................................377
UV Plane...............................................................................................................................................................335
V
Value
OFFSET SURF .................................................................................................................................................254
Variable Peck ........................................................................................................................................................302
views............................................................................................................................................................. 581, 582
adding ...............................................................................................................................................................581
modifying..........................................................................................................................................................581
switching sheets.................................................................................................................................................581
Visibility ....................................................................................................................................................... 151, 152
Volume
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................171
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................171
W
Walls.....................................................................................................................................................................254
WEDM....................................................................................................................................................................35
Where Used
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
Window......................................................................................................................................................... 171, 172
Wire EDM..............................................................................................................................................324, 325, 336
2-axis ................................................................................................................................................................324
4-axis ................................................................................................................................................................335
contouring cut motions ......................................................................................................................................325
Head1/Head2 format..........................................................................................................................................336
mirroring cut motions ........................................................................................................................................334
No Core cut motions ..........................................................................................................................................332
radius substitution..............................................................................................................................................341
register tables ....................................................................................................................................................340
Workcell..................................................................................................................................................................35
create ............................................................................................................................................................35, 36
MFG SETUP.......................................................................................................................................................35
OPERATION ................................................................................................................................................31, 32
Workpiece ..............................................................................................................................................20, 21, 22, 23
MFG MDL TYP..................................................................................................................................................23
no geometry.........................................................................................................................................................24
SURF PICK.......................................................................................................................................................160
using part families ...............................................................................................................................................25
workpiece geometry....................................................................................................................................... 564, 565
in part machining process plans..........................................................................................................................564
X
XY ........................................................................................................................................................................336
XY Plane...............................................................................................................................................................335
Z
Z Depth
639
CTM DEPTH ....................................................................................................................................................177
Z-Axis Orientation...................................................................................................................................................50
640